Download SERVICE MANUAL

R
PointSource Ai 3010
SERVICE
MANUAL
Published in Apr. ’00
2AR70765
Revision 5
3010 S/M (MCA)
Service
Manual
PointSource
Ai 3010
CAUTION
DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY REPLACED. REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT
TYPE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. DISPOSE
OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS.
ATTENTION
IL Y A DANGER D’EXPLOSION S’IL Y A REMPLACEMENT INCORRECT DE LA BATTERIE. REMPLACER UNIQUEMENT
AVEC UNE BATTERIE DU MÊME TYPE OU D’UN TYPE RECOMMANDÉ PAR LE CONSTRUCTEUR. METTRE AU RÉBUT
LES BATTERIES USAGÉES CONFORMÉMENT AUX INSTRUCTIONS DU FABRICANT.
Safetyprecautions
This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service
personnel to ensure the safety of their customers, their machines as well
as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel are
advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the
warnings and precautions described here before engaging in
maintenance activities.
Safety warnings and precautions
Varioussymbolsareusedtoprotectourservicepersonneland
customersfromphysicaldangerandtopreventdamagetotheir
property.Thesesymbolsaredescribedbelow:
DANGER :
High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from
insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning
messages using this symbol.
WARNING : Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient
attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages
using this symbol.
CAUTION : Bodily injury or damage to property may result from
insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning
messages using this symbol.
Symbols
The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger
and caution. The specific point of attention is shown inside
the symbol.
General warning.
Warning of risk of electric shock.
Warning of high temperature.
indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is
shown inside the symbol.
General prohibited action.
Disassembly prohibited.
indicates that action is required. The specific action
required is shown inside the symbol.
General action required.
Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.
Always ground the copier.
1. Installation Precautions
WARNING
• Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified.
Avoid multiple connections to one outlet: they may cause fire or electric
shock. When using an extension cable, always check that it is
adequate for the rated current. ...............................................................
• Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding
the copier may cause fire or electric shock. Connecting the earth wire
to an object not approved for the purpose may cause explosion or
electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following:
gas pipes, lightning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water
pipes or faucets not approved by the proper authorities. ........................
CAUTION:
• Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may
tip over, causing injury. ...........................................................................
• Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire
or electric shock. .....................................................................................
• Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or
near flammable material. This may cause fire. .......................................
• Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to
keep the machine as cool as possible. Insufficient ventilation may
cause heat buildup and poor copying performance. ...............................
• Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. ....
• Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped.
Failure to do this may cause the copier to move unexpectedly or
topple, leading to injury. ..........................................................................
• Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner
or developer is accidentally ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in
the stomach and obtain medical attention immediately. If it gets into the
eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain
medical attention. ....................................................................................
• Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and
precautions in the copier’s instruction handbook. ...................................
2. Precautions for Maintenance
WARNING
• Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting
machine disassembly. ............................................................................
• Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service
manual and other related brochures. ......................................................
• Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features
including safety mechanisms and protective circuits. .............................
• Always use parts having the correct specifications. ...............................
• Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service
manual or other related brochure when replacing them. Using a piece
of wire, for example, could lead to fire or other serious accident. ...........
• When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a
distance or gap for installation of a part, always use the correct scale
and measure carefully. ...........................................................................
• Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a
ground connection. .................................................................................
• Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the
power plug is dust-free. If it is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or
electric shock. .........................................................................................
• Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers.
Leaking laser light may damage eyesight. ..............................................
• Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high
potentials and may cause electric shock if handled improperly. .............
CAUTION
• Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as
ties, make sure they are safely secured so they will not be caught in
rotating sections. .....................................................................................
• Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away
from chains and belts. .............................................................................
• Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be
extremely hot. .........................................................................................
• Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean.
Dirt on them can cause abnormally high temperatures. .........................
• Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for
routine replacement. ...............................................................................
• Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage
components when removing them; always hold the plug itself. ..............
• Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If
necessary, protect it with a cable cover or other appropriate item. ........
• Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire
to avoid electric leaks. ............................................................................
• Remove toner completely from electronic components. .........................
• Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or
damaged. ................................................................................................
• After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors
and wires that were removed, have been refitted correctly. Special
attention should be paid to any forgotten connector, trapped wire and
missing screws. ......................................................................................
• Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine
according to the instruction handbook are clean and not peeling.
Replace with new ones if necessary. ......................................................
• Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions
below: .....................................................................................................
· Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to
spill. Wipe spills off completely.
· Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents.
· Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the
covers or turning the main switch on.
· Always wash hands afterwards.
• Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause
sparks when exposed directly to fire in a furnace, etc. .........................
• Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power
plug from the wall outlet immediately. ..................................................
3. Miscellaneous
WARNING
• Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents
such as alcohol, other than the specified refiner; it may generate toxic
gas. .........................................................................................................
2AR
CONTENTS
I
THEORY AND CONSTRUCTION SECTION
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 Specifications ..............................................................................
1-2 Handling Precautions
1-2-1 Drum ............................................................................................
1-2-2 Developer and toner ....................................................................
1-3 Mechanical Construction
1-3-1 Part names and their functions ....................................................
1-3-2 Machine cross section .................................................................
1-3-3 Drive system ................................................................................
1-3-4 Mechanical construction ..............................................................
1-1-1
1-2-1
1-2-1
1-3-1
1-3-3
1-3-4
1-3-6
II ELECTRICAL SECTION
2-1 Electrical Parts Layout
2-1-1 Electrical parts layout .................................................................. 2-1-1
2-2 Detection of Paper Misfeed
2-2-1 Paper misfeed detection .............................................................. 2-2-1
2-2-2 Paper misfeed detection conditions ............................................ 2-2-2
2-3 Operation of the PCBs
2-3-1 Power source PCB ...................................................................... 2-3-1
2-3-2 Main PCB .................................................................................... 2-3-3
2-3-3 Scanner control PCB ................................................................... 2-3-5
2-3-4 Engine PCB ................................................................................. 2-3-6
2-3-5 Scanner motor PCB .................................................................... 2-3-7
2-3-6 Operation unit main PCB, operation unit right PCB
and operation unit left PCB ......................................................... 2-3-8
2-3-7 CCD PCB .................................................................................. 2-3-10
2-3-8 Laser diode PCB and beam detection PCB .............................. 2-3-11
III SET UP AND ADJUSTMENT SECTION
3-1 Installation
3-1-1 Unpacking and installation ........................................................... 3-1-1
3-1-2 Setting initial copy modes .......................................................... 3-1-16
3-1-3 Installing the add-on memory SIMM (option) ............................ 3-1-17
3-1-4 Installing the drawer heater (service part) ................................. 3-1-19
3-1-5 Installing the key counter (option) ............................................. 3-1-21
3-1-6 Installing the MMD host monitoring system device (option) ...... 3-1-24
3-1-7 Installing the DF (option) ........................................................... 3-1-26
3-2 Maintenance Mode
3-2-1 Maintenance mode ...................................................................... 3-2-1
3-2-2 Copier management .................................................................. 3-2-86
3-3 Assembly and Disassembly
3-3-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly .................................. 3-3-1
3-3-2 Paper feed section ......................................................................... 3-3-3
3-3-3 Optical section .............................................................................. 3-3-24
3-3-4 Main charging section .................................................................. 3-3-43
3-3-5 Drum section ................................................................................ 3-3-47
2AR-1
2AR
(4) Scanner control PCB .................................................................
(5) Scanner motor PCB ..................................................................
(6) CCD PCB ..................................................................................
(7) Operation unit main PCB ...........................................................
(8) Operation unit left PCB ..............................................................
(9) Operation unit right PCB ...........................................................
(10) LCD ...........................................................................................
3-6-4 Electrical problems ..........................................................................
(1) The machine does not operate when the main switch is
turned on. ..................................................................................
(2) The drive motor does not operate (C200). ................................
(3) The scanner motor does not operate. .......................................
(4) The upper lift motor does not operate (C241). ..........................
(5) The lower lift motor does not operate (C242). ...........................
(6) The toner feed motor does not operate. ....................................
(7) The paper conveying section fan motor does not operate. .......
(8) Cooling fan motor 1 does not operate at all or does not turn
at full speed. ..............................................................................
(9) Cooling fan motor 2 does not operate at all or does not turn
at full speed. ..............................................................................
(10) The upper paper feed clutch does not operate. ........................
(11) The lower paper feed clutch does not operate. .........................
(12) Feed clutch 1 does not operate. ................................................
(13) Feed clutch 2 does not operate. ................................................
(14) Feed clutch 3 does not operate. ................................................
(15) The registration clutch does not operate. ..................................
(16) The cleaning lamp does not turn on. .........................................
(17) The exposure lamp does not turn on. ........................................
(18) The exposure lamp does not turn off. ........................................
(19) Fixing heater M or S does not turn on (C620). ..........................
(20) Fixing heater M or S does not turn off
(fixing unit thermostat triggered; C630). ....................................
(21) Main charging is not performed (C510). ....................................
(22) Transfer charging is not performed. ..........................................
(23) No developing bias is output. ....................................................
(24) The original size is not detected. ...............................................
(25) The original size is not detected correctly. ................................
(26) The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when
paper is present in the upper drawer. ........................................
(27) The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when
paper is present in the lower drawer. ........................................
(28) The size of paper in the upper drawer is not displayed
correctly. ....................................................................................
(29) The size of paper in the lower drawer is not displayed
correctly. ....................................................................................
(30) A paper jam in the paper feed or paper conveying section
is indicated when the main switch is turned on. ........................
(31) The message requesting covers to be closed is displayed
when the front, left 1 and left 2 covers are closed. ....................
(32) Others. .......................................................................................
3-6-32
3-6-35
3-6-37
3-6-39
3-6-42
3-6-43
3-6-44
3-6-45
3-6-45
3-6-45
3-6-46
3-6-46
3-6-46
3-6-47
3-6-47
3-6-47
3-6-47
3-6-48
3-6-48
3-6-48
3-6-48
3-6-49
3-6-49
3-6-49
3-6-49
3-6-50
3-6-50
3-6-50
3-6-50
3-6-51
3-6-51
3-6-51
3-6-52
3-6-52
3-6-52
3-6-53
3-6-53
3-6-54
3-6-54
3-6-54
2AR-1
2AR
3-6-5 Mechanical problems .......................................................................
(1) No primary paper feed. ..............................................................
(2) No secondary paper feed. .........................................................
(3) Skewed paper feed. ..................................................................
(4) The scanner does not travel. .....................................................
(5) Multiple sheets of paper are fed at one time. ............................
(6) Paper jams. ...............................................................................
(7) Toner drops on the paper conveying path. ................................
(8) Abnormal noise is heard. ...........................................................
3-6-55
3-6-55
3-6-55
3-6-55
3-6-56
3-6-56
3-6-56
3-6-56
3-6-56
I Theory and
Construction Section
I
THEORY AND
CONSTRUCTION
SECTION
3010 S/M (MCA)
2AR
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 Specifications ..................................................................................... 1-1-1
2AR-1
2AR
1-1-1 Specifications
Type ............................................... Desktop
Copying system ............................. Dry, indirect electrostatic system
Originals ......................................... Sheets and books
Maximum size: A3/11" x 17"
Original feed system ...................... Fixed
Copy paper .................................... Drawer: Plain paper (64 – 80 g/m2)
Bypass table (optional for 120 V specificaitons):
Plain paper (60 – 160 g/m2)
Special paper: Transparencies, tracing paper,
colored paper and letterhead
Note: Use the bypass table for special paper.
Copying sizes ................................. Maximum: A3/11" x 17"
Minimum: A6R (when the bypass table is used) /
51/2" × 81/2"
Magnification ratios ........................ Manual mode: 25 – 400%, 1% increments
(25 – 200%, when the SRDF is used)
Auto copy mode: fixed ratios
Metric
1:1 ± 1.0%, 1:4.00/1:2.00/1:1.41/1:1.27/1:1.06/
1:0.90/1:0.75/1:0.70/1:0.50/1:0.25
Inch
1:1 ± 1.0%, 1:4.00/1:2.00/1:1.54/1:1.29/1:1.21/
1:0.78/1:0.77/1:0.64/1:0.50/1:0.25
Copy speed .................................... At 100% magnification in memory copy mode:
A4: 31 copies/min.
A4R: 23 copies/min.
A3: 17 copies/min.
B4 (257 x 364 mm): 19 copies/min.
11" x 81/2": 30 copies/min.
81/2" x 11": 24 copies/min.
11" x 17": 16 copies/min.
81/2" x 14": 19 copies/min.
First copy time ................................ From 5 to 6 s (A4/11" x 81/2", 100% magnification,
upper drawer, ejection to the eject tray)
Warm-up time ................................ 45 s or less (room temperature 20°C/68°F, 65%
RH)
In preheat/energy saver mode: 30 s or less (room
temperature 20°C/68°F, 65% RH)
Paper feed system ......................... Automatic feed
Capacity:
Drawers: 550 sheets
Manual feed
Capacity:
Bypass: 200 sheets
1-1-1
2AR
2AR-1
Continuous copying .......................
Photoconductor ..............................
Charging system ............................
Exposure light source ....................
Exposure scanning system ............
Developing system .........................
Transfer system .............................
Fixing system .................................
Charge erasing system ..................
Cleaning system ............................
Scanning system ............................
Bit map memory .............................
Image storage memory ..................
Resolution ......................................
Light source ...................................
Dimensions ....................................
Weight ............................................
Floor requirements .........................
Functions .......................................
Power source .................................
Power consumption .......................
1-1-2
1 – 999 sheets
OPC (drum diameter 30 mm)
Single positive corona charging
Semiconductor laser
Polygon mirror
Dry, reverse developing (magnetic brush)
Developer: 2-component, ferrite carrier and N29T
black toner
Toner density control: toner sensor
Toner replenishing: automatic from a toner cartridge
Transfer roller
Heat roller
Heat source: halogen heaters (main 550 W, sub
400 W)
Control temperature: 175°C/347°F (at normal
ambient temperature)
Abnormally high temperature protection device:
140°C/284°F thermostat
Fixing pressure: 49 N
Exposure by cleaning lamp
Cleaning blade
Flat bed scanning by CCD image sensor
12 MB (standard)
16 MB (standard)
600 x 600 dpi
Inert gas lamp
585 (W) x 600 (D) × 745 (H) mm
231/16" (W) x 235/8" (D) x 295/16" (H)
Approx. 81 kg/178.2 lbs
585 (W) x 600 (D) mm
231/16" (W) x 235/8" (D)
Self-diagnostics, preheat,
automatic copy density control,
original size detection, automatic paper selection,
automatic magnification selection,
enlargement/reduction copy, fixed ratio selection,
XY zoom mode, photo mode, margin copy,
print page numbers function, split copy,
border erasing, form overlay, combine copy,
sort copy, invert copy, mirror image mode,
program copy, department control and
language selection
120 V AC, 60 Hz, 10 A
220 – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 5.5 A
1200 W (120V)
1320W (220 – 240V)
2AR-1
2AR
Options ........................................... SRDF, duplex unit, job separator, mailbox,
eject unit, feedshift unit, paper feed desk,
large paper deck, finisher, key counter, key card*,
add-on memory SIMM,
bypass unit*, original cover, fax board, printerboard
and network board.
* Optional for 120 V specifications only.
1-1-3
2AR
CONTENTS
1-2 Handling Precautions
1-2-1 Drum .................................................................................................. 1-2-1
1-2-2 Developer and toner .......................................................................... 1-2-1
2AR
1-2-1 Drum
Note the following when handling or storing the drum.
•When removing the image formation unit, never expose the drum surface to strong direct
light.
•Keep the drum at an ambient temperature between 0°C/32°F and 35°C/95°F and at a
relative humidity not higher than 85% RH. Avoid abrupt changes in temperature and
humidity.
•Avoid exposure to any substance which is harmful to or may affect the quality of the drum.
•Do not touch the drum surface with any object. Should it be touched by hands or stained
with oil, clean it.
•If the machine is left open for more than 5 minutes for maintenance, remove the drum and
store it in the drum storage bag (Part No. 78369020).
1-2-2 Developer and toner
Store the developer and toner in a cool, dark place. Avoid direct light and high humidity.
1-2-1
2AR
CONTENTS
1-3 Mechanical Construction
1-3-1
1-3-2
1-3-3
1-3-4
Part names and their functions .......................................................... 1-3-1
Machine cross section ....................................................................... 1-3-3
Drive system ...................................................................................... 1-3-4
Mechanical construction .................................................................... 1-3-6
(1) Paper feed section ...................................................................... 1-3-6
(2) Main charging section ............................................................... 1-3-10
(3) Optical section ........................................................................... 1-3-13
(4) Developing section .................................................................... 1-3-19
(5) Transfer and separation section ................................................ 1-3-29
(6) Cleaning section ........................................................................ 1-3-32
(7) Charge erasing section ............................................................. 1-3-33
(8) Fixing section ............................................................................ 1-3-35
E
A
A
A
E
E
A
A
E
E
2AR
1-3-1 Part names and their functions
¤
1
%
⁄
2
$
3
4
5
‹
^
8
9
0
7
! &
*
‹
@
#
)
!
6
(
‹
@
Figure 1-3-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Original cover
Operation panel
Feedshift unit (eject unit)*2
Paper transfer section cover
Paper transfer section cover release lever
Left 1 cover
Left 2 cover
8
9
0
!
@
#
$
Toner cartridge
Toner cartridge release lever
Paper feed section knob*1
Front cover
Upper drawer
Lower drawer
Contact glass
%
^
&
*
(
)
⁄
Original size scales
Ejection section
Length adjustment lever
Width adjustment lever
Main switch
Eject tray
Bypass table*1
¤ Insert guides*1
‹ Handles for transport
*1: Optional for 120 V specifications.
*2: Optional.
1-3-1
E
E
A
E
A
A
E
2AR (MCA)
A
A
E
E
A
E
A
A
E
A
A
E
E
2AR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Metric
„‚ ‡ fl
⁄
¤‹)
(
*
& 0
9
8
7
6
5
3
2
1
´ Œ °·
fi ›
^
%
$
Inch
„‚ ‡ fl
⁄
¤‹)
(
*
& 0
9
8
7
6
%
^
&
*
(
)
⁄
¤
‹
4
# @!
8
9
0
!
@
#
$
5
›
fi
3
fl
‡
°
·
2
1
´ Œ °·
fi ›
^
%
$
# @!
‚
Œ
„
´
Start key
Stop/clear key
Reset key
Numeric keys
Printer/on line key (indicator)
Interrupt key (indicator)
Energy saver (preheat) key
(indicator)
Drawer select indicators
Misfeed location indicators
Message display
Data indicator
Paper select key
Preset R/E/enter key
Copy exposure adjustment
keys/Copy exposure indicators
Auto Exp. key (indicator)
Copy quality selection key/
Photo/text & photo indicators
Manual/cursor up key
Cursor down key
Zoom (+)/cursor right key
Zoom (–)/cursor left key
Layout key (indicator)
Booklet key (indicator)
Auto selection/filing key
(indicator)
Duplex key (indicator)
Page separation key
(indicator)
Image key (indicator)
Page # key (indicator)
Margin/border erase key
(indicator)
Presentation/sheet/insert key
(indicator)
*/language key
Program key
Staple key (indicator)
Sort key/Sort indicator/Group
indicator
4
Figure 1-3-2 Operation panel
1-3-2
E
E
A
E
A
E
A
2AD (MCA)
A
A
E
2AR
1-3-2 Machine cross section
3
8
6
7
2
5
4
1
Light path
Paper path
Figure 1-3-3 Machine cross section
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Paper feed section (page 1-3-6)
Main charging section (page 1-3-10)
Optical section (page 1-3-13)
Developing section (page 1-3-19)
Transfer and separation section (page 1-3-29)
Cleaning section (page 1-3-32)
Charge erasing section (page 1-3-33)
Fixing section (page 1-3-35)
1-3-3
2AR
1-3-3 Drive system
ı ◊
˜
˜
Ç
#
5@
6 !
7
8
41
3
· ¤)
‚
Ρ
˜
¸
˛
^
%
$
0
9
2&
* ‹›
fi
⁄ (
fl
„
´
ˇ
”
ΨÁ
Ô
Å

Í
Ò
Ï
Ú
˝
Ó
‡ ‰
ˆ
Ø
As viewed from the machine front
Figure 1-3-4 Drive system
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Drive motor gear
Gear 67/20
Drum drive belt
Drum drive pulley
Gear 92/35
Cleaning drive gear
Gear 30
Gear 16
Gear 53/37
Gear 30
1-3-4
!
@
#
$
%
^
&
*
(
)
Gear 32
Gear 30
Fixing drive gear
Gear 30
Gear 30
Eject gear 39/25
Gear 45
Image formation idle gear
Gear 62/46
Developing drive gear 18
2AR
⁄
¤
‹
›
fi
fl
‡
°
·
‚
Œ
„
´
‰
ˇ
Á
¨
ˆ
Gear 25
Registration clutch gear
Gear 50T
Bypass idle gear
Bypass drive gear 24
Feed drive gear
Feed clutch 1 gear
Duplex idle gear
Gear 24
Gear 18
Duplex drive gear 25
Gear 25
Gear 25
Upper paper feed clutch gear
Gear 30
Feed idle gear 1
Feed idle gear 2
Feed gear 25
Ø
∏
Å
Í
Î
Ï
˝
Ó
Ô
Ò
Ú
¸
˛
Ç
◊
ı
˜
Feed clutch 2 gear
Gear 25
Gear 25
Gear 25
Lower paper feed clutch gear
Feed idle gear 3
Feed idle gear 4
Feed idle gear 5
Feed idle gear 6
Feed idle gear 7
Gear 25
Feed clutch 3 gear
Scanner motor pulley
Scanner drive belt
Scanner drive pulley
Scanner wire drum
Scanner wire
Scanner wire pulley
1-3-5
2AR
1-3-4 Mechanical construction
(1) Paper feed section
The paper feed section consists of the primary feed and secondary feed subsections.
Primary feed conveys paper from the upper drawer or lower drawer to the left and right
registration rollers, at which point secondary feed takes place and the paper travels to
the transfer section in sync with the printing timing.
¤
⁄
0
)
8
(
&
6
^
¨
7
*2
° 9
fi·ˇ
∏
1
4
fl
‹
ˆ3 ‚Á
%2
@
!
Œ
!
„
´
1
$
6
3 ›
@
‰
5
‡
#
Ø
Figure 1-3-5 Paper feed section
1-3-6
2AR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
@
#
$
%
^
&
*
(
)
Forwarding pulley
Paper feed pulley
Separation pulley
Feed roller 1
Feed roller 2
Feed pulley
Right feed roller
Left feed roller
Right registration roller
Left registration roller
Drawer lift
Lift operation plate
Desk paper conveying guide
Lower left vertical paper conveying
guide
Upper vertical paper conveying guide
Vertical paper conveying guide
Left vertical paper conveying guide
Lower feed guide
Duplex junction guide
Feed guide
⁄
¤
‹
›
fi
fl
‡
°
·
‚
Œ
„
´
‰
ˇ
Á
¨
ˆ
Ø
∏
Transfer guide
Right transfer guide
Upper paper feed clutch (PFCL-U)
Lower paper feed clutch (PFCL-L)
Feed clutch 1 (FCL1)
Feed clutch 2 (FCL2)
Feed clutch 3 (FCL3)
Registration clutch (RCL)
Upper paper switch (PSW-U)
Lower paper switch (PSW-L)
Upper paper length switch (PLSW-U)
Lower paper length switch (PLSW-L)
Upper paper width switch (PWSW-U)
Lower paper width switch (PWSW-L)
Upper lift limit switch (LICSW-U)
Lower lift limit switch (LICSW-L)
Feed switch 1 (FSW1)
Feed switch 2 (FSW2)
Feed switch 3 (FSW3)
Registration switch (RSW)
1-3-7
2AR
2AR-1
Each drawer consists of a lift driven by the lift motor and other components. Each
drawer can hold up to 550 sheets of paper.
Paper is fed from the drawer by the rotation of the forwarding pulley and paper feed
pulley. The separation pulley prevents multiple sheets from being fed at one time, via
the torque limiter.
EPCB
RCL
CN10-A5
CN8-25
RSW
FCL1
CN10-A7
CN15-5
FSW1
PSW-U
LICSW-U
CN12-8
PFCL
U
CN12-11
CN10-B1
FCL2
CN10-A9
PSW-L
FSW2
FCL3
LICSW-L
CN12-2
PFCL
L
CN12-5
CN10-B3
CN10-A11
CN15-11
FSW3
CN15-8
Figure 1-3-6 Paper feed section block diagram
1-3-8
2AR
Image ready
Start key
100 ms
DM
48 ms
110 ms
RCL
30 ms
FCL1
88 ms
PFCL-U
RSW
FSW1
A
B
C
D
E
Auto copy density control, copy paper: A4/11" × 81/2", magnification ratio 100%
Timing chart 1-3-1 Paper feed from the upper drawer
A 100 ms after the start key is pressed, the drive motor (DM) turns on to start the drive
for the paper feed section. At the same time, the upper paper feed clutch (PFCL-U)
turns on, and the forwarding and paper feed pulleys rotate to start primary paper
feed.
B At the same time as the leading edge of the paper turns feed switch 1 (FSW1) on,
feed clutch 1 (FCL1) turns on, and the right feed roller rotates.
C 88 ms after the leading edge of the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) on, the
upper paper feed clutch (PFCL-U) and feed clutch 1 (FCL1) turn off.
D 48 ms after image ready signal turns on, the registration clutch (RCL) turns on, and
the right registration roller rotates to start secondary paper feed. At the same time,
feed clutch 1 (FCL1) turns on for 30 ms.
E 110 ms after the trailing edge of the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) off,
the registration clutch (RCL) turns off.
1-3-9
2AR
(2) Main charging section
The main charging section consists of the drum and the main charger assembly.
The main charger assembly charges the drum so that a latent image is formed on the
surface, the shield grid ensuring the charge is applied uniformly.
Main charger assembly
Tungsten wire
Shield grid
Drum
Figure 1-3-7 Main charging section
1-3-10
2AR
8
3
6
5
4
2
7
1
Figure 1-3-8 Main charger
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Main charger housing
Main charger front lid
Main charger rear lid
Tungsten wire
CN9-14
CN9-13
CN9-12
CN9-5
MC REM
GRID CONT
MC ALM
24 V DC
Charger spring
Charger terminal
Charger pin
Shield grid
CN1-1
MC
CN1-2
CN1-3
CN1-10
Grid
HVTPCB
Drum
EPCB
Figure 1-3-9 Main charging section block diagram
1-3-11
2AR
Start key
DM
100 ms
500 ms
MC REM
200 ms
FSM
518 ms
ESW
A
B
C
Auto copy density control, copy paper: A4/11" x 81/2", magnification ratio 100%
Timing chart 1-3-2 Main charging
A 100 ms after the start key is pressed, the drive motor (DM) turns on.
B 500 ms after the drive motor (DM) turns on, main charging (MC REM) starts.
C 200 ms after paper is ejected and the feedshift motor (FSM) turns off, main charging
(MC REM) is completed.
1-3-12
2AR
(3) Optical section
The optical section consists of the scanner, mirror frame and image scanning unit for
scanning and the laser scanner unit for printing.
6
4
7
2
$
9 8 0
1
3
@
5
#
!
Figure 1-3-10 Optical section
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Scanner
Mirror frame
Mirror 1
Mirror 2
Mirror 3
Exposure lamp (EL)
Reflector
8
9
0
!
@
#
$
Image scanning unit
Lens
Optical rail
Laser scanner unit (LSU)
CCD PCB (CCDPCB)
Scanner motor (SM)
Scanner home position switch
(SHPSW)
1-3-13
2AR
Original scanning
The original image is illuminated by the exposure lamp (EL) and scanned by the CCD
PCB (CCDPCB) in the image scanning unit via the three mirrors, the reflected light
being converted to an electrical signal.
The scanner and mirror frame travel to scan on the optical rails on the front and rear of
the machine to scan from side to side. The speed of the mirror frame is half the speed
of the scanner. When the SRDF* is used, the scanner and mirror frame stop at the DF
original scanning position to start scanning.
* Optional.
Original
SHPSW
CCDPCB
CN2-1–
CN2-120
CN5-A1–
CN5-A12,
CN5-B1–
CN5-B12
MPCB
SCPCB
LSU
CN3-1–
CN3-120
Drum
EPCB
Figure 1-3-11 Optical section block diagram
1-3-14
CN3-1–
CN3-10
CN1-6
CN2-4
CN1-1–
CN3-6
CN4-1–
CN4-6
CN3-1–
CN9-A1–
CN9-A12,
CN9-B1–
CN9-B12
INPCB
CN8-1–
CN8-13
CN1-1–
CN1-14
CN2-1–
CN2-14
SMPCB
CN2-1
EL
CN2-1–
CN2-6
CN4-2
SM
2AR
Start key
270 P
Fwd. rotation
SM
Rev. rotation
414 P
9921 P
120 P
SHPSW
FVSYNC signal
A
B
C
D
Original: A3/11" ¥ 17", magnification ratio 100%
Timing chart 1-3-3 Scanner operation
A When the start key is pressed, the scanner motor (SM) reverses for 270 pulses and
then rotates forward.
B 414 pulses after the scanner motor (SM) starts rotating forward, the FVSYNC signal
turns on for 9921 pulses for scanning.
C The scanner motor (SM) reverses to return the scanner to the home position.
D 120 pulses after the scanner home position switch (SHPSW) turns on, the scanner
motor (SM) turns off, and the scanner stops at its home position.
1-3-15
2AR
Image printing
The image data scanned by the CCD PCB (CCDPCB) is processed on the main PCB
(MPCB) and transmitted as image printing data to the laser scanner unit (LSU). By
repeatedly turning the laser on and off, the laser scanner unit forms a latent image on
the drum surface.
• Laser scanner unit
23
4
1
8
7
0
9
6
Figure 1-3-12 Laser scanner unit (1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1-3-16
Laser diode (laser diode PCB)
Collimator lens
Cylindrical lens
Polygon mirror
Lenses
BD sensor mirror
Cylindrical correcting lens
BD sensor (beam detection PCB)
Glass dust filter
Polygon motor (PM)
5
2AR
Drum
7
8
1
3
9
2
6
5
4
Figure 1-3-13 Laser scanner unit (2)
1 Laser diode: Generates the laser beam which forms a latent image on the drum.
2 Collimator lens: Collimates the diffused laser beam emitted from the laser diode to
convert it into a cylindrical beam.
3 Cylindrical lens: Shapes the collimated laser beam to suit the printing resolution.
4 Polygon mirror: Six-facet mirror that rotates at approximately 31890 rpm with each
face reflecting the laser beam toward the drum for one main-direction scan.
5 Lens: Corrects for non-linearity of the laser beam scanning speed on the drum
surface, keeps the beam diameter constant and corrects for the vertical alignment of
the polygon mirror to ensure that the focal plane of the laser beam is on the drum
surface.
6 BD sensor mirror: Reflects the laser beam to the BD sensor to generate the maindirection (horizontal) sync signal.
7 Cylindrical correcting lens: Corrects for the deviation of the laser beam reflected by
the BD sensor mirror to the BD sensor.
8 BD sensor: Detects the beam reflected by the BD sensor mirror, outputting a signal
to the main PCB (MPCB) to provide timing for the main-direction sync signal.
9 Glass dust filter: Prevents dust from entering the unit.
1-3-17
2AR
The dimensions of the laser beam are as shown in Figure 1-3-14.
70 µm
65 µm
Figure 1-3-14
Scanning in the main direction is provided by the rotating polygon mirror, while
scanning in the auxiliary direction is provided by the rotating drum, forming a static
latent image on the drum.
The static latent image of the letter “A”, for example, is formed on the drum surface as
shown in Figure 1-3-15. Electrical charge is dissipated on the area of the drum surface
irradiated by the laser.
The focal point of the laser beam is moved line by line, and adjacent lines slightly
overlap each other.
Main
scanning
direction
Auxilary
scanning
direction
: laser beam is on
Figure 1-3-15
1-3-18
2AR
(4) Developing section
The developing section consists of the developing unit and the toner cartridge.
Toner cartridge
Toner feed motor (TFM)
Developing unit
Figure 1-3-16 Developing section
The developing unit consists of the developing roller where a magnetic brush is formed,
the doctor blade and the developing spirals that agitate the developer.
In the toner recycling assembly, new toner from the toner cartridge is mixed with the
residual toner recovered from the cleaning section. This mixture is conveyed to the
developing unit.
1-3-19
2AR
Left developing
spiral
Right developing
spiral
Cleaning spiral
Toner recycling
assembly
Toner recycle
spiral
Flow of the recycled toner
Figure 1-3-17 Toner recycling
1-3-20
2AR
Formation of magnetic brush
The developing roller consists of a magnet roller with five poles and a sleeve roller.
Rotation of the sleeve roller around the magnet roller entrains developer, which in turn
forms a magnetic brush at pole N1 on the magnet roller. The height of the magnet
brush is regulated by the doctor blade; the developing result is affected by the position
of the poles on the magnet roller and the position of the doctor blade.
A developing bias voltage generated by the high-voltage transformer (HVTPCB) is
applied to the developing roller to provide image contrast.
A
4
Magnetic poles on the developing roller
7
6
S1
68.2˚
5
N2
60˚
N1
S2
92˚
2 1
69.3˚
3
A: Distances beteen the doctor blade and
developing roller: 0.6 ± 0.05 mm
S3
N1:
N2:
S1:
S2:
S3:
860 × 10–4 T
640 × 10–4 T
590 × 10–4 T
485 × 10–4 T
605 × 10–4 T
Figure 1-3-18 Forming a magnetic brush
1
2
3
4
Developing unit housing
Developing roller
Toner sensor (TNS)
Doctor blade
5 Right developing spiral
6 Left developing spiral
7 Developing paddle
1-3-21
2AR
CN8-17
CN8-18
CN8-22
CN8-24
CN9-11
CN9-10
CN9-5
EPCB
TFM+
TFM
TFM–
TNS SIG
TNS CONT
DB REM
DB CONT
24 V DC
CN1-4
DB
CN1-5
CN1-10
HVTPCB
Figure 1-3-19 Developing section block diagram
Toner density is detected by the toner sensor (TNS).
The sensor section of the toner sensor detects the ratio of toner to carrier in the
developer near it and converts it into a voltage. As more toner is used, the ratio of toner
to carrier decreases, increasing the toner sensor output voltage.
When the ratio drops below the specified value, the increase in toner sensor output
voltage triggers toner replenishing. When toner is added and the ratio of toner to carrier
returns to normal, the toner sensor output voltage drops to the point where toner
replenishing stops.
1-3-22
2AR-1
2AR
Toner density control
Toner density control is conducted using the TARGET value as the reference which is
the toner sensor initial output value set by maintenance item U130 when developer is
loaded for the first time.
Toner being replenished message
(forced toner feed)
Toner sensor
output voltage (V)
Toner request message
(Toner cartridge to be replaced.)
180 s
Toner empty detection
level
Toner feed start level
(TARGET set by U130)
Toner feed stop level
AB
C
D
E F
Copying
Figure 1-3-20 Toner density control
A If the toner sensor output voltage exceeds the toner feed start level 3 s after the
drive motor (DM) has turned on (end of toner empty detection inhibit time), the toner
feed motor (TFM) turns on to replenish toner.
B As toner is replenished, the toner sensor output voltage falls until it drops below the
toner feed stop level and replenishing stops.
C When the toner sensor output voltage exceeds the toner empty detection level after
toner replenishing is carried out, the toner being replenished message appears
disabling copying and forced toner feed starts. If the toner sensor output voltage fails
to fall to the toner feed stop level within 180 s of the start of forced toner feed, the
toner request message appears.
D When toner is replenished, the toner sensor output voltage falls until it drops below
the toner feed stop level and replenishing stops. After 60 s aging (15 s while
copying) the toner being replenished message disappears and copying is enabled.
1-3-23
2AR
E After replacing the toner cartridge, the toner feed motor (TFM) turns on to replenish
toner.
F When toner is replenished, the toner sensor output voltage falls until it drops to the
toner feed stop level. The toner being replenished message disappears and
replenishing stops.
1-3-24
2AR
Correcting the toner sensor control voltage
The toner sensor control voltage is corrected based on the absolute humidity and the
total drive motor time so that the toner density is kept constant regardless of the
changes in humidity and the total drive motor time.
Toner sensor control voltage after correction = A + B + C
A: Toner sensor control voltage before correction (value set by maintenance item 131)
B: Correction data based on the absolute humidity
C: Correction data based on the total drive motor time
• Correction based on the absolute humidity
Correction data
A
B
+10
C
0
D
–25
E
–35
0
2.0
4.0
10.0
20.0
32.0
Absolute humidity (g/m3)
Figure 1-3-21 Correction based on the absolute humidity
A When the absolute humidity is between 0 and 2.0 g/m3, a constant value of +10 is
added to the toner sensor control voltage.
B When the absolute humidity is between 2.0 and 4.0 g/m3, the correction data is
reduced according to the rise in absolute humidity.
C When the absolute humidity is between 4.0 and 10.0 g/m3, the correction data
becomes 0.
D When the absolute humidity is between 10.0 and 32.0 g/m3, the correction data is
decreased according to the rise in absolute humidity, reducing the toner sensor
control voltage.
E When the absolute humidity exceeds 32.0 g/m3, the correction data becomes a
constant value of –35, decreasing the toner sensor control voltage.
1-3-25
2AR
Computing the absolute humidity
The external humidity sensor (EHUMSENS) and external temperature thermistor
(ETTH) are located on the humidity sensor PCB (HUMPCB). The external humidity
sensor (EHUMSENS) converts the relative humidity detected by the humidity sensing
element into a voltage and sends it to the engine PCB (EPCB). The main PCB
(MPCB)computes the absolute humidity based on this EHUMSENS signal and the
temperature (ETTH signal) detected by the external temperature thermistor (ETTH).
EPCB
CN3
HUMPCB
ETTH
Humidity
sensing
element
4
ETTH
3
GND
2
EHUMSENS
1
5V
MPCB
CN2
CN15-1
CN15-2
CN15-3
EHUMSENS
CN15-4
Figure 1-3-22 Absolute humidity computation block diagram
1-3-26
2AR
• Correction based on the total drive motor time
The toner sensor control voltage is also corrected based on the total time the drive
motor (DM) has been on from execution of maintenance item U130, so that the toner
sensor output voltage is regulated properly.
Correction data
A
B
0
D
C
–10
E
–20
0
150
300
800
1500
Drive time (min)
Figure 1-3-23 Correction based on the total drive motor time
A When maintenance item U130 is run for initial developer setting, the total drive
motor time is cleared and the toner sensor control voltage correction data becomes
0.
B When the total drive motor time is between 150 and 300 min., the correction data is
decreased according to the increase in the total drive motor time.
C When the total drive motor time is between 300 and 800 min., the toner sensor
control voltage is corrected with a constant value of –10.
D When the total drive motor time is between 800 and 1500 min., the correction data is
decreased according to the increase in the total drive motor time.
E When the total drive motor time exceeds 1500 min., the toner sensor control voltage
is corrected with a constant value of –20.
1-3-27
2AR
Correcting toner sensor output voltage
The toner sensor output voltage is corrected according to the absolute humidity at
power-on (the main switch turning on), fixing temperature and accumulated drive time.
Toner sensor output voltage after correction = Toner sensor output voltage before
correction – Correction data at power-on
Correction data at power-on = A – B
If A – B ⱕ 0, the correction data at power-on is 0
A: Correction data based on the absolute humidity and fixing temperature
B: Accumulated drive time from the main switch turning on (total drive motor on-time)
If the fixing temperature at the main switch turning on is 50°C/122°F or below,
correction data A is determined as follows:
Condition
Correction data A
The absolute humidity at the last main switch turning off was
14 g/m3 or below.
+12
The absolute humidity at the main switch turning on was
14 g/m3 or below.
+12
Other cases than above.
0
If the fixing temperature at the main switch turning on is 50°C/122°F or above, the value
of correction data A applied when the main switch was last turned off is used.
1-3-28
2AR
(5) Transfer and separation section
Separation claw pulleys
Drum separation
claws
Transfer roller
Transfer cleaner
Figure 1-3-24 Transfer and separation section
The transfer and separation section consists mainly of the transfer roller and drum
separation claws.
A high voltage generated by the high-voltage transformer PCB (HVTPCB) is applied to
the transfer roller for transfer charging.
Toner adhered to the transfer roller is removed by the transfer cleaner.
1-3-29
2AR
CN9-9
CN9-7
CN9-5
TC REM
TC CONT
24 V DC
CN1-6
Transfer roller
CN1-8
Drum
CN1-10
TC
HVTPCB
EPCB
Figure 1-3-25 Transfer and separation section block diagram
1-3-30
2AR
Image ready
Secondary
paper feed start
48 ms
Secondary paper feed end
110 ms
RCL
250 ms
FSM
518 ms
RSW
ESW
350 ms
419 ms
TC REM
215 ms
A
B
C
Auto copy density control, copy paper: A4/11" × 81/2", magnification ratio 100%
Timing chart 1-3-4 Transfer
A 250 ms after the registration clutch (RCL) turns on to start secondary paper feed,
transfer charging (TC REM) starts.
B 419 ms after the trailing edge of the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) off,
transfer charging (TC REM) ends.
C 350 ms after the paper is ejected and the feedshift motor (FSM) turns off, transfer
charging (TC REM) is conducted again for 215 ms.
1-3-31
2AR
(6) Cleaning section
The cleaning section consists of the cleaning blade that removes residual toner from
the drum surface after the transfer process, and the cleaning spiral that carries the
residual toner back to the toner recycling assembly.
3
2
4
1
Figure 1-3-26 Cleaning section
1
2
3
4
1-3-32
Drum
Cleaning blade
Cleaning spiral
Lower cleaning seal
2AR
(7) Charge erasing section
The cleaning lamp (CL) consists of 47 LEDs which remove residual charge from the
drum surface.
Cleaning lamp (CL)
Figure 1-3-27 Charge erasing section
CN13-4
CL REM
CL
Drum
EPCB
Figure 1-3-28 Charge erasing section block diagram
1-3-33
2AR
Start key
100 ms
DM
300 ms
CL
TC REM
215 ms
A
B
Auto copy density control, copy paper: A4/11" × 81/2", magnification ratio 100%
Timing chart 1-3-5 Charge erasing
A 100 ms after the start key is pressed, the drive motor (DM) and cleaning lamp (CL)
turn on simultaneously to remove the residual charge from the drum surface after
the residual toner has been removed in the cleaning section.
B 300 ms after 215 ms of transfer charging (TC REM) ends, the drive motor (DM) and
cleaning lamp (CL) turn off simultaneously.
1-3-34
2AR
2AR-2
(8) Fixing section
5
$
7
8
4
6
#
1
0
!
9
@
%
3
2
Figure 1-3-29 Fixing section
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Fixing unit cover
Fixing unit front right guide
Fixing unit front left guide
Fixing unit rear right guide
Fixing unit rear left guide
Heat roller
Press roller
8 Heat roller separation claws
9 Fixing heater M (H1)
0 Fixing heater S (H2)
! Fixing unit thermostat (TH)
@ Fixing unit thermistor (FTH)
# Press roller separation claws
$ Fixing unit pressure spring
% Fixing Cleaning Roller
1-3-35
2AR
The fixing section consists of the parts shown in Figure 1-3-29. When paper reaches
the fixing section after the transfer process, it passes between the press roller and heat
roller, which is heated by fixing heaters M or S (H1 or H2). Pressure is applied by the
fixing unit pressure springs so that the toner on the paper is melted, fused and fixed
onto the paper.
When the fixing process is completed, the paper is separated from the heat roller by its
separation claws and is ejected from the copier to either the eject unit* or feedshift unit*
.
* Optional
TH
Heat roller
ILSW
FTH
CN1-1
CN1-3
H2
H1
CN1-4
EPCB
Figure 1-3-30 Fixing section block diagram
1-3-36
CN13-1
FTH
CN13-2
FTH 5 V
CN2-3
H2 REM
CN1-6
CN1-7
H1 REM
CN2-2
PSPCB
2AR
Heating the heat roller and detecting temperature
1
5
3
4
2
Figure 1-3-31 Heating the heat roller and detecting temperature
1 Heat roller
2 Fixing heater M (H1)
3 Fixing heater S (H2)
4 Fixing unit thermostat (TH)
5 Fixing unit themistor (FTH)
The heat roller is heated by fixing heaters M or S (H1 or H2) inside it; its surface
temperature is detected by the fixing unit thermistor (FTH) and is regulated by the fixing
heaters turning on and off.
If the fixing section becomes abnormally hot, either the fixing unit thermistor detects it or
fixing unit thermostat (TH) operates, in each case, shutting the power to the fixing
heaters off.
1-3-37
2AR
Fixing temperature control
Secondary stabilization
fixing temperature
175°C/347°F
Primary stabilization
fixing temperature
170°C/338°F
Copying enabled
Aging end
MSW
H1
H2
2s
500 ms
500 ms
300 ms
DM
10 s
100 ms
500 ms
DB REM
CFM1, 2
(half speed)
CFM1, 2
(full speed)
PM
180 s
1000 ms
500 ms
TC REM
AB C
DE
F
G
H IJ
Timing chart 1-3-6 Fixing temperature control
A 2 s after the main switch (MSW) is turned on, fixing heater M (H1) turns on to heat
the heat roller. At the same time, cooling fan motors 1 and 2 (CFM1 and 2) turn on.
When the fixing temperature is 100°C/212°F or lower at the main switch (MSW)
turning on, and the absolute humidity is 15 g/m3 or higher, cooling fan motors 1 and
2 (CFM1 and 2) rotate for 180 s at full speed. Otherwise, the motors rotate at half
speed.
B 500 ms after fixing heater M (H1) turns on, fixing heater S (H2) turns on.
C 1000 ms after fixing heater M (H1) turns on, the polygon motor (PM) of the laser
scanner unit turns on.
D When the fixing temperature reaches 170°C/338°F, the copier enters primary
stabilization. The developing bias (DB REM) turns on and, 100 ms later, the drive
motor (DM) turns on and primary stabilization starts.
1-3-38
2AR
E 500 ms after the drive motor (DM) turns on, transfer charging (TC REM) starts.
F When the fixing temperature reaches 175°C/347°F, the copier enters secondary
stabilization. Fixing heaters M and S (H1 and H2) are turned on and off to keep the
fixing temperature at 175°C/347°F and aging starts.
G Copying is enabled as follows:
1. When fixing temperature at the main switch turning on is 100°C/212°F or lower
Absolute humidity is 15 g/m3 or higher:
Copying is enabled 120 s after fixing heater M (H1) turning on.
2. When fixing temperature at the main switch turning on is 100°C/212°F or lower
The fixing temperature at the main switch turning on is 13°C/55.4°F or higher and
the ambient temperature is 18°C/64.4°F or higher:
Copying is enabled at the earlier timing of either 41 s after fixing heater M (H1)
turning on or when the copier enters secondary stabilization.
Other than the above:
Copying is enabled at the later timing of either 69 s after fixing heater M (H1)
turning on or when the copier enters secondary stabilization.
3. Other conditions than 1 and 2
Copying is enabled when the copier enters secondary stabilization.
H 10 s after copying is enabled, transfer charging (TC REM) ends.
Note: If the fixing temperature at main switch (MSW) turning on is 100°C/212°F or
lower and the absolute humidity is 15 g/m3 or higher, transfer charging (TC
REM) ends 60 s after the copying is enabled.
I 300 ms after transfer charging (TC REM) ends, the drive motor (DM) turns off and
aging ends.
J 500 ms after aging ends, developing bias (DB REM) turns off.
1-3-39
2AR
Paper separation
Paper is separated in the fixing section by the separation claws as shown in Figure 1-332.
Heat roller separation claws
Heat roller
Press roller
separation
claws
Press roller
Figure 1-3-32 Paper separation
1-3-40
II
II Electrical Section
ELECTRICAL
SECTION
3010 S/M (MCA)
2AR
CONTENTS
2-1 Electrical Parts Layout
2-1-1 Electrical parts layout ......................................................................... 2-1-1
(1) Copier .......................................................................................... 2-1-1
2AR
2-1-1 Electrical parts layout
(1) Copier
7
15
14
13
5
8
12
16
6
3
1
4
10
9
2
11
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-1-1 Copier (PCBs)
1. Main PCB (MPCB) ....................................... Controls the other PCBs, electrical
components and optional devices;
modifies and modulates image signal.
• SIMM ......................................................... Stores data during memory copying.
2. Power source PCB (PSPCB) ....................... Generates 24 V DC, +12 V DC, 5V DC
and 3.3 V DC; controls fixing heaters M
and S.
2-1-1
2AR
2AR-1
3. Engine PCB (EPCB) .................................... Interfaces output and input signals to
and from electrical components and
optional devices.
4. High-voltage transformer PCB (HVTPCB) ... Main charging. Generates developing
bias and high voltages for transfer.
5. Scanner motor PCB (SMPCB) .................... Controls the scanner motor.
6. Scanner control PCB (SCPCB) ................... Controls the scanning section, SRDF*
and image processing.
7. Inverter PCB (INPCB) .................................. Controls the exposure lamp.
8. CCD PCB (CCDPCB) .................................. Reads the image off originals.
9. Laser diode PCB (LDPCB) .......................... Generates and controls the laser light.
10. Beam detection PCB (BDPCB). .................. Detects the laser light.
11. Humidity sensor PCB (HUMPCB) ............... Detects the absolute humidity.
• External humidity sensor (EHUMSENS) ... Detects the external humidity.
• External temperature thermistor (ETTH) ... Detects the external temperature.
12. Operation unit main PCB (OMPCB) ............ Controls the operation unit.
13. Operation unit left PCB (OLPCB) ................ Consists of operation keys and display
LEDs.
14. Operation unit right PCB (ORPCB) .............. Consists of operation keys and display
LEDs.
15. LCD ............................................................. Displays copy modes and messages.
16. LCD inverter PCB (LCDINPCB) .................. Controls lighting of the CFL.
* Optional.
2-1-2
2AR
2
1
3
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-1-2 Copier (switches and sensors in the scanning system)
1. Scanner home position switch (SHPSW) .... Detects the scanner in the home
position.
2. Original detection switch (ODSW) ............... Operates the original size sensor.
3. Original size sensor (OSS) .......................... Detects the length of the original on the
contact glass.
2-1-3
2AR
12
9
1
7
10
2
5
3
6
4
8
11
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-1-3 Copier (switches and sensors in the paper feed and conveying
system)
1. Upper paper switch (PSW-U) ...................... Detects the presence of paper in the
upper drawer.
2. Lower paper switch (PSW-L) ....................... Detects the presence of paper in the
lower drawer.
3. Upper paper length switch (PLSW-U) ......... Detects the length of paper in the upper
drawer.
4. Lower paper length switch (PLSW-L) .......... Detects the length of paper in the lower
drawer.
5. Upper paper width switch (PWSW-U) ......... Detects the width of paper in the upper
drawer.
6. Lower paper width switch (PWSW-L) .......... Detects the width of paper in the lower
drawer.
2-1-4
2AR-1
2AR
7. Upper lift limit switch (LICSW-U) ................. Detects the upper drawer lift reaching
the upper limit.
8. Lower lift limit switch (LICSW-L) .................. Detects the lower drawer lift reaching
the upper limit.
9. Feed switch 1 (FSW1) ................................. Controls the feed clutch 1 drive timing.
10. Feed switch 2 (FSW2) ................................. Controls the feed clutch 2 drive timing.
11. Feed switch 3 (FSW3) ................................. Controls the feed clutch 3 drive timing.
12. Registration switch (RSW) ........................... Controls the primary paper feed end
timing.
* Optional.
2-1-5
2AR
1
7
4
3
2
6
5
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-1-4 Copier (switches and sensors)
1. Main switch (MSW) ...................................... Turns the AC power on and off.
2. Interlock switch (ILSW) ................................ Turns the AC power for the fixing
heaters on and off.
3. Safety switch 1 (SSW1) ............................... Breaks the safety circuit when the front
cover is opened; resets paper jam
detection.
4. Safety switch 2 (SSW2) ............................... Breaks the safety circuit when left 1
cover is opened; resets paper jam
detection.
5. Safety switch 3 (SSW3) ............................... Breaks the safety circuit when left 2
cover is opened; resets paper jam
detection.
6. Toner sensor (TNS) ..................................... Detects the toner density in the
developing section.
7. Fixing unit thermistor (FTH) ......................... Detects the heat roller temperature.
2-1-6
2AR
2
7,8
1
6
5
3
4
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-1-5 Copier (motors)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Drive motor (DM) ......................................... Drives each section of the copier.
Scanner motor (SM) .................................... Drives the scanner.
Upper lift motor (CLM-U) ............................. Drives the upper drawer lift.
Lower lift motor (CLM-L) .............................. Drives the lower drawer lift.
Toner feed motor (TFM) .............................. Replenishes toner.
Paper conveying section fan motor ............. Assists paper advance along the paper
(PCFM)
conveying path and exhausts heat.
7. Cooling fan motor 1 (CFM1) ........................ Cools the machine interior.
8. Cooling fan motor 2 (CFM2) ........................ Cools the machine interior.
2-1-7
2AR
6
3
1
4
2
5
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-1-6 Copier (clutches and solenoids)
1. Upper paper feed clutch (PFCL-U) .............. Primary paper feed from the upper
drawer.
2. Lower paper feed clutch (PFCL-L) .............. Primary paper feed from the lower
drawer.
3. Feed clutch 1 (FCL1) ................................... Controls the drive of the right feed
roller.
4. Feed clutch 2 (FCL2) ................................... Controls the drive of feed roller 1.
5. Feed clutch 3 (FCL3) ................................... Controls the drive of feed roller 2.
6. Registration clutch (RCL) ............................ Secondary paper feed.
2-1-8
2AR-2
2AR
1
7
4
5
3
2
6
8
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-1-7 Copier (other components)
1. Exposure lamp (EL) ..................................... Exposes originals.
2. Cleaning lamp (CL) ...................................... Removes residual charge from the
drum surface.
3. Fixing heater M (H1) .................................... Heats the heat roller.
4. Fixing heater S (H2) .................................... Heats the heat roller.
5. Fixing unit thermostat (TH) .......................... Prevents overheating in the fixing
section.
6. Laser scanner unit (LSU) ............................. Writes image.
• Polygon motor (PM) .................................. Drives the polygon mirror.
• Laser diode PCB (LDPCB) ........................ Generates and controls the laser light.
• Beam detection PCB (BDPCB) ................. Detects the laser light.
7. Total counter (TC) ....................................... Displays the total number of copies
produced.
8. Drawer heater (CH) ..................................... Dehumidifies drawer section (optional).
2-1-9
2AR
CONTENTS
2-2 Detection of Paper Misfeed
2-2-1 Paper misfeed detection .................................................................... 2-2-1
2-2-2 Paper misfeed detection conditions ................................................... 2-2-2
2AR
2-2-1 Paper misfeed detection
When a paper jam occurs, the machine immediately stops operation and displays a
message indicating a paper jam, the jam location and the jam code on the message display
in the operation unit.
To remove the jammed paper, open the drawer, front cover, left 1 cover or left 2 cover as
necessary.
To reset the paper misfeed detection, open and close the respective cover to turn safety
switch 1, 2 or 3 off and on.
7
4
2
6
3
1
5
Figure 2-2-1 Misfeed location indication
1 Paper feed section
2 Paper conveying section,
fixing section, feedshift unit*
or eject unit*
3 Bypass unit
4 SRDF*
5 Paper feed unit*
6 Finisher*
7 Mailbox*
* Optional.
2-2-1
2AR-1
2AR
2-2-2 Paper misfeed detection conditions
FSSW*
ESW*
RCL
RSW
FSW1
PFCL-U
FSW2
PFCL-L
* Feedshift unit or eject unit (optional)
Figure 2-2-2
2-2-2
2AR
2AR-2
1. Jam at power-on
• One or more of the switches in the paper feed conveying system is on when the main
switch is turned on. (jam code 00)
2. Paper feed section [The detection time (ms) is for A4 (lateral)/81/2"×11" paper]
• No paper feed from copier upper drawer (jam code 10)
Feed switch 1 (FSW1) does not turn on within 1270 ms of the upper paper feed clutch
(PFCL-U) turning on; the clutch is then held off for 1 s and turned back on, but the switch
again fails to turn on within 1270 ms of the retry.
FSW1
Off
1s
PFCL-U
On
1270 ms
1270 ms
Off
On
Timing chart 2-2-1
• No paper feed from copier lower drawer (jam code 11)
Feed switch 2 (FSW2) does not turn on within 1369 ms of the lower paper feed clutch
(PFCL-L) turning on; the clutch is then held off for 1 s and turned back on, but the switch
again fails to turn on within 1369 ms of the retry.
FSW2
Off
1s
PFCL-L
On
1369 ms
1369 ms
Off
On
Timing chart 2-2-2
• Jam in copier vertical paper conveying section (jam code 18)
The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within 1448 ms of feed switch 1 (FSW1)
turning on.
Off
FSW1
RSW
On
1448 ms
Off
On
Timing chart 2-2-3
2-2-3
2AR
2AR-2
Feed switch 1 (FSW1) does not turn on within 1674 ms of feed switch 2 (FSW2) turning
on.
Off
FSW2
FSW1
On
1674 ms
Off
On
Timing chart 2-2-4
• Multiple sheets in paper feed section (jam code 21)
When paper is fed from the upper drawer, feed switch 1 (FSW1) does not turn off within
3113 ms of turning on.
FSW1
3113 ms
Off
On
Timing chart 2-2-5
When paper is fed from the lower drawer, feed switch 2 (FSW2) does not turn off within
3113 ms of turning on.
FSW2
3113 ms
Off
On
Timing chart 2-2-6
2-2-4
2AR
2AR-2
Feed switch 1 (FSW1) does not turn off within 1270 ms of the upper paper feed clutch
(PFCL-U) turning on.
Off
PFCL-U
FSW1
On
Off
1270 ms
On
Timing chart 2-2-7
Feed switch 2 (FSW2) does not turn off within 1369 ms of the lower paper feed clutch
(PFCL-L) turning on.
Off
PFCL-L
FSW2
On
Off
1369 ms
On
Timing chart 2-2-8
• Multiple sheets in copier vertical conveying section (jam code 22)
Feed switch 1 (FSW1) does not turn off within 1674 ms of feed switch 2 (FSW2) tuning
off.
Off
FSW2
FSW1
On
1674 ms
Off
On
Timing chart 2-2-9
2-2-5
2AR-2
2AR
Feed switch 1 (FSW1) does not turn off within 1674 ms of feed switch 2 (FSW2) turning
on.
Off
FSW2
FSW1
On
Off
1674 ms
On
Timing chart 2-2-10
3. Paper conveying section [The detection time (ms) is for A4 (lateral)/81/2"×11"
paper]
• Jam in registration/transfer section (jam code 30)
The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within 1448 ms of feed switch 1 (FSW1)
turning off.
Off
FSW1
On
1448 ms
RSW
Off
On
Timing chart 2-2-11
The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within 1448 ms of feed switch 1 (FSW1)
turning on.
Off
FSW1
RSW
On
1448 ms
On
Timing chart 2-2-12
2-2-6
Off
2AR
2AR-2
4. Fixing section [The detection time (ms) is for A4 (lateral)/81/2"×11" paper]
• Jam in fixing section (jam code 40)
The eject switch (ESW) does not turn on within 3762 ms of the registration clutch (RCL)
turning on.
Off
RCL
ESW*
On
Off
3762 ms
On
Timing chart 2-2-13
The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within 3888 ms of the registration clutch
(RCL) turning on.
Off
RCL
On
FSSW*
Off
3888 ms
On
Timing chart 2-2-14
* Feedshift unit or eject unit (optional)
2-2-7
2AR
CONTENTS
2-3 Operation of the PCBs
2-3-1
2-3-2
2-3-3
2-3-4
2-3-5
2-3-6
Power source PCB ............................................................................ 2-3-1
Main PCB ........................................................................................... 2-3-3
Scanner control PCB ......................................................................... 2-3-5
Engine PCB ....................................................................................... 2-3-6
Scanner motor PCB ........................................................................... 2-3-7
Operation unit main PCB, operation unit right PCB and operation
unit left PCB ....................................................................................... 2-3-8
2-3-7 CCD PCB ......................................................................................... 2-3-10
2-3-8 Laser diode PCB and beam detection PCB ..................................... 2-3-11
2AR
2-3-1 Power source PCB
PSPCB
AC input
Noise
filter
circuit
L1
and
L2
Rectifier circuit
T1
DB1
C30 ,C32, C36
C40, C48
C6
Fixing
heater
control
circuit
TRC
20
Overload
detection
circuit
C37
C50
Switching
control
circuit
IC1
5 V DC
output
circuit
IC40
C53
5V
H2 REM
5 V DC
C40 ,C41 5 V
C51
GND
12 V DC
D50
D51
H1 REM
PC
21
24 V DC
output
circuit
IC30
GND
Q1
Q2
5V
PC
20
24 V DC
D30
12 V DC
output
circuit
IC51
TRC
21
PC1
GND
3.3 V DC
output
circuit
IC41
3.3 V DC
GND
PC2
Figure 2-3-1 Power source PCB block diagram
2-3-1
2AR
The power source PCB (PSPCB) is a switching regulator which converts an AC input to
generate 24 V DC, 5 V DC, 3.3 V DC and 12 V DC. It consists of a noise filter circuit,
rectifier circuit, switching control circuit, 24 V DC output circuit, 5 V DC output circuit, 3.3
V DC output circuit, 12 V DC output circuit and fixing heater control circuit.
The noise filter circuit, which consists mainly of the line filters L1 and L2 and capacitors,
attenuates external noise, and prevents the switching noise generated on the power
source PCB from leaving the machine via the AC line.
The rectifier circuit full-wave rectifies the AC input which has passed through the noise
filter circuit using the diode bridge DB1. The smoothing capacitor C6 smoothes out the
pulsed voltage from the diode bridge.
The switching control circuit turns on/off the power MOSFET Q1 and Q2 via the PWM
controller IC1 to switch the current induced in the secondary coil of the transformer T1.
The 24 V DC output circuit smoothes out the voltage from the current induced in the
secondary coil of the transformer T1 via diode D30 and smoothing capacitors C30, C32,
C36, C40 and C48, and outputs a stable 24 V DC by the function of shunt regulator
IC30. The output status of the 24 V DC is fed back to the PWM controller IC1 in the
switching control circuit via the photo-coupler PC1. Based on the feedback, the PWM
controller IC1 changes the duty cycle of the pulse that turns power MOSFET Q1 and Q2
on/off in order to adjust the 24 V DC output.
The 5 V DC output circuit converts the 24 V DC from the 24 V DC output circuit to a
stable 5 V DC by means of the 4-pin regulator IC40.
The 3.3 V DC output circuit converts the 5 V DC from the 5 V DC output circuit to a
stable 3.3 V DC by means of the 4-pin regulator IC41.
The 12 V DC output circuit smoothes out the voltage from the current induced in the
secondary coil of the transformer T1 via diodes D50 and D51 and smoothing capacitor
C53, and generates a stable 12 V DC by the function of the 4-pin regulator IC51.
The fixing heater control circuit is controlled by the fixing heater M light signal H1 REM
from the engine PCB (EPCB). The phototriac PC20 turns on when this signal goes low.
When phototriac PC20 turns on, it will turn the triac TRC20 on (continuity present),
which then passes AC current. The fixing heater M (H1) then turns on. The sub fixing
heater control circuit is controlled by the fixing heater S light signal H2 REM. Its
components include phototriac PC21 and triac TRC21.
2-3-2
2AR
2-3-2 Main PCB
OMPCB
MPCB
Main CPU
IC22
SRAM
IC25 and IC26
Communication
processor 1
IC30
EPROM
IC24
Communication
processor 2
IC28
RAM
IC27
CODEC
IC20
CPLD
IC21
SIMM
Bit map memory
DRAMs
IC14 to IC19
ASIC
IC11
Engine
CPU
IC35
Scan data
Memory
image data
LVD
ISU
BUF
SRAM
IC38
VTC
IC6
Fax reception data
Printer data
EPROM
IC37
XIO
IC43 and IC45
EPCB
Communication
processor 3
IC41
FCPCB*
BUF
BUF
PCPCB*
LVD
LSU
Print data
SPLD
IC36
Data bus
Control signal
* Optional.
Figure 2-3-2 Main PCB block diagram
2-3-3
2AR
The main PCB (MPCB) consists of the main CPU IC22 and the engine CPU IC35. The
main CPU IC22 controls the memory copying and communication with other PCBs. The
engine CPU IC35 controls the engine drive system and communication with other
PCBs.
The main CPU IC22 operates basically on a 16-bit bus (8 bits for some devices). It
uses SRAM IC25 and IC26 for work memory. In accordance with the control program in
EPROM IC24, the main CPU IC22 communicates with the engine CPU IC35, the
operation unit main PCB (OMPCB), fax control PCB (FCPCB)*, and printer control PCB
(PCPCB)* via the serial communication function in the CPU, communication processor
1 IC30, and communication processor 2 IC28. The main CPU IC22 also controls the
ASIC IC11 and CODEC IC20 during memory copying for sort and rotation copies. The
main CPU IC22 is connected to the backup RAM IC27 that stores the machine status.
The engine CPU IC35 operates on an 8-bit bus, using SRAM IC38 for work memory.
In accordance with the control program in EPROM IC37, the engine CPU IC35
communicates with the main CPU IC22 and external devices such as the paper feed
unit* and the finisher* via the serial communication function of the CPU and
communication processor 3 IC41. The engine CPU IC35 also controls the LSU via VTC
IC6, which is for the image output control, and drives the machine, conveys paper and
detects abnormality via XIO IC43 and IC45.
* Optional
2-3-4
2AR
2-3-3 Scanner control PCB
SCPCB
Image control signals
Image signal
Image data bus (8 bits)
MIP
IC17
Data bus
Address bus
SRAM
IC18
Data bus
Address bus
SRAM
IC19
Address bus
Data bus
Image control signals
(differential transmission)
Driver Image signal
IC16 (differential transmission)
SM control signals
EL control signals
SHPSW detection signal
Image data
bus
8 bits (odd)
Image data
bus
8 bits (even)
ADC
IC14
ADC
IC13
SMPCB
CPU
IC5
Detection input signal
Control output signals
EPROM
IC7
SHD
IC11
MPCB
S/H
IC12
Opamp
IC21
Analog image
signal
(odd)
Analog image
signal
(even)
SRDF*
CCDPCB
Control signal
Clock signal
Buffer
IC10
Figure 2-3-3 Scanner control PCB block diagram
The scanner control PCB (SCPCB) consists of CPU IC5, MIP IC17, SHD IC11, and
EPROM IC7. In accordance with the control program in EPROM IC7, the CPU IC5
controls the scanner motor PCB (SMPCB), SRDF*, MIP IC17 and SHD IC11. SHD IC11
outputs clock signals to the CCD PCB (CCDPCB) to drive the CCD, which produces
analog image signals (odd and even) according to the scanned image. The analog
signals are converted to a digital image data by ADC IC13 and IC14 via operational
amplifier IC21 and S/H IC12, and fed to SHD IC11. The digital image data obtained is
processed by SHD IC11 and MIP IC17, serialized by driver IC16 in LVDS (Low Voltage
Differential Signaling), and then differentially transmitted to the main PCB (MPCB).
* Optional
2-3-5
2AR
2-3-4 Engine PCB
EPCB
Feedshift unit*
Duplex unit*
Paper feed unit
MPCB
Drivers
IC1, IC2
and IC4
Drivers
IC6, IC7,
IC10,
IC11
and IC12
Engine
CPU
IC35
XIOs
IC43
and IC45
Developing unit
FTH
Op-amps
IC3,
IC5
and IC9
HUMPCB
TFM
Motor
driver
IC8
Figure 2-3-4 Engine PCB block diagram
The engine PCB (EPCB), which is directly connected to the main PCB (MPCB) via
connectors, serves to interface control signals between the engine CPU IC35 on the
main PCB (MPCB) and each drive system unit.
The control signal from the main PCB (MPCB) controls the drive system units via
drivers IC1, IC2, and IC4, and drivers IC6, IC7, IC10, IC11, and IC12.
The control signal from the main PCB (MPCB) also controls the toner feed motor (TFM)
via the motor driver IC8.
The detection signals from components such as the fixing unit thermistor (FTH) and
humidity sensor PCB (HUMPCB) are sent to the main PCB (MPCB) via operational
amplifiers IC3, IC5 and IC9.
2-3-6
2AR
2-3-5 Scanner motor PCB
SMPCB
SCPCB
SM Vref
SM M1
SM M2
SM M3
SM CLK
SM CWB
SM ENABLE
EL ON REM
Stepper
motor
driver IC1
SM A
SM _A
SM B
SM _B
SM
EL
DT1
DT2
EL
ODSW
INPCB
ODSW
SHPSW
SHPSW
Figure 2-3-5 Scanner motor PCB block diagram
The scanner motor PCB (SMPCB) consists of the stepper motor driver IC1 and digital
transistors DT1 and DT2.
The current setting voltage SM Vref, mode signals SM M1, SM M2, SM M3, and SM
CWB, phase switching clock signal SM CLK, and drive/stop signal SM ENABLE from
the scanner control PCB (SCPCB) control the scanner motor (SM).
The control signal EL REM sent from the scanner control PCB (SCPCB) to the inverter
PCB (INPCB) via the digital transistor DT2 controls the exposure lamp (EL).
The scanner motor PCB (SMPCB) is also a relay circuit that transmits signals from the
original detection switch (ODSW) and scanner home position switch (SHPSW).
2-3-7
2AR
2AR-1
2-3-6 Operation unit main PCB, operation unit right PCB and
operation unit left PCB
OMPCB
Serial communication
Key detection signal
LED on signal
Scan signal
MPCB
Serial communication
FCPCB*2
Fax data ROM detection signal
Flash tool assembly detection signal
FLASH
ROM
IC2
Address bus
Data bus
Key detection signal
LED on signal
Scan signal
OLPCB
CPU
IC5
Key detection signal
LED on signal
Scan signal
CFL remote signal
_RD
ORPCB
_WR
Flash
tool
assembly
LCD
reference
VEE
VEE voltage
generator
CD1
SRAM
IC4
FDPCB*1
LCD
display
font
ROM
FAPCB*2
GAL
address
decoder
IC3
Address bus
LCD
controller
IC1
LCD
reference
VO
VO voltage
generator
IC8
LCD
INPCB
LCD
C
F
L
24 V DC
5 V DC
Data bus
_RD
PSPCB
*1 Flash tool assembly is connected when updating the flash ROM IC2.
*2 Optional.
Figure 2-3-6 Operation unit main PCB, operation unit right PCB and operation
unit left PCB block diagram
2-3-8
2AR-1
2AR
The operation unit main PCB (OMPCB) consists of the CPU IC5; flash ROM IC2, which
contains the control program and LCD display font; SRAM IC4 for executing the control
program and LCD controller IC1. The CPU IC5 controls the entire operation unit directly
or via LCD controller IC1, driver IC and transistors.
The operation unit right PCB (ORPCB), operation unit left PCB (OLPCB), and fax
operation unit PCB (FAPCB)* consist of key switches and LEDs. They are controlled by
the scan signals and LED lighting signals from the operation unit main PCB (OMPCB).
The LCD inverter PCB (LCDINPCB) is turned on/off by the CFL remote signals from the
operation unit main PCB (OMPCB) via the operation unit right PCB (ORPCB).
For operation of fax*, the operation unit main PCB (OMPCB) selects the ROM on the
fax data ROM PCB (FDPCB)* for LCD display font. Upon detection of the flash tool
assembly (which is connected when it is required to update the flash ROM), the
operation unit main PCB (OMPCB) writes to the flash ROM IC2.
* Optional.
2-3-9
2AR
2-3-7 CCD PCB
CCDPCB
SCPCB
CLK
(×6)
RS
(×2)
CLP
(×2)
SHIFT
Clock
driver
IC3
CCD
IC1
Odd
Even
CLK
RS
CLP
SHIFT
Clock signal
generator
Analog image
signal
(odd)
Emitter
follower
TR1
Analog image
signal
(even)
Emitter
follower
TR2
Image
processor
Op-amp
IC2
Figure 2-3-7 CCD PCB block diagram
The clock signals SHIFT, CLP, RS and CLK from the clock signal generator on the
scanner control PCB (SCPCB) are sent to the CCD PCB (CCDPCB), where clock driver
IC3 generates eleven clock signals to drive CCD IC1. Upon reception of clock signals,
the CCD IC1 outputs analog image signals according to the density of the image. Evenand odd-numbered pixels are output separately. These analog image signals are
amplified by the operational amplifier IC2 via the emitter followers TR1 and TR2, and
then sent to the image processor of the scanner control PCB (SCPCB).
2-3-10
2AR-1
2AR
2-3-8 Laser diode PCB and beam detection PCB
LDPCB
MPCB
BDPCB
Photo
sensor
IC
PS1
Laser
diode
D2
Laser
driver
IC1
_ADJUST
_ENABLE
_VIDEO+
Differential transmission
_DATA
_VIDEO–
_BD+
_BD
Differential transmission
_BD–
Transceiver
IC2
Trans
ceiver
Figure 2-3-8 Laser diode PCB and beam detection PCB block diagram
The laser diode PCB (LDPCB) consists of laser diode D2, laser driver IC1, and
transceiver IC2.
The laser driver IC1 on the laser diode PCB (LDPCB) turns the laser diode D1 on/off
according to the image data (_DATA) differentially transmitted from the main PCB
(MPCB) transceiver to the laser diode PCB (LDPCB) transceiver IC2.
Upon detection of laser beam from the laser diode D2 of the laser diode PCB (LDPCB),
the beam detection PCB (BDPCB), on which photo sensor IC PS1 is mounted, outputs
horizontal sync signal (_BD). This signal is sent to the laser diode PCB (LDPCB), and
differentially transmitted from the transceiver IC2 to the main PCB (MPCB) transceiver.
The laser diode PCB (LDPCB) adjusts the laser diode drive current (APC) for each line
scanned outside the image area when _ADJUST is low to keep the laser beam output
constant.
2-3-11
III
III Set Up and
Adjustment Section
SET UP AND
ADJUSTMENT
SECTION
3010 S/M (MCA)
2AR
CONTENTS
3-1 Installation
3-1-1 Unpacking and installation .................................................................. 3-1-1
(1) Installation environment ............................................................... 3-1-1
(2) Installation procedure .................................................................. 3-1-2
3-1-2 Setting initial copy modes ................................................................ 3-1-16
3-1-3 Installing the add-on memory SIMM (option) ................................... 3-1-17
3-1-4 Installing the drawer heater (service part) ....................................... 3-1-19
3-1-5 Installing the key counter (option) .................................................... 3-1-21
3-1-6 Installing the MMD host monitoring system device (option) ............ 3-1-24
3-1-7 Installing the DF (option) .................................................................. 3-1-26
2AR-1
2AR
3-1-1 Unpacking and installation
( 1 ) Installation environment
1. Temperature: 10 - 35°C/50 - 95°F
2. Humidity: 15 - 85%RH
3. Power supply: 120 V AC, 10 A
220 - 240 V AC, 5.5 A
4. Power source frequency: 50 Hz ±0.3%/60 Hz ±0.3%
5. Installation location
• Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting. Ensure that the photoconductor will not be
exposed to direct sunlight or other strong light when removing paper jams.
• Avoid extremes of temperature and humidity, abrupt ambient temperature
changes, and hot or cold air directed onto the machine.
• Avoid dust and vibration.
• Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine.
• Place the machine on a level surface (maximum allowance inclination: 1° ).
• Avoid air-borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the
photoconductor, such as mercury, acidic of alkaline vapors, inorganic gasses,
NOx, SOx gases and chlorine-based organic solvents.
• Select a room with good ventilation.
6. Allow sufficient access for proper operation and maintenance of the machine.
Machine front: 1000 mm/393/8"
Machine rear: 100 mm/4"
Machine right: 700 mm/275/8"
Machine left: 600 mm/235/8"
g
e
h
d
c
f
a
b
Figure 3-1-1 Installation dimensions
a: 855 mm/3311/16"
b: 1170 mm/461/16"
c: 585 mm/231/16"
d: 1010 mm/393/4"
e: 633 mm/2415/16"
f: 1530 mm/601/4"
g: 423 mm/165/8"
h: 1630 mm/643/16"
3-1-1
2AR
( 2 ) Installation procedure
Start
Unpack.
Remove the tapes.
Remove pins holding light source
units 1 and 2.
Connect the power cord.
Install the optional devices.
Remove the image formation unit.
Carry out initial developer setting
(maintenance item U130).
Load developer.
Exit maintenance mode.
Release the cleaning blade.
Install a toner cartridge.
Adjust the fixing pressure.
Install the transfer roller assembly.
Make test copies.
Completion of the machine installation.
3-1-2
2AR-1
2AR
Light source
unit 1 pins
Light source unit 2 pin
Transfer roller
assembly
Spacers*
Figure 3-1-2
* For 220 - 240 V specifications only.
Note: The original cover is standard for 220 - 240 V specifications.
3-1-3
2AR
2AR-1
Unpack.
4
@
^
#
%
7
1
3
!
$
8
6
9
5
2
0
Figure 3-1-3 Unpacking
1
2
3
4
5
6
Copier
Bottom pads
Outer case
Top pads
Skid
Inner frame
7 Machine cover
8 Air-padded bag
9 Transfer roller
assembly
0 Hinge joint
! Bar code labels
@
#
$
%
^
Plastic bag
Instruction handbook
Spacers*1
Power cord*1
Business reply mail*2
*1: For 220 - 240 V specifications only.
*2: For 120 V specifications only.
Note: The original cover is standard for 220 - 240 V specifications.
3-1-4
2AR
2AR-5
Remove the tapes.
1. Remove the two tapes holding the front cover.
2. Remove the two tapes each holding the drawers.
3. Remove the tape holding the left 1 cover.
4. Remove the two tapes holding the power cord.
5. Remove the three tapes holding the pins for light source units 1 and 2.
Light source unit 1 pins
Power cord
Front cover
Power cord
Drawers
For 120V specifications
only.
Light source
uint 2 pin
Left 1 cover
Figure 3-1-4
3-1-5
2AR
2AR-5
6. Remove the tapes covering the original detection switch and bypass unit*.
7. Open the bypass table and remove the two spacers.*
Original detection switch
Bypass unit*
Spacers*
* For 220 - 240 V specifications only.
Figure 3-1-5
8. Open the front cover and remove the tape holding the cartridge mount.
Cartridge mount
Figure 3-1-6
3-1-6
2AR-5
2AR
9. Open the drawers and remove the tape from each of them.
Figure 3-1-7
Remove pins holding light source units 1 and 2.
1. Remove the two pins for light source unit 1 and the pin for light source unit 2.
Light source unit 1 pins
Light source unit 2 pin
Figure 3-1-8
3-1-7
2AR
Install the optional devices.
1. Install the optional devices (eject unit, feedshift unit, bypass unit*, job separator,
duplex unit, SRDF and/or original cover*) as necessary (see the respective
installation manuals or service manuals).
Note: Be sure to install either the eject unit or feedshift unit.
* Standard for 220 - 240 V specifications.
Remove the image formation unit.
1. Open the front cover, left 1 cover and the paper transfer section cover.
2. Remove the two screws and detach the image formation unit.
Image formation unit
Screws
Figure 3-1-9
3-1-8
2AR
Load developer.
1. Remove the four screws and detach the developing unit upper cover.
Caution: Be sure to place the image formation unit on a level surface when
loading developer.
Developing unit upper cover
Screws
Figure 3-1-10
2. Shake the developer bottle well to agitate the developer.
3. While turning the magnet roller gear in the direction of the arrow in the diagram,
uniformly pour developer into the image formation unit.
Caution: Never turn the magnet roller gear in the reverse direction.
Developer
Magnet roller gear
Figure 3-1-11 Loading developer
4. Refit the developing unit upper cover using the four screws.
3-1-9
2AR
2AR-1
Release the cleaning blade.
1. Slide the cleaning blade release lever in the direction of the arrow in the
diagram.
Cleaning blade release lever
Figure 3-1-12
2. Refit the image formation unit using the two screws.
3. Connect the 12-pin connector.
12-pin connector
Figure 3-1-13
4. Close the front cover.
3-1-10
2AR
Adjust the fixing pressure.
1. Adjust the fixing pressure by turning the fixing pressure pins on the front and
rear of the fixing unit clockwise until each pin stops.
Caution: Never turn the fixing pressure nuts.
Fixing pressure pin
Fixing pressure pin
Figure 3-1-14 Adjusting the fixing pressure
2. Close the paper transfer section cover and left 1 cover.
3-1-11
2AR
Connect the power cord.
1. Connect the power cord to the connector on the machine.*
2. Insert the power plug into the wall outlet.
Carry out initial developer setting (maintenance item U130).
1. Turn the main switch on and enter the maintenance mode by entering
“10871087” using the numeric keys.
2. Enter “130” using the numeric keys and press the start key.
3. Press the start key to execute the maintenance item.
• The drive stops within approximately 2 minutes and the toner feed start level
and toner sensor control voltage are automatically set. The settings are
displayed on the message display.
Display example
INPUT: 135
(Toner sensor input level)
CONTROL: 181
(Toner sensor control voltage)
TARGET: 138
(Toner feed start level)
HUMID: 57
(Absolute humidity)
4. Press the stop/clear key.
Exit maintenance mode.
1. Enter "001" using the numeric keys and press the start key.
The machine exits the maintenance mode.
* For 220 - 240 V specifications only.
3-1-12
2AR
Install a toner cartridge.
1. Open the front cover.
2. Shift the toner cartridge release lever to the right until it stops.
Toner cartridge release lever
Figure 3-1-15
3. Shake the toner cartridge horizontally eight to ten times to agitate the toner.
Figure 3-1-16
3-1-13
2AR
4. Insert the toner cartridge in the direction of the arrows on the top of the toner
cartridge by fitting the projection on the cartridge bottom into the groove inside
the machine.
5. Secure the toner cartridge by shifting the toner cartridge release lever to the left
until it stops.
Toner cartridge
Toner cartridge release lever
Figure 3-1-17
6. Close the front cover.
3-1-14
2AR
2AR-5
This page has been left blank intentionally
3-1-15
2AR
3-1-2 Setting initial copy modes
Factory settings are as follows:
Maintenance
item No.
U253
U254
U255
U256
U344
U347
Switching between double and single counts
Turning auto start function on/off
Setting auto clear time
Turning auto preheat/energy saver
function on/off
Switching copy operation at toner
empty detection
Changing the copy count timing
Switching between duplex/simplex
copy mode
Setting preheat/energy saver mode
Setting auto drawer size detection
U348
Setting the copy density adjustment range
U258
U260
U343
3-1-16
Contents
Factory setting
Double count
ON
90 s
ON
SINGLE MODE, 70
EJECT
Simplex copy
Energy Star
ON
SPECIAL AREA
2AR
3-1-3 Installing the add-on memory SIMM (option)
Installation of add-on memory to the main PCB requires the following part:
Add-on memory (16 MB or 32 MB 72-pin SIMM)
<Procedure>
1. Remove the eight screws holding the rear cover and then the cover.
2. Remove the eleven screws holding the upper shield and then the shield.
Screws
Upper shield
Screws
Screws
Screws
Figure 3-1-19
3-1-17
2AR
3. Fit the add-on memory into the add-on memory slot on the main PCB.
Caution: The add-on memory should only be inserted into add-on memory slot CN7
when a memory has already been inserted into memory slot CN6. If addon memory slot CN7 is used only, the main PCB does not recognize the
presence of the add-on memory.
Main PCB
Memory slot CN6
2
1
Add-on memory
Add-on memory slot CN7
Figure 3-1-20
4. Refit all removed parts.
3-1-18
2AR
3-1-4 Installing the drawer heater (service part)
Drawer heater installation requires the following parts:
Drawer heater (P/N 33960020): for 220 - 240 V specifications
Drawer heater (P/N 34860030): for 120 V specifications
Two (2) BVM4 × 6 bronze binding screws (P/N B1304060)
ON/OFF sticker (P/N 3A105020)
<Procedure>
1. Remove the eight screws holding the rear cover and then the cover.
2. Pull the upper and lower drawers out.
3. Pass the 2-pin connector of the drawer heater cable to the machine rear through the
cable hole.
4. Fit the drawer heater using the two screws.
Screws
Drawer heater
Cable hole
Figure 3-1-21
3-1-19
2AR
5. Remove the open connector from the 2-pin connector of the relay cable clamped to
the option connector attachment panel, and insert the 2-pin connector of the drawer
heater into the 2-pin connector of the relay cable.
Option connector
attachment panel
Open connector
2-pin connector
2-pin connector
Figure 3-1-22
6. Refit all removed parts.
7. Affix the ON/OFF sticker exactly onto the marked area above the main switch.
ON/OFF sticker
Main switch
Figure 3-1-23
3-1-20
2AR
3-1-5 Installing the key counter (option)
Key counter installation requires the following parts:
Key counter set (P/N 66069782)
Contents of the set:
• Key counter cover (P/N 66060010)
• Key counter retainer (P/N 66060030)
• Key counter cover retainer (P/N 66060021)
• Key counter mount (P/N 66060040)
• Key counter assembly (P/N 29236240)
• Four (4) M4 × 6 bronze TP-A screws (P/N B4304060)
• Two (2) M4 × 10 bronze TP-A screws (P/N B4304100)
• One (1) M4 × 20 bronze TP-A screws (P/N B4304200)
• One (1) M4 × 6 chrome TP-A screw (P/N B4104060)
• Two (2) M3 × 6 bronze flat-head screws (P/N B2303060)
• One (1) M3 bronze nut (P/N C2303000)
<Procedure>
1. Fit the key counter assembly to the key counter retainer using the two screws and
nut.
2. Fit the key counter mount to the key counter cover using the two screws, and attach
the key counter retainer to the mount using the two screws.
M4 × 6 screws
(B4304060)
Key counter retainer (66060030)
Key counter mount (66060040)
M3 nut (C2303000)
Key counter cover (66060010)
M4 × 6 bronze screws
(B4304060)
Key counter assembly (29236240)
M3 × 6 flat-head screws (B2303060)
Figure 3-1-24
3-1-21
2AR
3. Remove the six screws holding the upper right cover and then the cover.
4. Cut out the aperture plate on the upper right cover using nippers.
5. Pass the 4-pin connector inside the machine through the aperture.
Upper right cover
4-pin connector
Aperture
Screws
Screws
Figure 3-1-25
3-1-22
2AR
6. Refit the upper right cover using four of the six screws.
7. Pass the 4-pin connector of the key counter through the aperture in the key counter
cover retainer, and insert into the 4-pin connector of the machine.
8. Seat the projection of the key counter cover retainer in the aperture in the upper
right cover, and fasten them both to the machine using the remaining two screws.
9. Fit the key counter cover with the key counter assembly inserted to the key counter
cover retainer on the machine using the screw.
Jumper
4-pin connector
Key counter cover retainer
(66060021)
M4 × 10 screw
(B4304100)
Key counter cover
4-pin connector
M4 × 20 screw
(B4304200)
M4 × 6 screw
(B4104060)
Upper right cover
Figure 3-1-26
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Insert the key counter into the key counter assembly.
Turn the main switch on and enter the maintenance mode.
Run maintenance item U204 and select “KEY COUNTER.”
Exit the maintenance mode.
Check that the message requesting the key counter to be inserted is displayed
when the key counter is pulled out.
15. Check that the counter counts up as copies are made.
3-1-23
2AR
2AR-1
3-1-6
Installing the MMD host monitoring system device
(optional for 120 V specifications only)
<Procedure>
1. Remove the two screws holding the signal cable cover and then the cover.
Signal cable cover
Screws
Figure 3-1-27
2. Pull the 10-pin connector out of the machine, remove the jumper and insert the
connector into the 10-pin connector of the signal cable.
Secure the signal cable using the two screws removed in step 1.
10-pin connector
10-pin connector
Signal cable
Jumper
Screws
Figure 3-1-28
3-1-24
2AR-1
2AR
3. Fit the MMD host monitoring system device to the rear cover using the two screws.
4. Insert the connector of the signal cable into the connector of the MMD host
monitoring system device, and tighten the two screws on the signal cable.
MMD host monitoring
system device
Screw
Screw
Screws
Rear cover
Figure 3-1-29
5. Insert one connector of the modular connector cable into the "LINE" jack on the
MMD host monitoring system device and the other into a telephone jack.
Modular connector cable
LIN
E
TE
L
Figure 3-1-30
3-1-25
2AR
3-1-7
Installing the DF (option)
<Procedure>
1. Insert the DF into the machine.
Figure 3-1-31
2. Close the DF.
Remove the two screws holding the cover and then the cover.
Cover
Screws
Figure 3-1-32
3-1-26
2AR
3. Remove the screw holding the tray mounting fixture and then the fixture.
Tray mounting fixture
yy
;;
Screw
Figure 3-1-33
4. Insert the tray assembly over the pin on the front of the DF.
5. Fit the rear of the tray assembly to the DF using the tray mounting fixture removed
in step 3 and the screw.
Tray assembly
Tray mounting fixture
Screw
Figure 3-1-34
3-1-27
2AR
6. Insert the tray assembly connector into the DF connector.
Connector
Connector
Figure 3-1-35
7. Refit the cover removed in step 3.
8. Insert the DF connector into the machine.
Connector
Figure 3-1-36
3-1-28
2AR
9. Prepare an original with four lines drawn 15 mm from the edges and one center line
(see Figure 3-1-37).
15 mm
15 mm
15 mm
15 mm
Figure 3-1-37
10. Place the original on the DF and make a test copy.
If the copy image is different from the original, run maintenance item U070
"Adjusting the DF magnification," U071 "Adjusting the DF scanning timing" or U072
"Adjusting the DF center line" as necessary (see the SRDF service manual).
11. If the leading or trailing edge of the copy image is skewed (the lateral squareness is
not correct), adjust the lateral squareness of the DF.
Caution:
• Before performing this adjustment, output a VTC-PG2 pattern in maintenance item
U993 to use as the original for the adjustment.
• Adjust the amount of slack in the paper (see page 3-3-22) and the lateral
squareness (reference) (see page 3-3-35) first. Check for lateral squareness of
the copy image and if squareness is not obtained, adjust the lateral squareness of
the DF.
3-1-29
2AR
<Procedure>
Start
Place the original on the SRDF.
Adjustment on a machine without
an adjustable hinge (Figure 3-1-39)
Press the start key
to make a test copy.
Is the image correct?
Yes
End
Loosen the four screws and adjust the
position of the SRDF.
• For copy example 1, move the SRDF in
the direction of the white arrow (e).
• For copy example 2, move the SRDF in
the direction of the black arrow (b).
No
Secure the SRDF by retightening the four screws.
Adjustment on a machine equipped with
an adjustable hinge (Figure 3-1-40)
Adjust the position of the SRDF.
• For copy example 1, rotate the
adjustment screw in the direction of the
white arrow (e).
• For copy example 2, rotate the
adjustment screw in the direction of the
black arrow (b).
Original
Copy
example 1
Figure 3-1-38
3-1-30
Copy
example 2
2AR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
• Adjustment on a machine without an adjustable hinge (Figure 3-1-39):
Disconnect the SRDF connector and remove the SRDF from the machine.
Loosen the four screws securing the right leg of the SRDF.
Adjust the position of the SRDF by moving the right leg back and forth.
Retighten the four screws loosened in step 2.
Refit all removed parts.
• Adjustment on a machine equipped with an adjustable hinge (Figure 3-1-40):
Open the SRDF.
Loosen the screw securing the right leg of the SRDF on the right.
Adjust the position of the SRDF by rotating the adjustment screw behind the right
leg of the SRDF.
Retighten the screw loosened in step 2.
Refit all removed parts.
Screws
SRDF right leg
Screw
Figure 3-1-39
SRDF right leg
Adjustable hinge
Adjustment
screw
Figure 3-1-40
3-1-31
2AR
CONTENTS
3-2 Maintenance Mode
3-2-1 Maintenance mode ............................................................................ 3-2-1
(1) Executing a maintenance item .................................................... 3-2-1
(2) Maintenance mode item list ......................................................... 3-2-4
(3) Contents of maintenance mode items ......................................... 3-2-8
3-2-2 Copier management ........................................................................ 3-2-86
(1) Executing a copier management item ....................................... 3-2-86
(2) Department management .......................................................... 3-2-87
(3) Copy default .............................................................................. 3-2-89
(4) Machine default ......................................................................... 3-2-92
(5) Language .................................................................................. 3-2-94
2AR
3-2-1 Maintenance mode
The copier is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and
service the machine.
(1) Executing a maintenance item
Start
Enter 10871087.
Enter the number of the maintenance
item to be executed using the
numeric or cursor up/down keys.
· · · · · · · Entering the maintenance mode
· · · · · · · Selecting a maintenance item
Press the start key.
The maintenance item is run.
Press the stop/clear key.
Yes
Run the item again?
No
Yes
Run another maintenance
mode?
No
Enter 001 using numeric or cursor
· · · · · · · Exiting the maintenance mode
up/down keys, and press the start key.
End
3-2-1
2AR
• Data setting
Data is changed by pressing the cursor left/right keys, and the new data is set by pressing
the start key. In a maintenance item where multiple items can be changed, the item to be
changed is selected by pressing the cursor up/down keys.
1
Correcting position of FOLIO
LENGTH DATA : 330
WIDTH DATA
: 210
U035
Metric
/C
3
4
2
Inch
Stop/
Clear
Start
Figure 3-2-1
1
2
3
4
Items ................................... Displays the selected item in reverse.
Setting ................................. Displays the current setting.
Stop/clear key ..................... Cancels the change.
Start key .............................. Sets the changed setting.
3-2-2
3
4
2AR
• Operation execution
The specified operations and auto adjustments are performed by pressing the start key. In
a maintenance item where multiple operations can be performed, the item to be executed
is selected by pressing the cursor up/down keys.
1
Metric
Drive motors and fans ON
U030
/C
MAIN
EJECT (REV, L) EJECT (REV, L)
EJECT (FWD, L)
EJECT (REV, H)
EJECT (FWD, H)
Inch
Stop/
Clear
Start
2
3
2
3
Figure 3-2-2
1 Items ··································· Displays the selected item in reverse.
2 Stop/clear key ····················· Stops operation.
3 Start key ······························ Starts operation.
• Interrupt copy mode
Outputting a test copy or PG pattern is required in some maintenance items. Such an
output is enabled by pressing the interrupt key to enter interrupt copy mode.
However, since this function is restricted depending on maintenance items, only
outputting may be enabled, or a test copy even from an original may not be as good as
that made in normal copy mode.
To return the screen from interrupt copy mode to maintenance mode, press the interrupt
key again.
3-2-3
2AR
(2) Maintenance mode item list
Section
General
Initialization
Drive,
paper
feed,
paper
conveying
and
cooling
system
Item
No.
Outputting an own-status report
———
U001
Exiting the maintenance mode
———
U003
Setting the service telephone number
———
U004
Setting the machine number
———
U005
Copying without paper
———
U019
Displaying the ROM version
———
U020
Initializing all data
———
U021
Initializing memories
———
U022
Initializing backup data
———
U030
Checking motor operation
———
U031
Checking switches for paper conveying
———
U032
Checking clutch operation
———
U033
Checking solenoid operation
———
U034
Adjusting the print start timing
• Adjusting the leading edge registration of
image printing
• Adjusting the leading edge registration of
image printing for duplex copying
• Adjusting the center line of image printing
• Adjusting the center line of image printing for
duplex copying
U051
U053
Setting folio size
• Length
• Width
Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper
• Regist data
• Feed data
Performing fine adjustment of the motor speed
• Drive motor
• Feedshift motor
• Polygon motor
+0.5
0
–0.5
0.0
330
210
———
———
3
7
0
MODE 0
U059
Setting the cooling fan mode
U060
Adjusting the scanner input properties
• Text/text and photo/photo mode
U061
Turning the exposure lamp on
———
U063
Adjusting the shading position
0
* Initial setting for executing maintenance item U020
3-2-4
Initial
setting*
U000
U035
Optical
Maintenance item contents
12
2AR
Section
Optical
High
voltage
Item
No.
U065
Adjusting the scanner magnification
• Main scanning direction/auxiliary scanning
direction
Initial
setting*
0
U066
Adjusting the leading edge registration for
scanning an original on the contact glass
0
U067
Adjusting the center line for scanning an
original on the contact glass
0
U070
Adjusting the DF magnification
0
U071
Adjusting the DF scanning timing
0
U072
Adjusting the DF center line
0
U073
Checking scanner operation
———
U074
Adjusting the DF input light luminosity
U087
Turning the DF scanning position adjust mode
on/off
U088
Setting the input filter (moiré reduction mode)
U091
Checking shading
———
U092
Adjusting the scanner automatically
———
U093
Setting the exposure density gradient
• Text/text and photo/photo mode
4
OFF
OFF
0
U099
Checking the original size detection
U100
Setting the surface potential
U101
Setting high voltages
• Developing bias
• Transfer voltage
• Transfer voltage output timing
191/34
168
0
Checking/clearing the drum count
———
U111
Checking/clearing the drum drive time
———
U130
Initial setting for the developer
———
U110
Developing
Maintenance item contents
———
193
U131
Setting the toner sensor control voltage
U132
Replenishing toner forcibly
———
170
U135
Checking toner feed motor operation
———
U155
Displaying the toner sensor output
———
U156
Changing the toner control level
• Toner feed start level
• Toner empty level
138
44
U157
Checking/clearing the developing drive time
———
U158
Checking/clearing the developing count
———
* Initial setting for executing maintenance item U020
3-2-5
2AR-1
Section
Fixing and
cleaning
Operation
panel and
support
equipment
Mode
setting
Item
No.
U161
Maintenance item contents
Setting the fixing control temperature
• Normal stabilization fixing temperature
• Primary stabilization fixing temperature
• Secondary stabilization fixing temperature
• Degree of temperature to be reduced from
CONT TEMP during duplex copying
• Aging time after secondary stabilization
175
170
175
10
30
U162
Stabilizing fixing forcibly
———
U196
Turning the fixing heater on
———
U199
Checking the fixing temperature
———
U200
Turning all LEDs on
———
U202
Setting the MMD host monitoring system
———
U203
Operating DF separately
———
U204
Setting the presence or absence of a key card
or key counter
———
U206
Setting the presence or absence of the coin
vender
U208
Setting the paper size for the large paper deck
U210
Reversing the LCD
U243
Checking the operation of the DF motors,
solenoids and clutch
———
U244
Checking the DF switches
———
U245
Checking messages
———
U247
Checking the operation of the large paper deck
and paper feed desk
———
U249
Checking the paper ejection to optional devices
———
U250
Setting the maintenance cycle
U251
Checking/clearing the maintenance count
U252
Setting the destination
U253
Switching between double and single counts
U254
Turning auto start function on/off
ON
U255
Setting auto clear time
120
U256
Turning auto preheat/energy saver function on/off
U258
Switching copy operation at toner empty
detection
U260
Changing the copy count timing
U343
Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode
* Initial setting for executing maintenance item U020
3-2-6
Initial
setting*
OFF
A4
OFF
50
———
JAPAN
DOUBLE
COUNT
ON
SINGLE
MODE, 70
EJECT
OFF
2AR-1
Section
Mode
setting
Image
processing
Fax board
Item
No.
Maintenance item contents
Initial
setting*
U344
Setting preheat/energy saver mode
U345
Setting the value for maintenance due indication
U347
Setting auto drawer size detection
U348
Setting the copy density adjustment range
U402
Adjusting margins of image printing
———
U403
Adjusting margins for scanning an original on
the contact glass
———
U404
Adjusting margins for scanning an original from
the DF
———
U407
Adjusting the leading edge registration for
memory image printing
———
U600
Initializing all data
———
U601
Initializing permanent data
———
U602
Setting factory defaults
———
U603
Setting the user registration data
• Setting the self telephone number
• Setting the type of telephone line
• Setting the number of rings in fax/telephone
auto select mode
• Setting remote diagnostic transmission
U604
U605
Clearing data
• Clearing transmission history
• Initializing the cipher key password
• Initializing the confidential box ID
• Initializing the F-code confidential box ID
Setting the system (operational)
• Setting how to proceed if memory becomes
full during memory transmission
• Setting an alarm for when reception is completed
• Selecting if auto reduction in the auxiliary
direction is to be performed
• Setting the addition of an image to the report
• Setting the error report display format
• Setting the line-monitoring period
• Setting the one-shot detection time for remote
switching
• Setting the continuous detection time for
remote switching
• Setting the initial condition of fax image
scanning quality
ENERGY
STAR
0
ON
SPECIAL
AREA
———
———
———
———
———
———
———
———
———
———
———
———
———
———
———
———
———
* Initial setting for executing maintenance item U020
3-2-7
2AR-1
Section
Item
No.
Fax board
U606
U607
U608
U609
U610
U612
Maintenance item contents
Setting the system (operation unit and display)
• Setting the conditions under which an error
indicator turns off
• Setting the date format
• Setting if the image scanning quality in fax
mode is initialized
• Setting if the scanning density in fax mode is
initialized
Setting the system (communication 1)
• Setting the auto redialing interval
• Setting the number of times of auto redialing
• Setting the voice response
• Setting the communication starting speed
• Setting the reception speed
• Setting no-ring reception when using the F
network
• Setting the mode for remote switching
• Setting the transmission intervals
Setting transmission
• Setting the method to process errors
• Setting the number of times of DIS signal
reception
• Setting the reference for RTN signal output
• Setting the waiting period to prevent echo
problem at the sender
• Setting the waiting period to prevent echo
problem at the receiver
• Setting ECM transmission
• Setting ECM reception
• Setting the criteria for receiving a TCF signal 1
• Setting the frequency of the CED signal
———
———
———
———
———
———
———
———
———
OFF
———
———
———
———
———
———
———
———
———
———
———
Setting communication time
• Setting the T0 time-out time
• Setting the T1 time-out time
• Setting the T2 time-out time
• Setting the Ta time-out time
• Setting the Tb time-out time
• Setting the Tc time-out time
• Setting the Td time-out time
———
———
60
30
50
60
———
Setting the modem output level
• Setting the modem output level
• Adjusting the modem output level
• Setting the voice response level
———
———
———
Setting the modem detection level
———
* Initial setting for executing maintenance item U020
3-2-8
3-2-7-1
Initial
setting*
2AR-1
Section
Item
No.
Fax board
U613
U614
U615
U616
U617
U650
Maintenance item contents
Setting the DTMF output level
• Setting the DTMF (high-frequency group)
output level
• Setting the DTMF (low-frequency group)
output level
Adjusting the DTMF output level
• Adjusting the DTMF (high-frequency group)
output level
• Adjusting the DTMF (low-frequency group)
output level
———
———
———
———
Setting the NCU
• Setting the connection to PBX/PSTN
• Setting PSTN dial tone detection
• Setting the busy tone detection
• Setting for a PBX
———
———
———
———
Adjusting the ratio of make-to-break of dial
pulses
• Make time (10 PPS)
• Make time (20 PPS)
———
———
Outputting lists
• Settings list
• Action list
• Monitor list
• Own-status report
• Protocol list
———
———
———
———
———
Setting the fax paper size
• Setting the number of lines to be ignored
when receiving a fax at 100% magnification
• Setting the number of lines to be ignored
when receiving a fax in auto reduction mode
• Setting the number of lines to be ignored
when receiving a fax (A4R, letter) in auto
reduction mode
• Setting the recording width for inch specifications
U651
Setting the number of lines to be ignored in
rotation mode
U660
Setting the system (communication 2)
• Setting the criteria for receiving a TCF signal 2
• Setting the reception of a short protocol
transmission
• Setting the CNG detection times in fax/
telephone auto select mode
U670
Initial
setting*
Setting if V.34 transmission is available
3
3
3
———
3
———
———
———
———
* Initial setting for executing maintenance item U020
3-2-7-2
3-2-9
2AR-1
Section
Fax board
Others
Item
No.
Maintenance item contents
U680
Displaying the fax board ROM version
———
U894
Performing board test
• Performing tests on SRAM and DRAM
• Performing tests on optional memories
———
———
U901
Checking/clearing copy counts by paper feed
locations
———
U903
Checking/clearing the paper jam counts
———
U904
Checking/clearing the service call counts
———
U905
Checking/clearing counts by optional devices
———
U907
Setting the paper eject location when used as a
printer/fax
• Printer
• Fax
INNER TRAY
INNER TRAY
U910
Switching between fax/copier modes
Copier
U906
Resetting partial operation control
———
U990
Checking/clearing the time for the exposure
lamp to light
———
U992
Checking or clearing the printer/fax count
———
U993
Outputting a VTC-PG pattern
———
* Initial setting for executing maintenance item U020
3-2-10
3-2-7-3
Initial
setting*
2AR-1
This page is intentionally left blank.
3-2-11
2AR
(3) Contents of maintenance mode items
Maintenance
item No.
U000
Description
Outputting an own-status report
Description
Outputs lists of the current settings of the maintenance items, and paper
jam and service call occurrences.
Purpose
To check the current setting of the maintenance items, or paper jam or
service call occurrences.
Before initializing or replacing the backup RAM, output a list of the current
settings of the maintenance items to reenter the settings after initialization
or replacement.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the item to be output using the cursor up/down keys. The
selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display
MAINTENANCE
JAM
SERVICE CALL
Output list
List of the current settings of the
maintenance modes
List of the paper jam occurrences
List of the service call occurrences
3. Press the start key. The interrupt copy mode is entered and a list is
output.
When A4/11" × 81/2" paper is available, a report of this size is output.
If not, specify the paper feed location.
When output is complete, the screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-8
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U001
Description
Exiting the maintenance mode
Description
Exits the maintenance mode and returns to the normal copy mode.
Purpose
To exit the maintenance mode.
Method
Press the start key. The normal copy mode is entered.
U003
Setting the service telephone number
Description
Sets the telephone number to be displayed when a service call code is
detected.
Purpose
To set the telephone number to call service when installing the machine.
Method
Press the start key. The currently set telephone number is displayed.
Setting
1. Enter a telephone number (up to 16 digits) using the numeric keys.
Move the cursor using the cursor left/right keys and select a number
or symbol using the cursor up/down keys.
To enter symbols, press the keys shown below as required.
Key
* key
# key
Copy quality selection key
Auto Exp. key
Copy exposure adjustment key (lighter)
Copy exposure adjustment key (darker)
Symbol
*
#
(
)
–
(Space)
2. Press the start key. The phone number is set, and the screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press
the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
3-2-9
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U004
Description
Setting the machine number
Description
Displays and changes the machine number.
Purpose
To check or set the machine number.
Method
Press the start key. The currently set machine number is displayed.
Setting
1. Enter the last six digits of the machine number using the numeric key.
Do not enter the first two digits, 3 and 7.
2. Press the start key. The machine number is set.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press
the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
3-2-10
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U005
Description
Copying without paper
Description
Simulates the copy operation without paper feed.
Purpose
To check the overall operation of the machine.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the item to be operated using the cursor up/down keys. The
selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display
PPC
PPC + DF
Operation
Only the copier operates.
Both the copier and SRDF operate
(continuous operation).
3. Press the interrupt key. The copy mode screen is displayed.
4. Set the operation conditions required on the copy mode screen.
Changes in the following settings can be made.
• Paper feed locations
• Magnifications
• Simplex or duplex copy mode
• Number of copies: continuous copying is performed when set to
999.
• Copy density
• Keys on the operation panel other than the energy saver (preheat)
key
5. To control the paper feed pulley, remove all the paper in the drawers,
or the drawers. With the paper present, the paper feed pulley does not
operate.
6. Press the start key. The operation starts.
Copy operation is simulated without paper under the set conditions.
When operation is complete, the screen for selecting an item is
displayed.
7. To stop continuous operation, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-11
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U019
Description
Displaying the ROM version
Description
Displays the part number of the ROM fitted to each PCB.
Purpose
To check the part number or to decide if the ROM version is new from the
last digit of the number.
Method
Press the start key. The last six digits of the part number indicating the
ROM version are displayed.
Display
MAIN
ENGINE
SCAN.
MMI
Description
Main ROM IC
Engine ROM IC
Scanner ROM IC
Operation 1 ROM IC
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
U020
Initializing all data
Description
Initializes all the backup RAM on the main PCB to return to the original
settings.
Purpose
Used when replacing the backup RAM on the main PCB.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
2. Select EXECUTE using the cursor up/down keys. It is displayed in
reverse.
3. Press the start key. All data in the backup RAM is initialized, and the
original settings for Japan specifications are set.
When initialization is complete, the machine automatically returns to
the same status as when the main switch is turned on and the display
language to the initial setting of English.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without executing initialization, press the
stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
3-2-12
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U021
Description
Initializing memories
Description
Initializes the setting data other than that for adjustments due to variations
between respective machines, i.e., settings for counters, service call history
and mode settings. As a result, initializes the backup RAM according to
the specifications depending on the destination selected in U252.
Purpose
Used to return the machine settings to the factory settings.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
2. Select EXECUTE using the cursor up/down keys. It is displayed in
reverse.
3. Press the start key. All data other than that for adjustments due to
variations between machines is initialized based on the destination
setting.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
3-2-13
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U022
Description
Initializing backup data
Description
Initializes only the data set for the optical section.
Purpose
To be executed after replacing the scanner unit.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
2. Select SCANNER using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Press the start key.
4. Select EXECUTE using the cursor up/down keys. It is displayed in
reverse.
5. Press the start key. The data for the optical section (U060 to 099,
U403, U404 and U990) is initialized.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
3-2-14
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U030
Description
Checking motor operation
Description
Drives each motor.
Purpose
To check the operation of each motor.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the motor to be operated using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Press the start key. The selected item is displayed in reverse and the
operation starts.
Display
Operation
MAIN
EJECT (FWD, L)
EJECT (FWD, H)
EJECT (REV, L)
EJECT (REV, H)
Drive motor turns on and developing bias turns on
Feedshift motor* rotates forward at low speed
Feedshift motor* rotates forward at high speed
Feedshift motor* rotates in reverse at low speed
Feedshift motor* rotates in reverse at high speed
* Optional.
4. To stop operation, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop key after operation stops. The screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-15
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U031
Description
Checking switches for paper conveying
Description
Displays the on-off status of each paper detection switch on the paper
path.
Purpose
To check if the switches for paper conveying operate correctly.
Method
1. Press the start key. A list of the switches, the on-off status of which
can be checked, are displayed.
2. Turn each switch on and off manually to check the status.
When the on-status of a switch is detected, that switch is displayed in
reverse.
Display
F1
F2
F3
F4
BYP
RES
EJE
BRA
DUP
JOB
Switches
Feed switch 1 (FSW1)
Feed switch 2 (FSW2)
Feed switch 3 (FSW3)
Desk feed switch*1 (DFSW)
Bypass feed switch*2 (BYPFSW)
Registration switch (RSW)
Eject switch*1 (ESW)
Feedshift switch*1 (FSSW)
Duplex paper conveying switch*1 (DUPPCSW)
Job separator eject switch*1 (JBESW)
*1: Optional.
*2: Optional for 120 V specifications only.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
3-2-16
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U032
Description
Checking clutch operation
Description
Turns each clutch on.
Purpose
To check the operation of each clutch.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the clutch to be operated using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Press the start key. The selected item is displayed in reverse, and the
clutch turns on for 1 s.
Display
PF1
PF2
PFBYP
FEED1
FEED2
FEED3
BYPF
RES
DUPF
Clutches
Upper paper feed clutch (PFCL-U)
Lower paper feed clutch (PFCL-L)
Bypass paper feed clutch*2 (BYPPFCL)
Feed clutch 1 (FCL1)
Feed clutch 2 (FCL2)
Feed clutch 3 (FCL3)
Bypass feed clutch*2 (BYPFCL)
Registration clutch (RCL)
Duplex clutch*1 (DUPCL)
*1: Optional.
*2: Optional for 120 V specifications only.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
3-2-17
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U033
Description
Checking solenoid operation
Description
Turns each solenoid on.
Purpose
To check the operation of each solenoid.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the solenoid to be operated using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Press the start key. The selected item is displayed in reverse, and the
solenoid turns on for 1 s.
Display
BRANCH1 SOL
BRANCH2 SOL
MAIN SW SOL
Solenoids
Feedshift solenoid 1* (FSSOL1)
Feedshift solenoid 2* (FSSOL2)
Main switch turns off
* Optional.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
U034
Adjusting the print start timing
Adjustment
See pages 3-3-18 and 20.
3-2-18
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U035
Description
Setting folio size
Description
Changes the image area for copying onto folio size paper.
Purpose
To prevent the image at the trailing edge, or right or left side of the paper
from not being copied by setting the actual size of the folio paper used.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select the item to be set using the cursor up/down keys. The selected
item is displayed in reverse.
2. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys.
Display
LENGTH DATA
WIDTH DATA
Setting
Setting range
Initial setting
Length
Width
330 to 356 mm
200 to 220 mm
330
210
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
3-2-19
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U051
Description
Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper
Adjustment
See page 3-3-22.
U053
Performing fine adjustment of the motor speed
Description
Performs fine adjustment of the speeds of the motors.
Purpose
Used to adjust the speed of the respective motors when the magnification
is not correct.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select the item to be set using the cursor up/down keys. The selected
item is displayed in reverse.
2. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys.
Display
Description
MAIN MOTOR
Drive motor speed adjustment
Feedshift motor* speed
adjustment
Polygon motor speed
adjustment
EJECT MOTOR
POLYGON
MOTOR
Setting range Initial setting
0 to 14
3
0 to 14
7
–20 to +20
0
* Optional.
MAIN MOTOR
Increasing the setting makes the image shorter in the auxiliary
scanning direction, and decreasing it makes the image longer in the
auxiliary scanning direction.
POLYGON MOTOR
Increasing the setting makes the image longer in the main scanning
direction and shorter in the auxiliary scanning direction; decreasing
the setting makes the image shorter in the main scanning direction
and longer in the auxiliary scanning direction.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
3-2-20
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U053
(cont.)
Description
Interrupt copy mode
While this maintenance item is being performed, a VTC pattern shown
below is output in interrupt copy mode.
Correct values for an A3/11" × 17" output are:
A = 300 ± 0.75 mm
B = 260 ± 1.3 mm
B
A
Figure 3-2-3
Adjustment
1. Output an A3/11" × 17" VTC pattern in interrupt mode.
2. Measure A and B on the VTC pattern (Figure 3-2-3), and perform
the following adjustments if they are different from the correct sizes:
A: Drive motor speed adjustment
B: Polygon motor speed adjustment
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-21
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U059
Description
Setting the cooling fan mode
Description
Switches the fixing temperature control method when the absolute
humidity is 15 g/m3 or higher.
Purpose
Used to reduce the time between main switch turning on and copying
enabled by switching to MODE 1 if the user wishes to have the time
shortened. Note that in MODE 1, black dots may appear on the copy
image under high humidity since the drum may not be cooled down
sufficiently.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select the control mode using the cursor up/down keys.
Display
MODE 0
MODE 1
Operation
Regular operation (When the absolute humidity is
15 g/m3 or higher, copying is enabled 120 s after
the main switch turning on.)
When the absolute humidity is 15 g/m3 or higher,
only the control of cooling fan motors 1 and 2
changes to that for high humidity but others
operate on the same control as when humidity
is low (copying is enabled 43 s after the main
switch turning on even when the absolute humidity
is 15 g/m3 or higher).
Initial setting: MODE 0
2. Press the start key. The value is set. The screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press
the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
3-2-22
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U060
Description
Adjusting the scanner input properties
Description
Adjusts the image scanning density in text, text and photo, or photo mode.
Purpose
Used when the entire image appears too dark or light in the specified
mode.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select the item to be set using the cursor up/down keys. The selected
item is displayed in reverse.
2. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys.
Display
TEXT γ adj
MIX γ adj
PHOTO γ adj
Description
Density in text mode
Density in text and photo
mode
Density in photo mode
Setting range Initial setting
0 to 23
0 to 23
12
12
0 to 23
12
Increasing the setting makes the density lower, and decreasing it
makes the density higher.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Interrupt copy mode
While this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original
can be made in interrupt copy mode.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Caution
The following settings are also reset to the initial values by performing this
maintenance item:
• Exposure density gradient set in maintenance mode (U093)
• Exposure set in the copy default item of the copier management mode
3-2-23
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U061
Description
Turning the exposure lamp on
Description
Turns the exposure lamp on.
Purpose
To check the exposure lamp.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
2. Press the start key. The exposure lamp lights.
3. To turn the exposure lamp off, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
U063
Adjusting the shading position
Description
Changes the shading position.
Purpose
Used when white lines continue to appear longitudinally on the image after
the shading plate is cleaned. This is due to flaws or stains inside the
shading plate. To prevent this problem, the shading position should be
changed so that shading is possible without being affected by the flaws or
stains.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for adjustment is displayed.
2. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys.
Description
Shading position
Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step
–2 to +2
0
0.17 mm
Increasing the setting moves the shading position toward the machine
right, and decreasing it moves the position toward the machine left.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Interrupt copy mode
While this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original
can be made in interrupt copy mode.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for adjustment. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-24
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U065
Description
Adjusting the scanner magnification
Adjustment
See pages 3-3-38 and 39.
U066
Adjusting the leading edge registration for scanning an original on the
contact glass
Adjustment
See page 3-3-40.
U067
Adjusting the center line for scanning an original on the contact glass
Adjustment
See page 3-3-41.
3-2-25
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U070
Description
Adjusting the DF magnification
Description
Adjusts the DF original scanning speed.
Purpose
To be executed if the correct magnification is not obtained in the auxiliary
scanning direction when the optional SRDF is used.
Caution
Before making this adjustment, ensure that the following adjustments have
been made in maintenance mode.
U053
U034
U402
U070
U071
U072
U404
Method
Press the start key.
Setting
1. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys.
Display
Description
Setting
range
CONVEY SPEED Original conveying –25 to +25
motor speed
Initial
setting
0
Change in value
per step
0.1%
Increasing the setting makes the image longer, and decreasing it
makes the image shorter.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Interrupt copy mode
While this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original
can be made in interrupt copy mode.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
3-2-26
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U071
Description
Adjusting the DF scanning timing
Description
Adjusts the DF original scanning timing.
Purpose
To be executed if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing
edges of the original and the copy image when the optional SRDF is used.
Caution
Before making this adjustment, ensure that the following adjustments have
been made in maintenance mode.
U053
U034
U402
U070
U071
U072
U404
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select the item to be set using the cursor up/down keys. The selected
item is displayed in reverse.
2. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys.
Display
Description
LEAD EDGE ADJ
DF leading edge
registration
DF trailing edge
registration
TRAIL EDGE ADJ
Setting
range
Initial
setting
Change in value
per step
–32 to +32 0
0.17 mm
–32 to +32 0
0.17 mm
Increasing the setting moves the copy image backward, and decreasing it moves the copy image forward.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Interrupt copy mode
While this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original
can be made in interrupt copy mode.
3-2-27
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U071
(cont.)
Description
Adjustment
1. In interrupt copy mode, make a copy using the DF.
2. Check the copy image and adjust the registration as follows.
For copy example 1, increase the setting of LEAD EDGE ADJ.
For copy example 2, decrease the setting of LEAD EDGE ADJ.
Original
Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
Figure 3-2-4
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-28
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U072
Description
Adjusting the DF center line
Description
Adjusts the scanning start position for the DF original.
Purpose
To be executed if there is a regular error between the centers of the
original and the copy image when the optional SRDF is used.
Caution
Before making this adjustment, ensure that the following adjustments have
been made in maintenance mode.
U053
U034
U402
U070
U071
U072
U404
Method
Press the start key.
Setting
1. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys.
Description
DF center line
Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step
–39 to +39
0
0.17 mm
Increasing the setting moves the image to the right, and decreasing it
moves the image to the left.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Interrupt copy mode
While this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original
can be made in interrupt copy mode.
3-2-29
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U072
(cont.)
Description
Adjustment
1. In interrupt copy mode, make a copy using the DF.
2. Check the copy image and adjust the center line as follows.
For copy example 1, increase the setting.
For copy example 2, decrease the setting.
Reference
Original
Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
Figure 3-2-5
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
3-2-30
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U073
Description
Checking scanner operation
Description
Simulates the scanner operation under arbitrary conditions.
Purpose
To check scanner operation.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the item to be changed using the cursor up/down keys. The
selected item is displayed in reverse.
3. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys.
Display
ZOOM
SIZE
LAMP
Setting range
Operating conditions
Magnification
Paper size
On and off of the exposure lamp
25 to 400%
See below.
0 (off) or 1 (on)
Paper sizes for each setting in SIZE
Setting
8
9
24
36
39
40
41
Paper size
A4
B5
11" × 81/2"
A3
B4
A4R
B5R
Setting
42
47
52
53
55
56
58
Paper size
A5R
Folio
11" × 17"
11" × 15"
81/2" × 14"
81/2" × 11"
51/2" × 81/2"
4. Press the start key. Scanning starts under the selected conditions.
5. To stop operation, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key when scanning stops. The screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-31
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U074
Description
Adjusting the DF input light luminosity
Description
Adjusts the luminosity of the exposure lamp for scanning originals from the
optional SRDF.
Purpose
Used if the exposure amount differs significantly between when scanning
an original on the contact glass and when scanning an original from the
DF.
Method
Press the start key.
Setting
1. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys.
Description
DF input light
luminosity
Setting range Initial setting
0 to 8
4
Increasing the setting makes the luminosity higher, and decreasing it
makes the luminosity lower.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Interrupt copy mode
While this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original
can be made in interrupt copy mode.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
3-2-32
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U087
Description
Turning the DF scanning position adjust mode on/off
Description
Turns on or off the DF scanning position adjust mode, in which the DF
original scanning position is adjusted automatically by determining the
presence or absence of dust on the slit glass. Also changes the reference
data for identifying dust.
Reference
In the DF original scanning position adjust mode, the presence or absence
of dust is determined by comparing the scan data of the original trailing
edge and that taken after the original is conveyed past the DF original
scanning position. If dust is identified, the DF original scanning position is
adjusted for the following originals.
Purpose
Used to prevent appearance of black lines due to dust adhering in the
original scanning position on the slit glass when the DF is used.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the item to be set using the cursor up/down keys. The screen
for the selected item is displayed.
Display
ON/OFF
DATA
Description
Setting the mode on/off
Setting the reference data for identifying dust
Setting the mode on/off
1. Select ON or OFF using the cursor up/down keys. The selected item
is displayed in reverse.
Display
ON
OFF
Description
DF scanning position adjust mode on
DF scanning position adjust mode off
Initial setting: OFF
2. Press the start key. The setting is set. The screen for selecting an
item is displayed.
3-2-33
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U087
(cont.)
Description
Setting the reference data for identifying dust
Available only when the mode is turned on.
1. Select the item to be set using the cursor up/down keys. The selected
item is displayed in reverse.
2. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys.
Display
DOT WIDTH
DENSITY
BACKGROUND
Description
Minimum dot width to be
regarded as image
Minimum density to be
regarded as dust
Density difference between
background and detection dot
Setting
range
Initial
setting
2 to 15
8
10 to 95
35
–1 to –20
–5
Example
DOT WIDTH: When the setting is 8, 8-dot data or larger is regarded
as image and data of less than 8 dots is regarded as dust on the slit
glass.
DENSITY: The figure indicates the density in 256 levels of gray
(0: white, 255: black). When the setting is 35, data of the level of 35 or
higher is regarded as dust and data of lower level is regarded as the
background (scan data taken when there is no original).
BACK GROUND: When the setting is –5, data of the level of that set
for DENSITY minus 5 is regarded as the background.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
4. Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-34
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U088
Description
Setting the input filter (moiré reduction mode)
Description
Turns moiré reduction mode on and off by switching the input filter on and
off.
Purpose
Used to prevent regular density unevenness (moiré) on halftone image
areas of the copy image in text mode and text and photo mode. Such
moiré is more likely to appear when an enlargement or reduction copy is
made in text mode from an original containing large halftone image areas.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select ON or OFF using the cursor up/down keys. The selected item
is displayed in reverse.
Display
ON
OFF
Description
Moiré reduction mode
Normal copy mode
Initial setting: OFF
If moiré on the copy image is significant, change the setting to ON.
Note that when the moiré reduction mode is turned on, the resolution
may be slightly reduced.
2. Press the start key. The value is set. The screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press
the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
3-2-35
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U091
Description
Checking shading
Description
Performs scanning under the same conditions as before and after shading
is performed, displaying the original scanning values at nine points of the
contact glass.
Purpose
To check the change in original scanning values before and after shading.
The results may be used to decide the causes for fixing unevenness
(uneven density) of the gray area of an image: either due to optical
(shading or CCD) or other problems.
Also to check the causes for a white or black line appearing longitudinally.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the item to be operated using the cursor up/down keys. The
selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display
SHD BEFORE
SHD AFTER
3-2-36
Output list
Performs scanning before shading and
displays the result.
Performs scanning after shading and
displays the result.
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U091
(cont.)
Description
3. Press the start key. Scanning is performed under the selected
conditions and the result is displayed.
When scanning is performed before shading, the scan value at the
machine center should be slightly different from those at the machine
front and rear. When scanning is performed after shading, there
should be no difference between respective values. Any differences
between the values at machine front and rear indicates that scanner
problem causes the fixing unevenness.
If the displayed results indicate no shading problems, the fixing
unevenness (uneven copy density) is caused by factors other than in
the scanner section (shading or CCD).
If a black line appears, the cause may be assumed based on the
results of the scanning operation before shading: if a white line
appears, they may be assumed based on the results of the scanning
operation after shading. Note that depending on the thickness and
location of the black or white line, it may not be possible to use this
method to determine the cause. This is because the displayed values
obtained from scanning at the limit of nine points are insufficient to
provide significant information.
20 mm from the machine left
011
024
015
200 mm from the machine left
001
000
000
400 mm from the machine left
004
004
000
100 mm from the machine
center toward machine front
Machine center
100 mm from machine
center toward machine rear
Figure 3-2-6
4. Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for entering a maintenance item is
displayed.
3-2-37
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U092
Description
Adjusting the scanner automatically
Description
Makes auto scanner adjustments in the order below using the specified
original.
• Adjusting the scanner center line (U067)
• Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration (U066)
• Adjusting scanner magnification in the auxiliary direction (U065)
When this maintenance item is performed, the settings in U065, U066 and
U067 are also changed.
Purpose
Used to make respective auto adjustments for the scanner.
Method
1. Place the specified original (P/N: 2AC68240) on the contact glass.
2. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. When adjustment is
complete, each adjusted value is displayed.
Display
SCAN CENTER
SCAN TIMING
SUB SCAN
Description
Scanner center line
Scanner leading edge registration
Scanner magnification in the auxiliary
scanning direction
If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, DATA: XX (XX is
replaced by an error code) is displayed and operation stops. Should
this happen, determine the details of the problem and either repeat
the procedure from the beginning, or adjust the remaining items
manually by running the corresponding maintenance items.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key after auto adjustment is complete. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
If the stop/clear key is pressed during auto adjustment, adjustment stops
and no settings are changed.
3-2-38
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U093
Description
Setting the exposure density gradient
Description
Changes the exposure density gradient in manual density mode, depending on respective image modes (text, text and photo, photo).
Purpose
To set how the image density is altered by a change of one step in the
manual density adjustment. Also used to make copy image darker or
lighter.
Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the image mode to be adjusted using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Press the start key. The screen for the selected item is displayed.
Display
TEXT
MIXED
PHOTO
Description
Density in text mode
Density in text and photo mode
Density in photo mode
Setting
1. Select the item to be adjusted using the cursor up/down keys. The
selected item is displayed in reverse.
2. Adjust the setting using the cursor left/right keys.
Display
DARKER
LIGHTER
Description
Change in density when
manual density is set dark
Change in density when
manual density is set light
Setting range Initial setting
0 to 3
0
0 to 3
0
Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger, and
decreasing it makes the change smaller.
3-2-39
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U093
(cont.)
Description
Image density
Setting: 3
Setting: 0
Dark
Set to LIGHTER
Set to DARKER
Light
Light
Center
Dark
Density adjustment
Density adjustment range: Normal
Density adjustment range: Special area
Figure 3-2-7 Exposure density gradient
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Interrupt copy mode
While this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original
can be made in interrupt copy mode.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-40
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U099
Description
Checking the original size detection
Description
Displays the original width detection data and sets the original width
detection threshold.
Purpose
To check the original width detection. Also to change the original size
detection threshold if the size of the original on the contact glass is
detected incorrectly.
Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the item.
3. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
Display
DATA
B/W LEVEL
Description
Checking the original width detection data
Setting or checking the original width
detection threshold
Method to display the original width detection data
1. Place an original on the contact glass and turn the original detection
switch on. The exposure lamp turns on and the width of the original is
detected. The scanner data taken at the nine points from (1) at the
machine rear to (9) at the machine front is displayed on the message
display as follows.
The data is displayed within the range of 000 to 255, 000 indicating
white (original present) and 255 indicating black (no original).
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Figure 3-2-8
2. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
3-2-41
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U099
(cont.)
Description
Method to set or check the original size detection threshold
1. Place an original on the contact glass and turn the original detection
switch on. The original size detection starts and detection data is
displayed.
Display
Description
Data
range
LEVEL
Scanner data threshold
WAIT TIME
Time between original detection 0 to 100 ms
switch turning on and reading-in
of scanner data
ORIGINAL AREA Detected original width
0 to 255
Remarks
Adjustable
Adjustable
0 to 350 mm
SIZE
Original size detected by scanner 0 to 63*
data and original size sensor
detection data
B_DATA
Black (no original) data at the
0 to 255
point on the boundary between
original area and no original area
W_DATA
White (original present) data at
the point on the boundary
between original area and no
original area
0 to 255
* See Paper size in U073 for the paper size for each setting.
2. To change the original size detection threshold, select LEVEL or
WAIT TIME using the cursor up/down keys and change the setting
using the cursor left/right keys.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-42
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U100
Description
Setting the surface potential
Description
Changes the surface potential by changing the grid control voltage. Also
performs main charging.
Purpose
To set the surface potential or check main charging. Also used when
reentering data after replacing the backup RAM or initializing the set data.
Start
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Display
MC DATA
MC ON
LASER ON/OFF
Description
Changing the grid control voltage
Turning the main charger on
Turning the main charger on and the laser
scanner unit on and off
Method for main charger output
1. Select either MC ON or LASER ON/OFF using the cursor up/down
keys.
2. Press the start key. The selected operation starts.
3. To stop operation, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the grid control voltage
1. Select MC DATA using the cursor up/down keys.
2. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys.
Description
Grid control voltage
Setting range
0 to 255
Initial setting
193
Increasing the setting makes the surface potential higher, and
decreasing it makes the potential lower.
Change in value per step: approximately 3.6 V
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Interrupt copy mode
While this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original
can be made in interrupt copy mode.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item when main
charger output stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
3-2-43
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U101
Description
Setting high voltages
Description
Changes the developing bias voltage and transfer voltage by changing the
developing bias control voltage and transfer control voltage. Also checks
the transfer output voltage.
Purpose
To check and change high voltages other than the main charger voltage.
Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the item to be set or checked using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Press the start key. The screen for the selected item is displayed.
Display
DEV BIAS SET
TC SET
Description
Setting the developing bias
Setting and checking the transfer voltage
Setting the developing bias
1. Select the item to be adjusted using the cursor up/down keys. The
selected item is displayed in reverse.
2. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys.
Display
DB DATA
DB DATA2
Description
Developing bias control
voltage during image
formation
Developing bias control
voltage during no image
formation
Setting range Initial setting
0 to 255
191
0 to 255
34
DB DATA values corresponding to the drum ranks are displayed on
the message display. When replacing the drum, be sure to set the DB
DATA value to the figure corresponding to the letter (A, B or C)
situated at the left end of the figure printed on the drum flange.
drum rank A: 191 B: 188 C: 185
DB DATA : 191
DB DATA2 : 34
Figure 3-2-8 (a)
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
3-2-44
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U101
(cont.)
Description
Setting the transfer voltage
1. Select the item to be adjusted using the cursor up/down keys. The
selected item is displayed in reverse.
2. Change the TC DATA setting using the cursor left/right keys.
Display
TC DATA
TC TIMING
3.
4.
5.
6.
Description
Transfer control voltage
Transfer voltage output
timing
Setting range Initial setting
0 to 255
–100 to +100
168
0
Increasing the TC DATA setting makes the transfer voltage higher,
and decreasing it makes the voltage lower.
Increasing the TC TIMING setting makes the transfer voltage output
timing later and improves paper separation performance.
Press the start key. The value is set.
To check the transfer voltage output, select TC ON using the cursor
up/down keys and press the start key. The currently set transfer
voltage is output.
To stop the transfer voltage output, press the stop/clear key.
To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key
after the transfer voltage output is stopped.
Interrupt copy mode
While this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original
can be made in interrupt copy mode.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
3-2-45
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U110
Description
Checking/clearing the drum count
Description
Displays the drum counts for checking, clearing or changing the figure,
which is used as a reference when correcting the main charger potential
output.
Purpose
To check the drum status. Also used to clear the count after replacing the
drum during regular maintenance.
Since the count was cleared before shipping, do not clear it when
installing.
Method
Press the start key. The drum counter count is displayed.
Clearing
1. Select CLEAR using the cursor up/down keys.
2. Press the start key. The count is cleared, and the screen for selecting
a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Setting
1. Enter a six-digit count using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The count is set, and the screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit the maintenance mode without changing the count, press the stop/
clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-46
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U111
Description
Checking/clearing the drum drive time
Description
Displays the drum drive time for checking, clearing or changing a figure,
which is used as a reference when correcting the high voltage based on
time.
Purpose
To check the drum status. Also used to clear the drive time after replacing
the drum.
Method
Press the start key. The drum drive time is displayed in minutes.
Clearing
1. Select CLEAR using the cursor up/down keys.
2. Press the start key. The time is cleared, and the screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
Setting
1. Enter a five-digit drive time (in minutes) using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The time is set, and the screen for selecting a
maintenance No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the time, press the stop/
clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-47
2AR
2AR-5
Maintenance
item No.
U130
Description
Initial setting for the developer
Description
Automatically sets the toner sensor control voltage and toner feed start
level for the installed developer.
Purpose
To set the initial settings for the developer when installing the machine or
replacing the developer.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
2. Press the start key. The initial settings for the developer is set, and
the result is displayed.
Display
INPUT
CONTROL
TARGET
HUMID
Description
Toner sensor output value
Toner sensor control voltage
Toner feed start level
Absolute humidity
Supplement
The following data is also renewed or cleared by performing this maintenance item:
• Renewing the toner sensor control voltage (U131)
• Renewing the toner feed start level (U156)
• Clearing the developing drive time (U157)
• Clearing the developing count (U158)
• Resetting the toner feed start level and toner empty detection
Completion
After initial setting is complete, press the stop/clear key. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-48
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U131
Description
Setting the toner sensor control voltage
Description
Displays or changes the toner sensor control voltage automatically set in
maintenance item U130.
Purpose
To check the automatically set toner sensor control voltage. Also to
change the toner density if an image is too dark or light.
Method
Press the start key. The current setting for the toner sensor control voltage
is displayed.
Setting
1. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys.
Description
Setting range
Toner sensor control 0 to 255
voltage
Initial setting
170
Increasing the setting makes the density higher, and decreasing it
makes the density lower.
Increasing the setting too high may result in toner scattering.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
3-2-49
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U132
Description
Replenishing toner forcibly
Description
Replenishes toner forcibly until the toner sensor output value reaches the
toner feed start level.
Purpose
Used when the toner empty is detected frequently.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
2. Press the start key. Operation starts, and the current data is displayed.
Toner is replenished until the toner sensor output value reaches the
toner feed start level.
Display
INPUT
TARGET
CONTROL
HUMID
Description
Toner sensor output value after start key
is pressed
Current toner feed start level
Current toner sensor control voltage
Absolute humidity
3. To stop operation, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key when toner replenishment stops. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-50
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U135
Description
Checking toner feed motor operation
Description
Drives the toner feed motor.
Purpose
To check the operation of the toner feed motor.
Caution
Note that driving the motor unnecessarily long may cause a toner jam,
resulting in machine lockup. Be sure to drive the motor for only a few
seconds.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
2. Press the start key. The toner feed motor turns on.
3. To stop operation, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key when operation stops. The screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
U155
Displaying the toner sensor output
Description
Displays the toner sensor output value, and related data.
Purpose
To check the toner sensor output value.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
2. Press the start key. The current data is displayed.
Display
INPUT
TARGET
CONTROL
HUMID
Description
Toner sensor output value after start key
is pressed
Current toner feed level
(value corrected based on humidity and
drive time)
Current toner sensor control voltage
Absolute humidity
3. Press the stop/clear key. The sampling operation stops.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
3-2-51
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U156
Description
Changing the toner control level
Description
Changes the toner feed start level set in maintenance item U130 or the
toner empty level to be determined by the difference from the toner feed
start level.
Purpose
To check the toner feed start level and toner empty level.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Display
TARGET
EMPTY
Description
Toner feed start level
Difference between the toner feed start
level and toner empty level
Setting for the toner feed start level
1. Select TARGET using the cursor up/down keys.
2. Change the setting using the cursor left/right key.
Description
Toner feed start level
Setting range
0 to 255
Increasing the setting makes the toner density lower.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Setting for the toner empty level
1. Select EMPTY using the cursor up/down keys.
2. Change the setting using the cursor left/right key.
Description
Difference between
the toner feed start level
and the toner empty level
Setting range
0 to 255
Increasing the setting makes the toner empty level higher: the toner
density is lower when the toner empty is detected.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting maintenance item No. is
displayed.
3-2-52
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U157
Description
Checking/clearing the developing drive time
Description
Displays the developing drive time for checking, clearing or changing a
figure, which is used as a reference when correcting the toner control. It is
automatically cleared when U130 is executed.
Purpose
To check the developing drive time after replacing the developer.
Method
Press the start key. The developing drive time is displayed in minutes.
Clearing
1. Select CLEAR using the cursor up/down keys.
2. Press the start key. The time is cleared, and the screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
Setting
1. Enter a five-digit drive time (in minutes) using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The time is set, and the screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the time, press the stop/
clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U158
Checking/clearing the developing count
Description
Displays the developing count for checking, clearing or changing a figure,
which is used as a reference when correcting the toner control. It is
automatically cleared when U130 is executed.
Purpose
To check the developing count after replacing the developer.
Method
Press the start key. The developing count is displayed.
Clearing
1. Select CLEAR using the cursor up/down keys.
2. Press the start key. The count is cleared, and the screen for selecting
a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Setting
1. Enter a six-digit count using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The count is cleared, and the screen for selecting
a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/
clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-53
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U161
Description
Setting the fixing control temperature
Description
Changes the fixing control temperature.
Purpose
Normally no change is necessary. However, can be used to prevent
curling or creasing of paper, or solve a fixing problem on thick paper.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select the item to be set using the cursor up/down keys. The selected
item is displayed in reverse.
2. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys.
Display
CONT TEMP
1ST TEMP
2ND TEMP
DUP TEMP
RUN TIME
Description
Normal stabilization
fixing temperature
Primary stabilization
fixing temperature
Secondary stabilization
fixing temperature
Degree of temperature to
be reduced from
CONT TEMP during
duplex copying
Aging time after
secondary stabilization
Setting range
Initial setting
160 to 190 (°C)
175
150 to 180 (°C)
170
160 to 190 (°C)
175
0 to 20 (°C)
10
0 to 120 (s)
30
The respective temperatures are to be set such that CONT TEMP ≥
2ND TEMP ≥ 1ST TEMP.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting maintenance item No. is
displayed.
3-2-54
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U162
Description
Stabilizing fixing forcibly
Description
Stops the stabilization fixing drive forcibly, regardless of fixing temperature.
Purpose
To forcibly stabilize the machine before the fixing section reaches
stabilization temperature.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
2. Press the start key. The forced stabilization mode is entered, and
stabilization operation stops regardless of fixing temperature. The
screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
To exit the forced stabilization mode, turn the power off and on.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without executing forced fixing stabilization,
press the stop/clear key.
U196
Turning the fixing heater on
Description
Turns the fixing heater M or S on.
Purpose
To check fixing heaters.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the heater to be turned on using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Press the start key. The selected heater turns on for 3 s and then
turns off.
Display
MAIN
SUB
Description
Fixing heater M (H1)
Fixing heater S (H2)
Completion
Press the stop/clear key when fixing heaters M and S are off. The screen
for selecting the maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-55
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U199
Description
Checking the fixing temperature
Description
Displays the fixing temperature and the ambient temperature.
Purpose
To check the fixing temperature and the ambient temperature.
Method
Press the start key. The fixing temperature and ambient temperature are
displayed in centigrade (°C).
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
U200
Turning all LEDs on
Description
Turns all the LEDs on the operation panel on.
Purpose
To check if all the LEDs on the operation panel light.
Method
Press the start key. All the LEDs on the operation panel light.
Press the stop/clear key or wait for 10 s. The LEDs turns off, and the
screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-56
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U202
Description
Setting the MMD host monitoring system
Description
Initializes or operates the MMD host monitoring system*.
* Optional for 120 V specifications only.
Purpose
Used when setting up the machine or during regular maintenance or
repair.
Method
1. Press the start key. The basic status screen is displayed.
2. Select the item to be executed using the cursor up/down keys and
press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
3. Operate the device following the instructions on the screen.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key on the basic status screen. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
[Basic status]
MMD initialization
Technician arrive
Maintenance count clear
Service report (leave)
1
2
3
Cursor up/down keys
MMD initialization
Service report (leave)
Phone number setting
Device initialization
4
5
• During regular maintenance or service, run the
following items in order:
· Technician arrive 1
· Maintenance count clear 2
· Service report (leave) 3
• To initialize the MMD host monitoring system,
run the following items in order:
· Phone number setting 4
· Device initialization 5
3-2-56-1
3-2-57
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
Description
2
1
Stop/
clear key
Maintenance parts check/clear
Ready to send
Push start key
Start key
Transmission starts.
1. Pulley, separation (upper)
00000008
| > 2. Pulley, forwarding (upper)
00000125
3. Pulley, paper feed (upper)
Cursor up/down keys
Maintenance parts check/clear
Basic status screen
17. Thermistor, fixing unit
00000000
18. Separation claw, heat roller 00000025
19. Separation claw, press roller 00000001
Select the replaced item and
press the enter key.
Reset key
Ready to send
Push start key
Start key
Counts are cleared.
Basic status screen
3-2-58
3-2-56-2
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
Description
3
Service report (leave)
Select an item using the
cursor up/down keys.
Preventive maintenance
| Repair
PM & Repair
Courtesy call
Start key
Ready to send
Push start key
Start key
Transmission starts.
Basic status screen
4
Phone number setting
1. Prefix Code
0000000000
| 2. Host tel No
000000000000000
3. Suffix Code
000000000000000
Select an item using the cursor
up/down keys and enter the digits
using the numeric keys.
Press the interrupt key to enter a
space.
Cursor up/down keys
Phone number setting
2. Host tel No
000000000000000
3. Suffix Code
000000000000000
| 4. Dial Type
Select “Dial Type” and
press the start key.
∗∗ tone ∗∗
Start key
Ready to send
Push start key
Start key
Select the dial type.
tone
| pulse
Start key
The phone number is stored.
Basic status screen
3-2-56-3
3-2-59
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
Description
5
Device initialization
Select an item using the
cursor up/down keys.
| Standard
Special by MODEL
Retry initialization
Start key
Standard
Special by MODEL
Standard
Special by MODEL
PPC ID
Model
000000
Enter the digits using
the numeric keys and
press the start key.
Enter the digits using
the numeric keys and
press the start key.
Standard
Special by MODEL
Initialization ID
Personal ID
000000
Enter the digits using
the numeric keys and
press the start key.
Special by MODEL
Total count
00000000
Enter the digits using
the numeric keys and
press the start key.
00000000
Enter the digits using
the numeric keys and
press the start key.
5–1
3-2-60
3-2-56-4
000000
Enter the digits using
the numeric keys and
press the start key.
Standard
Total count
000000
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
Description
5 –1
xxxx
(Reason for failure)
Ready to send
Push start key
Start key
Start key
Initialization starts.
Initialization
succeeded?
Yes
Yes
MMD system
problem?
No
No
Screen depending
on the reason for failure
Initialization
successful
Start key
Device initialization
Standard
Basic status screen
Special by MODEL
| Retry initialization
Select “Retry initialization”
and press the start key.
5 –1
3-2-56-5
3-2-61
2AR-1
This page is intentionally left blank.
3-2-62
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U203
Description
Operating DF separately
Description
Simulates the original conveying operation separately in the optional
SRDF.
Purpose
To check the SRDF.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Place an original in the SRDF if running this simulation with paper.
3. Select the item to be operated using the cursor up/down keys. The
selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display
ADF
RADF
ADF (NON-P)
RADF (NON-P)
Operation
With paper, single-sided original
With paper, double-sided original
Without paper, single-sided original
(continuous operation)
Without paper, double-sided original
(continuous operation)
4. Press the start key. The operation starts.
5. To stop continuous operation, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key when the operation stops. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-57
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U204
Description
Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter
Description
Sets the presence or absence of the optional key card or key counter.
Purpose
It is not necessary to run this maintenance item if a key card is installed on
a 120 V specification machine. A key card is not available for 220 – 240 V
specifications.
Method
Press the start key.
Setting
1. Select the optional counter to be installed using the cursor up/down
keys. The selected counter is displayed in reverse.
Display
KEY CARD
KEY COUNTER
Description
The key card is installed
The key counter is installed
2. Press the start key. The setting is set and the screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press
the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
3-2-58
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U206
Description
Setting the presence or absence of the coin vender
Description
Sets the presence or absence of the optional coin vender. Also sets the
details for coin vender operation, such as mode and unit price.
This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese
specification machines, so no setting is necessary.
U208
Setting the paper size for the large paper deck
Description
Sets the size of paper used in the optional large paper deck. Note that the
setting cannot be changed on inch-specification machines since the paper
size for the large paper deck is fixed.
Purpose
To change the setting when the size of paper used in the large paper deck
is changed.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select the paper size (A4 or B5) using the cursor up/down keys.
Initial setting: A4
2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press
the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
3-2-59
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U210
Description
Reversing the LCD
Description
Sets whether to reverse the message display (LCD) in the operation
panel.
Purpose
To reverse the message display.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select ON or OFF using the cursor up/down keys.
Display
ON
OFF
Description
Reverse
Normal
Initial setting: OFF
2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press
the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
3-2-60
3-2-59-1
2AR-1
This page is intentionally left blank.
3-2-61
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U243
Description
Checking the operation of the DF motors, solenoids and clutch
Description
Turns the motors, solenoids or clutch in the optional SRDF on.
Purpose
To check the operation of the SRDF motors, solenoids and clutch.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the item to be operated using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Press the start key. The operation starts.
Display
F MOT
C MOT
FD CL
EJ SL
RJ SL
FD SL
RP SL
Motors, solenoids and clutch
Original feed motor (OFM)
Original paper conveying motor (OCM)
Original feed clutch (OFCL)
Eject feedshift solenoid (EFSSOL)
Switchback feedshift solenoid (SBFSSOL)
Original feed solenoid (OFSOL)
Switchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL)
Operation
In operation
In operation
On for 0.5 s
On for 0.5 s
On for 0.5 s
On and off
On and off
4. To turn each motor off, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key when operation stops. The screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-60
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U244
Description
Checking the DF switches
Description
Displays the status of the respective switches in the optional SRDF.
Purpose
To check if respective switches in the optional SRDF operate correctly.
Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the type of switches (SW or VR) to be checked using the
cursor up/down keys.
3. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
Display
SW
VR
Type of switches
On/off switches
Volume switch
Method for the on/off switches
1. Turn the respective switches on and off manually to check the status.
If the on-status of a switch is detected, the corresponding switch is
displayed in reverse.
Display
SET SW
FEED SW
REV SW
TMG SW
SZ A SW
Switches
Original set switch (OSSW)
Original feed switch (OFSW)
Original switchback switch (OSBSW)
DF timing switch (DFTSW)
Original size length switch (OSLSW)
2. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Method for the volume switch
1. Move the original insertion guides to check the detection status of the
original size width switch.
The detected original width is displayed as a numerical value with the
decimals omitted.
3-2-61
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U244
(cont.)
Description
Numerical
value
Original width to be detected
000
····
51/2" × 81/2"
····
49.664
A5R
····
50.176
····
61.440
····
61.952
B5R
····
103.936
81/2" × 14"/
81/2" × 11"
····
104.448
Folio/A4R
····
139.264
····
139.776
····
146.432
B4/B5
····
146.994
····
197.120
····
197.632
CF (11" × 15")
····
197.720
11" × 17"/
11" × 15"/
11" × 81/2"
····
223.232
A3/A4
256
For example, if any value between 105 and 139 is displayed when the
original insertion guides are adjusted for A4R paper, it indicates that
the original width is detected correctly.
2. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-62
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U245
Description
Checking messages
Description
Displays a list of messages and graphics to be displayed.
Purpose
To check the messages and graphics to be displayed.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select either messages or graphics using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Press the start key. The message display screen or graphic display
screen is displayed.
4. Enter the message number or graphic number to be checked using
the numeric keys and press the start key. The selected message or
graphic is displayed.
5. To check the messages in the listing order, use the cursor up/down
keys.
6. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U247
Checking the operation of the large paper deck and paper feed desk
Description
Turns on motors and clutches of the optional large paper deck or the
optional paper feed desk.
Purpose
To check the operation of motors and clutches of the respective paper
feed devices.
Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the paper feed device to be checked using the cursor up/down
keys.
3. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
Display
3000 DECK
500 × 2 DESK
Paper feed device
Large paper deck
Paper feed desk
3-2-63
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U247
(cont.)
Description
Method
1. Select the item to be operated using the cursor up/down keys.
2. Press the start key. The operation starts.
• Large paper deck
Display
LCF MOT
B CL
PCL1
PCL2
Motors and clutches
Deck paper conveying motor (CM)
Paper conveying clutch (CCL)
Paper feed clutch 1 (PFCL1)
Paper feed clutch 2 (PFCL2)
Operation
On for 5 s
On for 1 s
On for 1 s
On for 1 s
• Paper feed desk
Display
DESK MOT
FEED CL
UPP CL
LOW CL
Motors and clutches
Desk drive motor (DDM)
Desk feed clutch (DFCL)
Upper desk paper feed clutch (DPFCL-U)
Lower desk paper feed clutch (DPFCL-L)
Operation
On for 5 s
On for 1 s
On for 1 s
On for 1 s
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-64
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U249
Description
Checking the paper ejection to optional devices
Description
Ejects paper to an optional mailbox or job separator, or to the ejection slot
at the machine left.
Purpose
To check paper conveying operation to optional paper eject devices or the
ejection slot at the machine left.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the paper eject location using the cursor up/down keys.
Display
MAIL BOX
JOB SEPARATOR
LEFT BIN OUTPUT
Paper eject device
Mailbox
Job separator
Ejection slot at the machine left
(finisher not installed)
3. When selecting the mailbox, specify the mail tray number (1 to 7) to
which paper is to be ejected by using the cursor left/right keys. If 0 is
selected, paper is ejected to the mail trays in ascending order from
mail tray 1 to mail tray 7 repeatedly.
4. Press the interrupt key to enter interrupt copy mode.
5. Make a test copy and check paper ejection.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
3-2-65
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U250
Description
Setting the maintenance cycle
Description
Displays and changes the maintenance cycle.
Purpose
To check and change the maintenance cycle.
Method
Press the start key. The current setting is displayed as follows:
Maintenance cycle (number of copies) = setting × 1000
Setting
1. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys.
Description
Maintenance
cycle
Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step
0 to 600
50
1000 (copies)
For example, when set to 120, the maintenance cycle is set to
120000.
2. Press the start key. The value is set, and the screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press
the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
U251
Checking/clearing the maintenance count
Description
Displays, clears and changes the maintenance count.
Purpose
To check the maintenance count. Also to clear the count during maintenance service.
Method
Press the start key. The maintenance count is displayed.
Clearing
1. Select CLEAR using the cursor up/down keys.
2. Press the start key. The count is cleared, and the screen for selecting
a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Setting
1. Enter a six-digit count using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The count is set, and the screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/
clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-66
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U252
Description
Setting the destination
Description
Switches the operations and screens of the machine according to the
destination.
Purpose
To be executed after replacing the backup RAM on the main PCB or
initializing the backup RAM by running maintenance item U020, in order to
return the setting to the value before replacement or initialization.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select the destination using the cursor up/down keys. The selected
item is displayed in reverse.
Display
JAPAN METRIC
INCH
EUROPE METRIC
ASIA PACIFIC
Description
Metric (Japan) specifications
Inch (North America) specifications
Metric (Europe) specifications
Metric (Asia Pacific) specifications
2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the machine automatically
returns to the same status as when the power is turned on.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current count, press
the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
Supplement
The specified initial settings are provided according to the destinations in
the maintenance items below. To change the initial settings in those items,
be sure to run maintenance item U021 after changing the destination.
• Initial setting according to the destinations
Maintenance
item No.
253
255
348
Title
Switching between double
and single counts
Setting auto clear time
Setting the copy density
adjustment range
Japan
Inch
Europe Metric,
Asia Pacific
Single
Double
Double
120 s
Normal
90 s
Special
area
90 s
Special area
3-2-67
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U253
Description
Switching between double and single counts
Description
Switches the count system for the total counter and other counters.
Purpose
According to user (copy service provider) request, select if A3/11" × 17"
paper is to be counted as one sheet (single count) or two sheets (double
count).
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select double or single count using the cursor up/down keys.
Display
DOUBLE COUNT
SINGLE COUNT
Description
Double count for A3/11" × 17" paper only
Single count for all size paper
Initial setting: DOUBLE COUNT
2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press
the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
3-2-68
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U254
Description
Turning auto start function on/off
Description
Selects if the auto start function is turned on.
Purpose
Normally no change is necessary. If incorrect operation occurs, turn the
function off: this may solve the problem.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select either ON or OFF using the cursor up/down keys. The selected
item is displayed in reverse.
Display
ON
OFF
Description
Auto start function on
Auto start function off
Initial setting: ON
2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press
the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
3-2-69
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U255
Description
Setting auto clear time
Description
Sets the time to return to initial settings after copying is complete.
Purpose
To be set according to frequency of use. Set to a comparatively long time
for continuous copying at the same settings, and a comparatively short
time for frequent copying at various settings.
Method
Press the start key. The current setting is displayed.
Setting
1. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys.
Description
Auto clear time
Initial setting
Setting range
0 to 270
90
The setting can be changed by 30 s per step.
When set to 0, the auto clear function is cancelled.
2. Press the start key. The value is set, and the screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press
the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
3-2-70
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U256
Description
Turning auto preheat/energy saver function on/off
Description
Selects if the auto preheat/energy saver function is turned on. When set to
ON, the time to enter preheat/energy saver mode can be changed in copy
management mode.
Purpose
According to user request, to set the preheat time to save energy, or
enable copying promptly without the recovery time from preheat mode.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select ON or OFF using the cursor up/down keys. The selected item
is displayed in reverse.
Display
ON
OFF
Description
Auto preheat/energy saver function on
Auto preheat/energy saver function off
Initial setting: ON
2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
When the setting is changed from OFF to ON, the auto preheat time is
set to the initial setting of 15 minutes.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press
the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
3-2-71
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U258
Description
Switching copy operation at toner empty detection
Description
Selects if continuous copying is enabled after toner empty is detected, and
sets the number of copies that can be made after the detection.
Method
Press the start key. The current setting is displayed.
Setting
1. Select single or continuous copying using the cursor up/down keys.
The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display
SINGLE MODE
CONTINUE MODE
Description
Enables only single copying.
Enables single and continuous copying.
Initial setting: SINGLE MODE
2. Set the number of copies that can be made using the cursor left/right
keys.
Description
Number of copies
after toner empty
detection
Initial setting
Setting range
0 to 200 (copies)
70
The setting can be changed by 5 copies per step.
When set to 0, the number of copies is not limited regardless of the
setting for single or continuous copying.
3. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press
the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
3-2-72
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U260
Description
Changing the copy count timing
Description
Changes the copy count timing for the total counter and other counters.
Purpose
To be set according to user (copy service provider) request.
If a paper jam occurs frequently in the finisher when the number of copies
is counted at the time of paper ejection, copies are provided without copy
counts. The copy service provider cannot charge for such copying. To
prevent this, the copy timing should be made earlier.
If a paper jam occurs frequently in the paper conveying or fixing sections
when the number of copies is counted before the paper reaches those
sections, copying is charged without a copy being made. To prevent this,
the copy timing should be made later.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select the copy count timing using the cursor up/down keys.
Display
COUNT: FEED
COUNT: EJECT
Description
When secondary paper feed starts
When the paper is ejected
Initial setting: EJECT
2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press
the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
3-2-73
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U343
Description
Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode
Description
Switches the initial setting between duplex and simplex copy.
Purpose
To be set according to frequency of use: set to the more frequently used
mode.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select ON or OFF using the cursor up/down keys.
Display
ON
OFF
Description
Duplex copy
Simplex copy
Initial setting: OFF
2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press
the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
3-2-74
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U344
Description
Setting preheat/energy saver mode
Description
Changes the control for preheat/energy saver mode.
Purpose
According to user request, selects which has priority, the recovery time
from preheat or energy saver.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select control mode using the cursor up/down keys.
Display
INSTANT READY
ENERGY STAR
E 2000
Control in preheat mode
Without decreasing the fixing control temperature, the display on the operation panel is
turned off.
The fixing control temperature is decreased
by 80°C/144°F. When the ambient temperature at main switch turning on is 18°C/64.4°F
or higher, the copier is forcibly stabilized 30 s
after exiting preheat/energy saver mode.
The fixing control temperature is decreased
by 80°C/144°F.
Initial setting: ENERGY STAR
2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press
the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
3-2-75
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U345
Description
Setting the value for maintenance due indication
Description
Sets when to display a message notifying that the time for maintenance is
about to be reached, by setting the number of copies that can be made
before the current maintenance cycle ends.
When the difference between the number of copies of the maintenance
cycle and that of the maintenance count reaches the set value, the
message is displayed.
Purpose
To change the time to display the maintenance due indication.
Method
Press the start key. The current setting is displayed.
Setting
1. Change the setting using the numeric or cursor left/right keys.
Description
Display period for the next maintenance
(remaining count before the end of the
maintenance cycle)
Setting range
0 to 9999
Initial setting: 0
2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press
the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
3-2-76
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U347
Description
Setting auto drawer size detection
Description
Turns the auto drawer size detection function on/off.
Purpose
To be used when turning the auto paper size (in the drawers) detection off
and making copies onto only the specified size paper.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select ON or OFF using the cursor up/down keys.
Display
ON
OFF
Description
Detects the paper sizes in the drawers
automatically.
Does not detect the paper sizes in the
drawers automatically.
Initial setting: ON
2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press
the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
3-2-77
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U348
Description
Setting the copy density adjustment range
Description
Selects the adjustment range for copy density from NORMAL and
SPECIAL AREA (for wider range).
Purpose
To change the setting according to user request.
When especially dark or light density is requested, set to SPECIAL AREA.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select the density range using the cursor up/down keys.
Display
Description
SPECIAL AREA
NORMAL
25 steps (enlargement mode)
13 steps
Initial setting: SPECIAL AREA
2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press
the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
U402
Adjusting margins of image printing
Adjustment
See page 3-3-21.
U403
U404
Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact glass
Adjustment
See page 3-3-42.
Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DF
Description
Adjusts margins for scanning the original from the DF.
Purpose
Used if margins are not correct when the optional SRDF is used.
Caution
Before making this adjustment, ensure that the following adjustments have
been made in maintenance mode.
U053
U034
U402
U070
U071
U072
U404
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
3-2-78
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U404
(cont.)
Description
Setting
1. Select the item to be set using the cursor up/down keys. The selected
item is displayed in reverse.
2. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys.
Display
Description
A MARGIN
B MARGIN
C MARGIN
D MARGIN
Left margin
Leading edge
margin
Right margin
Trailing edge
margin
Setting range Initial setting
Change in value
per step
0 to 20
6 to 20
2
6
0.5 mm
0.5 mm
0 to 20
0 to 20
2
6
0.5 mm
0.5 mm
Increasing the setting makes the margin wider, and decreasing it
makes the margin narrower.
DF leading edge margin (3 ± 1.0 mm)
Ejection direction
(reference)
DF left margin
(2 ± 0.5 mm)
DF right margin
(2 ± 0.5 mm)
DF trailing edge margin
(3 ± 1.0 mm)
Figure 3-2-9 Correct margin amount
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Interrupt copy mode
While this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original
can be made in interrupt copy mode.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-79
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U407
Description
Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing
Adjustment
See page 3-3-19.
U600
Initializing all data
Description
Initializes software switches and all the data in SRAM on the optional fax
board according to the destination and OEM.
Purpose
Used to initialize the fax board.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for entering the destination code is
displayed.
Default: USA: 181
Europe: 004
There is no operation necessary on this screen.
INI.
ALL DATA
COUNTRY CODE:000
2. Press the start key. The screen for entering the OEM code is
displayed.
Default: 000
There is no operation necessary on this screen.
INI.
ALL DATA
OEM CODE:000
3. Press the start key. Data initialization starts. To cancel data initialization, press the stop/clear key.
4. After data initialization, the entered destination and OEM codes are
displayed, and the ROM version is displayed after two seconds.
INI.
ALL DATA
COMPLETED 000 000
INI.
ALL DATA
COMPLETED V1.00
3-2-80
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U601
Description
Initializing permanent data
Description
Initializes software switches other than that for machine data on the
optional fax board according to the destination and OEM.
Purpose
Used to initialize the fax board without changing the user registration data
and factory settings.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for entering the destination code is
displayed.
Default: USA: 181
Europe: 004
There is no operation necessary on this screen.
INI.
KEEP DATA
COUNTRY CODE:000
2. Press the start key. The screen for entering the OEM code is
displayed.
Default: 000
There is no operation necessary on this screen.
INI.
KEEP DATA
OEM CODE:000
3. Press the start key. Data initialization starts. To cancel data initialization, press the stop/clear key.
4. After data initialization, the entered destination and OEM codes are
displayed, and the ROM version is displayed after two seconds.
INI.
KEEP DATA
COMPLETED 000 000
INI.
KEEP DATA
COMPLETED V1.00
3-2-80-1
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U602
Description
Setting factory defaults
Description
Initializes software switches other than that for machine data and SRAM
on the optional fax board according to the destination and OEM.
Purpose
Used to initialize the fax board to the factory default.
Method
1. Press the start key. Data initialization starts. To cancel data initialization, press the stop/clear key.
2. After data initialization, the entered destination and OEM codes are
displayed, and the ROM version is displayed after two seconds.
INI.
SHIP DATA
COMPLETED 000 000
INI.
SHIP DATA
COMPLETED V1.00
U603
Setting the user registration data
Description
Makes user settings to enable the use of the copier as a fax.
Purpose
To be run after installation of the optional fax board.
Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select an item using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Press the start key. The screen for the selected item is displayed.
Display
SELF TEL No.
LINE TYPE
RINGS (F/T) #
REMOTE DIAG
3-2-80-2
Description
Sets the self telephone number.
Sets the type of telephone line.
Sets the number of rings in fax/telephone
auto select mode.
Sets remote diagnostic transmission.
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U603
(cont.)
Description
Setting the self telephone number
1. Enter the telephone number using the numeric keys.
Up to 20 digits can be entered.
To correct the entered telephone number or to delete the stored
telephone number, reset by pressing the stop/clear key.
2. Press the start key.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the type of telephone line
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Display
1: DTMF
2: 10
3: 20
Description
DTMF
10 PPS
20 PPS
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the number of rings in fax/telephone auto select mode
According to the user request, used to increase or decrease the time
required to switch to a fax.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Setting range
Description
Number of fax/telephone rings
0 to 15
When set to 0, a fax is selected immediately after receiving a ring
tone.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting remote diagnostic transmission
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to select if remote diagnostic
transmission is to be enabled.
Display
1: ON
2: OFF
Description
Remote diagnostic transmission is enabled.
Remote diagnostic transmission is disabled.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-80-3
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U604
Description
Clearing data
Description
Initializes data related to the fax transmission such as transmission history
and IDs.
Purpose
Used to clear the transmission history or if an ID has been forgotten.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select an item using the cursor up/down keys.
Display
COMM. REC
MANAGE PW
CONFI ID
F-CODE ID
Description
Clears activity report; error list; action list; line
setting list; transmission history of each
department as listed on the department control
report; transmission history for displaying the
transmission results; and other transmission
history such as document numbers, excluding
items regarding the machine variation adjustment.
Initializes the cipher key password.
Initializes the confidential box ID.
Initializes the F-code confidential box ID.
3. Press the start key. Initialization starts. When initialized, “COMPLETED” is displayed.
4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen
for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-80-4
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U605
Description
Setting the system (operational)
Description
Makes settings for fax transmission regarding operation.
Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select an item using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Press the start key. The screen for the selected item is displayed.
Display
MEM. FULL
FIN. ALARM
AUTO REDU
ADD IMAGE
ERR. CODE
MONITOR
TIME (ONE)
TIME (CON)
RESOLUT
Description
Sets how to proceed if memory becomes full
during memory transmission.
Sets an alarm for when reception is completed.
Selects if auto reduction in the auxiliary direction
is to be performed.
Sets for the addition of an image to the report.
Sets the error report display format.
Sets the line-monitoring period.
Sets the one-shot detection time for remote
switching.
Sets the continuous detection time for remote
switching.
Sets the initial condition of fax image scanning
quality.
Setting how to proceed if memory becomes full during memory
transmission
Used to select whether to send only stored data or to display an error
indication and cancel transmission if memory becomes full during memory
transmission.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
Display
1: CONT
2: STOP
Description
Whether to continue memory transmission or to
clear the memory can be selected by the user.
Memory is forcibly cleared.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
3-2-80-5
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U605
(cont.)
Description
Setting an alarm for when reception is completed
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
Display
1: ON
2: OFF
Description
An alarm rings.
An alarm does not ring.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Selecting if auto reduction in the auxiliary direction is to be performed
Sets whether to receive a long document by automatically reducing in the
auxiliary direction or at 100% magnification.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
Display
1: ON
2: OFF
Description
Auto reduction is performed if the received
document is longer than the fax paper.
Auto reduction is not performed.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the addition of an image to the report
Selects if an image is to be added to the transmission report.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
Display
1: ON
2: OFF
Description
Image added.
Image not added.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the error report display format
Selects the format of the transmission report when a transmission error
occurs.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Display
1: WORDS
2: CODE
3: MIX
Description
Records an error message (BUSY, OK, ERROR
or STOP).
Records a six-digit error code.
Records either an error message or code.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
3-2-80-6
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U605
(cont.)
Description
Setting the line-monitoring period
Sets the period to monitor the line. By monitoring a transmission from the
start to the end, it can be checked whether the transmission was correct or
not.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Display
1: END
2: DIS
Description
Until transmission is completed.
After dialing is completed until reception of a DIS
signal.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the one-shot detection time for remote switching
Sets the detection time when one-shot detection is selected for remote
switching. Used to change the setting if malfunction occurs due to external
noise during remote switching.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Description
One-shot detection time for remote switching
Setting range
0 to 255 ms
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the continuous detection time for remote switching
Sets the detection time when continuous detection is selected for remote
switching. Used to change the setting if malfunction occurs due to external
noise during remote switching.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Description
Setting range
Continuous detection time for remote switching 0 to 255 ms
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
3-2-80-7
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U605
(cont.)
Description
Setting the initial condition of fax image scanning quality
Set to the resolution that is most frequently used by the user.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Display
1: S
2: F
3: SF
4: UF
Description
Standard
Fine
Super fine
Ultra fine
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U606
Setting the system (operation unit and display)
Description
Makes settings for fax transmission regarding the operation unit and display.
Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select an item using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Press the start key. The screen for the selected item is displayed.
Display
Description
ALARM LED OFF
Sets the conditions under which an error
indicator turns off.
Sets the date format.
Sets if the image scanning quality in fax mode
is initialized.
Sets if the scanning density in fax mode is
initialized.
DATE PATTERN
RESO. LOCK
DENS. LOCK
Setting the conditions under which an error indicator turns off
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
Display
1: RESET
2: COMM
Description
An error indicator turns off only when the
reset key is pressed.
An error indicator turns off when any key is
pressed, an original is inserted or the next
transmission is started.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
3-2-80-8
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U606
(cont.)
Description
Setting the date format
Selects the date format on the respective reports and sender’s information
record.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Display
1: YMD
2: MDY
3: DMY
Order
Year/month/day
Month/day/year
Day/month/year
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting if the image scanning quality in fax mode is initialized
Sets if the resolution is to be initialized when fax operation is complete.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
Display
1: ON
2: OFF
Description
Resolution is initialized.
Resolution is not initialized.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting if the scanning density in fax mode is initialized
Sets if the scanning density is initialized when fax operation is complete.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
Display
1: ON
2: OFF
Description
Density is initialized.
Density is not initialized.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-80-9
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U607
Description
Setting the system (communication 1)
Description
Makes settings for fax transmission regarding the communication.
Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select an item using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Press the start key. The screen for the selected item is displayed.
Display
Description
INTERVAL
TIMES
VOICE RES
TX SPEED
RX SPEED
F-NET
REMOTE
CALL INT
Sets the auto redialing interval.
Sets the number of times of auto redialing.
Sets the voice response.
Sets the communication starting speed.
Sets the reception speed.
Sets no-ring reception when using the F network.
Sets the mode for remote switching.
Sets the transmission intervals.
Setting the auto redialing interval
Change the setting to prevent the following problems: fax transmission is
not possible due to too short redial interval, or fax transmission takes too
much time to complete due to too long redial interval.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Description
Redialing interval
Setting range
1 to 9 min.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the number of times of auto redialing
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Description
Number of redialing
Setting range
0 to 9
When set to 0, no redialing is performed.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
3-2-80-10
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U607
(cont.)
Description
Setting the voice response
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
Display
1: ON
2: OFF
Description
Voice response is performed.
Voice response is not performed.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the communication starting speed
Sets the initial communication speed when starting transmission. When
the destination unit has V.34 capability, V.34 is selected for transmission,
regardless of this setting.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Display
1: 144
2: 96
3: 48
4: 24
Description
V.17, 14400 bps
V.17, 9600 bps
V.27ter, 4800 bps
V.27ter, 2400 bps
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the reception speed
Sets the reception speed that the sender is informed of using the DIS or
NSF signal. When the destination unit has V.34 capability, V.34 is
selected, regardless of the setting.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Display
1: 144
2: 96
3: 48
4: 24
Description
V.17, V.33, V.29, V.27ter
V.29, V.27ter
V.27ter
V.27ter (fallback only)
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
3-2-80-11
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U607
(cont.)
Description
Setting no-ring reception when using the F network
Sets whether to enable no-ring reception (a fax is received without the
machine ringing) when using F network. Note that since the F network is
only available in Japan, no setting is necessary for other destinations.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
Display
1: ON
2: OFF
Description
No-ring reception is enabled.
No-ring reception is disabled.
Initial setting: 2
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the mode for remote switching
Sets the signal detection method for remote switching. Be sure to change
the setting according to the type of telephone connected to the machine.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
Display
1: ONE
2: CONT
Description
One-shot detection
Continuous detection
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the transmission intervals
Sets the minimum time required for connection to the line for the next
transmission after the previous transmission was completed. Change the
setting if transmission problems occur during multi-transmission, such as
broadcasting and polling transmission, or reserved transmission.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Display
1: 10
2: 30
3: 70
4: 120
Description
10 s
30 s
70 s
120 s
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-80-12
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U608
Description
Setting transmission
Description
Makes settings regarding fax transmission.
Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select an item using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Press the start key. The screen for the selected item is displayed.
Display
ERROR
DIS-2 RES
RTN CHECK
TX ECHO
RX ECHO
ECM TX
ECM RX
TCF CHECK
CED FREQ.
Description
Sets the method to process errors.
Sets the number of times of DIS signal reception.
Sets the reference for RTN signal output.
Sets the waiting period to prevent echo problems
at the sender.
Sets the waiting period to prevent echo problems
at the receiver.
Sets ECM transmission.
Sets ECM reception.
Sets the criteria for receiving a TCF signal 1.
Sets the frequency of the CED signal.
Setting the method to process errors
Selects if transmission is to be treated as in error if a RTN or PIN signal is
received. If it is treated as in error, an alarm sounds and a transmission
report is output.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
Display
1: OK
2: ERROR
Description
Transmission is not treated as in error.
Transmission is treated as in error.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the number of times of DIS signal reception
Sets the number of times to receive the DIS signal to once or twice. Used
as one of the correction measures for transmission errors and other
problems.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
Display
1: ONCE
2: TWICE
Description
Responds to the first signal.
Responds to the second signal.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
3-2-80-13
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U608
(cont.)
Description
Setting the reference for RTN signal output
Sets the error line rate as the reference for RTN signal output. If transmission errors occur frequently due to the quality of the line, these can be
reduced by lowering the setting.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Display
1: 5
2: 10
3: 15
4: 20
Description
Error line rate of 5%
Error line rate of 10%
Error line rate of 15%
Error line rate of 20%
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the sender
Sets the period before a DCS signal is sent after a DIS signal is received.
Used when problems occur due to echoes at the sender.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
Display
1: 500
2: 200
Description
Sends a DCS 500 ms after receiving a DIS.
Sends a DCS 200 ms after receiving a DIS.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the receiver
Sets the period before an NSF, CSI or DIS signal is sent after a CED
signal is received. Used when problems occur due to echoes at the
receiver.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
Display
1: 500
2: 75
Description
Sends an NSF, CSI or DIS 500 ms after receiving a CED.
Sends an NSF, CSI or DIS 75 ms after receiving
a CED.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
3-2-80-14
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U608
(cont.)
Description
Setting ECM transmission
To be set to OFF when reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority
than image quality.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
Display
1: ON
2: OFF
Description
ECM transmission is enabled.
ECM transmission is disabled.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting ECM reception
To be set to OFF when reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority
than image quality.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
Display
1: ON
2: OFF
Description
ECM reception is enabled.
ECM reception is disabled.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the criteria for receiving a TCF signal 1
Sets the maximum number of error bytes judged acceptable when
receiving a TCF signal. Used as a measure to ease transmission conditions if transmission errors occur.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Description
Number of errors as a criterion for a TCF signal
Setting range
0 to 255
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
3-2-80-15
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U608
(cont.)
Description
Setting the frequency of the CED signal
Sets the frequency of the CED signal. Used as one of the measures to
improve transmission performance for international communication.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the frequency.
Display
1: 2100
2: 1100
Frequency of the CED signal
2100 Hz
1100 Hz
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-80-16
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U609
Description
Setting communication time
Description
Sets the time-out time for fax transmission.
Purpose
Used mainly to improve transmission performance for international
communication.
Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select an item using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Press the start key. The screen for the selected item is displayed.
Display
T0
T1
T2
Ta
Tb
Tc
Td
Description
Sets the T0 time-out time.
Sets the T1 time-out time.
Sets the T2 time-out time.
Sets the Ta time-out time.
Sets the Tb time-out time.
Sets the Tc time-out time.
Sets the Td time-out time.
Setting the T0 time-out time
Sets the time before detecting a DIS signal after a dialing signal is sent.
Depending on the quality of the exchange, or when the auto select
function is selected at the destination unit, a line can be disconnected.
Change the setting to prevent this problem.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Description
T0 time-out time
Setting range
30 to 90 s
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the T1 time-out time
Sets the time before receiving the correct signal after detecting a CED
signal. No change is necessary for this maintenance item.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Description
T1 time-out time
Setting range
30 to 90 s
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
3-2-80-17
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
Description
U609
(cont.)
Setting the T2 time-out time
The T2 time-out time decides the following.
• From CFR signal output to image data reception
• From image data reception to the next signal reception
• In ECM, from RNR signal detection to the next signal reception
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Description
T2 time-out time
Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step
1 to 255
60
100 ms
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the Ta time-out time
In fax/telephone auto select mode, sets the time during which rings to call
an operator continue through the connected telephone after receiving a
call as a fax machine (see the diagram on the following page). A fax signal
is received within the Ta set time, or fax mode is selected automatically
when the time elapses. In fax/telephone auto select mode, change the
setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a
call.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Description
Ta time-out time
Setting range Initial setting
1 to 255 s
30
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the Tb time-out time
In fax/telephone auto select mode, sets the time to start rings to call an
operator through the connected telephone after receiving a call as a fax
machine (see the diagram on the following page). In fax/telephone auto
select mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a
telephone fails to receive a call.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Description
Tb time-out time
Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step
1 to 255
50
100 ms
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
3-2-80-18
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
Figure 3-2-10
Ta
Start of fax reception
Tb
Rings
Ring detection
U609
(cont.)
Line connection
as a fax machine
Description
Ta/Tb time-out time
Setting the Tc time-out time
In TAD mode, set the time to check if there are any triggers to shift to fax
reception after a connected telephone receives a call. Only the telephone
function is available if shifting is not made within the set Tc time. In TAD
mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a
telephone fails to receive a call.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Description
Tc time-out time
Setting range Initial setting
1 to 255 s
60
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the Td time-out time
Sets the length of the time required to determine silent status (fax), one of
the triggers for Tc time check. In TAD mode, change the setting when fax
reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call. Be sure not
to set too short; otherwise, the mode may be shifted to fax while the unit is
being used as a telephone.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Description
Td time-out time
Setting range
1 to 255 s
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-80-19
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U610
Description
Setting the modem output level
Description
Sets the modem output level.
Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select an item using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Press the start key. The screen for the selected item is displayed.
Display
Description
SGL LEVEL MODEM
SGL OUTPUT ADJ
VOICE RES. LEVEL
Sets the modem output level.
Adjusts the modem output level.
Sets the voice response level.
Setting the modem output level
To be set when installing the machine to adapt to the line characteristics.
1. Change the setting using numeric keys 1 to 6. The bit setting in
accordance with the entered number is displayed.
SGL LEVEL MODEM
XXXX XXXX
Display
bit 1
bit 2
bit 3
bit 4
bit 5
bit 6
bit 7
Output level setting
1: –0.25 dB
0: 0 dB
1: –0.5 dB
0: 0 dB
1: –1 dB
0: 0 dB
1: –2 dB
0: 0 dB
1: –4 dB
0: 0 dB
1: –8 dB
0: 0 dB
Setting is inhibited.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
3-2-80-20
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U610
(cont.)
Description
Adjusting the modem output level
No change is necessary from the factory default.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Description
Modem output level
Setting range
4 to 12
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the voice response level
Sets the attenuation level for voice response.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Display
1: 0
2: –6
3: –12
4: –18
Description
0 dB
–6 dB
–12 dB
–18 dB
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U612
Setting the modem detection level
Description
Sets the modem detection level.
Purpose
Used to improve the transmission performance when a low quality line is used.
Method
Press the start key. The current setting is displayed.
Setting
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Display
1: 33
2: 38
3: 43
4: 47
Description
–33 dBm
–38 dBm
–43 dBm
–47 dBm
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
3-2-80-21
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U613
Description
Setting the DTMF output level
Description
Sets the DTMF output level of a push-button dial.
Purpose
Used if problems occur when sending a signal with a push-button dial.
Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select an item using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Press the start key. The screen for the selected item is displayed.
Display
Description
DTMF TX LEVEL (H)
DTMF TX LEVEL (L)
Sets the DTMF (high-frequency group)
output level.
Sets the DTMF (low-frequency group)
output level.
Setting
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Description
Setting range
DTMF (high-/low-frequency group) output level 0 to 255
E.g.: When set to 8, the DTMF output level is –8 dBm.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen
for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-80-22
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U614
Description
Adjusting the DTMF output level
Description
Adjusts the DTMF output level of a push-button dial.
Purpose
No change is necessary from the factory default.
Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select an item using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Press the start key. The screen for the selected item is displayed.
Display
Description
SGL LVL DTMF (H)
SGL LVL DTMF (L)
Adjusts the DTMF (high-frequency group)
output level.
Adjusts the DTMF (low-frequency group)
output level.
Setting
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Description
Setting range
DTMF (high-/low-frequency group) output level 4 to 12
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen
for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-80-23
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U615
Description
Setting the NCU
Description
Makes setting regarding the network control unit (NCU).
Purpose
To be set when installing the optional fax board.
Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select an item using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Press the start key. The screen for the selected item is displayed.
Display
Description
EXCHANGE
DIAL TONE
BUSY TONE
PBX SETTING
Sets the connection to PBX/PSTN.
Sets PSTN dial tone detection.
Sets the busy tone detection.
Setting for a PBX.
Setting the connection to PBX/PSTN
Selects if a fax is to be connected to either a PBX or public switched
telephone network.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
Display
1: PSTN
2: PBX
Description
Connected to the public switched telephone network.
Connected to a PBX.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting PSTN dial tone detection
Selects if the dial tone is detected to check off-hook when a fax is
connected to a public switched telephone network.
According to user request, set to 2 when sending a fax without dial tone.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
Display
1: ON
2: OFF
Description
Detects the dial tone.
Does not detect the dial tone.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
3-2-80-24
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U615
(cont.)
Description
Setting the busy tone detection
When a fax signal is sent, sets whether the line is disconnected immediately after a busy tone is detected, or the busy tone is not detected and
the line remains connected until T0 time-out time.
Fax transmission may fail due to incorrect busy tone detection. When set
to 2, this problem may be prevented. However, the line is not disconnected within the T0 time-out time even if the destination line is busy.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
Display
1: ON
2: OFF
Description
Detects busy tone.
Does not detect busy tone.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting for a PBX
Selects the mode to connect an outside call when connected to a PBX.
According to the type of the PBX connected, select the mode to connect
an outside call.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Display
1: EARTH
2: FLS
3: LOOP
Description
Earth mode
Flashing mode
Code number mode
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-80-25
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U616
Description
Adjusting the ratio of make-to-break of dial pulses
Description
Adjusts the ratio of make-to-break (ratio of make in pulse cycles) of dial
pulses.
Purpose
Change the setting if dial pulse transmission problems occur. Note that 20
PPS is for Japanese specifications only and no setting is necessary for
other specifications.
Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select an item using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Press the start key. The screen for the selected item is displayed.
Display
MAKE TIME (10 PPS)
MAKE TIME (20 PPS)
Description
Make time (10 PPS)
Make time (20 PPS)
Setting
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Description
Make time in the pulse cycle (10 PPS)
Make time in the pulse cycle (20 PPS)
Setting range
1 to 99 (ms)
1 to 49 (ms)
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen
for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-80-26
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U617
Description
Outputting lists
Description
Outputs a list of data regarding fax transmissions.
Purpose
Used to check conditions of use, settings and transmission procedures of
the fax.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select an item using the cursor up/down keys.
Display
SETTING LIST
ACTION LIST
MONITOR LIST
SELF ST RPT
PROTOCOL LIST
Description
Outputs a list of software switches, self
telephone number, confidential boxes, ROM
versions and other information.
Outputs a list of error history, transmission
line details and other information.
Outputs a list of transmission speeds,
resolutions, minimum transmission time and
other information.
Outputs a list of settings in maintenance
mode (own-status report) regarding fax
transmission only.
Outputs a list of transmission procedures.
3. Press the start key. The selected list is output.
3-2-80-27
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
Description
U650
Setting the fax paper size
Description
Makes settings for fax reception regarding the sizes of the fax paper and
received images.
Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select an item using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Press the start key. The screen for the selected item is displayed.
Display
Description
CUT LINE (100%)
Sets the number of lines to be ignored when
receiving a fax at 100% magnification.
Sets the number of lines to be ignored when
receiving a fax in auto reduction mode.
Sets the number of lines to be ignored when
receiving a fax (A4R, letter) in auto reduction
mode.
Sets the recording width for inch
specifications.
CUT LINE (AUTO)
CUT LINE (A4)
RX WIDTH 11"
Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at
100% magnification
Sets the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data
volume exceeds the recording capacity when recording the data at 100%
magnification. If the number of exceeded lines is below the setting, those
lines are ignored. If over the setting, they are recorded on the next page.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Description
Number of lines
to be ignored
when receiving
at 100%
Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step
0 to 22
3
6 lines
Increase the setting if a blank second page is received, and decrease
it if the received image does not include the entire transmitted data.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
3-2-80-28
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U650
(cont.)
Description
Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax in auto
reduction mode
Sets the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data
volume exceeds the recording capacity when the data is recorded in auto
reduction mode. If the number of exceeded lines is below the setting,
those lines are ignored. If over the setting, the entire data on a page is
further reduced so that it can be recorded on the same page.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Description
Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step
Number of lines
0 to 22
to be ignored
when receiving in
auto reduction
mode
3
6 lines
Increase the setting if a page received in reduction mode is overreduced and too much trailing edge margin is left. Decrease it if the
received image does not include the entire transmitted data.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
3-2-80-29
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
Description
U650
(cont.)
Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax (A4R,
letter) in auto reduction mode
Sets the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data
volume exceeds the recording capacity when the data is recorded in auto
reduction mode onto A4R or letter-size paper under the conditions below.
If the number of exceeded lines is below the setting, those lines are
ignored. If over the setting, the entire data on a page is further reduced so
that it can be recorded on the same page.
• With A4R present and folio absent in the drawers
• With letter-size paper present and legal-size paper absent in the drawers
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Description
Number of lines
to be ignored
when receiving a
fax (A4R, letter)
in auto reduction
mode
Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step
0 to 22
3
6 lines
Increase the setting if a page received in reduction mode is overreduced and too much trailing edge margin is left. Decrease it if the
received image does not include the entire transmitted data.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the recording width for inch specifications
Sets the maximum recording width and processing method when 11"
width fax paper is loaded on a inch-specification machine.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
Display
1: 11 × 17
2: B4
Description
Detects 11" width as A3 width and records at
100% magnifications.
Detects 11" width as B4 width.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen
for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-80-30
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U651
Description
Setting the number of lines to be ignored in rotation mode
Description
Sets the maximum number of lines to be ignored when the received data
volume exceeds capacity in rotation mode. When the number of the
exceeded lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored and the
remaining data only is received in rotation mode. If over the setting,
reception in rotation mode is disabled.
Purpose
Increase the setting if reception in rotation mode is disabled. However,
this can result in partially missing transmission data on the received
image.
Method
Press the start key. The current setting is displayed.
Setting
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Description
Number of lines
to be ignored in
the auxiliary
direction
Setting range Initial setting
0 to 255
3
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
3-2-80-31
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U660
Description
Setting the system (communication 2)
Description
Makes settings for fax transmission regarding the communication.
Purpose
To reduce transmission errors when a low quality line is used.
Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select an item using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Press the start key. The screen for the selected item is displayed.
Display
Description
TCF CHECK 2
Sets the criteria for receiving a TCF
signal 2.
SHORT PROTOCOL RX Sets the reception of short protocol
transmission.
NUMBER of CNG
Sets the CNG detection times in
(TEL/FAX)
fax/telephone auto select mode.
Setting the criteria for receiving a TCF signal 2
Sets the signal checking time as a criterion for a received TCF signal.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric key to change the setting.
Display
1: LONG
2: SHORT
Description
Checks for 1.2 s.
Checks for 1.0 s.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
3-2-80-32
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U660
(cont.)
Description
Setting the reception of a short protocol transmission
Selects whether to receive or ignore transmission using short protocol.
If a short protocol transmission is received when an auto switching device
is attached to the machine, communication problems, including auto
switching inability, sometimes occur. Change the setting to ignore short
protocol transmission to prevent such problems.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Display
1: ON
2: OFF
Description
Receives short protocol transmission.
Ignores short protocol transmission.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the CNG detection times in fax/telephone auto select mode
Sets the CNG detection times in fax/telephone auto select mode.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Display
1: 1 TIME
2: 2 TIMES
Description
Detects CNG once.
Detects CNG twice.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen
for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-80-33
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U670
Description
Setting if V.34 transmission is available
Description
Selects if transmission by V.34 is available.
Purpose
Depending on the quality of the line to be used, change the setting to 2 if
any problems occur during transmission.
Method
Press the start key. The current setting is displayed.
Setting
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric key to change the setting.
Display
1: ON
2: OFF
Description
V.34 transmission is available.
V.34 transmission is inhibited.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
U680
Displaying the fax board ROM version
Description
Displays the version of the ROM on the optional fax board.
Purpose
Used to check the version of the ROM on the fax board.
Method
1. Press the start key. The version of the ROM on the fax board is
displayed.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
3-2-80-34
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U894
Description
Performing board test
Description
Performs tests on SRAM, DRAM (image memory, bitmap memory) and
optional memories on the optional fax board.
Purpose
Used to check if reading and writing are performed correctly in respective
installed memories.
Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select an item using the cursor up/down keys.
Display
BOARD MEMORY
BOARD OP. MEM
Description
Performs tests on SRAM and DRAM.
Performs tests on optional memories.
Performing tests on SRAM and DRAM
1. Press the start key. The test is performed and the results displayed as
follows.
• When the test result is OK:
TEST MEMORY
OK
• If the test result is NG:
TEST MEMORY
NG DRAM IMG 0x∗∗∗∗∗∗
∗∗∗∗∗∗: address
DRAM IMG: DRAM (image memory) error
DRAM B.M: DRAM (bitmap memory) error
SRAM: SRAM error
2. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
3-2-80-35
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U894
(cont.)
Description
Performing tests on optional memories
1. Press the start key. The test is performed and the result is displayed
as follows.
• When the test result is OK:
TEST OPTION MEMORY
OK
• If the test result is NG:
TEST OPTION MEMORY
NG DRAM IMG 0x∗∗∗∗∗∗
∗∗∗∗∗∗: address
IMG: Image memory error
B.M: Bitmap memory error
• If the test result is NG (memory is not installed):
TEST OPTION MEMORY
NG DRAM IMG
IMG: Image memory is not installed.
B.M: Bitmap memory is not installed.
2. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
If the test result is OK, press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting
an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
If the test result is NG, reset by turning the main switch off and on.
3-2-80-36
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U901
Description
Checking/clearing copy counts by paper feed locations
Description
Displays or clears copy counts by paper feed locations.
Purpose
To check the time to replace consumable parts. Also to clear the counts
after replacing the consumable parts.
Method
1. Press the start key. The counts by paper feed locations are displayed.
2. Change the screen using the cursor left/right keys.
Display
BYPASS*2
FIRST
SECOND
THIRD*1
FORTH*1
LCF*1
DUPLEX*1
Paper feed locations
Bypass table
Copier upper drawer
Copier lower drawer
Paper feed desk upper drawer
Paper feed desk lower drawer
Large paper deck
Duplex unit
*1: Optional.
*2: Optional for 120 V specifications only.
When an optional paper feed device is not installed, the corresponding count is not displayed.
Clearing
1. Select the count to be cleared using the cursor up/down keys. The
selected item is displayed in reverse.
To clear the counts for all paper feed locations, select ALL using the
cursor up/down keys.
2. Press the start key. The count is cleared, and the screen for selecting
a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
3-2-80-37
2AR-1
This page is intentionally left blank.
3-2-38
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U903
Description
Checking/clearing the paper jam counts
Description
Displays or clears the jam counts by jam locations.
Purpose
To check the paper jam status. Also to clear the jam counts after replacing
consumable parts.
Method
1. Press the start key. The jam count is displayed by jam codes.
2. Change the screen using the cursor left/right keys.
Clearing
1. Select ALL using the cursor up/down keys. Jam counts cannot be
cleared individually.
2. Press the start key. The count is cleared, and the screen for selecting
a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press
the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
U904
Checking/clearing the service call counts
Description
Displays or clears the service call code counts by types.
Purpose
To check the service call code status by types. Also to clear the service
call code counts after replacing consumable parts.
Method
1. Press the start key. The service call count is displayed by service call
codes.
2. Change the screen using the cursor left/right keys.
Clearing
1. Select the count to be cleared using the cursor up/down keys. The
selected count is displayed in reverse. To clear all counts, select ALL
using the cursor up/down keys.
2. Press the start key. The count is cleared. When all counts are cleared,
the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
3-2-81
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U905
Description
Checking/clearing counts by optional devices
Description
Displays or clears the counts of the optional SRDF or finisher.
Purpose
To check the use of the SRDF and finisher. Also to clear the counts after
replacing consumable parts.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the device, the count of which is to be checked using the
cursor up/down keys. The count of the selected device is displayed.
• SRDF (DF)
Display
CHANGE
ADF
RADF
Description
Original replacement count
No. of single-sided originals that has
passed through the DF in ADF mode
No. of double-sided originals that has
passed through the DF in RADF mode
• Finisher (SORTER)
Display
CP CNT
STAPLE
STACK
Description
No. of copies that has passed
Frequency the stapler has been activated
Frequency the stacker has been activated
Clearing
1. Select the item to be cleared using the cursor up/down keys. The
selected item is displayed in reverse.
2. Press the start key. The count is cleared.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-82
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U906
Description
Resetting partial operation control
Description
Resets the service call code for partial operation control.
Purpose
To be reset after partial operation is performed due to problems in the
drawers or other sections, and the related parts are serviced.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select EXECUTE using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Press the start key to reset partial operation control. The maintenance
mode is exited, and the machine returns to the same status as when
the main switch is turned on.
3-2-83
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U907
Description
Setting the paper eject location when used as a printer/fax
Description
Sets the paper eject location when an optional device for using the copier
as a printer or fax is installed.
Purpose
Used to change the paper eject location when the copier is used as a
printer or fax.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the item (printer or fax) to be set using the cursor up/down
keys.
3. Press the start key. The screen for the selected item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select the paper eject location using the cursor up/down keys.
• Printer
Display
INNER TRAY
JOB SEPARATOR
Paper eject location
Eject tray
Job separator
• Fax
Display
IINNER TRAY
OTHER
Paper eject location
Eject tray
Other paper eject locations*
* Other paper feed locations
Mailbox
Present
Job
separator
Not present
Present
Job separator
Job separator
Not present
Mailbox mail tray 1
Eject tray
2. Press the start key. The value is set, and the screen for selecting an
item is displayed.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-83-1
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U910
Description
Switching between fax/copier modes
Description
Switches between fax and copier modes when the optional fax board is
installed to use the copier as a fax.
Purpose
To be set according to frequency of use: set to the more frequently used
mode.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select the mode (copier or fax) to be given priority using the cursor
up/down keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set, and the screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press
the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
3-2-83-2
2AR-1
Maintenance
item No.
U990
Description
Checking/clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light
Description
Displays, clears or changes the accumulated time for the exposure lamp
to light.
Purpose
To check duration of use of the exposure lamp. Also to clear the accumulated time for the lamp after replacement.
Method
Press the start key. The accumulated time of illumination for the exposure
lamp is displayed in minutes.
Clearing
1. Select CLEAR using the cursor up/down keys.
2. Press the start key. The accumulated time is cleared, and the screen
for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Setting
1. Enter a six-digit accumulated time using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The time is set, and the screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the accumulated time,
press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
U992
Checking or clearing the printer/fax count
Description
Displays, clears or changes the print count of the printer or fax when the
optional printer board or fax board is installed.
Purpose
To check the condition of use of the printer or fax.
Method
Press the start key. The print count of the printer or fax is displayed.
Setting
1. Select the count to be changed using the cursor up/down keys.
2. Enter a six-digit numerical value using the numeric keys. To clear both
of the printer and fax counts, press the reset key.
3. Press the start key. The count is set.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
3-2-84
2AR
Maintenance
item No.
U993
Description
Outputting a VTC-PG pattern
Description
Selects and outputs a VTC-PG pattern created in the copier.
Purpose
When performing respective image printing adjustments, used to check
the machine status apart from that of the scanner with a non-scanned
output VTC-PG pattern.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the VTC-PG pattern to be output using the cursor up/down
keys.
Display
PG pattern to be output
Purpose
VTC-PG1
• Center line adjustment
VTC-PG2
• Lateral squareness adjustment
• Magnification adjustment
3. Press the interrupt key. The copy mode screen is displayed.
4. Press the start key. A VTC-PG pattern is output.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
3-2-85
2AR
3-2-2 Copier management
In addition to a maintenance function for service, the copier is equipped with a management function which can be operated by users (mainly by the copier administrator). In this
copier management mode, settings such as default settings can be changed.
(1) Executing a copier management item
Start
Press the */language key.
Select “Default” and press
the enter key.
Enter the management
code.
Select “Management” and press
the enter key (see page 3-2-87).
Select “End” and
press the enter key.
Select “Copy default” and press
the enter key (see page 3-2-89).
Select “End” and
press the enter key.
Select “Machine default” and press
the enter key (see page 3-2-92).
Select “End” and
press the enter key.
Select “Language” and press the enter key
(see page 3-2-94).
End
3-2-86
2AR
(2) Department management
Registering a new department code
Altering the copy limit
Sets a department code and the limit
of the number of copies for that
department.
1. Select “Management setting” and
press the enter key.
2. Select “Register” and press the
enter key.
3. Enter a department code using
the numeric keys: 7 digits for inch
specifications and 4 digits for
metric specifications.
4. Select “Copy limit.”
5. Enter the number of copies limit
using the numeric keys. Setting
is possible within the range of
1,000 to 999,000 sheets in
increments of 1,000 sheets. Set
to 0 for unlimited copies.
6. Press the enter key.
7. Select “End” and press the enter
key.
1. Select “Management setting” and
press the enter key.
2. Select “Copy limit correction” and
press the enter key.
3. Select the department code to be
altered.
4. Press the enter key.
5. Enter the number of copies limit
using the numeric keys.
6. Press the enter key.
7. Select “End” and press the enter
key.
8. Select “End” and press the enter
key.
Deleting a department code
1. Select “Management setting” and
press the enter key.
2. Select “Code delete” and press
the enter key.
3. Select the department code to be
deleted.
4. Press the enter key.
5. Select “Yes” and press the enter
key.
6. Select “End” and press the enter
key.
Clearing copy counts
1. Select “Management setting” and
press the enter key.
2. Select “Count delete” and press
the enter key.
3. Select “Yes” and press the enter
key.
4. Select “End” and press the enter
key.
Viewing copy counts
1. Select “Reference” and press the
enter key.
2. Select “All Department total” or
“Department.”
All Department total: Copy count
by paper size
Department: Copy count by
department
3. Press the enter key.
4. Select “End” and press the enter
key.
5. Select “End” and press the enter
key.
3-2-87
2AR
Printing management list
1. Set A4/11" × 81/2" copy paper.
2. Select “Printer management list”
and press the enter key.
3. Select “End” and press the enter
key.
Turning copy management
function on/off
1. Select “Management on/off” and
press the enter key.
2. Select “On” or “Off.”
3. Press the enter key.
3-2-88
2AR
(3) Copy default
Exposure mode
Text original density
Selects auto or manual exposure to
be given priority in initial mode.
1. Select “Exposure mode” and
press the enter key.
2. Select “Auto” or “Manual.”
3. Press the enter key.
Adjusts the exposure to be used
when text mode is selected as the
original quality.
1. Select “Txt ori density” and press
the enter key.
2. Adjust the exposure using the
cursor left/right keys.
3. Press the enter key.
Exposure steps
Sets the exposure steps in manual
exposure mode.
1. Select “Exposure step” and press
the enter key.
2. Select “7 steps” or “13 steps.”
3. Press the enter key.
Auto exposure adjustment
Adjusts the exposure in auto density
mode.
1. Select “Auto exposure” and press
the enter key.
2. Adjust the exposure using the
cursor left/right keys.
3. Press the enter key.
Mix size density
Adjusts the exposure to be used
when text and photo mode is
selected as the original quality.
1. Select “Mix size den.” and press
the enter key.
2. Adjust the exposure using the
cursor left/right keys.
3. Press the enter key.
Photo original density
Adjusts the exposure to be used
when photo mode is selected as the
original quality.
1. Select “Pho ori density” and
press the enter key.
2. Adjust the exposure using the
cursor left/right keys.
3. Press the enter key.
Original quality
Sets which original quality is to be
given priority in initial mode.
1. Select “Orig. quality” and press
the enter key.
2. Select “Auto,” “Text” or “Photo.”
3. Press the enter key.
Paper selection
Sets if the same sized paper as the
original to be copied is automatically
selected.
1. Select “Paper selection” and
press the enter key.
2. Select “Auto” or “Manual.”
3. Press the enter key.
3-2-89
2AR
Default drawer
Set the drawer to be selected after
the reset key is pressed.
1. Select “Default drawer” and
press the enter key.
2. Select the default drawer.
3. Press the enter key.
AMS mode
Selects if auto magnification selection
or 100% magnification is to be given
priority when the sizes of the original
and copy paper are different.
1. Select “AMS mode” and press
the enter key.
2. Select “AMS” or “100%.”
3. Press the enter key.
Copy limit
Sets the number of copies limit for
multiple copying.
1. Select “Copy limit” and press the
enter key.
2. Enter the number of copies limit
up to 999 using the numeric
keys.
3. Press the enter key.
Margin width
Sets the default settings for the left
and top margins for margin copying.
1. Select “Margin width” and press
the enter key.
2. Select the margin width.
For metric specifications, select
from 3, 6, 9, 12, 15 or 18 mm.
For inch specifications, select
from 1/4", 3/8", 1/2", 5/8" or 3/4".
3. Press the enter key.
3-2-90
Border erase width
Sets the default setting of the border
width for sheet border erase copying
or book border erase copying.
1. Select “Border Erase w” and
press the enter key.
2. Select the erasing boarder width.
For metric specifications, select
from 6, 12 or 18 mm.
For inch specifications, select
from 1/4", 1/2" or 3/4".
3. Press the enter key.
Erase size
Sets the original size for “Custom” of
the border erase copying.
1. Select “Erase size” and press the
enter key.
2. Select the original length using
the cursor up/down keys.
3. Set the length using the cursor
left/right keys.
For metric specifications, setting
is possible within the range of 94
to 214 mm in increments of 8 mm.
For inch specifications, setting is
possible within the range of 311/16"
to 87/16" in increments of 5/16".
4. Select the original width using
the cursor up/down keys.
5. Set the width using the cursor
left/right keys.
For metric specifications, setting
is possible within the range of 60
to 296 mm in increments of 4 mm.
For inch specifications, setting is
possible within the range of 23/8"
to 115/8" in increments of 1/8".
6. Press the enter key.
2AR
Insert tray
1. Select “Insert tray” and press the
enter key.
2. Select the paper source.
3. Press the enter key.
Rotate sort
Sets if rotate sort is available in sort
copy mode. Setting is not available
when the finisher is installed.
1. Select “Rotate sort” and press
the enter key.
2. Select “On” or “Off.”
3. Press the enter key.
3-2-91
2AR
(4) Machine default
Auto drawer switching
Sets if the auto drawer switching
function is available.
1. Select “Auto drawer SW” and
press the enter key.
2. Select “On” or “Off.”
3. Press the enter key.
Auto shutoff
Sets if the auto shutoff function is
available.
1. Select “Auto shut-off” and press
the enter key.
2. Select “On” or “Off.”
3. Press the enter key.
Special paper
Selects the paper source for special
paper. (A sign indicating special
paper can appear on the message
display.)
1. Select “Special paper” and press
the enter key.
2. Select the paper source.
3. Select whether to display the sign
using the cursor left/right keys.
4. Select “End” and press the enter
key.
APS for special paper
Sets if auto paper selection is
available for the paper source with
the special paper.
1. Select “APS” and press the enter
key.
2. Select “On” or “Off.”
3. Press the enter key.
3-2-92
Auto preheat time
Sets the auto preheat time.
Setting is not available when the
preheat/energy saver function is
turned off in maintenance item U256.
1. Select “Auto preheat” and press
the enter key.
2. Set the auto preheat time.
Setting is possible within the
range of 5 to 45 minutes in
increments of 5 minutes.
3. Press the enter key.
Auto shutoff time
Sets the auto shutoff time.
Setting is not available when the auto
shutoff function is turned off.
1. Select “Auto shut-off time” and
press the enter key.
2. Set the auto shutoff time. Setting
is possible within the range of 15
to 240 minutes in increments of
15 minutes.
3. Press the enter key.
Display contrast adjustment
Adjusts the contrast of the LCD if the
message display is not clear.
1. Select “Display contrast adj.” and
press the enter key.
2. Adjust the LCD density using the
cursor left/right keys.
3. Press the enter key.
2AR
Management code change
Changes the management code to
be used.
1. Select “Management code
change” and press the enter key.
2. Enter the new management code
using the numeric keys.
3. Press the enter key.
Silent mode
Sets if the silent mode is available.
1. Select “Silent mode” and press
the enter key.
2. Select “On” or “Off.”
3. Press the enter key.
3-2-93
2AR
(5) Language
Switches the language to be displayed.
1. Select the language to be displayed.
• Available languages are as follows.
Metric
English
German
French
Italian
Spanish
3-2-94
Inch
English
French
Spanish
Japanese
2AR
CONTENTS
3-3 Assembly and Disassembly
3-3-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly ....................................... 3-3-1
(1) Precautions ................................................................................. 3-3-1
(2) Running a maintenance item ....................................................... 3-3-2
3-3-2 Paper feed section .............................................................................. 3-3-3
(1) Replacing the forwarding, paper feed and separation pulleys .... 3-3-3
(2) Replacing the upper and lower paper width switches ................. 3-3-7
(3) Replacing the upper and lower paper feed clutches ................... 3-3-9
(4) Replacing feed clutches 1, 2 and 3 ........................................... 3-3-11
(5) Replacing the registration clutch ............................................... 3-3-12
(6) Replacing the left feed cleaner assembly
and left registration cleaner assembly ....................................... 3-3-13
(7) Replacing the right feed cleaner assembly
and right registration cleaner assembly ..................................... 3-3-15
(8) Adjusting the position of the rack adjuster ................................. 3-3-17
(9) Adjustment after roller and clutch replacement ......................... 3-3-18
(9-1) Adjusting the leading edge registration of image
printing .......................................................................... 3-3-18
(9-2) Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory
image printing ............................................................... 3-3-19
(9-3) Adjusting the center line of image printing .................... 3-3-20
(9-4) Adjusting the margins of image printing ....................... 3-3-21
(9-5) Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper ................... 3-3-22
3-3-3 Optical section .................................................................................. 3-3-24
(1) Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp ................................. 3-3-24
(2) Replacing the scanner wires ...................................................... 3-3-25
(2-1) Detaching the scanner wires ........................................ 3-3-25
(2-2) Fitting the scanner wires ............................................... 3-3-27
(3) Replacing the laser scanner unit ................................................ 3-3-30
(4) Replacing the ISU (reference) .................................................... 3-3-32
(5) Adjusting the longitudinal squareness (reference) ..................... 3-3-34
(6) Adjusting the lateral squareness (reference) .............................. 3-3-35
(6-1) Adjusting the position of the laser scanner unit ............. 3-3-35
(6-2) Adjusting the position of the ISU ................................... 3-3-37
(7) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the auxiliary
scanning direction ...................................................................... 3-3-38
(8) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the main
scanning direction ...................................................................... 3-3-39
(9) Adjusting the leading edge registration for scanning
an original on the contact glass .................................................. 3-3-40
(10) Adjusting the center line for scanning an original
on the contact glass ................................................................... 3-3-41
(11) Adjusting the margins for scanning an original
on the contact glass ................................................................... 3-3-42
2AR
3-3-4 Main charging section ....................................................................... 3-3-43
(1) Replacing the charger assembly ................................................ 3-3-43
(2) Replacing the tungsten wire and shield grid (reference) ............ 3-3-45
3-3-5 Drum section ..................................................................................... 3-3-47
(1) Replacing the drum .................................................................... 3-3-47
(2) Cleaning the drum ...................................................................... 3-3-50
3-3-6 Developing section ............................................................................ 3-3-51
(1) Adjusting the position of the doctor blade (reference) ................ 3-3-51
3-3-7 Transfer section ................................................................................. 3-3-53
(1) Replacing the transfer roller assembly ....................................... 3-3-53
3-3-8 Cleaning section ................................................................................ 3-3-54
(1) Detaching and refitting the cleaning blade ................................. 3-3-54
(2) Detaching the drum separation claw assemblies
and the cleaning lower seal assembly. ....................................... 3-3-56
3-3-9 Fixing section .................................................................................... 3-3-57
(1) Replacing fixing heaters M and S ............................................... 3-3-57
(2) Replacing the fixing unit thermistor ............................................ 3-3-60
(3) Replacing the fixing unit thermostat ........................................... 3-3-61
(4) Replacing the press roller separation claws ............................... 3-3-62
(5) Replacing the heat roller separation claws ................................. 3-3-63
(6) Replacing the press roller and press roller bearings .................. 3-3-64
(7) Replacing the heat roller, heat roller bearings,
heat roller bushings, and fixing unit gear .................................... 3-3-65
(8) Adjusting the fixing pressure (reference) .................................... 3-3-66
2AR
3-3-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly
( 1 ) Precautions
• Be sure to turn the main switch off and disconnect the power plug before starting
disassembly.
• When handling PCBs, do not touch connectors with bare hands or damage the board.
• Do not touch PCBs containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static
charge.
• Use only the specified parts to replace the fixing unit thermostat.
Never substitute wire for thermostats, as the copier may be seriously damaged.
When installing a thermostat, ensure the correct clearance, if specified, using a
thickness gauge.
• Use the following testers when measuring voltages:
Hioki 3200
Sanwa MD-180C
Sanwa YX-360TR
Beckman TECH300
Beckman DM45
Beckman 330 (capable of measuring RMS values)
Beckman 3030 (capable of measuring RMS values)
Beckman DM850 (capable of measuring RMS values)
Fluke 8060A (capable of measuring RMS values)
Arlec DMM1050
Arlec YF1030C
• Prepare the following as test originals:
1. NTC (new test chart)
2. NPTC (newspaper test chart)
3-3-1
2AR
( 2 ) Running a maintenance item
Start
Enter "10871087" using the numeric keys. · · · · Maintenance mode is entered.
Enter the maintenance item number
using the numeric keys
or the cursor up/down keys.
· · · ·The maintenance item is selected.
Press the start key.
The selected maintenance item is run.
Press the stop/clear key.
Yes
Repeat the same
maintenance item?
No
Yes
Run another
maintenance item?
No
Enter "001" using the numeric keys
or the cursor up/down keys.
End
3-3-2
· · · ·Maintenance mode is exited.
2AR
3-3-2 Paper feed section
( 1 ) Replacing the forwarding, paper feed and separation pulleys
Replace the forwarding, paper feed and separation pulleys as follows.
<Procedure>
Removing the primary paper feed units
1. Remove the two pivot hinges holding the front cover and then the cover.
2. Remove the upper and lower drawers.
3. Remove the one screw from each of the primary paper feed units and then the
units.
Screw
Primary paper feed units
Screw
Figure 3-3-1 Detaching the primary paper feed units
3-3-3
2AR
Removing the forwarding pulley
4. Remove the stopper.
5. Raise the forwarding pulley retainer in the direction the arrow, and remove from the
primary paper feed unit.
Forwarding pulley retainer
Stopper
Figure 3-3-2 Detaching the forwarding pulley retainer
3-3-4
2AR
6. Remove the stop ring, pull the forwarding pulley shaft in the direction of the arrow,
and remove the forwarding pulley.
Forwarding pulley shaft
Stop ring
Forwarding pulley
Figure 3-3-3 Detaching the forwarding pulley
Removing the paper feed pulley
7. Remove the two stop rings.
8. Pull the paper feed shaft toward the rear of the primary paper feed unit (in the
direction of the arrow) and remove the paper feed pulley and gear.
Stop rings
Paper feed shaft
Gear
Paper feed pulley
Figure 3-3-4 Detaching the paper feed pulley
3-3-5
2AR
2AR-1
Removing the separation pulley
9. Remove the stop ring on the rear of the primary paper feed unit.
10. Pull the separation shaft toward the machine rear (in the direction of the arrow) and
remove the separation pulley.
Stop ring
Separation shaft
Separation pulley
Figure 3-3-5 Detaching the separation pulley
11. Replace the forwarding, paper feed and separation pulleys.
Caution:
• When fitting the forwarding pulley, orient it correctly as shown in Figure 3-3-6.
Machine front
Machine rear
Forwarding pulley
Figure 3-3-6
• When fitting the paper feed pulley and gear, keep the blue end of the paper feed
pulley and the black end of the gear toward the machine rear.
12. Refit all removed parts.
3-3-6
2AR-1
2AR
( 2 ) Replacing the upper and lower paper width switches
Replace the upper and lower paper width switches as follows.
Caution: After replacing a paper width switch, be sure to perform (8) Adjusting the
position of the rack adjuster.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the drawer.
Drawer
Figure 3-3-7
2. Remove the two screws holding the 8-pin socket from the rear of the drawer and
then the socket.
3. Detach the 8-pin paper width switch connector from the 8-pin socket.
4. Remove the three screws holding the rack adjuster.
5. While raising the drawer lift in the direction of the arrow, remove the rack adjuster.
Screws
Rack adjuster
8-pin socket
Drawer lift
Screws
8-pin connector
Figure 3-3-8 Detaching the rack adjuster
3-3-7
2AR
2AR-1
6. Remove the two screws holding the paper width switch from the back of the rack
adjuster and then the switch.
Screws
Desk paper width switch
Figure 3-3-9 Detaching the paper width switch
7. Apply the specified grease to the printed surface of the new paper width switch
(shaded area in the diagram) and fit the switch to the rack adjuster.
Apply the specified grease.
Figure 3-3-10 Paper width switch
8. Refit all removed parts.
3-3-8
2AR-1
2AR
( 3 ) Replacing the upper and lower paper feed clutches
Replace the upper and lower paper feed clutches as follows.
<Procedure>
• Replacing the upper paper feed clutch
1. Remove the eight screws holding the rear cover and then the cover.
2. Remove the upper paper feed clutch wire from the clamp and then detach the
connector.
3. Remove the two screws holding the upper paper feed clutch retainer and then the
retainer.
4. Remove the stop ring and then the upper paper feed clutch.
5. Replace the upper paper feed clutch.
6. Refit all removed parts.
Caution: When fitting the clutch, be sure to refit the whirl-stop.
Upper paper feed clutch
Clamp
Screw
Screw
Upper paper feed
clutch retainer
Connector
Figure 3-3-11 Detaching the upper paper feed clutch
3-3-9
2AR
2AR-1
• Replacing the lower paper feed clutch
1. Open the left 2 cover and the lower drawer.
2. Remove the eight screws holding the rear cover and then the cover.
3. Remove the stop ring and then feed clutch 3.
4. Remove the three screws holding the lower paper feed clutch retainer and then the
retainer.
5. Detach the connector of the lower paper feed clutch.
6. Remove the stop ring and then the lower paper feed clutch.
7. Replace the lower paper feed clutch.
8. Refit all removed parts.
Caution: When fitting the clutch, be sure to refit the whirl-stop.
Lower paper feed clutch
Screw
Lower paper feed
clutch retainer
Connector
Feed clutch 3
Screws
Stop ring
Figure 3-3-12 Detaching the lower paper feed clutch
3-3-10
2AR-1
2AR
( 4 ) Replacing feed clutches 1, 2 and 3
Replace feed clutches 1, 2 and 3 as follows.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the eight screws holding the rear cover and then the cover.
2. Remove the wires of the feed clutches from the clamps and then detach the
connectors.
3. Remove the stop rings and then the feed clutches.
4. Replace the feed clutches.
5. Refit all removed parts.
Caution: When fitting the clutches, be sure to refit the whirl-stops.
Stop ring
Connector
Feed clutch 1
Stop ring
Feed clutch 2
Connector
Connector
Feed clutch 3
Stop ring
Figure 3-3-13 Replacing feed clutches 1, 2 and 3
3-3-11
2AR
2AR-1
( 5 ) Replacing the registration clutch
Replace the registration clutch as follows.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the eight screws holding the rear cover and then the cover.
2. Remove the paper conveying fan wire from the clamp.
Interlock switch
retainer
Screws
Paper conveying duct
Paper
conveying fan
Stop ring
Clamps
Registration clutch
Connector
Figure 3-3-14 Replacing the registration clutch
3. Remove the two screws. Remove the interlock switch retainer while raising it.
4. Remove the paper conveying duct.
5. Remove the registration clutch wire from the clamp and then detach the connector.
6. Remove the stop ring and then the registration clutch.
7. Replace the registration clutch.
8. Refit all removed parts.
Caution: When fitting the clutch, be sure to refit the whirl-stop.
3-3-12
2AR-1
2AR
( 6 ) Replacing the left feed cleaner assembly and left registration cleaner
assembly
Replace the left feed cleaner assembly and left registration cleaner assembly as
follows.
<Procedure>
1. Open the left 1 cover. Remove the stop ring and then the left 1 cover slide.
2. While lifting the paper transfer section cover release lever, open the paper transfer
section cover.
3. Remove the stop rings and then the paper conveying arms from the machine front
and rear.
Stop ring
Paper
conveying arm
Paper
conveying arm
Stop ring
Paper transfer
section cover
Left front cover
Slide
Left 1 cover
Stop ring
Paper transfer section cover
release lever
Figure 3-3-15 Replacing the left feed cleaner assembly and
left registration cleaner assembly ( 1 )
3-3-13
2AR
2AR-1
4. Remove the two screws holding the left front cover and then the cover.
5. Remove the one screw from each of the left feed and left registration cleaner
assemblies and then the assemblies.
Left registration
cleaner assembly
Left feed cleaner
assembly
Figure 3-3-16 Replacing the left feed cleaner assembly and
left registration cleaner assembly ( 2 )
6. Refit all removed parts.
3-3-14
2AR-1
2AR
( 7 ) Replacing the right feed cleaner assembly and right registration cleaner
assembly
Replace the right feed clear assembly and right registration cleaner assembly as
follows.
<Procedure>
• Removing the right feed cleaner assembly
1. Open the left 1 cover. Remove the stop ring and then the left 1 cover slide.
2. While lifting the paper transfer section cover release lever, open the paper transfer
section cover.
3. Remove the stop rings and then the paper conveying arms from the machine front
and rear.
4. Remove the two screws and then the lower feed guide.
Stop ring
Paper
conveying arm
Paper
conveying arm
Screw
Screw
Stop ring
Right feed cleaner
assembly
Lower feed guide
Screw
Figure 3-3-17 Replacing the right feed cleaner assembly
5. Remove the screw holding the right feed cleaner assembly and then the assembly.
6. Refit all removed parts.
3-3-15
2AR
2AR-1
• Removing the right registration cleaner assembly
1. Open the left 1 cover and then while lifting the paper transfer section cover release
lever, open the paper transfer section cover.
2. Open the front cover and then detach the connector.
3. Remove the two screws holding the image formation unit and then the unit.
4. Remove the screw holding the right registration cleaner assembly and then the
assembly.
Screw
Right registration cleaner assembly
Figure 3-3-18 Replacing the right registration cleaner assembly
5. Refit all removed parts.
Caution: Fit the right registration cleaner assembly in to the hook on the back.
3-3-16
2AR
( 8 ) Adjusting the position of the rack adjuster
Perform the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of
the copy image and the original when paper fed from the drawer.
<Procedure>
Start
Enter maintenance mode.
Enter "993" using
the numeric keys.
Correct image
Output
example 1
Output
example 2
Figure 3-3-19
Select "VTC-PG1".
Tighten the three screws
and refit the drawer
Press the interrupt key.
Load paper in the drawer
and make a test copy.
Is the center
of the image aligned with
that of the paper?
Yes
No
Loosen the three screws holding the
rack adjuster and change the position
of the adjuster so that the centers of
the paper and the copy image are
aligned.
• For output example 1, move toward
the machine front ( ).
• For output example 2, move toward
the machine rear ( ).
End
Screws
Rack adjuster
Figure 3-3-20 Adjusting the position of the rack adjuster
3-3-17
2AR
2AR-3
( 9 ) Adjustment after roller and clutch replacement
Perform the following adjustment after installing rollers and clutches.
(9-1) Adjusting the leading edge registration of image printing
Make the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of
the copy image and the original.
U 402
(P.3-3-21)
U034
U066
(P.3-3-40)
U403
(P.3-3-42)
U407
(P.3-3-19)
Caution: Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect,
perform the above adjustments in maintenance mode.
<Procedure>
Leading edge registration (50±1.0mm)
Start
Enter maintenance mode.
Enter “034” using the numeric keys.
Correct image
Press the start key.
Output
example 1
Output
example 2
Figure 3-3-21
RCL ON: Leading edge registration
RCL ON 2: Leading edge registration for
duplex copying (second face)
Select “RCL ON”.
Press the start key.
Press the interrupt key.
The new setting is stored.
Press the start key
and make a test copy.
Is the leading edge
registration correct?
Yes
Press the stop/clear key.
Exit maintenance mode.
End
3-3-18
No
For output example 1, decrease
the value using the cursor left key.
For output example 2, increase
the value using the cursor right key.
Setting range: –30.0 - +30.0
Changing the value by 1 moves the
leading edge by 0.5 mm.
Initial setting: 0.5
2AR-3
23
(9-2) Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing
Make the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edge of the
copy image and the trailing edge of the original during memory copying.
U053
(P.3-2-20)
U034
(P.3-3-18)
U402
(P.3-3-21)
U065
(P.3-3-38)
U066
(P.3-3-40)
U403
(P.3-3-42)
U407
U407
(P.3-3-19)
Caution: Before performing the following adjustment, ensure that the above
adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.
<Procedure>
Start
Enter maintenance mode.
Enter “407” using the numeric keys.
Original
Press the start key.
Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
Figure 3-3-22
Press the start key.
Press the interrupt key.
The new setting is stored.
Press the start key
and make a test copy.
Is the leading edge
registration correct?
Yes
Press the stop/clear key.
No
For copy example 1, decrease
the value using the cursor left key.
For copy example 2, increase
the value using the cursor right key.
Setting range: –10.0 - +10.0
Changing the value by 1 moves
the leading edge by 1 mm.
Initilal setting: 0
Exit maintenance mode.
End
3-3-19
2AR
2AR-3
(9-3) Adjusting the center line of image printing
Make the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the
copy image and the original when paper fed from the drawer.
U 402
(P.3-3-21)
U034
U067
(P.3-3-41)
U403
(P.3-3-42)
Caution:
• Before and after performing this adjustment, be sure to perform (8) Adjusting the
position of rack adjuster.
• Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform
the above adjustments in maintenance mode.
<Procedure>
Start
Enter maintenance mode.
Enter “034” using the numeric keys.
Correct image
Output
example 1
Figure 3-3-23
Press the start key.
LSUOUT: Optical axis adjustment data
LSUOUT 2: Optical axis adjustment data
for duplex copying (second face)
Select “LSUOUT”.
Press the start key.
Press the interrupt key.
The new setting is stored.
Press the start key
to make a test copy.
Is the image correct?
Yes
Press the stop/clear key.
Exit maintenance mode.
End
3-3-20
Output
example 2
No
For output example 1, decrease
the value using the cursor left key.
For output example 2, increase
the value using the cursor right key.
Setting range: –5.0 - +5.0
Changing the value by 1 moves the
center line by 0.1 mm.
Initial setting: –0.5
2AR
(9-4) Adjusting the margins of image printing
Make the following adjustment if the margins are not correct.
Caution: Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the margins are still incorrect,
perform (11) Adjusting the margins for scanning an original on the contact
glass (p. 3-3-42).
Printer leading edge margin
(3 ± 1.0 mm)
<Procedure>
Printer
left/right margins
(2 ± 0.5 mm)
Start
Enter maintenance mode.
Printer trailing edge margin
(3 ± 1.0mm)
Enter “402” using the numeric keys.
Figure 3-3-24
Press the start key.
Select the item to be adjusted
using the cursor up/down keys.
LEAD: Printer leading edge margin
AC: Printer left/right margins
TRAIL: Printer trailing edge margin
TRAIL 2: Printer trailing edge margin
for duplex copying (second face)
Press the interrupt key.
Press the start key.
The new setting is stored.
Load paper in the upper drawer
to make a test copy.
Are the margins correct?
Yes
Yes
Proceed to
another mode?
No
No
Change the setting using
the cursor left/right keys.
Setting range (initial setting)
Printer leading edge margin: 0 - +100 (30)
Printer left/right margins: –50 - +100 (25)
Printer trailing edge margin: –50 - +100 (45)
The greater the value, the wider the margin;
The smaller the value, the narrower the margin.
Changing the value by 1 moves the margin
by 0.1 mm for all.
Press the stop/clear key.
Exit maintenance mode.
End
3-3-21
2AR
(9-5) Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper
Make the following adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is missing or varies
randomly, or if the copy paper is Z-folded.
<Procedure>
• Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper at the paper feed roller
Start
Enter maintenance mode.
Enter “051” using
the numeric keys.
Original
Copy example 1
Copy example 2
Figure 3-3-25
Press the start key.
Select “FEED DATA”.
FEED DATA: Amount of slack in the paper
at the paper feed roller
Select the drawer
to be adjusted.
Press the interrupt key.
Press the start key.
The new setting is stored.
Press the start key
to make a test copy.
Is the
leading edge of
the image missing or varying
randomly (copy
example 1)?
Yes
Increase the value using the cursor left key.
No
Is the copy paper
Z-folded (copy
example 2)?
No
Press the stop/clear key.
Exit maintenance mode.
End
3-3-22
Yes
Decrease the value using the cursor right key.
Setting range: 0 - +255
Changing the value by 1 changes
the amount of slack by 0.67 mm
Initial setting: 0
The greater the value,
the larger the amount of slack;
The smaller the value,
the smaller the amount of slack.
2AR
• Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper at the registration roller
Start
Enter maintenance mode.
Enter “051” using the numeric keys.
Press the start key.
RESIST DATA: Amount of slack in the paper
at the registration roller
Select “RESIST DATA”.
Select “DECK DATA”.
Press the interrupt key.
Press the start key.
The new setting is stored.
Press the start key
to make a test copy.
Is the
leading edge of the image
missing or varying randomly
(copy example 1)?
Yes
Increase the value using the cursor left key.
No
Is the
copy paper Z-folded
(copy example 2)?
No
Press the stop/clear key.
Exit maintenance mode.
Yes
Decrease the value using the cursor right key.
Setting range: –30 - +20
Changing the value
by 1 changes the amount of slack by 1 mm
Initial setting: 0
The greater the value,
the larger the amount of slack;
The smaller the value,
the smaller the amount of slack.
(See Figure 3-3-25)
End
3-3-23
2AR
3-3-3 Optical section
( 1 ) Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp
Clean or replace the exposure lamp as follows.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the two screws holding the contact glass right cover and then the cover.
2. While taking care not to touch the shading plate or rear face of the contact glass,
remove the contact glass.
3. Move the scanner to the cutouts at the center of the machine.
Caution: When moving the scanner, do not touch the exposure lamp nor inverter PCB.
4. Detach the exposure lamp 2-pin connector from the inverter PCB.
5. Remove the two screws holding the exposure lamp and then the lamp.
6. Clean or replace the exposure lamp.
7. Refit all removed parts.
Screw
Exposure lamp
Screw
Cutout
2-pin connector
Scanner
Inverter PCB
Cutout
Figure 3-3-26 Detaching the exposure lamp
3-3-24
2AR-1
2AR
( 2 ) Replacing the scanner wires
Take the following procedure when the scanner wires are broken or to be replaced.
Caution: After replacing the scanner wires, be sure to perform (5) Adjusting the
longitudinal squareness (reference).
(2-1) Detaching the scanner wires
<Procedure>
1. Remove the rear cover and the contact glass left, right, and rear covers.
2. While taking care not to touch the shading plate or rear face of the contact glass,
remove the contact glass.
3. Remove the two screws holding the slit glass and then the glass.
4. Remove the screw holding the front middle cover and then the cover.
5. Remove the three screws holding the operation unit lower cover and then the cover.
6. Detach the clamp and two connectors from under the operation unit main PCB.
7. Remove the five screws holding the operation unit and then the unit.
8. Loosen the two screws securing the lamp wire and remove the wire from the
inverter PCB.
Caution: Remove the lamp wire completely from the machine. Be sure not to straighten
the curved part.
9. Remove the four screws holding the mirror 1 upper frame and then the frame.
Screws
Mirror 1 upper frame
Screws
Lamp wire
Mirror 1 lower frame
Wire retainers
Figure 3-3-27 Detaching the mirror 1 upper frame
3-3-25
2AR
10. Remove the two screws from each of the wire retainers and then the retainers from
the mirror 1 lower frame.
11. Remove the mirror 1 lower frame from the scanner unit.
12. Detach the round terminal of the scanner wire from the scanner wire spring on the
left side of the scanner unit.
13. Remove the scanner wire.
Scanner unit
Round terminal
Scanner wire spring
Figure 3-3-28 Detaching the scanner wire
3-3-26
2AR
(2-2) Fitting the scanner wires
Caution: When fitting the wires, be sure to use those specified below.
Machine front: 2AR12100
Machine rear: 2AR12180 (black)
Fitting requires the following tool: Two frame securing tools (P/N: 2AC68230)
<Procedure>
• At the machine rear:
1. Insert the two frame securing tools into the positioning holes at the centers of the
scanner unit front and rear to pin the mirror 2 frame in position.
2. Secure the two frame securing tools at the machine front and rear using the two
screws for each.
3. Hook the round terminal on one end of the scanner wire onto the left catch on the
inside of the scanner unit. ······················································································· 1
4. Loop the scanner wire around the rear groove in the scanner wire pulley on the
mirror 2 frame, winding from below to above. ························································ 2
5. Loop the scanner wire around the groove in the scanner wire pulley at the right of
the scanner unit, winding from above to below. ····················································· 3
(Machine left)
(Machine right)
Front groove
Wire guide
2
Rear groove
Scanner wire pulley
6
Round
terminal
Catch
1
7
5
3
Round terminal
4
Scanner wire drum
Scanner wire spring
Figure 3-3-29 Fitting the scanner wires
3-3-27
2AR
6. Wind the scanner wire around the scanner wire drum six turns from the rear toward
the hole in the drum.
7. Insert the locating ball on the scanner wire into the hole in the scanner wire drum.
8. Wind the scanner wire a further two turns from the locating ball toward the machine
front.
Rear
Locating ball
Scanner wire
6 turns
2 turns
Front
Figure 3-3-30 Winding the scanner wire
9. Loop the scanner wire around the groove in the scanner wire pulley at the left of the
scanner unit, winding from below to above. ··························································· 4
10. Loop the scanner wire around the front groove in the scanner wire pulley on the
mirror 2 frame, winding from below to above. ························································ 5
11. Run the scanner wire around the wire guide at the left of the scanner unit. ··········· 6
12. Hook the round terminal onto the scanner wire spring. ·········································· 7
13. Hook the other end of the scanner wire spring onto the catch at the machine left.
14. Repeat steps 2 to 13 for the scanner wire at the machine front.
15. Remove the two screws from each of the frame securing tools and then the tools.
16. Move the scanner from side to side to correctly locate the wire in position.
3-3-28
2AR
17. Loosen the two screws holding the mirror 2 frame.
18. Insert the mirror 1 lower frame into the scanner unit and seat it to the left of the
positioning holes.
19. Insert the two frame securing tools into the positioning holes in the front and rear of
the left of the scanner unit and determine the positions of the mirror 1 lower frame
and mirror 2 frame.
20. While holding the scanner wire on the mirror 1 lower frame, secure the wire
retainers at the front and rear of the scanner unit using the two screws for each.
Screws
Screws
Frame securing tool
Mirror 2 frame
Wire retainer
Mirror 1 lower frame
Screws
Screws
Frame securing tool
Mirror 2 frame
Wire retainer
Mirror 1 lower frame
Figure 3-3-31 Securing the scanner wire
21. Retighten the two screws holding the mirror 2 frame.
22. Remove the two screws holding each of the two frame securing tools and then the
tools.
23. Refit all removed parts.
3-3-29
2AR
2AR-1
( 3 ) Replacing the laser scanner unit
Take the following procedure when the laser scanner unit is to be checked or replaced.
Caution: After installing the laser scanner unit, be sure to perform (6) Adjusting the
lateral squareness (reference).
<Procedure>
1. Remove the screw and then the upper front cover.
2. Open the left 1 cover and remove the optional feedshift unit or eject unit.
3. Open the front cover and remove the pin and the screw holding the eject tray and
then the tray.
Eject tray
Front middle cover
Pin
Screw
Figure 3-3-32 Detaching the eject tray
3-3-30
2AR-1
2AR
4. Remove the wire from the clamp and then detach the connector.
5. Detach the two connectors, and remove the two screws holding the cooling duct
assembly and then the assembly.
6. Detach the 10 pin connector and remove the two pins, two springs and the screw
holding the laser scanner unit and then the unit.
Connectors
Cooling duct assembly
Connector
Clamp
Pin
Screws
Pin
10 pin
connector
Spring
Spring
Screw
Laser scanner unit
Figure 3-3-33 Replacing the laser scanner unit
7. Check or replace the laser scanner unit.
8. Refit all removed parts.
3-3-31
2AR
2AR-1
( 4 ) Replacing the ISU (reference)
Check or replace the ISU as follows.
Caution: After installing the ISU, be sure to perform (6-2) Adjusting the position of the
ISU.
Fitting requires the following tool:
Two (2) positioning pins (P/N: 18568120)
<Procedure>
• Removing the ISU
1. Remove the contact glass right cover.
2. While taking care not to touch the shading plate or rear face of the contact glass,
remove the contact glass.
3. Remove the eight screws holding the scanner control PCB cover and then the
cover.
4. Detach the two connectors from the scanner control PCB.
5. Remove the five screws holding the ISU cover and then the cover.
Screws
Connectors
Screws
Screws
Scanner control PCB cover
Scanner control PCB
ISU
Figure 3-3-34 Removing the ISU
6. Remove the four screws holding the ISU and then the ISU.
7. Check or replace the ISU.
3-3-32
Screws
ISU cover
2AR-1
2AR
• Fitting the ISU
8. Fit the ISU with two positioning pins.
9. Refit the four screws.
10. Remove the two positioning pins.
Positioning pin
Screws
ISU
Screws
Positioning pin
Figure 3-3-35 Fitting the ISU
11. Refit all removed parts.
3-3-33
2AR
( 5 ) Adjusting the longitudinal squareness (reference)
Perform the following adjustment if the copy image is longitudinally skewed (longitudinal
squareness is not obtained).
Caution:
• Before performing the following adjustment, output a VTC-PG2 pattern in
maintenance item U993 to use as the original for the adjustment.
• Perform “Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper” (page 3-3-22) first and check
for longitudinal squareness of the copy image. If squareness is not obtained,
perform the longitudinal squareness adjustment.
<Procedure>
Start
Original
Place the original
on the contact glass.
Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
Figure 3-3-36
Press the start key and make
a test copy at 100% magnification.
Retighten the two screws
and refit the contact glass.
Is the image correct?
Remove the contact glass.
Loosen the two screws and adjust
the position of the mirror 2 frame.
For copy example 1,
move the frame in the direction of
the white arrow ( ).
For copy example 2,
move the frame in the direction of
the black arrow ( ).
Yes
No
End
Mirror 2 frame
Screws
Figure 3-3-37 Adjusting the position of the mirror 2 frame
3-3-34
2AR-1
2AR
( 6 ) Adjusting the lateral squareness (reference)
Perform the following adjustment if the copy image is laterally skewed (lateral
squareness not obtained).
Caution:
• Perform (6-1) Adjusting the position of the laser scanner unit first and check for
lateral squareness of the copy image. If squareness is not obtained, perform (6-2)
Adjusting the position of ISU.
(6-1) Adjusting the position of the laser scanner unit
<Procedure>
Start
Correct image
Enter maintenance mode.
Output
example 1
Output
example 2
Figure 3-3-38
Enter “993” using the numeric keys
Power on
Select “VTC-PG2”.
Refit all removed parts.
Press the interrupt key.
Retighten the screw to secure
the laser scanner unit.
Press the start key and make
a test copy at 100% magnification.
Is the image correct?
No
Loosen the screw holding the LSU
adjustment table and then change the
position of the laser scanner unit by
moving the table.(see Figure 3-3-39).
For output example 1, move the LSU
adjustment table in the direction of the
white arrow ( ).
For output example 2, move the LSU
adjustment table in the direction of the
black arrow ( ).
Yes
Press the stop/clear key.
Remove the cooling duct assembly and
eject tray (see page 3-3-31).
Exit maintenance mode.
Remove the image formation unit (see
page 3-3-43).
End
Power off
3-3-35
2AR
2AR-1
Laser scanner unit
Screw
LSU adjustment table
(As viewed from machine left)
Figure 3-3-39 Adjusting the position of the laser scanner unit
3-3-36
2AR
(6-2) Adjusting the position of the ISU
Caution: Before performing the following adjustment, output a VTC-PG2 pattern in
maintenance item U993 to use as the original for the adjustment.
<Procedure>
Start
Original
Place the original
on the contact glass.
Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
Figure 3-3-40
Press the start key and make a test
copy at 100% magnification.
Is the image correct?
Yes
Refit the contact glass.
No
Remove the contact glass and adjust
the lateral squareness of the ISU by
rotating the pin.
For copy example 1, rotate the pin in
the direction of the black arrow ( ).
For copy example 2, rotate the pin in
the direction of the white arrow ( ).
End
Pin
Figure 3-3-41 Adjusting the position of the ISU
3-3-37
2AR
2AR-1
( 7 ) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the auxiliary scanning direction
Perform the following adjustment if the magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction
is not correct.
U053
(P.3-2-20)
U053
(P.3-3-18)
U402
(P.3-3-21)
U065
U066
(P.3-3-40)
U403
(P.3-3-42)
U407
(P.3-3-19)
Caution: Before performing the following adjustment, ensure that the above
adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.
<Procedure>
Start
Enter maintenance mode.
Enter “065” using the numeric keys.
Original
Copy
example 1
Press the start key.
Copy
example 2
Figure 3-3-42
Select “SUB SCAN ADJ”
(auxiliary scanning direction)
using the cursor up/down keys.
Press the interrupt key.
Press the start key.
The new setting
is stored.
Place an original and press the
start key to make a test copy.
Is the image correct?
No
For copy example 1, increase the
value by using the cursor left key.
For copy example 2, decrease the
value by using the cursor right
key.
Yes
Press the stop/clear key.
Exit maintenance mode.
End
3-3-38
Setting range: –25 - +25
Initial setting: 0
Changing the value
by 1 changes the magnification by 0.1%
The greater the value, the longer the image;
The smaller the value, the shorter the image.
2AR
( 8 ) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the main scanning direction
Perform the following adjustment if the magnification in the main scanning direction is
not correct.
U 403
(P.3-3-42)
U 066
(P.3-3-40)
U065
Caution: Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect,
perform the above adjustments in maintenance mode.
<Procedure>
Start
Enter maintenance mode.
Enter “065” using the numeric keys.
Original
Press the start key.
Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
Figure 3-3-43
Select “MAIN SCAN ADJ”
(main scanning direction)
using the cursor up/down keys.
Press the start key.
Press the interrupt key.
The new setting
is stored.
Place an original and press
the start key to make a test copy.
Is the image correct?
Yes
Press the stop/clear key.
Exit maintenance mode.
No
For copy example 1, increase the
value by using the cursor left key.
For copy example 2, decrease the
value by using the cursor right key.
Setting range: –25 - +25
Initial setting: 0
Changing the value
by 1 changes the magnification by 0.1%.
The greater the value, the wider the image;
The smaller the value, the narrower the image.
End
3-3-39
2AR
2AR-1
( 9 ) Adjusting the leading edge registration for scanning an original on the
contact glass
Perform the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of
the copy image and the original.
U053
(P.3-3-18)
U 402
(P.3-3-21)
U066
U403
(P.3-3-42)
U407
(P.3-3-19)
Caution: Before performing the following adjustment, ensure that the above
adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.
<Procedure>
Start
Enter maintenance mode.
Original
Enter “066” using the numeric keys.
Copy
example 1
Figure 3-3-44
Press the start key.
Press the interrupt key.
Press the start key.
The new setting
is stored.
Place an original and press
the start key to make a test copy.
Is the
leading edge
registration correct?
Yes
Press the stop/clear key.
Exit maintenance mode.
End
3-3-40
No
For copy example 1, increase the
value by using the cursor left key.
For copy example 2, decrease the
value by using the cursor right key.
Setting range: –32 - +32
Changing the value
by 1 moves the leading edge
by 0.17 mm.
Initial setting: 0
Copy
example 2
2AR-1
2AR
(10) Adjusting the center line for scanning an original on the contact glass
Perform the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of
the copy image and the original.
U053
(P.3-3-20)
U 402
(P.3-3-21)
U403
(P.3-3-42)
U067
Caution: Before performing the following adjustment, ensure that the above
adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.
<Procedure>
Start
Enter maintenance mode.
Original
Enter “067” using the numeric keys.
Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
Figure 3-3-45
Press the start key.
Press the start key.
Press the interrupt key.
The new setting
is stored.
Place an original and press
the start key to make a test copy.
Is the
center line correct?
Yes
Press the stop/clear key.
No
For copy example 1, increase the
value by using the cursor left key.
For copy example 2, decrease the
value by using the cursor right key.
Setting range: –39 - +39
Changing the value
by 1 moves the center line
by 0.17 mm.
Initial setting: 0
Exit maintenance mode.
End
3-3-41
2AR
(11) Adjusting the margins for scanning an original on the contact glass
Perform the following adjustment if the margins are not correct.
Caution: Before performing the following adjustment, be sure to perform “Adjusting the
margins of image printing.” (P.3-3-21).
Before performing the following adjustment, make a copy onto A3/11" × 17"
paper without an original on the contact glass to use as the original for the
adjustment.
<Procedure>
Scanner leading edge
margin (3 ± 1.5mm)
Start
Scanner
right margin
(1 ± 0.5mm)
Scanner
left margin
(1 ± 0.5mm)
Enter maintenance mode.
Enter "403" using the numeric keys.
Scanner trailing edge
margin (2 ± 1.0mm)
Press the start key.
Figure 3-3-46
Select the item to be adjusted
using the cursor up/down keys.
A MARGIN: scanner left margin
B MARGIN: scanner leading edge margin
C MARGIN: scanner right margin
D MARGIN: scanner trailing edge margin
Press the interrupt key.
Press the start key to make
a test copy onto A4/11" × 8"1/2
paper at 100% magnification.
Are the margins correct?
Press the start key.
The new setting is stored.
No
Change the setting.
Increasing the value using the cursor
left key makes the margin wider.
Decreasing the value using the cursor
right key makes the margin narrower.
Yes
Yes
Proceed to another mode?
No
Press the stop/clear key.
Exit maintenance mode.
End
3-3-42
Setting range (initial setting)
Scanner left margin: 0 - +20 (2)
Scanner leading edge margin: 4 - +20 (4)
Scanner right margin: 0 - +20 (2)
Scanner trailing edge margin: 0 - +20 (6)
Changing the value by
1 moves the margin by 0.5 mm for all.
2AR-1
2AR
3-3-4 Main charging section
( 1 ) Replacing the charger assembly
Replace the charger assembly as follows.
<Procedure>
1. Open the left 1 cover and then while lifting the paper transfer section cover release
lever, open the paper transfer section cover.
2. Open the front cover and then detach the connector.
3. Remove the two screws holding the image formation unit and then the unit.
Screw
Image formation unit
Screw
Figure 3-3-47 Detaching the image formation unit
3-3-43
2AR
4. Remove the screw holding the charger assembly and then the assembly.
Charger assembly
Screw
Figure 3-3-48 Detaching the charger assembly
5. Replace the charger assembly.
6. Refit all removed parts.
3-3-44
2AR-1
2AR
( 2 ) Replacing the tungsten wire and shield grid (reference)
Take the following procedure when the tungsten wire is broken or to be replaced.
<Precautions>
• Use the specified tungsten wire.
• The part of the wire wrapped around the charger spring must not protrude from the
main charger rear housing.
• The cut end of the tungsten wire must not protrude more than 2 mm from under the
tungsten wire retainer pin.
• Use clean, undamaged tungsten wire.
• Keep the tungsten wire taut by stretching it.
• Clean the shield grid with a wet cloth followed by a dry cloth when replacing the
tungsten wire.
• Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol or thinner to clean the shield grid.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the two screws holding the image formation unit and then the unit.
2. Remove the screw and slide off the charger assembly from the image formation
unit.
3. Remove the main charger front and rear lids.
4. Remove the shield grid from the front of the charger assembly.
5. Remove the tungsten wire retainer pin and the charger spring from the charger
terminal, and then the tungsten wire.
Shield grid
Main charger
rear lid
Charger
terminal
Charger spring
Tungsten wire
Main charger front lid
Tungsten
wire retainer pin
Main charger
housing
Figure 3-3-49 Detaching the tungsten wire
3-3-45
2AR
Charger terminal
Charger spring
Charger terminal
Tungsten wire
retainer pin
2-4 mm
Tungsten wire retainer pin
Charger spring
Not more
than 2 mm
Not more
than 2 mm of cut end
Main charger rear housing
Main charger front housing
Figure 3-3-50 Installing the tungsten wire
6. Wind the new tungsten wire six turns around one end of the charger spring and trim
the end.
• The width of the coiled tungsten wire and the cut end must be less than 2 mm.
7. Hook the other end of the charger spring onto the charger terminal of the main
charger rear housing.
8. Pass the tungsten wire through the V-shaped notch in the tungsten wire retainer pin
and stretch it taut.
• The tungsten wire must be adjusted so that the distance between the spring end
and the rib on the main charger rear housing is 2-4 mm.
9. Insert the tungsten wire retainer pin into the projection on the main charger rear
housing to secure the tungsten wire.
10. Cut off the excess wire under the tungsten wire retainer pin.
• The cut end of the tungsten wire must protrude less than 2 mm.
11. Refit the main charger front and rear lids.
12. Refit all removed parts.
3-3-46
2AR-2
2AR
3-3-5 Drum section
( 1 ) Replacing the drum
Replace the drum as follows.
<Precautions>
• Avoid direct sunlight or strong light when detaching and fitting the drum.
• Hold the drum at the ends and never touch the drum surface.
• After removing the drum, keep it in the drum case or storage bag to protect the
surface from light.
<Procedure>
1. Open the left 1 cover and then while lifting the paper transfer section cover release
lever, open the paper transfer section cover.
2. Open the front cover and then detach the connector.
3. Remove the two screws holding the image formation unit and then the unit.
4. Move the cleaning blade release lever in the direction of the arrow to move the
cleaning blade away from the drum.
Cleaning blade
release lever
Figure 3-3-51 Cleaning blade release lever
3-3-47
2AR
5. Remove the two screws holding the transfer right guide.
M3 retainer
Cleaning lower
seal assembly
M3 retainer
Screw
Drum
Transfer right guide
Screws
Screw
Drum shaft
Figure 3-3-52 Detaching the drum
6. Remove the two screws holding the cleaning lower seal assembly and then the
assembly.
7. Pull out the drum shaft and remove the drum.
8. Refit all removed parts.
3-3-48
2AR-1
2AR
Caution:
• After replacing the drum, run maintenance items U110 “Checking/clearing the
drum count” and U111 “Checking/clearing the drum drive time.”
• When fitting the drum, orient it correctly so that the gear is positioned at the
machine rear.
• After replacing the drum, run maintenance item U101 and set the DB DATA value
to the figure corresponding to the letter indicating the drum rank (A, B or C) printed
on the drum flange (see page 3-2-44).
Drum flange
Drum rank
A9422
12348
Gear
Drum
Machine front
Machine rear
Figure 3-3-53
• When detaching and refitting the drum separation claw assemblies, take care not
to lose the M3 retainer (P/N 33302080).
Fitting the drum
<Procedure>
1. Remove the one screw from each of the drum separation claw assemblies and then
the assemblies from the cleaning lower seal assembly.
2. Refit the cleaning lower seal assembly using the two screws.
3. Fit the drum.
4. Insert the drum shaft into the drum by turning in the forward direction only.
• Never allow the drum to turn in the reverse direction when the drum shaft is
inserted.
5. Refit the transfer right guide using the two screws.
6. Refit the separation claw assemblies using one screw for each.
7. After replacing the drum, secure the cleaning blade release lever so that the
cleaning blade makes contact with the drum.
3-3-49
2AR
( 2 ) Cleaning the drum
Clean the drum as follows when an image formation problems occur or if the drum is
soiled.
<Precautions>
• Avoid direct sunlight or strong light when cleaning the drum.
• Dust in the air and from the polishing cloth may damage the drum during subsequent
operation. Avoid working in a dusty environment.
• Clean the drum entirely even if it is soiled only locally.
• Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol or thinner to clean the drum.
<Required supplies>
• Polishing cloth: specified synthetic cotton
• Toner
<Procedure>
1. Remove the drum from the image formation unit (see page 3-3-47).
2. Apply a polishing cloth to the drum and gently wipe the drum taking care not to
damage the surface.
3. Apply toner to another cloth and wipe the drum surface with it in the same manner.
4. Refit the drum.
5. Refit all removed parts and let the machine stand for 30 minutes.
6. Make a test copy and check the image.
Polishing cloth
Drum
Figure 3-3-54 Cleaning the drum
3-3-50
2AR-1
2AR
3-3-6 Developing section
( 1 ) Adjusting the position of the doctor blade (reference)
Perform the following adjustment if carrier or background appears on the copy image.
<Procedure>
1. Open the left 1 cover and then while lifting the paper transfer section cover release
lever, open the paper transfer section cover.
2. Open the front cover and then detach the connector.
3. Remove the two screws holding the image formation unit and then the unit.
4. Remove the two screws holding the charger assembly and MC rail and then the
assembly and rail.
5. Remove the screw holding the MC rail and then the rail.
Screw
Grounding wire
Doctor blade cover
MC rail
Screw
Figure 3-3-55 Detaching the doctor blade cover
6. Remove the screw holding the doctor blade cover and then the cover.
• When refitting the doctor blade cover, be sure to refit the grounding wire.
3-3-51
2AR
7. Measure the distance between the doctor blade and the developing roller at the
three points indicated by the white arrows using a thickness gauge. Adjust the
distances with the three screws until the correct measurements are obtained; the
0.55 mm gauge should go into the gap and the 0.65 mm one should not.
• The smaller the distance, the lighter the image; the larger the distance, the darker
the image.
Developing roller
Adjustment screws
Doctor blade
Figure 3-3-56
3-3-52
Adjustment screw
2AR
3-3-7 Transfer section
( 1 ) Replacing the transfer roller assembly
Clean or replace the transfer roller assembly as follows.
<Procedure>
1. Open the left 1 cover.
2. While lifting the paper transfer section cover release lever, open the paper transfer
section cover.
3. Remove the transfer roller assembly.
Caution: Remove the transfer roller assembly carefully to prevent the residual toner in
the transfer roller assembly from spilling.
Transfer roller assembly
Paper transfer section cover
Figure 3-3-57 Detaching the transfer roller assembly
4. Replace the transfer roller assembly.
5. Refit all removed parts.
3-3-53
2AR
2AR-2
3-3-8 Cleaning section
( 1 ) Detaching and refitting the cleaning blade
Check or replace the cleaning blade as follows.
<Procedure>
1. Open the left 1 cover and then while lifting the paper transfer section cover release
lever, open the paper transfer section cover.
2. Open the front cover and then detach the connector.
3. Remove the two screws holding the image formation unit and then the unit.
4. Remove the two screws holding the charger assembly and MC rail and then the
assembly and rail.
5. Remove the cleaning lower seal assembly and the transfer right guide (see page 33-48).
6. Loosen the cleaning blade release lever (see page 3-3-47).
7. Pull out the drum shaft and remove the drum.
8. Remove the three screws holding the cleaning blade and then the blade.
• When detaching and refitting the cleaning blade, take care not to touch the blade.
• Do not clean the cleaning blade edge. If cleaned, apply toner or setting powder
P/N 66000670 to the edge before refitting the cleaning blade.
Cleaning blade
Screws
Figure 3-3-58 Detaching the cleaning blade
3-3-54
2AR
9. Refit all removed parts and secure the cleaning blade release lever.
• When installing the cleaning blade, take care not to trap the sponges at either end.
Cleaning blade
Sponge
Sponge
Figure 3-3-59 Installing the cleaning blade
3-3-55
2AR
2AR-1
( 2 ) Detaching the drum separation claw assemblies and the cleaning lower seal
assembly
Clean or replace the drum separation claw assembly and the cleaning lower seal
assembly as follows.
<Procedure>
1. Open the left 1 cover and then while lifting the paper transfer section cover release
lever, open the paper transfer section cover.
2. Open the front cover and then detach the connector.
3. Remove the two screws holding the image formation unit and then the unit.
4. Remove the one screw from each of the drum separation claw assemblies and then
the assemblies.
5. Remove the drum separation claws from the drum separation claw assemblies.
6. Remove the two screws holding the transfer right guide (see page 3-3-48).
7. Pull out the drum shaft and remove the drum.
8. Remove the two screws holding the cleaning lower seal assembly and then the
assembly.
• When detaching and refitting the cleaning lower seal assembly, take care not to
lose the M3 retainers (P/N 33302080).
M3 retainer
Drum separation
claw assemblies
Cleaning lower seal assembly
M3 retainer
Screw
Screws
Screw
Figure 3-3-60 Detaching the drum separation claw assemblies and
the cleaning lower seal assembly
9. Refit all removed parts.
3-3-56
2AR
3-3-9 Fixing section
( 1 ) Replacing fixing heaters M and S
Replace fixing heaters M and S as follows.
<Procedure>
1. Open the left 1 cover.
2. While lifting the paper transfer section cover release lever, open the paper transfer
section cover.
3. Loosen the screws at the front and rear of the fixing unit and remove the fixing unit
stoppers.
Fixing unit
stopper
Fixing unit
stopper
Screw
Screw
Fixing unit
Figure 3-3-61 Detaching the fixing unit
4. Remove the fixing unit.
5. Remove the three screws holding the fixing unit cover and then the cover.
Fixing unit
Fixing unit cover
Screws
Figure 3-3-62 Detaching the fixing unit cover
3-3-57
2AR
6. Detach the two connectors (white) and remove the clamps. Disconnect the wires of
fixing heaters M and S from the fixing unit front housing. Then remove the two
screws and the fixing unit front housing.
Screw
Fixing unit
front housing
Screw
Connectors
(white)
Fixing heater S
Clamps
Fixing heater M
Figure 3-3-63 Detaching the fixing unit front housing
3-3-58
2AR
7. Detach the two connectors (blue) and remove the clamps. Disconnect the wires of
fixing heaters M and S from the fixing unit rear housing. Then remove the two
screws and the fixing unit rear housing.
Fixing unit
Fixing unit
rear housing
Connectors
(blue)
Clamps
Figure 3-3-64 Detaching the fixing unit rear housing
8. Remove and replace fixing heaters M and S.
• When fitting, place fixing heater M (black wire) on the lower side, and heater S
(white wire) on the upper side.
• Insert the white connectors at the front of the fixing unit and the blue ones at the
rear.
9. Refit all removed parts.
Fixing heater S
Fixing heater M
Figure 3-3-65 Fixing heaters M and S
3-3-59
2AR
( 2 ) Replacing the fixing unit thermistor
Replace the fixing unit thermistor as follows.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the screw holding the fixing unit front right guide and then the guide.
2. Detach the connector and remove the clamp of the fixing unit thermistor.
3. Remove the screw holding the fixing unit thermistor and then the thermistor.
Clamp
Connector
Screw
fixing unit
thermistor
Screw
Fixing unit front right guide
Figure 3-3-66 Detaching the fixing unit thermistor
4. Replace the fixing unit thermistor.
• When fitting the fixing unit thermistor, insert the projection on the thermistor into
the cutout in the fixing unit stay.
5. Refit all removed parts.
3-3-60
2AR
( 3 ) Replacing the fixing unit thermostat
Replace the fixing unit thermostat as follows.
Caution: Use the specified thermostat for replacement. Do not substitute a simple wire
or similar; otherwise, the machine will be seriously damaged.
<Procedure>
1. Detach the connectors of the fixing unit wire and fixing heater wire from the fixing
unit thermostat.
2. Remove the two screws holding the fixing unit thermostat and then the thermostat.
Screws
Connector of
the fixing unit wire
Fixing unit thermostat
Connector of
the fixing heater wire
Figure 3-3-67 Detaching the fixing unit thermostat
3. Replace the fixing unit thermostats.
4. Refit all removed parts.
3-3-61
2AR
( 4 ) Replacing the press roller separation claws
Replace the press roller separation claws as follows.
<Procedure>
1. Open the left 1 cover.
2. While lifting the paper transfer section cover release lever, open the paper transfer
section cover.
3. Remove the screw and two pins each at the front and rear of the paper transfer
section cover, and then the fixing unit left guide.
Press roller
separation claw
Spring
Pins
Fixing unit
left guide
Screw
Paper transfer section cover
Pins
Figure 3-3-68 Detaching the press roller separation claws
4. Remove the springs and then the four press roller separation claws.
5. Replace the press roller separation claws.
6. Refit all removed parts.
3-3-62
2AR-1
2AR
( 5 ) Replacing the heat roller separation claws
Replace the heat roller separation claws as follows.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the fixing unit (see page 3-3-57).
2. Remove the two fixing guide pins holding the fixing unit right guide and then the
guide.
Screw
Fixing unit right guide
Heat roller
separation claw
Fixing guide pin
Spring
Heat roller separation
claw retainer
Fixing guide pin
Figure 3-3-69 Detaching the heat roller separation claws
3. Remove the screw holding the heat roller separation claw retainer.
4. Remove the springs from the heat roller separation claws.
5. Remove the six heat roller separation claws from the heat roller separation claw
retainer.
6. Replace the heat roller separation claws.
7. Refit all removed parts.
Caution: While fitting the heat roller separation claws, take care not to touch the edges
of the claws.
3-3-63
2AR
( 6 ) Replacing the press roller and press roller bearings
Replace the press roller and press roller bearings as follows.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the two screws holding the press roller cover and then the cover.
2. Remove the two fixing pressure pins holding the front and rear fixing pressure
plates and then the plates.
Caution: When detaching and refitting the fixing pressure pins, do not turn the nuts of
the pins. Also, be sure to refit the pins to the front and rear respectively.
Fixing pressure pin
Fixing pressure pin
Rear fixing
pressure plate
Screw
Press roller cover
Screw
Front fixing pressure plate
Figure 3-3-70 Detaching the fixing pressure pins
3. Replace the press roller and the press roller bearings.
Press roller bearing
Press roller
Press roller shaft
Press roller bearing
Figure 3-3-71 Detaching the press roller bearings
4. Refit all removed parts.
3-3-64
2AR-1
2AR
( 7 ) Replacing the heat roller, heat roller bearings, heat roller bushings, and
fixing unit gear
Replace the heat roller, heat roller bearings, heat roller bushings and fixing unit gear as
follows.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the fixing heaters M and S (see P.3-3-57).
2. Remove the fixing unit right guide and press roller (see p.3-3-64).
3. Remove the two circlips.
4. Remove the fixing unit gear, heat roller bearings, heat roller bushings and heat
roller .
Circlip
Heat roller bearing
Fixing unit gear
Heat roller bearing
Heat roller bushing
Heat roller
Heat roller bushing
Circlip
Figure 3-3-72 Detaching the heat roller
5. Refit all removed parts.
3-3-65
2AR
2AR-1
( 8 ) Adjusting the fixing pressure (reference)
Perform the following adjustment if the copy paper creases, fixing is poor, or when the
fixing pressure spring has been replaced.
If the copy image is distorted at 32 mm from the trailing edge of the paper, follow the
step on page 3-3-67.
<Procedure>
1. Remove the fixing unit.
2. Remove the fixing pressure pins and then adjust the distance between the two
washers.
21±0.5 mm
(common to machine
front and rear)
Washers
Fixing pressure pin
Fixing pressure pin
Front fixing
pressure plate
Rear fixing
pressure plate
• Fixing pressure: 49 N (common to machine front and rear)
• Distance between the washers: 21±0.5 mm (common to machine front and rear)
Figure 3-3-73
3. Refit all removed parts.
3-3-66
2AR-1
2AR
32 mm
32 mm
<Procedure>
1. Make one turn counterclockwise of the fixing pressure pin at, according to the
direction of the distortion of the copy image, the machine front or rear.
• For copy example 1, turn the fixing pressure pin at the machine front.
• For copy example 2, turn the fixing pressure pin at the machine rear.
Caution: Never turn the nuts of the fixing pressure pins.
Original
Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
Fixing pressure pin
(machine rear)
Fixing pressure pin
(machine front)
Figure 3-3-74
3-3-67
2AR
CONTENTS
3-4 PCB Initial Settings
3-4-1 Replacing the main PCB ....................................................................
(1) Replacing the main PCB only. .....................................................
(2) Replacing the main PCB and backup RAM. ................................
3-4-2 Upgrading the firmware in the flash ROM
(operation unit main PCB). ................................................................
3-4-3 Adjustment-free variable resisters (VR). ............................................
3-4-1
3-4-1
3-4-1
3-4-2
3-4-4
2AR
3-4-1 Replacing the main PCB
( 1 ) Replacing the main PCB only
After replacing the main PCB, remove the backup RAM (IC27) from the old main PCB
and fit it to the new main PCB to maintain the original settings data.
( 2 ) Replacing the main PCB and backup RAM
When replacing the backup RAM along with the main PCB, perform the following steps.
Procedure
• Before removing the old backup RAM:
1. Enter the maintenance mode.
2. Execute maintenance item U000 to output a list of the current settings for
maintenance items.
3. Exit the maintenance mode.
4. Turn the main switch off and disconnect the power plug.
5. Replace the main PCB and backup RAM with the new ones.
• After installing the new backup RAM:
6. Insert the power plug and turn the main switch on.
7. Enter the maintenance mode.
8. Execute maintenance item U020.
9. Execute maintenance item U252 and select the destination.
10. Execute maintenance item U000 to output a list of the current settings for
maintenance items.
11. Compare the lists output in steps 2 and 10. If there are any differences, reenter
the data in accordance with the values on the list output in step 2.
12. Exit the maintenance mode.
3-4-1
2AR
3-4-2 Upgrading the firmware in the flash ROM (operation unit
main PCB)
Perform the steps below when upgrading the firmware in the flash ROM (operation unit
main PCB).
Firmware upgrading requires the following tools:
Flash tool assembly (P/N 35968010)
Flash data change harness (P/N 18568060)
Operation 1 ROM IC for 120 V specifications (P/N 2AR68040)
Operation 2 ROM IC for 120 V specifications (P/N 2AR68050)
Operation 1 ROM IC for 220 - 240 V specifications (P/N 2AR68060)
Operation 2 ROM IC for 220 - 240 V specifications (P/N 2AR68070)
Caution:
• Turn the main switch off before disconnecting or inserting connectors.
• Do not allow the flash tool assembly to make contact with any metal parts of the
copier during firmware upgrading.
Procedure
1. Enter the maintenance mode.
2. Execute maintenance item U000 to output a list of the current settings for
maintenance items.
3. Exit the maintenance mode.
4. Turn the main switch off and disconnect the power plug.
5. Remove the screw holding the upper front cover. Remove the cover by shifting to
the left.
6. Remove the three screws holding the operation unit lower cover and then the
cover.
7. Fit the operation 1 ROM IC into the IC3 socket on the flash tool assembly.
8. Insert the connector of the flash data change harness into CN2 on the flash tool
assembly.
Operation 1 ROM IC
Flash tool assembly
CN2
Flash data change harness
Figure 3-4-1
3-4-2
2AR
9. Insert the other connector of the flash data change harness into CN7 on the
operation unit main PCB.
CN7
Flash data change harness
Operation unit main PCB
Flash tool assembly
Figure 3-4-2
10. Open the left 1 cover to prevent malfunctioning of the copier during the firmware
upgrading.
11. Connect the power plug and turn the main switch on. Upgrading of the operation
1 ROM IC starts and LED2 on the flash tool assembly flashes for 1 minute. LED2
remains on when upgrading is complete.
12. Turn the main switch off.
13. Remove the operation 1 ROM IC from the flash tool assembly and fit the
operation 2 ROM IC into the IC3 socket on the flash tool assembly.
14. Turn the main switch on. Upgrading of the operation 2 ROM IC starts and LED2
on the flash tool assembly flashes for 3 minutes. LED2 remains on when
upgrading is complete.
15. Turn the main switch off.
16. Detach the connector of the flash data change harness from the operation unit
main PCB.
17. Close the left 1 cover and refit the removed covers.
18. Turn the main switch on.
19. Enter the maintenance mode.
20. Execute maintenance item U000 to output a list of the current settings for
maintenance items.
21. Compare the lists output in steps 2 and 20. If there are any differences, reenter
the data in accordance with the values on the list output in step 2.
22. Exit the maintenance mode.
3-4-3
2AR
3-4-3 Adjustment-free variable resisters (VR)
The variable resistors listed below are set at the factory prior to shipping and should not
be adjusted in the field.
• High-voltage transformer PCB: VR101, VR102, VR201, VR301 and VR302
• Power source PCB: VR2
• Laser diode PCB: VR1
3-4-4
2AR
CONTENTS
3-5 Self Diagnostics
3-5-1 Self-diagnosis .................................................................................... 3-5-1
(1) Self-diagnostic function ............................................................... 3-5-1
Self diagnostic codes .................................................................. 3-5-2
2AR
3-5-1 Self-diagnosis
(1) Self-diagnostic function
This unit is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, copying
is disabled and the problem displayed as a code consisting of “C” followed by a number
between 010 and 924, indicating the nature of the problem.
A message is also displayed requesting the user to call for service.
After removing the problem, the self-diagnostic function can be reset by turning safety
switches 1, 2 or 3 off and back on.
Call for service.
: 0123456789012345
C200
Figure 3-5-1 Service call code display
3-5-1
2AR
2AR-4
Self diagnostic codes
Remarks
Code
Contents
C005
Operation Unit Main
PCB Communication
Problem (to Fax Control
PCB)
Communication between
the operation unit main
PCB and the Fax control
PCB cannot be normally
performed.
Defective Fax
control PCB.
Replace the Fax control PCB
and check for correct
operation.
C006
Main PCB
communication problem
(to Fax Control PCB)
Communication between
the main PCB and the
Fax control PCB cannot
be normally performed.
Defective Fax
control PCB
Replace the Fax control PCB
and check for correct
operation.
C007
Checksum error
(program area)
Checksum error
(softswitch area)
The checksum value
stored at power off does
not match the checksum
value found at power on.
Defective Fax
control PCB or
SRAM.
Replace the Fax control PCB
and check for correct
operation.
3-5-1-1
3-5-2
Causes
Check procedures/
corrective measures
2AR
Self diagnostic codes
Remarks
Code
Contents
C010
C011
C021
C022
C023
Causes
Check procedures/
corrective measures
RAM/ROM problem
Read and write data does
not match.
Defective
main PCB.
Replace the main PCB and
check for correct operation.
Backup memory data
problem
Data in the specified area
of the backup memory
does not match the specified values.
Problem with
the backup
memory data.
Turn safety switch 1 off and
back on and run maintenance
item U020 to set the contents
of the backup memory data
again.
Defective
backup RAM.
If the C011 is displayed after
re-setting the backup memory
contents, replace the backup
RAM IC27.
Operation unit main PCB
communication problem
There is no reply after 20
retries at communication.
Poor contact
of the connector terminals.
Check the connection of connectors CN9 on the main PCB
and CN8 on the operation unit
main PCB, and the continuity
across the connector terminals.
Remedy or replace if necessary.
Defective
main PCB or
operation unit
main PCB.
Replace the main PCB or
operation unit main PCB and
check for correct operation.
Communication problem
between the engine PCB
and main PCB
There is no reply after 20
retries at communication.
Defective
engine ROM
IC.
Replace the engine ROM
IC37 on the main PCB and
check for correct operation.
Defective
main PCB.
Replace the main PCB and
check for correct operation.
Scanner control PCB
communication problem
There is no reply after 5
retries at communication.
Poor contact
of the connector terminals.
Check the connection of connectors CN5 on the main PCB
and CN9 on the scanner control PCB, and the continuity
across the connector terminals.
Remedy or replace if necessary.
Defective
main PCB or
scanner
control PCB.
Replace the main PCB or
scanner control PCB and
check for correct operation.
3-5-3
3-5-2
2AR-1
Code
Contents
C024* Printer board communication problem
There is no reply after 20
retries at communication.
Causes
Remarks
Check procedures/
corrective measures
Poor contact
of the connector terminals.
Check the connection of connector CN3 on the main PCB
and the connector CN2 on
the printer board. Repair or
replace if necessary.
Defective
main PCB or
printer board.
Replace the main PCB or
printer board and check for
correct operation.
C032* Large paper deck
communication problem
Communication errors
from the communication
microcomputer IC41 on
the main PCB:
No communication: there
is no reply after 3 retries.
Abnormal communication:
a communication error
(parity or checksum error)
is detected five times in
succession.
Poor contact
of the connector terminals.
Check the connection of connectors CN11 on the main
PCB and CN1 on the deck
main PCB, and the continuity
across the connector terminals. Remedy or replace if
necessary.
Defective
main PCB.
Replace the main PCB and
check for correct operation.
Defective deck
main PCB.
Replace the deck main PCB
and check for correct operation.
C032* Large paper deck
sequence problem
Operation
start request is
sent from the
copier to the
large paper
deck while
paper feed is
disabled.
Turn the power off and back
on (reset request is sent from
the copier to the large paper
deck to cancel operation start
request).
Paper feed
request is sent
to the large
paper deck
before operation start
request.
Turn the power off and back
on (reset request is sent from
the copier to the large paper
deck to cancel operation start
request).
* If the optional device is attached.
3-5-4
3-5-3
2AR
Code
Contents
Causes
Remarks
Check procedures/
corrective measures
C032* Paper feed desk
communication problem
An error code from the
paper feed desk is detected eight times in succession.
No communication: there
is no reply after 3 retries.
Abnormal communication:
a communication error
(parity or checksum error)
is detected five times in
succession.
Poor contact
of the connector terminals.
Check the connection of connectors CN11 on the main
PCB and CN5 on the desk
main PCB, and the continuity
across the connector terminals.
Remedy or replace if necessary.
Defective
main PCB.
Replace the main PCB and
check for correct operation.
Defective desk
main PCB.
Replace the desk main PCB
and check for correct operation.
C034* Finisher communication
problem
Communication errors from
the communication microcomputer IC41 on the main
PCB:
No communication: there
is no reply after 3 retries.
Abnormal communication:
a communication error
(parity or checksum error)
is detected five times in
succession.
Poor contact
of the connector terminals.
Check the connection of connectors CN10 on the copier
main PCB and CN2 on the
finisher main PCB, and the
continuity across the connector
terminals. Remedy or replace
if necessary.
Defective
copier main
PCB.
Replace the copier main PCB
and check for correct operation.
Defective
finisher main
PCB.
Replace the finisher main
PCB and check for correct
operation.
* If the optional device is attached.
3-5-5
3-5-4
2AR-1
Code
Contents
Causes
Remarks
Check procedures/
corrective measures
C035* Mailbox communication
problem
Communication errors from
the communication microcomputer IC41 on the main
PCB:
No communication: there
is no reply after 3 retries.
Abnormal communication:
a communication error
(parity or checksum error)
is detected five times in
succession.
The presence of the
mailbox has been detected although the communication microcomputer
IC41 on the main PCB did
not detect the connection
of the mailbox during initial
communication.
Poor contact
of the connector terminals.
Check the connection of the
connector CN10 on the copier
main PCB, connector CN1 on
the mailbox main PCB and the
connector on the signal cable
connecting the mailbox and
the copier, and the continuity
across the connector terminals.
Remedy or replace if necessary.
Defective
copier main
PCB.
Replace the copier main PCB
and check for correct operation.
Defective
mailbox main
PCB.
Run a simulation of the mailbox
(communication test mode). If
there is any problem with the
communication, replace the
mailbox main PCB.
C037
Communication
microcomputer problem
A problem is detected with
the communication microcomputer IC41 on the main
PCB.
Defective
main PCB.
Replace the main PCB and
check for correct operation.
C040
SIMM problem
SIMM inserted incorrectly.
There is a problem with the
data or address bus.
SIMM inserted
incorrectly.
Check the insertion of the
SIMM into connectors CN6
and CN7 on the main PCB.
If the SIMM is incorrectly or
insufficiently inserted, reinsert
correctly (be sure to insert the
first SIMM into CN6).
Defective
main PCB.
Replace the main PCB and
check for correct operation.
Defective
main PCB.
Replace the main PCB and
check for correct operation.
C041
Bitmap problem
There is a problem with the
data or address bus of the
bitmap DRAM.
* If the optional device is attached.
3-5-6
3-5-5
2AR
Code
Contents
Causes
Remarks
Check procedures/
corrective measures
C042
Memory input interface
problem
Reading-in of an image
does not complete within
10 s of the start of image
transmission.
Defective
main PCB.
Replace the main PCB and
check for correct operation.
C043
DMA problem
DMA transmission of compressed, decompressed,
rotated, relocated or
blanked-out image data
does not complete within
the specified period of
time.
Defective
main PCB.
Replace the main PCB and
check for correct operation.
C104
Optical system problem
After AGC, correct input is
not obtained at CCD.
Insufficient
exposure lamp
luminosity.
Replace the exposure lamp
or inverter PCB.
Defective
scanner
control PCB.
Replace the scanner control
PCB.
Incorrect
shading
position.
Adjust the position of the
contact glass (shading plate).
If the problem still occurs,
replace the scanner home
position switch.
CCD PCB
output
problem.
Replace the ISU.
Poor contact
of the drive
motor connector terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also
check for continuity within the
connector cable. If none, repair
or replace the cable.
Defective
drive motor
rotation
control circuit.
Replace the drive motor.
Defective
drive transmission system.
Check if the rollers and gears
rotate smoothly. If not, grease
the bushings and gears.
Check for broken gears and
replace if any.
C200
Drive motor problem
DM LOCK signal remains
high for 1 s or longer, 1 s
after the drive motor has
turned on.
3-5-7
3-5-6
2AR-1
Code
Contents
C231* Desk drive motor
problem
DDM LOCK signal remains
high for 2 s or longer, 1 s
after the desk drive motor
has turned on.
C241
Upper lift motor problem
When the drawer is inserted, the upper lift limit
switch does not turn on
within 4.6 s of the upper
lift motor turning on.
During copying, the upper
lift limit switch does not
turn on within 200 ms of the
upper lift motor turning on.
* If the optional device is attached.
3-5-8
3-5-7
Causes
Remarks
Check procedures/
corrective measures
Poor contact of
the desk drive
motor connector terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also
check for continuity within the
connector cable. If none, repair
or replace the cable.
Defective desk
drive motor
rotation control
circuit.
Replace the desk drive motor.
Defective drive
transmission
system.
Check if the rollers and gears
rotate smoothly. If not, grease
the bushings and gears.
Check for broken gears and
replace if any.
Broken gears
or couplings of
the upper lift
motor.
Replace the upper lift motor.
Defective
upper lift
motor.
Check for continuity across
the coil. If none, replace the
upper lift motor.
Poor contact
of the upper
lift motor connector terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also
check for continuity within the
connector cable. If none, repair
or replace the cable.
Defective
upper lift limit
switch.
Check if CN12-8 on the engine
PCB goes low when the upper
lift limit switch is turned off. If
not, replace the upper lift limit
switch.
Poor contact
of the upper
lift limit switch
connector
terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also
check for continuity within the
connector cable. If none, repair
or replace the cable.
2AR
Code
Contents
C242
Lower lift motor problem
When the drawer is inserted, the lower lift limit
switch does not turn on
within 4.6 s of the lower lift
motor turning on.
During copying, the lower
lift limit switch does not
turn on within 200 ms of the
lower lift motor turning on.
Causes
Remarks
Check procedures/
corrective measures
Broken gears
or couplings of
the lower lift
motor.
Replace the lower lift motor.
Defective lower
lift motor.
Check for continuity across
the coil. If none, replace the
lower lift motor.
Poor contact
of the lower lift
motor connector terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also
check for continuity within the
connector cable. If none, repair
or replace the cable.
Defective lower
lift limit switch.
Check if CN12-2 on the engine
PCB goes low when the lower
lift limit switch is turned off. If
not, replace the lower lift limit
switch.
Poor contact
of the lower lift
limit switch
connector
terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also
check for continuity within the
connector cable. If none, repair
or replace the cable.
3-5-9
3-5-8
2AR
Code
Contents
C243* Desk upper lift motor
problem
When the drawer is inserted, the desk upper lift
limit switch does not turn
on within 4.6 s of the desk
upper lift motor turning on.
During copying, the desk
upper lift limit switch does
not turn on within 200 ms
of the desk upper lift motor
turning on.
* If the optional device is attached.
3-5-10
3-5-9
Causes
Remarks
Check procedures/
corrective measures
Broken gears
or couplings of
the desk upper
lift motor.
Replace the desk upper lift
motor.
Defective desk
upper lift
motor.
Check for continuity across
the coil. If none, replace the
desk upper lift motor.
Poor contact
of the desk
upper lift motor
connector
terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also
check for continuity within the
connector cable. If none, repair
or replace the cable.
Defective desk
upper lift limit
switch.
Check if CN1-5 on the desk
main PCB goes low when the
desk upper lift limit switch is
turned off. If not, replace the
desk upper lift limit switch.
Poor contact
of the desk
upper lift limit
switch connector terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also
check for continuity within the
connector cable. If none, repair
or replace the cable.
2AR
Code
Contents
C244* Desk lower lift motor
problem
When the drawer is inserted, the desk lower lift
limit switch does not turn
on within 4.6 s of the desk
lower lift motor turning on.
During copying, the desk
lower lift limit switch does
not turn on within 200 ms
of the desk lower lift motor
turning on.
C310
Scanner carriage
problem
The home position is not
correct when the power is
turned on or at the start of
copying using the bypass
table.
Causes
Remarks
Check procedures/
corrective measures
Broken gears
of couplings of
the desk lower
lift motor.
Replace the desk lower lift
motor.
Defective desk
lower lift
motor.
Check for continuity across
the coil. If none, replace the
desk lower lift motor.
Poor contact
of the desk
lower lift motor
connector
terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also
check for continuity within the
connector cable. If none, repair
or replace the cable.
Defective desk
lower lift limit
switch.
Check if CN1-7 on the desk
main PCB goes low when the
desk lower lift limit switch is
turned off. If not, replace the
desk lower lift limit switch.
Poor contact
of the desk
lower lift limit
switch connector terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also
check for continuity within the
connector cable. If none, repair
or replace the cable.
Poor contact
of the connector terminals.
Check the connection of connector CN4 on the scanner
motor PCB and the continuity
across the connector terminals.
Remedy or replace if necessary.
Defective
scanner home
position switch.
Replace the scanner home
position switch.
Defective main
PCB, scanner
control PCB or
scanner motor
PCB.
Replace the main PCB, scanner control PCB or scanner
motor PCB and check for
correct operation.
Defective
scanner motor.
Replace the scanner motor.
* If the optional device is attached.
3-5-11
3-5-10
2AR
Remarks
Check procedures/
corrective measures
Code
Contents
C332
Scanner watchdog
problem
The main routine does not
run within 8.192 ms of the
main switch being turned
on.
Defective
scanner
control PCB.
Replace the scanner control
PCB and check for correct
operation.
C340
Original detection
position problem
The CPU IC5 in the scanner
control PCB cannot store
initial data from the original size sensor correctly.
Poor contact
of the connector terminals.
Check the connection of connector CN8 on the scanner
control PCB and the continuity
across the connector terminals.
Remedy or replace if necessary.
Defective
original size
sensor.
Replace the original size
sensor.
Defective main
PCB or scanner control
PCB.
Replace the main PCB or
scanner control PCB and
check for correct operation.
Poor contact
of the polygon
motor connector terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also
check for continuity within the
connector cable. If none, repair
or replace the cable.
Defective
polygon motor.
Replace the LSU.
Defective
power source
PCB.
Check if 24 V DC is present
at CN6-1 on the power
source PCB. If not, replace
the power source PCB.
Poor contact
of the polygon
motor connector terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also
check for continuity within the
connector cable. If none, repair
or replace the cable.
Defective
polygon motor.
Replace the LSU.
Defective
power source
PCB.
Check if 24 V DC is present
at CN6-1 on the power source
PCB. If not, replace the power
source PCB.
C400
C401
3-5-11
3-5-12
Polygon motor
synchronization problem
The polygon motor does
not reach the stable speed
within 20 s of the polygon
motor remote signal turning
on.
Polygon motor
steady-state problem
The polygon motor rotation
is not stable for 600 ms
after the polygon motor
rotation has been stabilized.
Causes
2AR
Code
Contents
C420
BD steady-state problem
The VTC detects a BD
error for 1000 ms during
copying.
C510
C610
Causes
Remarks
Check procedures/
corrective measures
Defective laser
diode.
Replace the LSU.
Defective
polygon motor.
Replace the LSU.
Defective
main PCB.
Replace the main PCB.
Main charger problem
MC ALM signal is detected continuously for
400 ms when MC REM
signal is turned on.
Defective
high-voltage
transformer
PCB.
Replace the high-voltage
transformer PCB.
Leakage
during main
charging.
Check and clean the main
charger assembly.
Broken fixing heater
wire
Warm-up does not end
within 90 s.
The secondary stabilization fixing temperature
drops to 100°C/212°F or
below.
Fixing heater
M or S installed
incorrectly.
Check and reinstall if necessary.
Broken fixing
heater M or S
wire.
Check for continuity. If none,
replace fixing heater M or S.
Poor contact
of the fixing
unit thermistor
connector
terminals.
Check the connection of connector CN13-2 on the engine
PCB and the continuity across
the connector terminals.
Remedy or replace if necessary.
Broken fixing
unit thermistor
wire.
Measure the resistance. If it is
∞ Ω, replace the fixing unit
thermistor.
Fixing unit
thermistor
installed
incorrectly.
Check and reinstall if necessary.
Fixing unit
thermostat
triggered.
Check for continuity. If none,
replace the fixing unit thermostat.
3-5-13
3-5-12
2AR
Code
Contents
C620
Abnormally low fixing
temperature
The fixing temperature
drops to 100°C/212°F or
below during copying.
While the fixing heaters
are turned on, the temperature does not change
for 7 s or longer from
40°C/104°F or below.
C630
C710
3-5-13
3-5-14
Causes
Remarks
Check procedures/
corrective measures
Fixing heater
M or S installed
incorrectly.
Check and reinstall if necessary.
Broken fixing
heater M or S
wire.
Check for continuity. If none,
replace the fixing heater M or
S.
Poor contact
of the fixing
unit thermistor
connector terminals.
Check the connection of connector CN13-2 on the engine
PCB and the continuity across
the connector terminals.
Remedy or replace if necessary.
Broken fixing
unit thermistor
wire.
Measure the resistance. If it is
∞ Ω, replace the fixing unit
thermistor.
Fixing unit
thermistor
installed incorrectly.
Check and reinstall if necessary.
Fixing unit
thermostat
triggered.
Check for continuity. If none,
replace the fixing unit thermostat.
Abnormally high fixing
temperature
The fixing temperature
exceeds 240°C/464°F.
Shorted fixing
unit thermistor.
Measure the resistance. If it is
∞ Ω, replace the fixing unit
thermistor.
Broken fixing
heater control
circuit on the
power source
PCB.
Replace the power source
PCB.
Toner sensor problem
The toner sensor output
voltage is outside the range
of 0.5 to 4.5 V during toner
control.
The toner sensor control
voltage cannot be set within
the setting range when
maintenance item U130 is
run.
Defective
toner sensor.
Replace the toner sensor.
Poor contact
of the toner
sensor connector terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also
check for continuity within the
connector cable. If none, repair
or replace the cable.
Developer
problem.
Replace the developer.
2AR
Code
Contents
C730
Broken external temperature thermistor wire
The input voltage is above
4.5 V (230 bits).
C731
C740
Short-circuited external
temperature thermistor
The input voltage is below
0.5 V (25 bits).
Image formation unit
connector insertion
problem
Absence of the image formation unit is detected
continuously for 1500 ms
while there is no error on
the copier.
C801* Finisher paper conveying motor problem
PCM LOCK signal is detected for 0.5 s or longer.
Causes
Remarks
Check procedures/
corrective measures
Poor contact
of the humidity
sensor PCB
connector
terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also
check for continuity within the
connector cable. If none, repair
or replace the cable.
Defective
external
temperature
thermistor.
Replace the humidity sensor
PCB.
Poor contact
of the humidity
sensor PCB
connector
terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also
check for continuity within the
connector cable. If none, repair
or replace the cable.
Defective
external
temperature
thermistor.
Replace the humidity sensor
PCB.
Image formation unit
connector
installed
incorrectly.
Reinstall the image formation
unit connector if necessary.
Defective
image formation unit.
Replace the image formation
unit.
The paper
conveying
motor connector makes
poor contact.
Reinsert the connector. Also
check for continuity within the
connector cable. If none, repair
or replace the cable.
The paper
conveying
motor malfunctions.
Replace the paper conveying
motor and check for correct
operation.
Defective
finisher main
PCB.
Replace the finisher main
PCB and check for correct
operation.
* If the optional device is attached.
3-5-15
3-5-14
2AR
Code
Contents
C803* Finisher paper conveying belt problem
An on-to-off or off-to-on
state change of the paper
conveying belt home position sensor is not detected
within 2 s of the paper
conveying belt clutch turning on.
C814* Finisher tray elevation
motor problem
The sort tray is not detected in the home position within 30 s of the start
of the tray elevation motor
rotation.
* If the optional device is attached.
3-5-16
3-5-15
Causes
Remarks
Check procedures/
corrective measures
The paper
conveying belt
is out of phase.
Adjust the paper conveying
belt so that it is in phase and
check for correct operation.
The paper
conveying belt
clutch malfunctions.
Replace the paper conveying
belt clutch and check for correct operation.
The paper
conveying belt
home position
sensor malfunctions.
Replace the paper conveying
belt home position sensor and
check for correct operation.
The paper
conveying belt
home position
sensor connector makes
poor contact.
Reinsert the connector. Also
check for continuity within the
connector cable. If none, repair
or replace the cable.
The internal
tray is incorrectly inserted.
Check whether the internal
tray unit or front cover catches
are damaged.
The tray elevation motor connector makes
poor contact.
Reinsert the connector. Also
check for continuity within the
connector cable. If none, repair
or replace the cable.
The tray elevation motor malfunctions.
Replace the tray elevation
motor and check for correct
operation.
Defective
finisher main
PCB.
Replace the finisher main
PCB and check for correct
operation.
2AR
Code
Contents
C817* Finisher front jogger
motor problem
While the front jogger is
not detected in the home
position, the front jogger
home position sensor does
not detect the jogger within
1.5 s of the start of front
jogger motor clockwise
rotation.
After the front jogger is
detected in the home position, the front jogger home
position sensor still detects
the jogger within 0.5 s of
the start of front jogger
motor counterclockwise
rotation.
Causes
Remarks
Check procedures/
corrective measures
The front
jogger motor
connector
makes poor
contact.
Reinsert the connector. Also
check for continuity within the
connector cable. If none, repair
or replace the cable.
The front
jogger motor
malfunctions.
Replace the front jogger motor
and check for correct operation.
The front
jogger home
position sensor
connector
makes poor
contact.
Reinsert the connector. Also
check for continuity within the
connector cable. If none, repair
or replace the cable.
The front
jogger home
position sensor
malfunctions.
Replace the front jogger home
position sensor and check for
correct operation.
Defective
finisher main
PCB.
Replace the finisher main
PCB and check for correct
operation.
* If the optional device is attached.
3-5-16
3-5-17
2AR
Code
Contents
C818* Finisher rear jogger
motor problem
While the rear jogger is
not detected in the home
position, the rear jogger
home position sensor does
not detect the jogger within
1.5 s of the start of rear
jogger motor clockwise
rotation.
After the rear jogger is
detected in the home position, the rear jogger home
position sensor still detects
the jogger within 0.5 s of
the start of rear jogger
motor counterclockwise
rotation.
C822* Finisher stapler problem
The stapler home position
sensor does not change
state from non-detection
to detection within 0.2 s of
the start of stapler motor
counterclockwise (forward)
rotation.
During initialization, the
stapler home position
sensor does not change
state from non-detection
to detection within 0.6 s of
the start of stapler motor
clockwise (reverse) rotation.
* If the optional device is attached.
3-5-18
3-5-17
Causes
Remarks
Check procedures/
corrective measures
The rear
jogger motor
connector
makes poor
contact.
Reinsert the connector. Also
check for continuity within the
connector cable. If none, repair
or replace the cable.
The rear
jogger motor
malfunctions.
Replace the rear jogger motor
and check for correct operation.
The rear
jogger home
position sensor
connector
makes poor
contact.
Reinsert the connector. Also
check for continuity within the
connector cable. If none, repair
or replace the cable.
The rear
jogger home
position sensor
malfunctions.
Replace the rear jogger home
position sensor and check for
correct operation.
Defective
finisher main
PCB.
Replace the finisher main
PCB and check for correct
operation.
The stapler
connector
makes poor
contact.
Reinsert the connector. Also
check for continuity within the
connector cable. If none, repair
or replace the cable.
The stapler
malfunctions.
a) The stapler
is blocked
with a
staple.
b) The stapler
is broken.
a) Remove the stapler
cartridge, and check the
cartridge and the stapling
section of the stapler.
b) Replace the stapler and
check for correct operation.
Defective
finisher main
PCB.
Replace the finisher main
PCB and check for correct
operation.
2AR
Code
Contents
Causes
Remarks
Check procedures/
corrective measures
C850* Mailbox drive motor
problem
While the mailbox drive
motor is driving, synchronization signals do not
synchronize continually for
464 ms (motor lockup).
Defective
mailbox drive
motor or
mailbox main
PCB.
Run a simulation of the mailbox
(communication test mode). If
there is any problem with the
communication, replace the
mailbox drive motor or the
mailbox main PCB and check
for correct operation.
C920* Deck paper conveying
motor problem
No pulse is input within
500 ms of the start-up.
No pulse is input within
100 ms of the previous
pulse input.
The deck
paper conveying motor connector makes
poor contact.
Reinsert the connector. Also
check for continuity within the
connector cable. If none, repair
or replace the cable.
Defective deck
paper conveying motor
PCB.
Replace the deck paper conveying motor PCB and check
for correct operation.
The deck
paper conveying motor does
not rotate
correctly (the
motor is overloaded).
Check the gears and remedy
if necessary.
Paper deck
motor 1 connector makes
poor contact.
Reinsert the connector. Also
check for continuity within the
connector cable. If none, repair
or replace the cable.
Paper deck
motor 1 does
not rotate
correctly (the
motor is overloaded).
Check the gears and remedy
if necessary.
C921* Paper deck motor 1
problem
A motor over-current signal is detected continuously for 1 s or longer.
* If the optional device is attached.
3-5-19
3-5-18
2AR
Code
Contents
Causes
Remarks
Check procedures/
corrective measures
C922* Paper deck motor 2
problem
A motor over-current signal
is detected continuously for
1 s or longer.
Paper deck
motor 2 connector makes
poor contact.
Reinsert the connector. Also
check for continuity within the
connector cable. If none, repair
or replace the cable.
Paper deck
motor 2 does
not rotate
correctly (the
motor is overloaded).
Check the gears and remedy
if necessary.
C923* Right lift position
problem
Deck level switch 2 does
not turn on within 20 s of
paper deck motor 2 turning on.
Deck level
switch 2 connector makes
poor contact.
Reinsert the connector. Also
check for continuity within the
connector cable. If none, repair
or replace the cable.
C924* Left lift position problem
Deck level switch 1 does
not turn on within 20 s of
paper deck motor 1 turning on.
Deck level
switch 1 connector makes
poor contact.
Reinsert the connector. Also
check for continuity within the
connector cable. If none, repair
or replace the cable.
* If the optional device is attached.
3-5-20
3-5-19
2AR
CONTENTS
3-6 Troubleshooting
3-6-1 Image formation problems ................................................................. 3-6-1
(1) No image appears (entirely white). .............................................. 3-6-3
(2) No image appears (entirely black). .............................................. 3-6-4
(3) Image is too light. ........................................................................ 3-6-5
(4) Background is visible. .................................................................. 3-6-5
(5) A white line appears longitudinally. ............................................. 3-6-6
(6) A black line appears longitudinally. ............................................. 3-6-6
(7) A black line appears laterally. ...................................................... 3-6-7
(8) One side of the copy image is darker than the other. .................. 3-6-7
(9) Black dots appear on the image. ................................................. 3-6-8
(10) Image is blurred. .......................................................................... 3-6-8
(11) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned
with the original. .......................................................................... 3-6-9
(12) The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned
with the original. .......................................................................... 3-6-9
(13) Paper creases. .......................................................................... 3-6-10
(14) Offset occurs. ............................................................................ 3-6-10
(15) Image is partly missing. ............................................................. 3-6-11
(16) Fixing is poor. ............................................................................ 3-6-11
(17) Image is out of focus. ................................................................ 3-6-12
(18) Image center does not align with the original center. ................ 3-6-12
(19) Image is not square. .................................................................. 3-6-13
(20) Image contrast is low (carrier scattering). ................................. 3-6-13
(21) Image is distorted at 32 mm from the trailing edge
of the paper. ........................................................................... 3-6-13-1
3-6-2 Paper misfeeds ................................................................................ 3-6-14
(1) A paper jam in the paper feed or conveying section is
indicated when the main switch is turned on. ............................ 3-6-14
(2) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during
copying (no paper feed from copier upper drawer). .................. 3-6-15
(3) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during
copying (no paper feed from copier lower drawer). ................... 3-6-15
(4) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during
copying (jam in copier vertical paper conveying section). ......... 3-6-16
(5) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during
copying (multiple sheets in paper feed section). ....................... 3-6-16
(6) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during
copying (multiple sheets in copier vertical conveying section). ..... 3-6-17
(7) A paper jam in the paper conveying section is indicated
during copying (jam in registration/transfer section). ................. 3-6-17
(8) A paper jam in the fixing section is indicated during copying
(jam in fixing section). ................................................................ 3-6-17
3-6-3 PCB terminal voltages ..................................................................... 3-6-18
(1) Power source PCB .................................................................... 3-6-18
(2) Engine PCB ............................................................................... 3-6-20
(3) Main PCB .................................................................................. 3-6-27
2AR
(4) Scanner control PCB .................................................................
(5) Scanner motor PCB ..................................................................
(6) CCD PCB ..................................................................................
(7) Operation unit main PCB ...........................................................
(8) Operation unit left PCB ..............................................................
(9) Operation unit right PCB ...........................................................
(10) LCD ...........................................................................................
3-6-4 Electrical problems ..........................................................................
(1) The machine does not operate when the main switch is
turned on. ..................................................................................
(2) The drive motor does not operate (C200). ................................
(3) The scanner motor does not operate. .......................................
(4) The upper lift motor does not operate (C241). ..........................
(5) The lower lift motor does not operate (C242). ...........................
(6) The toner feed motor does not operate. ....................................
(7) The paper conveying section fan motor does not operate. .......
(8) Cooling fan motor 1 does not operate at all or does not turn
at full speed. ..............................................................................
(9) Cooling fan motor 2 does not operate at all or does not turn
at full speed. ..............................................................................
(10) The upper paper feed clutch does not operate. ........................
(11) The lower paper feed clutch does not operate. .........................
(12) Feed clutch 1 does not operate. ................................................
(13) Feed clutch 2 does not operate. ................................................
(14) Feed clutch 3 does not operate. ................................................
(15) The registration clutch does not operate. ..................................
(16) The cleaning lamp does not turn on. .........................................
(17) The exposure lamp does not turn on. ........................................
(18) The exposure lamp does not turn off. ........................................
(19) Fixing heater M or S does not turn on (C620). ..........................
(20) Fixing heater M or S does not turn off
(fixing unit thermostat triggered; C630). ....................................
(21) Main charging is not performed (C510). ....................................
(22) Transfer charging is not performed. ..........................................
(23) No developing bias is output. ....................................................
(24) The original size is not detected. ...............................................
(25) The original size is not detected correctly. ................................
(26) The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when
paper is present in the upper drawer. ........................................
(27) The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when
paper is present in the lower drawer. ........................................
(28) The size of paper in the upper drawer is not displayed
correctly. ....................................................................................
(29) The size of paper in the lower drawer is not displayed
correctly. ....................................................................................
(30) A paper jam in the paper feed or paper conveying section
is indicated when the main switch is turned on. ........................
(31) The message requesting covers to be closed is displayed
when the front, left 1 and left 2 covers are closed. ....................
(32) Others. .......................................................................................
3-6-32
3-6-35
3-6-37
3-6-39
3-6-42
3-6-43
3-6-44
3-6-45
3-6-45
3-6-45
3-6-46
3-6-46
3-6-46
3-6-47
3-6-47
3-6-47
3-6-47
3-6-48
3-6-48
3-6-48
3-6-48
3-6-49
3-6-49
3-6-49
3-6-49
3-6-50
3-6-50
3-6-50
3-6-50
3-6-51
3-6-51
3-6-51
3-6-52
3-6-52
3-6-52
3-6-53
3-6-53
3-6-54
3-6-54
3-6-54
2AR
3-6-5 Mechanical problems .......................................................................
(1) No primary paper feed. ..............................................................
(2) No secondary paper feed. .........................................................
(3) Skewed paper feed. ..................................................................
(4) The scanner does not travel. .....................................................
(5) Multiple sheets of paper are fed at one time. ............................
(6) Paper jams. ...............................................................................
(7) Toner drops on the paper conveying path. ................................
(8) Abnormal noise is heard. ...........................................................
3-6-55
3-6-55
3-6-55
3-6-55
3-6-56
3-6-56
3-6-56
3-6-56
3-6-56
2AR
3-6-1 Image formation problems
(1) No image appears
(entirely white).
(2) No image appears
(entirely black).
See page 3-6-3
See page 3-6-4
See page 3-6-5
(5) A white line appears
longitudinally.
(6) A black line appears
longitudinally.
See page 3-6-6
See page 3-6-6
(4) Background is visible.
See page 3-6-5
(7) A black line appears
laterally.
See page 3-6-7
(10) Image is blurred.
See page 3-6-8
(8) One side of the copy
image is darker than
the other.
(3) Image is too light.
(9) Black dots appear on
the image.
See page 3-6-7
See page 3-6-8
(11) The leading edge of
the image is consistently misaligned with
the original.
(12) The leading edge of
the image is sporadically misaligned with
the original.
See page 3-6-9
See page 3-6-9
3-6-1
2AR-1
(13) Paper creases.
See page 3-6-10
(16) Fixing is poor.
(14) Offset occurs.
See page 3-6-10
(17) Image is out of focus.
(15) Image is partly missing.
See page 3-6-11
(18) Image center does
not align with the
original center.
See page 3-6-11
See page 3-6-12
See page 3-6-12
(19) Image is not square.
(20) Image contrast is low
(carrier scattering).
(21) Image is distorted at
32 mm from the trailing edge of the paper.
32 mm
See page 3-6-13
3-6-2
See page 3-6-13
See page 3-6-13-1
2AR
(1) No image appears
(entirely white).
Causes
1. No transfer charging.
Causes
Check procedures/corrective measures
1. No transfer charging.
A. Broken transfer wire.
Replace or repair the wire.
B. The connector terminals of the
high-voltage transformer PCB
make poor contact.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If none,
repair or replace the cable.
C. Defective main PCB.
Check if CN2-B53 on the main PCB goes low
when maintenance item U101 is run. If not,
replace the main PCB.
D. Defective engine PCB.
Check if CN9-9 on the engine PCB goes low
when CN2-B53 on the main PCB goes low
while maintenance item U101 is run. If not,
replace the engine PCB.
E. Defective high-voltage
transformer PCB.
Check if transfer charging takes place when
CN1-6 on the high-voltage transformer PCB
goes low while maintenance item U101 is
run. If not, replace the high-voltage
transformer PCB.
3-6-3
2AR
(2) No image appears
(entirely black).
Causes
1. No main charging.
2. Exposure lamp fails to light.
Causes
Check procedures/corrective measures
1. No main charging.
A. Broken main charger wire.
Replace the wire.
B. Leaking main charger housing.
Clean the main charger wire and shield grid.
C. The connector terminals of the
high-voltage transformer PCB
make poor contact.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If none,
repair or replace the cable.
D. Defective main PCB.
Check if CN2-B58 on the main PCB goes low
when maintenance item U100 is run. If not,
replace the main PCB.
E. Defective engine PCB.
Check if CN9-14 on the engine PCB goes low
when CN2-B58 on the main PCB goes low
while maintenance item U100 is run. If not,
replace the engine PCB.
F. Defective high-voltage
transformer PCB.
Check if main charging takes place when
CN1-1 on the high-voltage transformer PCB
goes low while maintenance item U100 is
run. If not, replace the high-voltage
transformer PCB.
2. Exposure lamp fails to light.
A. The connector terminals of the
exposure lamp make poor
contact.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If none,
repair or replace the cable.
B. Defective inverter PCB.
Check if the exposure lamp lights when
CN1-5 and 1-6 on the inverter PCB go low
while maintenance item U061 is run. If not,
replace the inverter PCB.
C. Defective scanner control PCB.
Check if CN2-12 on the scanner control PCB
goes low when maintenance item U061 is
run. If not, replace the scanner control PCB.
3-6-4
2AR
(3) Image is too light.
Causes
Causes
1. Insufficient toner.
2. Deteriorated developer.
3. Dirty or deteriorated drum.
Check procedures/corrective measures
1. Insufficient toner.
If the display shows the message requesting
toner replenishment, replace the cartridge.
2. Deteriorated developer.
Check the number of copies made with the
current developer. If it has reached the
specified limit, replace the developer.
3. Dirty or deteriorated drum.
Clean the drum or, if the maintenance level
has been reached, replace the drum (see
page 3-3-47).
(4) Background is visible.
Causes
1. Deteriorated developer.
Causes
1. Deteriorated developer.
Check procedures/corrective measures
Check the number of copies made with the
current developer. If it has reached the
specified limit, replace the developer.
3-6-5
2AR
(5) A white line appears
longitudinally.
Causes
1. Dirty or flawed main charger wire.
2. Foreign matter in the image formation unit.
3. Flawed drum.
4. Dirty shading plate.
Causes
Check procedures/corrective measures
1. Dirty or flawed main charger wire.
Clean the main charger wire or, if it is flawed,
replace it.
2. Foreign matter in the image
formation unit.
Check if the magnetic brush is formed
uniformly. If not, replace the developer.
3. Flawed drum.
Replace the drum (see page 3-3-47).
4. Dirty shading plate.
Clean the shading plate.
(6) A black line appears
longitudinally.
Causes
1. Dirty contact glass.
2. Dirty or flawed drum.
3. Deformed or worn cleaning blade.
4. Dirty scanner mirror.
Causes
Check procedures/corrective measures
1. Dirty contact glass.
Clean the contact glass.
2. Dirty or flawed drum.
Clean the drum or, if it is flawed, replace it
(see page 3-3-47).
3. Deformed or worn cleaning blade.
Replace the cleaning blade (see page
3-3-54).
4. Dirty scanner mirror.
Clean the scanner mirror.
3-6-6
2AR
(7) A black line appears
laterally.
Causes
1. Flawed drum.
2. Dirty developing section.
3. Leaking main charger housing.
Causes
Check procedures/corrective measures
1. Flawed drum.
Replace the drum (see page 3-3-47).
2. Dirty developing section.
Clean any part contaminated with toner or
carrier in the developing section.
3. Leaking main charger housing.
Clean the main charger wire and shield grid.
(8) One side of the copy
image is darker than
the other.
Causes
Causes
1. Dirty main charger wire.
2. Defective exposure lamp.
Check procedures/corrective measures
1. Dirty main charger wire.
Clean the main charger wire or, if it is
extremely dirty, replace it.
2. Defective exposure lamp.
Check if the exposure lamp light is distributed
evenly. If not, replace the exposure lamp
(see page 3-3-24).
3-6-7
2AR
(9) Black dots appear on
the image.
Causes
1. Dirty or flawed drum.
2. Deformed or worn cleaning blade.
Causes
Check procedures/corrective measures
1. Dirty or flawed drum.
Clean the drum or, if it is flawed, replace it
(see page 3-3-47).
2. Deformed or worn cleaning blade.
Replace the cleaning blade (see page
3-3-54).
(10) Image is blurred.
Causes
1. Scanner moves erratically.
2. Deformed press roller.
3. Paper conveying section drive problem.
Causes
Check procedures/corrective measures
1. Scanner moves erratically.
Check if there is any foreign matter on the
front and rear scanner rails. If any, remove it.
2. Deformed press roller.
Replace the press roller (see page 3-3-64).
3. Paper conveying section drive
problem.
Check the gears and belts and, if necessary,
grease them.
3-6-8
2AR
(11) The leading edge of the
image is consistently
misaligned with the
original.
Causes
1. Misadjusted leading edge registration.
2. Misadjusted scanner leading edge registration.
Causes
Check procedures/corrective measures
1. Misadjusted leading edge
registration.
Readjust the leading edge registration (see
pages 3-3-18 and 19).
2. Misadjusted scanner leading
edge registration.
Readjust the scanner leading edge registration (see page 3-3-40.)
(12) The leading edge of the
image is sporadically
misaligned with the
original.
Causes
1. Registration clutch, or upper or lower paper feed
clutch installed or operating incorrectly.
Causes
1. Registration clutch, or upper or
lower paper feed clutch installed
or operating incorrectly.
Check procedures/corrective measures
Check the installation position and operation
of the registration clutch and upper and lower
paper feed clutches. If any of them operates
incorrectly, replace it.
3-6-9
2AR
(13) Paper creases.
Causes
1. Paper curled.
2. Paper damp.
3. Defective fixing unit pressure springs.
Causes
Check procedures/corrective measures
1. Paper curled.
Check the paper storage conditions.
2. Paper damp.
Check the paper storage conditions.
3. Defective fixing unit pressure
springs.
Replace the fixing unit pressure springs.
(14) Offset occurs.
Causes
1. Defective cleaning blade.
3-6-10
Causes
1. Defective cleaning blade.
Check procedures/corrective measures
Replace the cleaning blade (see page
3-3-54).
2AR
(15) Image is partly missing.
Causes
1. Paper damp.
2. Paper creased.
3. Drum condensation.
4. Flawed drum.
Causes
Check procedures/corrective measures
1. Paper damp.
Check the paper storage conditions.
2. Paper creased.
Replace the paper.
3. Drum condensation.
Clean the drum (see page 3-3-50).
4. Flawed drum.
Replace the drum (see page 3-3-47).
(16) Fixing is poor.
Causes
1. Wrong paper.
2. Defective fixing unit pressure springs.
3. Flawed press roller.
Causes
Check procedures/corrective measures
1. Wrong paper.
Check if the paper meets specifications.
2. Defective fixing unit pressure
springs.
Replace the fixing unit pressure springs.
3. Flawed press roller.
Replace the press roller (see page 3-3-64).
3-6-11
2AR
(17) Image is out of focus.
Causes
1. Defective image scanning unit.
Causes
Check procedures/corrective measures
1. Defective image scanning unit.
(18) Image center does not
align with the original
center.
Replace the image scanning unit.
Causes
1. Misadjusted center line of image printing.
2. Misadjusted scanner center line.
3. Original placed incorrectly.
Causes
Check procedures/corrective measures
1. Misadjusted center line of image
printing.
Readjust the center line of image printing
(see page 3-3-20).
2. Misadjusted scanner center line.
Readjust the scanner center line (see page
3-3-41).
3. Original placed incorrectly.
Place the original correctly.
3-6-12
2AR
(19) Image is not square.
Causes
1. Laser scanner unit positioned incorrectly.
2. Image scanning unit positioned incorrectly.
Causes
Check procedures/corrective measures
1. Laser scanner unit positioned
incorrectly.
Adjust the installation position of the laser
scanner unit (see page 3-3-35).
2. Image scanning unit positioned
incorrectly.
Adjust the installation position of the image
scanning unit (see page 3-3-37).
(20) Image contrast is low
(carrier scattering).
Causes
1. No developing bias output.
Causes
Check procedures/corrective measures
1. No developing bias output.
A. Developing bias wire makes poor
contact.
Check the developing bias wire. If there are
any problems, replace it.
B. Defective main PCB.
Check if CN2-B55 on the main PCB goes low
when maintenance item U030 is run. If not,
replace the main PCB.
C. Defective high-voltage
transformer PCB.
Check if developing bias is output when CN1-4
on the high-voltage transformer PCB is low
while maintenance item U030 is run. If not,
replace the high-voltage transformer PCB.
3-6-13
2AR-1
(21) Image is distorted at
32 mm from the trailing edge of the paper.
Causes
1. Misadjusted fixing pressure.
32 mm
Causes
1. Misadjusted fixing pressure.
3-6-13-1
3-6-14
Check procedures/corrective measures
Readjust the fixing pressure at the machine
front or rear according to the direction of the
distortion of the image (see page 3-3-66).
2AR-1
This page is intentionally left blank.
3-6-15
2AR
3-6-2 Paper misfeeds
Problem
Causes/check procedures
(1)
A paper jam
in the paper
feed or conveying section
is indicated
when the
main switch is
turned on.
A piece of paper torn from copy
paper is caught around feed
switch 1/2/3 or the registration
switch.
Check and remove if any.
Defective feed switch 1.
With 5 V DC present at CN15-6
on the engine PCB, check if
CN15-5 on the engine PCB
remains low when feed switch 1
is turned on and off. If it does,
replace feed switch 1.
Defective feed switch 2.
With 5 V DC present at CN15-9
on the engine PCB, check if
CN15-8 on the engine PCB
remains low when feed switch 2
is turned on and off. If it does,
replace feed switch 2.
Defective feed switch 3.
With 5 V DC present at
CN15-12 on the engine PCB,
check if CN15-11 on the engine
PCB remains low when feed
switch 3 is turned on and off. If
it does, replace feed switch 3.
Defective registration switch.
With 5 V DC present at CN8-26
on the engine PCB, check if
CN8-25 on the engine PCB
remains low when the registration switch is turned on and off.
If it does, replace the registration switch.
3-6-14
Corrective measures
2AR
Problem
(2)
A paper jam
in the paper
feed section
is indicated
during copying (no paper
feed from
copier upper
drawer).
(3)
A paper jam
in the paper
feed section
is indicated
during copying (no paper
feed from
copier lower
drawer).
Causes/check procedures
Corrective measures
Paper in the upper drawer is
extremely curled.
Change the paper.
Check if the paper feed pulley,
separation pulley or forwarding
pulley of the upper drawer is
deformed.
Check visually and replace any
deformed pulleys.
Broken feed switch 1 actuator.
Check visually and replace feed
switch 1 if the actuator is broken.
Defective feed switch 1.
With 5 V DC present at CN15-6
on the engine PCB, check if
CN15-5 on the engine PCB
goes low when feed switch 1 is
turned on. If not, replace feed
switch 1.
Check if the upper paper feed
clutch malfunctions.
Check and remedy if necessary.
Electrical problem with the upper
paper feed clutch.
Check (see page 3-6-48).
Paper in the lower drawer is
extremely curled.
Change the paper.
Check if the paper feed pulley,
separation pulley or forwarding
pulley of the lower drawer is
deformed.
Check visually and replace any
deformed pulleys.
Broken feed switch 2 actuator.
Check visually and replace feed
switch 2 if the actuator is broken.
Defective feed switch 2.
With 5 V DC present at CN15-9
on the engine PCB, check if
CN15-8 on the engine PCB
goes low when feed switch 2 is
turned on. If not, replace feed
switch 2.
Check if the lower paper feed
clutch malfunctions.
Check and remedy if necessary.
Electrical problem with the
lower paper feed clutch.
Check (see page 3-6-48).
3-6-15
2AR
Problem
(4)
A paper jam
in the paper
feed section
is indicated
during copying (jam in
copier vertical
paper conveying section).
(5)
A paper jam
in the paper
feed section
is indicated
during copying (multiple
sheets in
paper feed
section).
3-6-16
Causes/check procedures
Corrective measures
Broken registration switch
actuator.
Check visually and replace the
registration switch if the actuator
is broken.
Defective registration switch.
With 5 V DC present at CN8-26
on the engine PCB, check if
CN8-25 on the engine PCB goes
low when the registration switch
is turned on. If not, replace the
registration switch.
Broken feed switch 1 actuator.
Check visually and replace feed
switch 1 if the actuator is broken.
Defective feed switch 1.
With 5 V DC present at CN15-6
on the engine PCB, check if
CN15-5 on the engine PCB goes
low when feed switch 1 is turned
on. If not, replace feed switch 1.
Broken feed switch 2 actuator.
Check visually and replace feed
switch 2 if the actuator is broken.
Defective feed switch 2.
With 5 V DC present at CN15-9
on the engine PCB, check if
CN15-8 on the engine PCB goes
low when feed switch 2 is turned
on. If not, replace feed switch 2.
Check if the feed pulleys and
feed rollers 1 and 2 do not
contact each other.
Check visually and remedy if
necessary.
Check if the feed pulleys and
feed rollers 1 and 2 are
deformed.
Remedy or replace if necessary.
Check if the feed pulleys and
feed rollers 1 and 2 are
deformed.
Remedy or replace if necessary.
Check if the feed pulleys and
feed rollers 1 and 2 do not
contact each other.
Check visually and remedy if
necessary.
Check if the feed guides are
deformed.
Check visually and remedy if
necessary.
2AR
Problem
Causes/check procedures
Corrective measures
(6)
A paper jam
in the paper
feed section
is indicated
during copying (multiple
sheets in
copier vertical
conveying
section).
Check if the feed guides are
deformed.
Check visually and remedy if
necessary.
(7)
A paper jam
in the paper
conveying
section is indicated during
copying (jam
in registration/
transfer section).
Check if the registration clutch
malfunctions.
Check visually and remedy if
necessary.
Electrical problem with the
registration clutch.
Check (see page 3-6-49).
Check if the left and right registration rollers contact each
other.
Check visually and remedy if
necessary.
Check if the left and right feed
rollers contact each other.
Check visually and remedy if
necessary.
(8)
A paper jam
in the fixing
section is indicated during
copying (jam
in fixing section).
Check if the registration clutch
malfunctions.
Check and remedy if necessary.
Electrical problem with the
registration clutch.
Check (see page 3-6-49).
Check if the left and right registration rollers contact each
other.
Check visually and remedy if
necessary.
Check if the left and right feed
rollers contact each other.
Check visually and remedy if
necessary.
Check if the fixing unit front
right and front left guides are
deformed.
Remedy or replace if necessary.
Check if the press roller is
extremely dirty or deformed.
Clean or replace if necessary.
Check if the heat roller separation claws are dirty or deformed.
Clean or replace if necessary.
Check if the heat roller and its
separation claws contact each
other.
Remedy if the separation claw
springs are out of place.
3-6-17
2AR
3-6-3 PCB terminal voltages
Precautions
• When handling PCBs, do not touch connectors with bare hands or damage the board.
• Do not touch PCBs containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge.
• Store PCBs wrapped in aluminum foil, conductive sponge rubber, or similar material.
1
1
2
TB4
TB3
TB1
3-6-18
TB2
18
2
30
CN5
CN3
2
TB5
CN8
1
1
1
CN6
17
4
CN4
1
4
CN1
2
1
6
1
CN2
CN7
3
29
(1) Power source PCB
2AR
Terminals (CN)
Voltage
TB1
TB2
TB3
TB4
1-3
1-1
1-4
1-1
2-1
2-2
2-3
3-1, 2
3-4
3-5, 6
3-7
3-8
3-23
3-24
3-25, 26
3-27
3-28
3-29
3-30
4-1
4-4
5-1, 2
5-3, 4,
5, 6
5-7
5-8
5-9
3-12
3-12
3-12
3-18, 19
3-20, 21
3-10, 11
3-22
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14, 15
3-14, 15
3-16, 17
3-16, 17
3-14
4-2
4-3
5-14, 15
5-10, 18
120 V AC
220 – 240 V AC
120 V AC
220 – 240 V AC
120 V AC
220 – 240 V AC
120 V AC
220 – 240 V AC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
24 V DC
24 V DC
5 V DC
24 V DC
24 V DC
5 V DC
5 V DC
5 V DC
3.4 V DC
5 V DC
3.4 V DC
+12 V DC
24 V DC
5 V DC
24 V DC
24 V DC
5-13
5-12
5-16
5 V DC
5 V DC
24 V DC
5-17
5-11
5 V DC
6-1
6-2
24 V DC
Remarks
AC supply, input
AC supply for MSW, output
AC supply for H2, output
AC supply for H1, output
5 V DC supply, input
H1 on/off, input
H2 on/off, input
24 V DC supply for SRDF*, output
24 V DC supply for EPCB, output
5 V DC supply for SRDF*, output
24 V DC supply for SMPCB, output
24 V DC supply for SSW1, output
5 V DC supply for EPCB, output
5 V DC supply for SMPCB, output
5 V DC supply for SCPCB, output
3.4 V DC supply for SCPCB, output
5 V DC supply for MPCB, output
3.4 V DC supply for MPCB, output
+12 V DC supply for SCPCB, output
24 V DC supply for OMPCB, output
5 V DC supply for OMPCB, output
24 V DC supply for mailbox*, output
24 V DC supply for finisher*, output
5 V DC supply for mailbox*, output
5 V DC supply for finisher*, output
24 V DC supply for large paper deck*/
paper feed desk*, output
5 V DC supply for large paper deck*/
paper feed desk*, output
24 V DC supply for PM, output
* Optional.
3-6-19
2AR
(2) Engine PCB
L4
D4 +1
3
1
8
C3
1
2
IC4
CN2
5
8
1
2
IC3
8
CN4
A
D12
21
22
20
KA
D11
C
K
A Q5
E
K1
B
5
12
C
C
C
C
D5
1
1
3
1
IC1
A12
B1
8
CN10
9
CN14
K K K
IC9
5
BE
Q4
1
BE
Q3
11
10
CN15
9
BE
Q2
C4
13
2
1
D10
A A A
BE
D1 D2 D3 Q1
+
CN5
D9
B1
A10
1
IC6
23
24
9
9
1
CN7
11
D8
CN11
1
1
IC7
IC13
D6
2
1
D7
B10
1
A1
IC2
L2
IC5
1
R1
R2
L8
L3
10
L1
1
Q8 Q10 Q12 Q14 Q16 Q18
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
CN16
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Q7 Q9 Q11 Q13 Q15 Q17
CN6
10
9
D13
A1
B12
+
+
8
1
CN1
L5
L6
CN12
C1
C2
2
1
12
11
1
14
Q6
R
116
B10
A10
9
CN9
B1
A1
3-6-20
R115
2
1
16
15
IC12
1
IC11
1
IC10
1
L7
R120
R117
CN8
1
2
CN13
29
30
1
4
R129
R128
R127
R126
R125
R124
R123
R122
2AR
Terminals (CN)
Voltage
1-1
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
2-1
1-2
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
2-13
24 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-13
2-11
2-11
2-11
2-11
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/24 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-12
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-19, 24
2-11
2-11
2-11
2-11
2-11
2-13
2-13
2-13
2-11
0/24 V DC (pulse)
0/24 V DC (pulse)
0/24 V DC (pulse)
0/24 V DC (pulse)
24 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
24 V DC
3-A2
3-A3
3-A4
3-A5
3-A6
3-A7
3-A8
3-A9
3-A10
3-A11
3-A12
3-A13
3-A14
3-A15
3-A16
3-A17
3-A18
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
*1: Optional.
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
Remarks
24 V DC supply for MPCB, input
5 V DC supply for MPCB, input
H2 on/off, output
H1 on/off, output
5 V DC supply for EPCB, output
Feedshift unit*1/eject unit*1 connected
signal, input
FSSW*1 on/off, input
FSSOL2*1 latch-on signal, output
FSFM*1 on/off, output
FSSOL1*1 latch-on signal, output
FSSOL1*1, FSSOL2*1 release signal,
output
_
FSM*1 coil energization pulse, output (B)
FSM*1 coil energization pulse, output (B)
_
FSM*1 coil energization pulse, output (A)
FSM*1 coil energization pulse, output (A)
24 V DC supply for FSPCB*1, output
5 V DC supply for FSPCB*1, output
ESW*1 on/off, input
5 V DC supply for ESW*1, output
24 V DC supply for feedshift unit*1/
eject unit*1, output
CLM-U on/off, input
CLM-L on/off, input
BYPFCL*2 on/off, input
FCL1 on/off, input
FCL2 on/off, input
FCL3 on/off, input
PFCL-U on/off, input
PFCL-L on/off, input
DUPCL*1 on/off, input
DUPPCSW*1 on/off, output
Duplex unit*1 connected signal, output
ETTH detection voltage, output
EHUMSENS detection voltage, output
FSW1 on/off, output
FSW2 on/off, output
FSW3 on/off, output
FSW3 on/off, output
*2: Optional for 120 V specifications only.
3-6-21
2AR-1
Terminals (CN)
3-A27
3-A29
3-A31
3-A32
3-A46
3-A47
3-A48
3-A49
3-A50
3-A51
3-A52
3-A53
3-A54
3-A55
3-A56
3-A57
3-A58
3-A59
3-A60
3-B1
3-B4
3-B5
3-B6
3-B7
3-B8
3-B9
3-B10
3-B11
3-B12
3-B13
3-B14
3-B15
3-B16
3-B17
3-B18
3-B19
3-B20
3-B21
3-B22
3-B23
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
*1: Optional.
3-6-22
Voltage
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0 – 15 V DC
0/5 V DC
24 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5/0 V DC
0/5 V DC
5/0 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
Remarks
MMD*2 serial signal, input
MMD*2 serial signal, output
MMD*2 connected signal, output
MMD*2 count signal, input
FTH detection voltage, output
CFM1, CFM2 HIGH SPEED signal, input
CFM1, CFM2 LOW SPEED signal, input
Total counter on/off, output
Total counter connected signal, output
Key counter*1 connected signal, output
Key card*2 on/off, input
MSW on/off, input
FUSW*1 on/off, input
TFM drive control signal (+), input
TFM drive control signal (–), input
DEV DET signal, output
TNS detection voltage, output
TNS control voltage, input
RSW on/off, output
24 V DC supply, input
H2 on/off, input
H1 on/off, input
PLSW-U on/off, output
PLSW-L on/off, output
PSW-U on/off, output
LICSW-U on/off, output
PSW-L on/off, output
LICSW-L on/off, output
PWSW-U (DIG0) on/off, output
PWSW-U (DIG1) on/off, output
PWSW-U (DIG2) on/off, output
PWSW-L (DIG0) on/off, output
PWSW-L (DIG1) on/off, output
PWSW-L (DIG2) on/off, output
Bypass table*2 connected signal, output
BYPPLSW*2 on/off, output
BYPFSW*2 on/off, output
BYPPSW*2 on/off, output
BYPPWSW*2 (DIG0) on/off, output
BYPPWSW*2 (DIG1) on/off, output
*2: Optional for 120 V specifications only.
2AR-1
Terminals (CN)
Voltage
3-B24
3-B25
3-B26
3-B27
3-B28
3-B29
3-B30
3-B31
3-B32
3-B33
3-B34
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
3-B35
3-B36
3-B37
3-B38
3-B39
3-B40
3-B41
3-B42
3-B43
3-B44
3-B45
3-B46
3-B47
3-B48
3-B51
3-B53
3-B54
3-B55
3-B56
3-B57
3-B58
3-B60
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
3-A24
4-7
4-7
4-7
4-7
4-7
4-7
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5/0 V DC
5/0 V DC
5/0 V DC
0 – 5 V DC
0/5V DC
0 – 5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0 – 5 V DC
0/5 V DC
24 V DC
24/0 V DC
24 V DC
24 V DC
24/0 V DC
24/0 V DC
24 V DC
*1: Optional.
Remarks
BYPPWSW*2 (DIG2) on/off, output
BYPLCL*2 on/off, input
BYPPFCL*2 on/off, input
JBESW*1 on/off, output
Job separator*1 connected signal, input
JOFSW*1 on/off, output
LED*1 on/off, input
DM, CL on/off, input
DM LOCK signal, output
DM drive clock pulse, input
Feedshift unit*1/eject unit*1 connected
signal, output
FSSW*1 on/off, output
FSSOL2*1 latch-on signal, input
RCL on/off, input
FSSOL1*1 latch-on signal, input
FSFM*1 on/off, input
_
FSM*1 coil energization pulse, input (B)
FSM*1 coil energization pulse, input (B)
_
FSM*1 coil energization pulse, input (A)
FSM*1 coil energization pulse, input (A)
ESW*1 on/off, output
PCFM on/off, input
SSW3 on/off, output
SSW1 on/off, output
SSW2 on/off, output
TC control voltage, input
TC on/off, input
DB control voltage, input
DB on/off, input
MC ALM signal, output
GRID control voltage, input
MC on/off, input
24 V DC supply, output
BYPPFCL*2 on/off, output
24 V DC supply for BYPPFCL*2, output
24 V DC supply for BYPLCL*2, output
BYPLCL*2 on/off, output
BYPFCL*2 on/off, output
24 V DC supply for BYPFCL*2, output
*2: Optional for 120 V specifications only.
3-6-23
2AR-1
Terminals (CN)
Voltage
4-8
4-9
4-10
4-11
4-12
4-15
4-16
4-17
4-18
4-20
7-1
7-3
7-5
7-8
7-9
7-10
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-8
8-9
4-7
4-7
4-7
4-13
4-13
4-14
4-14
4-19
4-19
4-21
7-2
7-4
7-6
7-7
7-2
7-7
8-7
8-7
8-7
8-7
8-7
8-7
8-7
8-10
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
5/0 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
24 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
24 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
24 V DC
0/13 V DC
24 V DC
0/13 V DC
24 V DC
0/24 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
8-11
8-10
24 V DC
8-12
8-10
0/5 V DC
8-13
8-14
8-16
8-17
8-18
8-19
8-22
8-23
8-24
8-25
8-26
8-15
8-15
8-15
8-15
8-15
8-20
8-21
8-21
8-21
8-27
8-27
24 V DC
0/24 V DC
0/5 V DC
14/24 V DC
14/24 V DC
0/5 V DC
*1: Optional.
3-6-24
24 V DC
0 – 15 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
Remarks
BYPPWSW*2 (DIG2) on/off, input
BYPPWSW*2 (DIG1) on/off, input
BYPPWSW*2 (DIG0) on/off, input
5 V DC supply for BYPPSW*2, output
BYPPSW*2 on/off, input
5 V DC supply for BYPFSW*2, output
BYPFSW*2 on/off, input
5 V DC supply for BYPPLSW*2, output
BYPPLSW*2 on/off, input
Bypass table*2 connected signal, input
24 V DC supply for MMD*2, output
MMD*2 serial signal, input
MMD*2 serial signal, output
MMD*2 connected signal, input
24 V DC supply for MMD*2, output
MMD*2 count on/off, output
24 V DC supply for CFM1, output
CFM1 half speed/full speed, output
24 V DC supply for CFM2, output
CFM2 half speed/full speed, output
24 V DC supply for total counter, output
Total counter on/off, input
Total counter connected signal, input
Key card*2, key counter*1 connected
signal, input
24 V DC supply for key card*2, key
counter*1, output
Key card*2, key counter*1 copy count
signal, output
24 V DC supply for MSW, output
MSW on/off, output
FUSW*1 on/off, output
TFM drive control signal (+), output
TFM drive control signal (–), output
DEV DET signal, input
TNS detection voltage, input
24 V DC supply for TNS, output
TNS control voltage, output
RSW on/off, input
5 V DC supply for RSW, output
*2: Optional for 120 V specifications only.
2AR-1
Terminals (CN)
9-5
9-7
9-9
9-10
9-11
9-12
9-13
9-14
10-A1
10-A2
10-A3
10-A4
10-A5
10-A6
10-A7
10-A8
10-A9
10-A10
10-A11
10-A12
10-B1
10-B2
10-B3
10-B4
10-B5
10-B6
10-B7
10-B8
10-B11
11-A1
11-A2
11-A3
11-A4
11-A8, A9
11-B1
11-B2
11-B3
11-B4
11-B6
11-B9
9-6
9-6
9-6
9-6
9-6
9-6
9-6
9-6
10-B9
10-B9
10-B9
10-B9
10-B9
10-B9
10-B9
10-B9
10-B9
10-B9
10-B9
10-B9
10-B9
10-B9
10-B9
10-B9
10-B9
10-B9
10-B9
10-B9
10-B9
11-A5
11-A5
11-A5
11-A5
11-A5
11-B8
11-B8
11-B8
11-B8
11-B8
11-B8
Voltage
24 V DC
0 – 5 V DC
0/13 V DC
0 – 5 V DC
0/23 V DC
0/5 V DC
0 – 15 V DC
0/18 V DC
24 V DC
0/24 V DC
24 V DC
0/24 V DC
0/24 V DC
24 V DC
0/24 V DC
24 V DC
0/24 V DC
24 V DC
0/24 V DC
24 V DC
0/24 V DC
24 V DC
0/24 V DC
24 V DC
0/24 V DC
24 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
24 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
Remarks
24 V DC supply for HVTPCB, output
TC control voltage, output
TC on/off, output
DB control voltage, output
DB on/off, output
MC ALM signal, input
GRID control voltage, output
MC on/off, output
24 V DC supply for CLM-U, output
CLM-U on/off, output
24 V DC supply for CLM-L, output
CLM-L on/off, output
RCL on/off, output
24 V DC supply for RCL, output
FCL1 on/off, output
24 V DC supply for FCL1, output
FCL2 on/off, output
24 V DC supply for FCL2, output
FCL3 on/off, output
24 V DC supply for FCL3, output
PFCL-U on/off, output
24 V DC supply for PFCL-U, output
PFCL-L on/off, output
24 V DC supply for PFCL-L, output
DUPCL* on/off, output
24 V DC supply for DUPCL*, output
DUPPCSW* on/off, input
5 V DC supply for DUPPCSW*, output
Duplex unit* connected signal, input
DM drive clock pulse, output
DM LOCK signal, input
DM on/off, output
5 V DC supply for DM, output
24 V DC supply for DM, output
5 V DC supply for LED*, output
LED* on/off, output
5 V DC supply for JOFSW*, output
JOFSW* on/off, input
Job separator* connected signal, input
5 V DC supply for JBESW*, output
* Optional.
3-6-25
2AR-1
Terminals (CN)
11-B10
12-2
12-3
12-5
12-6
12-8
12-9
12-11
12-12
12-13
12-15
13-1
13-2
13-3
13-4
14-2
14-3
14-4
14-5, 6
14-8
14-9
14-10
14-11, 12
15-1
15-3
15-4
15-5
15-6
15-8
15-9
15-11
15-12
16-1
16-2
16-4
16-5
16-7
16-9
16-10
* Optional.
3-6-26
11-B8
12-1
12-1
12-1
12-1
12-7
12-7
12-10
12-10
12-14
12-16
12-16
12-16
12-16
12-16
14-1
14-1
14-1
14-1
14-7
14-7
14-7
14-7
15-2
15-2
15-2
15-7
15-7
15-10
15-10
15-13
15-13
9-6
9-6
9-6
9-6
9-6
9-6
9-6
Voltage
0/5 V DC
5/0 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
5/0 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
24 V DC
0/24 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
24 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
24 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
24/0 V DC
24/0 V DC
24/0 V DC
24/0 V DC
24/0 V DC
0/24 V DC
24 V DC
Remarks
JBESW* on/off, input
LICSW-L on/off, input
5 V DC supply for LICSW-L, output
PSW-L on/off, input
5 V DC supply for PSW-L, output
LICSW-U on/off, input
5 V DC supply for LICSW-U, output
PSW-U on/off, input
5 V DC supply for PSW-U, output
PLSW-L on/off, input
PLSW-U on/off, input
5 V DC supply for FTH, output
FTH detection voltage, input
24 V DC supply for CL, output
CL on/off, output
PWSW-L (DIG2) on/off, input
PWSW-L (DIG1) on/off, input
PWSW-L (DIG0) on/off, input
24 V DC supply, output
PWSW-U (DIG2) on/off, input
PWSW-U (DIG1) on/off, input
PWSW-U (DIG0) on/off, input
24 V DC supply, output
ETTH detection voltage, input
EHUMSENS detection voltage, input
5 V DC supply for HUMPCB, output
FSW1 on/off, input
5 V DC supply for FSW1, output
FSW2 on/off, input
5 V DC supply for FSW2, output
FSW3 on/off, input
5 V DC supply for FSW3, output
SSW2 on/off, input
SSW2 on/off, output
SSW1 on/off, input
SSW1 on/off, output
SSW3 on/off, input
PCFM on/off, output
24 V DC supply for PCFM, output
2AR-1
(3) Main PCB
CN5
CN9
+
CN2
+
+
IC12
CN3
IC11
CN11
CN4
CN8
CN10
+
CN6
+ CN7
+
+
+
+
+
CN1
3-6-27
2AR-1
Terminals (CN)
1-1
1-4
2-A2
2-A3
2-A4
2-A5
2-A6
2-A7
2-A8
2-A9
2-A10
2-A11
2-A12
2-A13
2-A14
2-A15
2-A16
2-A17
2-A18
2-A27
2-A29
2-A31
2-A32
2-A46
2-A47
2-A48
2-A49
2-A50
2-A51
2-A52
2-A53
2-A54
2-A55
2-A56
2-A57
2-A58
2-A59
2-A60
2-B1
2-B4
1-2
1-3
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
*1: Optional.
3-6-28
Voltage
3.4 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0 – 15 V DC
0/5 V DC
24 V DC
0/5 V DC
Remarks
3.4 V DC supply, input
5 V DC supply, input
CLM-U on/off, output
CLM-L on/off, output
BYPFCL*2 on/off, output
FCL1 on/off, output
FCL2 on/off, output
FCL3 on/off, output
PFCL-U on/off, output
PFCL-L on/off, output
DUPCL*1 on/off, output
DUPPCSW*1 on/off, input
Duplex unit*1 connected signal, input
ETTH detection voltage, input
EHUMSENS detection voltage, input
FSW1 on/off, input
FSW2 on/off, input
FSW3 on/off, input
FSW3 on/off, input
MMD*2 serial signal, output
MMD*2 serial signal, input
MMD*2 connected signal, input
MMD*2 count signal, output
FTH detection voltage, input
CFM1, CFM2 HIGH SPEED signal, output
CFM1, CFM2 LOW SPEED signal, output
Total counter on/off, input
Total counter connected signal, input
Key counter*1 connected signal, input
Key card*2 on/off, output
MSW on/off, output
FUSW*1 on/off, output
TFM drive control signal (+), output
TFM drive control signal (–), output
DEV DET signal, input
TNS detection voltage, input
TNS control voltage, output
RSW on/off, input
24 V DC supply, output
H2 on/off, output
*2: Optional for 120 V specifications only.
2AR-1
Terminals (CN)
Voltage
2-B5
2-B6
2-B7
2-B8
2-B9
2-B10
2-B11
2-B12
2-B13
2-B14
2-B15
2-B16
2-B17
2-B18
2-B19
2-B20
2-B21
2-B22
2-B23
2-B24
2-B25
2-B26
2-B27
2-B28
2-B29
2-B30
2-B31
2-B32
2-B33
2-B34
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5/0 V DC
0/5 V DC
5/0 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
2-B35
2-B36
2-B37
2-B38
2-B39
2-B40
2-B41
2-B42
2-B43
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
*1: Optional.
Remarks
H1 on/off, output
PLSW-U on/off, input
PLSW-L on/off, input
PSW-U on/off, input
LICSW-U on/off, input
PSW-L on/off, input
LICSW-L on/off, input
PWSW-U (DIG0) on/off, input
PWSW-U (DIG1) on/off, input
PWSW-U (DIG2) on/off, input
PWSW-L (DIG0) on/off, input
PWSW-L (DIG1) on/off, input
PWSW-L (DIG2) on/off, input
Bypass table*2 connected signal, input
BYPPLSW*2 on/off, input
BYPFSW*2 on/off, input
BYPPSW*2 on/off, input
BYPPWSW*2 (DIG0) on/off, input
BYPPWSW*2 (DIG1) on/off, input
BYPPWSW*2 (DIG2) on/off, input
BYPLCL*2 on/off, output
BYPPFCL*2 on/off, output
JBESW*1 on/off, input
Job separator*1 connected signal, output
JOFSW*1 on/off, input
LED*1 on/off, output
DM, CL on/off, output
DM LOCK signal, input
DM drive clock pulse, output
Feedshift unit*1/eject unit*1 connected
signal, input
FSSW*1 on/off, input
FSSOL2*1 latch-on signal, output
RCL on/off, output
FSSOL1*1 latch-on signal, output
FSFM*1 on/off, output
_
FSM*1 coil energization pulse, output (B)
FSM*1 coil energization pulse, output (B)
_
FSM*1 coil energization pulse, output (A)
FSM*1 coil energization pulse, output (A)
*2: Optional for 120 V specifications only.
3-6-29
2AR-1
Terminals (CN)
2-B44
2-B45
2-B46
2-B47
2-B48
2-B51
2-B53
2-B54
2-B55
2-B56
2-B57
2-B58
2-B60
3-1, 11,
12
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-14
3-15
3-16
3-17
3-18
3-19
3-20
4-3
4-5
4-7
4-8
4-9
4-10
4-11
4-12
4-14
4-16
4-18
* Optional.
3-6-30
Voltage
Remarks
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
2-A24
3-2
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5/0 V DC
5/0 V DC
5/0 V DC
0 – 5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0 – 5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0 – 5 V DC
0/5 V DC
24 V DC
5 V DC
ESW* on/off, input
PCFM on/off, output
SSW3 on/off, input
SSW1 on/off, input
SSW2 on/off, input
TC control voltage, output
TC on/off, output
DB control voltage, output
DB on/off, output
MC ALM signal, input
GRID control voltage, output
MC on/off, output
24 V DC supply, input
5 V DC supply for printer board*, output
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-2
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
Printer board* control signal, input
Printer board* RESET signal, output
Printer board* control signal, output
Printer board* PRINT signal, input
Printer board* control signal, output
Printer board* control signal, input
Printer board* control signal, output
Printer board* control signal, input
Printer board* control signal, output
Printer board* control signal, input
Printer board* control signal, input
Printer board* control signal, output
Printer board* control signal, input
Printer board* connected signal, input
FCPCB* control signal, input
FCPCB* control signal, output
FCPCB* control signal, output
FCPCB* connected signal, input
FCPCB* SCAN signal, input
FCPCB* PRINT signal, input
FCPCB* READY signal, input
FCPCB* RESET signal, output
FCPCB* serial signal, input
FCPCB* serial signal, output
FCPCB* control signal, output
2AR-1
Terminals (CN)
4-20
4-21
4-22
4-23
4-25
4-27
4-28
4-29
4-31
4-33
4-35
4-37
4-38
4-41
4-43
5-A2
5-A4
5-A5
5-A6
5-A7
5-A8
5-A9
5-A10
5-A11
5-A12
5-B1
5-B2
5-B3
5-B4
5-B5
5-B7
5-B9
5-B11
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-5
8-6
8-7
8-9
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
5-A1
5-A3
5-A3
5-A3
5-A3
5-A3
5-A3
5-A3
5-A3
5-A3
5-B6
5-B6
5-B6
5-B6
5-B6
5-B6
5-B10
5-B12
8-4
8-4
8-4
8-4
8-4
8-4
8-8
Voltage
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
Remarks
FCPCB* PGEN signal, output
FCPCB* PGCLK signal, output
FCPCB* control signal, output
FCPCB* control signal, input
FCPCB* MAIN CLK signal, output
FCPCB* control signal, output
FCPCB* control signal, output
FCPCB* control signal, output
FCPCB* control signal, output
FCPCB* control signal, output
FCPCB* control signal, output
FCPCB* control signal, output
FCPCB* FAX ID signal, output
FCPCB* control signal, output
FCPCB* control signal, output
SCPCB SCN ACK signal, input
SCPCB MAIN SCN ACK signal, output
SCPCB MAIN SCN HEADER signal, output
SCPCB SCN START signal, output
SCPCB SCN HEADER signal, input
SCPCB SCN ENABLE signal, input
SCPCB SMRE + signal, input
SCPCB SMRE – signal, input
SCPCB SOHSYNC – signal, input
SCPCB SOHSYNC + signal, input
SCPCB image control signal SID –, input
SCPCB image control signal SID +, input
SCPCB clock pulse +, input
SCPCB clock pulse –, input
SCPCB SOVST signal, input
SCPCB SCN RESET signal, output
Serial signal to SCPCB, output
Serial signal from SCPCB, input
PM S/S signal, output
PM LD signal, input
PM clock pulse, output
5 V DC supply for LDPCB, output
LDPCB BD + signal, input
LDPCB BD – signal, input
LDPCB VIDEO – signal, output
* Optional.
3-6-30-1
3-6-31
2AR-1
Terminals (CN)
8-10
8-11
8-12
3-6-32
3-6-30-2
8-8
8-8
8-8
Voltage
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
Remarks
LDPCB VIDEO + signal, output
LDPCB ENABLE signal, output
LDPCB ADJUST signal, output
2AR
Terminals (CN)
Voltage
8-13
9-1
9-3
9-5
9-6
9-7
9-8
8-8
9-2
9-4
9-4
9-4
9-4
9-4
5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
9-9
9-10
9-11
10-1
10-3
10-5
10-6
10-7
10-9
10-11
10-12
11-1
9-4
9-4
9-4
10-2
10-4
10-4
10-4
10-8
10-10
10-10
10-10
11-2
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
11-3
11-4
0/5 V DC (pulse)
11-5
11-4
0/5 V DC
Remarks
5 V DC supply for LDPCB, output
Serial signal to OMPCB, output
Serial signal from OMPCB, input
OMPCB ACK FOR MAIN signal, input
OMPCB ACK FROM MAIN signal, output
OMPCB ERROR FOR MAIN signal, input
OMPCB ERROR FROM MAIN signal,
output
OMPCB DET SIG signal, input
OMPCB MMI STS signal, input
OMPCB RESET MAIN signal, output
Serial signal from finisher*, input
Serial signal to finisher*, output
Finisher* F RESET signal, output
Finisher* connected signal, input
Serial signal from mailbox*, input
Serial signal to mailbox*, output
Mailbox* connected signal, input
Mailbox* M RESET signal, output
Serial signal to paper feed desk*/large
paper deck*, output
Serial signal from paper feed desk*/
large paper deck*, input
FSW3 on/off, output
* Optional.
3-6-31
2AR
CN9
8
C103
C107
5
RA47 C108
10
CN8
3
1
10
D1
K
8
1
CN3
LA13
11 IC10
4
C123
X2
C23
132
C21
C150
C22
L5 4
RA70
4
4
8 5
C139
RA34 12
C47
C48
C49
5
C59
L16
13
C169
C168
R187
R177
C164
6
R84
C51
C52
4
R162
L64
L38
L39
L46
L85
L45
1
CN4
C131
R175
+
C46
C99
3
R87
C50
IC12
24
2
L72
C57
8
25
13
RA66
C60
+
L17
+
24
L14
5
C132
C55
+
C151
R178
R173
C163
38
13
8
12
R172
C62
37
48
1
C54
5
L77
C63
C64
C170
C44
RA35 C45
IC21
5
4
R176
C61
L9 R171
C26
C43
C41
C167
8
R174
8
8
C53
R111
5
RA25
C42
24
L15
C56
IC13
4
L8
4 3 4 5 8 5 8
RA27
RA30 RA29
8
R91
R92
5
L6
89
4 3
5
RA24
+
2
3
5
12
4
88
2
8
IC14
C162
R94
R83
4
5
RA32
5
R95
L1
8
4
2
C27
RA26
4
L13
C28
44
C136
RA31
4
RA19
RA20
133
1
C120
L3
C25 C124 8
C29 45
R196
C31
RA33
4 5
5
L2
3
C126 C125
RA57
20
8
RA67
C39
C122
C37
C33
RA10
L20
L60
L18
L61
L75
8
2
L4C24
L12
4
+
15
4
C149
A
5
C166
G
O
IC19
5 14
8
4
6
L34
L62
I
R194
4
L66
CN1
L67
L36
C97
5
RA42
RA44
8
R192
4
1
L33
L32
C165
L31 L63
R190
4
R160
L71
5
8
8
R108
R191
R193
R195
R197
L43
C105 RA18
+ C98
C94
8
5
8
4
C38
4
C36
L69
C96 C95 L68
C93 C92
4
C102
C101
5
5 4
C100
RA41
28 RA46
C32
17
+
C104
RA51 IC18
RA48
5 4
15
4
3 4
8
RA45
C141
14
RA40
5 2
8
RA49
C87
C84
176
C35
16
2
3
RA21
8
L44
L35
IC11
L11
4 R104
34
L30
IC20
IC16
121 R79
L21
80
R102
L19
9
IC6
L10
4
RA11
8
L25
RA50
RA37 RA36
R182
R181
R180
R179
R186
L29
R185
R183
R184
C66
R119
8
C68
RA39 RA38
14
8
IC17
L24
C78
IC7
C119
C16
3
R121
L22
C77
R32
R51
R31
8
R59
R61
R63
R65
R69
R71
R73
R75
8
C67
R120
8
4
5
R188
IC1
7
+ C19
C11
4
8
5
8
5
C143 TR1 RA8 RA9
R189
4 25
26
4
4
TR17
8
8
5
8
5
8
5
4
4
8
5
4
4
3
8
TR15
RA63
RA4
5
8
5
C90
L50
R24
16
C81
R100
RA22
4
5
R169
C129 C128
4 5
5
IC9
C80
C79
2
3
4
RA89
R101
R23
5
C160
8
4
81 C83
40
C58 C152
3-6-32
5
4
L52
8
C17
C
TR16
4
R164
4
C85
R108
L73
5
8
C86
RA43
C110
C111
2
R57
R58
R60
R62
R64
R66
R67
R68
R70
R72
R74
R76
4
L26 4
RA68
4
2
3
L41
8
C140
120
41
5 4
C91
9
1
C15
4
3
8
4
8
C76
32
R33
C118
5
R53
2
2
28
C72
C73
C14
R16
R35
IC8
L27
16
R123
R28
R27
R26
C74
C75
R25
R34
L74
4
RA61
C88
C144
8
1
R1
R4
C89
R7
R8
R11
R12
R15
5
C1
C2
C3
C4
8
C71 C69
L23
13
C18
R38
R37
R36
B
E
8
LA16
RA60
8
R170
4
R153
C114
C7
C8 RA1
5
C
L28
L76
RA62
LA2
3
4
8
5
X1
5
5
3
E
8
LA17
C147
RA28
5
C6
8
RA17 RA15
C5
7
4
5
4
4
6
B
8
8
RA6 RA7 5
RA65
RA5
IC2 14
RA12
4
8
5
R168
83
4
RA13
LA12
TR11 4 TR14 4 TR1
4
3
3
6
R21
TR7
4
3
3
3
51 4
6
TR5
TR4
50
TR6
C13
TR12
R20
R17
C117
1
6
C148
4
2
8
5
8
RA52 RA53 RA54 RA55 RA56
R52
R47 R46
5 4
4
8
8
LA11 4
2
5
RA64 R39
8
C12 L40
4
C115
5
4 5
6
4
100
8
R44 R48
LA5
R49
LA10
4
8
R166
6
R18
C10
R45
R43
RA14
L49
6
4
5
1
1
11
4 5
CN5
6
A1
B12
4
5
4
TR3
C9
LA6
4 5
8
A12
B1
8 LA1
6
C118
R42
8
76 IC5
75
4
8
R152
14
8
4 5
6
R19
C113
IC4
C146 LA9
4
TR9
7
LA4
7
1
12
CN6 CN7
4 5
6
4
5
R40 R41
3
6
3
4 5
8
6
4
3
4
IC3
14
6
TR2 4
3
44
R151
8
34
3
4 5
8
R154
8
1
4
4
5
8 5
3TR8 LA3 TR10
3
2
6
2
LA8 C112 C145 LA7
1
14
R158
160
RA2 L70
RA3
L42
CN2
(4) Scanner control PCB
2AR
Terminals (CN)
Voltage
1-1, 5
1-2
1-6
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
1-3
1-3
1-4
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-14
5 V DC
3.4 V DC
+12 V DC
0/5 V DC
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
3-1
3-3
3-5
3-7
3-9
4-1
4-3
4-5
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
6-1
6-2
6-3
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-14
3-2
3-2
3-4
3-6
3-10
4-2
4-4
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-6
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5/0 V DC
5/0 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
+12 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5/0 V DC
5/0 V DC
5/0 V DC
5/0 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
6-4
6-5
4-6
4-6
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
Remarks
5 V DC supply from PSPCB, input
3.4 V DC supply from PSPCB, input
+12 V DC supply from PSPCB, input
ODSW on/off, input
SM current control voltage SM Vref, output
SM drive control signal SM M1, output
SM drive control signal SM M2, output
SM drive control signal SM M3, output
SM drive control signal SM M4, output
SM drive control signal SM M5, output
SM drive clock pulse, output
SM rotation direction switching signal SM
CWB, output
SM control signal SM RET, output
SM enable signal, output
EL on/off, output
SHPSW on/off, input
CCD drive clock signal, output
CCDPCB RS signal, output
CCDPCB CLP signal, output
CCDPCB SHIFT signal, output
5 V DC supply for CCDPCB, output
CCD control signal VO_O, input
CCD control signal VO_E, input
+12 V DC supply for CCDPCB, output
OSBSW* on/off, input
OFSW* on/off, input
OSSW* on/off, input
SRDF* installed/not installed signal, input
OSWSW* on/off, input
DFSSW2* off/on, input
DFSSW1* off/on, input
OSLSW* off/on, input
DFTSW* off/on, input
OFM* control signal OFM RET, output
OFM* drive clock pulse, output
OFM* rotation direction switching signal
OFM CWB, output
OCM* enable signal, output
OCM* control signal OCM RET, output
* Optional.
3-6-33
2AR
Terminals (CN)
Voltage
6-6
6-7
4-6
4-6
6-8
4-6
6-9
6-10
6-11
4-6
4-6
4-6
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-9
7-10
7-11
7-12
8-2
8-3
9-A1
9-A2
9-A3
9-A4
9-A5
9-A6
9-A7
9-A8
9-A9
9-A11
9-B2
9-B4
9-B6
9-B9
9-B10
9-B11
9-B12
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-6
8-1
8-1
9-A10
9-A10
9-A10
9-A10
9-A10
9-A10
9-A10
9-A10
9-A10
9-A12
9-B1
9-B3
9-B7
9-B7
9-B7
9-B7
9-B7
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
* Optional.
3-6-34
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
Remarks
OCM* drive clock pulse, output
OCM* rotation direction switching signal
OCM CWB, output
OCM* current control voltage OCM Vref,
output
OCM* drive control signal OCM M3, output
OCM* drive control signal OCM M2, output
OCM* drive control signal OCM M1,
output
OSLED* (red) on/off, output
OSLED* (green) on/off, output
SBPSOL* release signal, output
SBPSOL* latch-on signal, output
OFCL* on/off, output
EFSSOL* on/off, output
SBFSSOL* on/off, output
OFSOL* release signal, output
OFSOL* latch-on signal, output
OFM* enable signal, output
5 V DC supply for OSS, output
OSS on/off, input
MPCB SOHSYNC + signal, output
MPCB SOHSYNC – signal, output
MPCB SMRE – signal, output
MPCB SMRE + signal, output
MPCB SCN ENABLE signal, output
MPCB SCN HEADER signal, output
MPCB SCN START signal, input
MPCB MAIN SCN HEADER signal, input
MPCB MAIN SCN ACK signal, input
MPCB SCN ACK signal, output
Serial signal to MPCB, output
Serial signal from MPCB, input
MPCB SCN RESET signal, input
MPCB clock pulse –, output
MPCB clock pulse +, output
MPCB image control signal SID +, output
MPCB image control signal SID –, output
2AR
(5) Scanner motor PCB
CN4
3
1
C11
J10
J4
C118
C16
C119
C111
J11
J12
TP1
C5
C110
+
C112
C10
C113
C101
+
L1
L2
C17
4
C18
CN6
JP5
JP15
JP6
JP16
J13
L3
C1
DT1
J1
R12
JP102
22
J8
1
E C B
DT2
J15
J14
EC
C12
+
1
2
C13
CN3
JP7
JP8
CN1
R3
JP100
JP101
R6
R15
R16
1
B
D1
C22
L5
JP9
J2 R1
R2
C6
C102
C19
R7
IC1
C7
C23
JP11
R8
14
5
6
C20
C8
J16
J9
C21
J17
R9
J5
C121
C9
C3
C120
C100
+
C116
C115
L4
J6
C114
1
C117
J7
J3
1
3
CN5
1
6
CN2
3-6-35
2AR-1
Terminals (CN)
Voltage
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
5/0 V DC
5/0 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-10
1-11
1-12
1-13
1-14
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
4-1
4-2
5-1
5-2
6-2
6-4
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
3-6
3-6
3-6
3-6
3-6
3-6
3-5
3-5
3-5
3-5
4-3
4-3
5-3
5-3
6-1
6-3
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
3-6-36
0/5 V DC
0/24 V DC (pulse)
24 V DC
0/24 V DC (pulse)
0/24 V DC (pulse)
24 V DC
0/24 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
24 V DC
24 V DC
5 V DC
5/0 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
24 V DC
5 V DC
Remarks
SHPSW on/off, output
EL on/off, input
SM enable signal, input
SM control signal SM RET, input
SM rotation direction switching signal SM
CWB, input
SM drive clock pulse, input
SM drive control signal SM M5, input
SM drive control signal SM M4, input
SM drive control signal SM M3, input
SM drive control signal SM M2, input
SM drive control signal SM M1, input
SM current control voltage SM Vref, input
ODSW on/off, output
_
SM coil energization pulse, output (B)
24 V DC supply for SM, output
SM coil energization pulse, output (B)
SM coil energization pulse, output (A)
24 V DC supply for SM, output
_
SM coil energization pulse, output (A)
EL on/off, output
EL on/off, output
24 V DC supply for INPCB, output
24 V DC supply for INPCB, output
5 V DC supply for SHPSW, output
SHPSW on/off, input
5 V DC supply for ODSW, output
ODSW on/off, input
24 V DC supply from PSPCB, input
5 V DC supply from PSPCB, input
2AR
(6) CCD PCB
C17
C16
RA1
C22
R4
C2
TR1
R5
F10
5
R6
E
B
TR2
R8
C7
R7
C6
6
C28
R10
R9
1
F4
IC3
F5
R12
9
1
F6
R19 R20 R21 R22
C10
C11
10
C12
R2
1
IC2
C
CN2
R11
E
B
C3
C4
C5
C
R3
F1
R15 F9 1
C8
F2 C9
C26
C27
C29
R1
R13
R16
R17
R14
C1
+
C20
F3
C13
C14
F18
CN1
C15
C32
3-6-37
2AR-1
Terminals (CN)
1-1
1-3
1-5
1-7
1-9
2-1
2-3
2-5
3-6-38
1-2
1-2
1-4
1-6
1-10
2-2
2-4
2-6
Voltage
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
+12 V DC
Remarks
CCD drive clock signal, input
CCDPCB RS signal, input
CCDPCB CLP signal, input
CCDPCB SHIFT signal, input
5 V DC supply from SCPCB, input
CCD control signal VO_O, input
CCD control signal VO_E, input
+12 V DC supply from SCPCB, input
2AR
(7) Operation unit main PCB
R9
R9
B
1
C
C
TR1
E
+
TR1
E
+
C1
5
L1
L2
IC8
1
CN6
L1
L2
IC8
C1
1
L27L28
L19
R8
13
B
1
5
1
L27L28
L19
R8
13
1
CN6
40
41
64
65
DC1
40
41
64
65
DC1
L22
11
1
L22
11
1
9
9
+
1
+
1
25
24
80
+
C3
TP1
IC10
15
25
24
80
+
C3
TP1
IC10
15
1
1
1
IC2
IC11
1
1
IC4
TP4
1
IC12
IC4
TP4
1
23
15
D1
15
4
14
L7
18
+ +
CN9
14
L7
18
+ +
CN9
13
1
13
TP6 L53 L54 L55
TP5
23
4
TP6 L53 L54 L55
TP5
TH1
8
TH1
8
L45 L47 L49 L51
1
8
1
IC12
L46 L48 L50 L52
CN8
IC2
8
TP3
L23
L24
TP2
C2
8
1
C2
IC11
TP3
L23
L24
TP2
8
1
L45 L47 L49 L51
1
L46 L48 L50 L52
CN8
1
19
81
100
9
1
IC3
8
4
80
CN4
R10 R11 R12
9
IC3
8
4
80
IC5
1
IC5
TR5 TR7 TR8 TR9
L57 L58
9
19
81
100
1
CN4
R10 R11 R12
TR5 TR7 TR8 TR9
L57 L58
9
1
TR11
TR11
51
30
15
51
30
15
50
31
X1
L62 L63
50
31
L62 L63
8
L64
8
L64
IC6
1
1
IC6
1
1
CN3
IC7
CN5
CN3
IC7
CN5
8
8
9
1
1
9
1
1
TR2
B
R6
TR3
B
TR4
B
C
1 IC13
TR2
B
R6
TR3
B
TR4
B
C
1 IC13
9
R7
R5
L17
L18
E
R18
9
R7
R5
L17
L18
E
R18
L8
L9
L10
L11
L8
L9
L10
L11
1
CN2
9
1
8
1
CN2
9
1
8
R3
R3
L15
R4
R4
CN1
CN1
R17
R17
L16
R16 R13
R14
L16
R16 R13
R14
TR12
E
TR12
E
R15
X1
R15
TR13
TR13
L59
L59
AK
AK
TR10
E
L60
L61
TR10
E
L60
L61
C5
C5
TR6
TR6
L56
L15
L56
K
A
K
A
L4
L4
C4
D1
C4
L5
L6
L5
L6
LED1
LED1
L14
L40
L41
L42
L43
L44
L14
L40
L41
L42
L43
L44
L12
L13
L21
L36
L37
L38
L39
L12
L13
L21
L36
L37
L38
L39
IC1
IC1
L33
L34
L35
L33
L34
L35
L3
L20
L29
L30
L31
L32
L3
L20
L29
L30
L31
L32
R1
R1
CN7
CN7
R2
L26
R2
L26
L25
L25
B25
B26
A25
A26
B1
B2
A1
A2
B25
B26
A25
A26
B1
B2
A1
A2
3-6-39
2AR
Terminals (CN)
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-13
5-14
5-15
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
3-6-40
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-1
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
Voltage
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
24 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
0 – 30 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
Remarks
OLPCB scan signal SCAN0, output
OLPCB scan signal SCAN1, output
OLPCB scan signal SCAN2, output
OLPCB scan signal SCAN3, output
OLPCB scan signal SCAN4, output
OLPCB scan signal SCAN5, output
OLPCB scan signal SCAN6, output
OLPCB scan signal SCAN7, output
OLPCB KEY SENSE0 signal, input
OLPCB KEY SENSE1 signal, input
OLPCB KEY SENSE2 signal, input
OLPCB LDONX0 signal, input
OLPCB LDONX1 signal, input
OLPCB LDONX2 signal, input
OLPCB LDONX3 signal, input
24 V DC supply for OLPCB, output
CFL on/off, output
ORPCB scan signal SCAN0, output
ORPCB scan signal SCAN1, output
ORPCB scan signal SCAN2, output
ORPCB scan signal SCAN3, output
ORPCB scan signal SCAN4, output
ORPCB scan signal SCAN5, output
ORPCB scan signal SCAN6, output
ORPCB scan signal SCAN7, output
ORPCB KEY SENSE3 signal, input
ORPCB KEY SENSE4 signal, input
ORPCB KEY SENSE5 signal, input
ORPCB LDONX3 signal, input
ORPCB LDONX4 signal, input
ORPCB LDONX5 signal, input
ORPCB LDONX6 signal, input
5 V DC supply for LCD, output
LCD VEE signal, output
LCD UD3 data, output
LCD UD2 data, output
LCD UD1 data, output
LCD UD0 data, output
LCD CP signal, output
LCD FLM signal, output
2AR
Terminals (CN)
6-9
6-10
6-11
8-5
8-7
8-7
8-8
8-9
8-10
8-11
8-13
8-15
9-1
9-2
6-12
6-12
6-1
8-12
8-12
8-12
8-12
8-12
8-12
8-12
8-12
8-14
9-4
9-3
Voltage
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0 – 22 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
24 V DC
5 V DC
Remarks
LCD DISP OFF signal, output
LCD LP signal, output
LCD VO signal, output
OMPCB RESET MAIN signal, input
OMPCB MMI STS signal, output
OMPCB DET SIG signal, output
OMPCB ERROR FROM MAIN signal, input
OMPCB ERROR FOR MAIN signal, output
OMPCB ACK FROM MAIN signal, input
OMPCB ACK FOR MAIN signal, output
Serial signal to MPCB, output
Serial signal from MPCB, input
24 V DC supply from PSPCB, input
5 V DC supply from PSPCB, input
3-6-41
2AR-1
(8) Operation unit left PCB
L10
L15
KEY12
KEY4
L16
KEY8
KEY13
L12 KEY9
KEY2
L5
L17 KEY14
KEY19
KEY15
8
KEY20
L14
L19
KEY17
L21
KEY18
L22
L23 L24 L25 L26 L27 L28 L29
1
1
L7
CN4
KEY10
L6
CN3
L20
9
CN6
1
2
L18
L13
KEY3
KEY6
Terminals (CN)
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
6-1
6-2
3-6-42
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
KEY11
KEY16
Voltage
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
24 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
24 V DC
0/5 V DC
KEY21
KEY22
KEY23
KEY24
Remarks
OLPCB scan signal SCAN7, input
OLPCB scan signal SCAN6, input
OLPCB scan signal SCAN5, input
OLPCB scan signal SCAN4, input
OLPCB scan signal SCAN3, input
OLPCB scan signal SCAN2, input
OLPCB scan signal SCAN1, input
OLPCB scan signal SCAN0, input
CFL on/off, input
24 V DC supply from OMPCB, input
OLPCB LDONX3 signal, output
OLPCB LDONX2 signal, output
OLPCB LDONX1 signal, output
OLPCB LDONX0 signal, output
OLPCB KEY SENSE2 signal, output
OLPCB KEY SENSE1 signal, output
OLPCB KEY SENSE0 signal, output
24 V DC supply for LCDINPCB, output
CFL on/off, output
2AR
(9) Operation unit right PCB
15
1
CN5
L78
L43
L45
L36
KEY26
KEY29
L31
L30
L37
L38
KEY30
KEY27
KEY31
KEY28
KEY32
L42
L33
KEY33
L39
L40
KEY35
KEY36
KEY34
L34 L41
KEY37
KEY0
L47
KEY38
KEY39
KEY25
L49
KEY43
KEY41
KEY42
L50L51L52L53
KEY40
Terminals (CN)
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-13
5-14
5-15
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
6-12
Voltage
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
Remarks
ORPCB LDONX6 signal, input
ORPCB LDONX5 signal, input
ORPCB LDONX4 signal, input
ORPCB LDONX3 signal, input
ORPCB KEY SENSE5 signal, input
ORPCB KEY SENSE4 signal, input
ORPCB KEY SENSE3 signal, input
ORPCB scan signal SCAN7, output
ORPCB scan signal SCAN6, output
ORPCB scan signal SCAN5, output
ORPCB scan signal SCAN4, output
ORPCB scan signal SCAN3, output
ORPCB scan signal SCAN2, output
ORPCB scan signal SCAN1, output
ORPCB scan signal SCAN0, output
3-6-43
2AR-1
(10) LCD
100
81
80
IC5
81
1
100
80
IC4
81
1
80
8
IC2
1
3-6-44
8
64
IC3
1 30
C8
51
31
50
30
51 30
31
50
40
51
31
50
25
80
1
C2
L2
R10
1-13
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-13
1-2
2-5
41
65
Terminals (CN)
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-10
1-11
1-12
1-13
2-1
R1
7
14
R15
9
C13 C12
R11
R12
E R13
R14
IC1
1
C10
CN1
C3
Q1
16
L4
C19
C22
IC6
L5
C14
C15
Voltage
0 – 22 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0 – 30 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
Remarks
LCD VO signal, input
LCD LP signal, input
LCD DISP OFF signal, input
LCD FLM signal, input
LCD CP signal, input
LCD UD0 data, input
LCD UD1 data, input
LCD UD2 data, input
LCD UD3 data, input
LCD VEE signal, input
5 V DC supply from OMPCB, input
CFL on/off, input
24
C11
C9
C6
C7
100
1
R5
R4
C1
13 L1
L6
C17
C18
L3
C5
C4
L7
C20
C21
C16
R9
R8
R7
R6
R3
R2
2AR
3-6-4 Electrical problems
Problem
Causes
(1)
The machine
does not
operate when
the main
switch is
turned on.
No electricity at the
power outlet.
Measure the input voltage.
The power cord is
not plugged in
properly.
Check the contact between the power plug
and the outlet.
The front cover,
left 1 cover or left
2 cover is not
closed completely.
Check the front cover, left 1 cover and left 2
cover.
Broken power cord.
Check for continuity. If none, replace the cord.
Defective main
switch.
Check for continuity across the contacts. If
none, replace the main switch.
Blown fuse in the
power source PCB.
Check for continuity. If none, remove the
cause of blowing and replace the fuse.
Defective safety
switch 1, 2 or 3.
Check for continuity across the contacts of
each switch. If none, replace the switch.
Defective power
source PCB.
With AC present, check for 5 V DC at CN3-28
on the power source PCB, 12 V DC at CN3-30,
24 V DC at CN3-7 and 3.4 V DC at CN3-29.
If none, replace the power source PCB.
Poor contact of the
drive motor connector terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If
none, repair or replace the cable.
Broken drive motor
gear.
Check visually and replace the drive motor if
necessary.
Defective drive
motor.
Run maintenance item U030 and check if the
drive motor operates when CN11-A3 on the
engine PCB goes low. If not, replace the drive
motor.
Defective main
PCB.
Run maintenance item U030 and check if
CN2-B31 on the main PCB goes low. If not,
replace the main PCB.
(2)
The drive
motor does
not operate
(C200).
Check procedures/corrective measures
3-6-45
2AR
Problem
(3)
The scanner
motor does
not operate.
(4)
The upper lift
motor does
not operate
(C241).
(5)
The lower lift
motor does
not operate
(C242).
3-6-46
Causes
Check procedures/corrective measures
Broken scanner
motor coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none,
replace the scanner motor.
Poor contact of the
scanner motor connector terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If
none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective scanner
control PCB.
Check if the motor drive coil energization
pulse signals are output at CN2-3, CN2-4,
CN2-5, CN2-6 and CN2-7 on the scanner
control PCB when maintenance item U073 is
run. If not, replace the scanner control PCB.
Broken upper lift
motor coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none,
replace the upper lift motor.
Poor contact of the
upper lift motor connector terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If
none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective engine
PCB.
Check if 24 V DC is output across CN10-A1
and CN10-A2 on the engine PCB right after
the upper drawer is installed. If not, replace
the engine PCB.
Broken lower lift
motor coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none,
replace the lower lift motor.
Poor contact of the
lower lift motor connector terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If
none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective engine
PCB.
Check if 24 V DC is output across CN10-A3
and CN10-A4 on the engine PCB right after
the lower drawer is installed. If not, replace
the engine PCB.
2AR
Problem
(6)
The toner
feed motor
does not
operate.
(7)
The paper
conveying
section fan
motor does
not operate.
(8)
Cooling fan
motor 1 does
not operate at
all or does not
turn at full
speed.
(9)
Cooling fan
motor 2 does
not operate at
all or does not
turn at full
speed.
Causes
Check procedures/corrective measures
Broken toner feed
motor coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none,
replace the toner feed motor.
Poor contact of the
toner feed motor
connector terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If
none, repair or replace the cable.
Defective engine
PCB.
Run maintenance item U135 and check if
drive pulse signal is output across CN8-17
and CN8-18 on the engine PCB. If not,
replace the engine PCB.
Broken paper conveying section fan
motor coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none,
replace the paper conveying section fan
motor.
Poor contact of the
paper conveying
section fan motor
connector terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If
none, repair or replace the cable.
Defective engine
PCB.
Run maintenance item U030. If 24 V DC is
always present at CN16-9 on the engine
PCB, replace the engine PCB.
Broken cooling fan
motor 1 coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none,
replace cooling fan motor 1.
Poor contact of the
cooling fan motor 1
connector terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If
none, repair or replace the cable.
Defective engine
PCB.
Run maintenance item U030 and check if
CN8-2 on the engine PCB goes low. If not,
replace the engine PCB.
Broken cooling fan
motor 2 coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none,
replace cooling fan motor 2.
Poor contact of the
cooling fan motor 2
connector terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If
none, repair or replace the cable.
Defective engine
PCB.
Run maintenance item U030 and check if
CN8-4 on the engine PCB goes low. If not,
replace the engine PCB.
3-6-47
2AR
Problem
(10)
The upper
paper feed
clutch does
not operate.
(11)
The lower
paper feed
clutch does
not operate.
(12)
Feed clutch 1
does not
operate.
(13)
Feed clutch 2
does not
operate.
3-6-48
Causes
Check procedures/corrective measures
Broken upper paper
feed clutch coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none,
replace the upper paper feed clutch.
Poor contact of the
upper paper feed
clutch connector
terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If
none, repair or replace the cable.
Defective engine
PCB.
Run maintenance item U032 and check if
CN10-B1 on the engine PCB goes low. If
not, replace the engine PCB.
Broken lower paper
feed clutch coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none,
replace the lower paper feed clutch.
Poor contact of the
lower paper feed
clutch connector
terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If
none, repair or replace the cable.
Defective engine
PCB.
Run maintenance item U032 and check if
CN10-B3 on the engine PCB goes low. If
not, replace the engine PCB.
Broken feed clutch
1 coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none,
replace feed clutch 1.
Poor contact of
feed clutch 1 connector terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If
none, repair or replace the cable.
Defective engine
PCB.
Run maintenance item U032 and check if
CN10-A7 on the engine PCB goes low. If
not, replace the engine PCB.
Broken feed clutch
2 coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none,
replace feed clutch 2.
Poor contact of
feed clutch 2 connector terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If
none, repair or replace the cable.
Defective engine
PCB.
Run maintenance item U032 and check if
CN10-A9 on the engine PCB goes low. If
not, replace the engine PCB.
2AR-1
Problem
Causes
Check procedures/corrective measures
(14)
Feed clutch 3
does not
operate.
Broken feed clutch
3 coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none,
replace feed clutch 3.
Poor contact of
feed clutch 3 connector terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If
none, repair or replace the cable.
Defective engine
PCB.
Run maintenance item U032 and check if
CN10-A11 on the engine PCB goes low. If
not, replace the engine PCB.
Broken registration
clutch coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none,
replace the registration clutch.
Poor contact of the
registration clutch
connector terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If
none, repair or replace the cable.
Defective engine
PCB.
Run maintenance item U032 and check if
CN10-A5 on the engine PCB goes low. If
not, replace the engine PCB.
(16)
The cleaning
lamp does not
turn on.
Poor contact of the
cleaning lamp connector terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If
none, repair or replace the cable.
Defective engine
PCB.
If the cleaning lamp turns on when CN13-4
on the engine PCB is low, replace the engine
PCB.
(17)
The exposure
lamp does not
turn on.
Poor contact of the
exposure lamp
connector terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If
none, repair or replace the cable.
Defective inverter
PCB.
If the exposure lamp does not turn on when
CN1-5 and CN1-6 on the inverter PCB are
low, replace the inverter PCB.
Defective scanner
motor PCB.
If the exposure lamp turns on when CN3-1
and 3-2 on the scanner motor PCB are low,
replace the scanner motor PCB.
(15)
The registration clutch
does not
operate.
3-6-49
2AR
Problem
Causes
Check procedures/corrective measures
(18)
The exposure
lamp does not
turn off.
Defective inverter
PCB.
If the exposure lamp does not turn off when
CN1-5 and CN1-6 on the inverter PCB are
high, replace the inverter PCB.
Defective scanner
motor PCB.
If CN3-1 and CN3-2 on the scanner motor
PCB are always low, replace the scanner
motor PCB.
(19)
Fixing heater
M or S does
not turn on
(C620).
Broken wire in fixing heater M or S.
Check for continuity across each heater. If
none, replace the heater (see page 3-3-57).
Fixing unit thermostat triggered.
Check for continuity across the thermostat. If
none, remove the cause and replace the
thermostat.
Broken fixing unit
thermistor wire.
Measure the resistance. If it is ∞ Ω, replace
the fixing unit thermistor.
(20)
Fixing heater
M or S does
not turn off
(fixing unit
thermostat
triggered;
C630).
Dirty sensor part of
the fixing unit thermistor.
Check visually and clean the thermistor sensor
parts.
Defective engine
PCB.
If fixing heater M/S stays on when CN1-6
and CN1-7 on the engine PCB are high,
replace the engine PCB.
(21)
Main charging
is not
performed
(C510).
Broken main
charger wire.
See page 3-6-4.
Leaking main
charger housing.
Poor contact of the
high-voltage transformer PCB connector terminals.
Defective main
PCB.
Defective engine
PCB.
Defective highvoltage transformer
PCB.
3-6-50
2AR
Problem
(22)
Transfer
charging is
not performed.
Causes
Broken transfer
wire.
Check procedures/corrective measures
See page 3-6-3.
Poor contact of the
high-voltage transformer PCB connector terminals.
Defective main
PCB.
Defective engine
PCB.
Defective highvoltage transformer
PCB.
(23)
No developing
bias is output.
(24)
The original
size is not
detected.
Poor contact of the
developing bias
wire.
Check the developing bias wire. If there is
any problem, replace it.
Poor contact of the
high-voltage transformer PCB connector terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If
none, repair or replace the cable.
Defective highvoltage transformer
PCB.
Check if the developing bias is output when
CN1-4 on the high-voltage transformer PCB
is low while maintenance item U030 is run. If
not, replace the high-voltage transformer
PCB.
Defective engine
PCB.
Check if CN9-11 on the engine PCB goes
low during copying. If not, replace the engine
PCB.
Defective original
detection switch.
If the level of CN5-2 on the scanner motor
PCB does not change when the original
detection switch is turned on and off, replace
the original detection switch.
3-6-51
2AR
Problem
(25)
The original
size is not
detected
correctly.
Causes
Check procedures/corrective measures
Original is not
placed correctly.
Check the original and correct if necessary.
Poor contact of the
original size sensor
connector terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If
none, repair or replace the cable.
Defective original
size sensor or the
scanner control
PCB.
Check if the original size sensor operates
correctly. If not, replace it or, if necessary,
the scanner control PCB.
(26)
The message
requesting
paper to be
loaded is
shown when
paper is
present in the
upper drawer.
Poor contact of the
upper paper switch
connector terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If
none, repair or replace the cable.
Defective upper
paper switch.
Check if CN12-11 on the engine PCB goes
low when the upper paper switch is turned
on with 5 V DC present at CN12-12 on the
engine PCB. If not, replace the upper paper
switch.
(27)
The message
requesting
paper to be
loaded is
shown when
paper is
present in the
lower drawer.
Poor contact of the
lower paper switch
connector terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If
none, repair or replace the cable.
Defective lower
paper switch.
Check if CN12-5 on the engine PCB goes
low when the lower paper switch is turned
on with 5 V DC present at CN12-6 on the
engine PCB. If none, replace the lower
paper switch.
3-6-52
2AR
Problem
Causes
(28)
The size of
paper in the
upper drawer
is not displayed correctly.
Poor contact of the
upper paper length
switch connector
terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If
none, repair or replace the cable.
Poor contact of the
upper paper width
switch connector
terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If
none, repair or replace the cable.
Defective upper
paper length
switch.
Check if CN12-15 on the engine PCB goes
low when the upper paper length switch is
turned on. If not, replace the upper paper
length switch.
Defective upper
paper width switch.
Check if the levels of CN14-8, CN14-9 and
CN14-10 on the engine PCB change alternately when the width guide in the upper
drawer is moved. If not, replace the upper
paper width switch.
Poor contact of the
lower paper length
switch connector
terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If
none, repair or replace the cable.
Poor contact of the
lower paper width
switch connector
terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If
none, repair or replace the cable.
Defective lower
paper length
switch.
Check if CN12-13 on the engine PCB goes
low when the lower paper length switch is
turned on. If not, replace the lower paper
length switch.
Defective lower
paper width switch.
Check if the levels of CN14-2, CN14-3 and
CN14-4 on the engine PCB change alternately when the width guide in the lower
drawer is moved. If not, replace the lower
paper width switch.
(29)
The size of
paper in the
lower drawer
is not displayed correctly.
Check procedures/corrective measures
3-6-53
2AR
Problem
Causes
(30)
A paper jam
in the paper
feed or paper
conveying
section is indicated when
the main
switch is
turned on.
A piece of paper
torn from copy
paper is caught
around feed switch
1/2/3 or the registration switch.
Check and remove if any.
Defective feed
switch 1.
With 5 V DC present at CN15-6 on the
engine PCB, check if CN15-5 on the engine
PCB remains low when feed switch 1 is
turned on and off. If it does, replace feed
switch 1.
Defective feed
switch 2.
With 5 V DC present at CN15-9 on the
engine PCB, check if CN15-8 on the engine
PCB remains low when feed switch 2 is
turned on and off. If it does, replace feed
switch 2.
Defective feed
switch 3.
With 5 V DC present at CN15-12 on the
engine PCB, check if CN15-11 on the engine
PCB remains low when feed switch 3 is
turned on and off. If it does, replace feed
switch 3.
Defective registration switch.
With 5 V DC present at CN8-26 on the
engine PCB, check if CN8-25 on the engine
PCB remains low when the registration
switch is turned on and off. If it does, replace
the registration switch.
(31)
The message
requesting
covers to be
closed is displayed when
the front, left
1 and left 2
covers are
closed.
Poor contact of the
connector terminals
of safety switch 1,
2 or 3.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If
none, repair or replace the cable.
Defective safety
switch 1, 2 or 3.
Check for continuity across each switch. If
there is no continuity when the switch is on,
replace it.
(32)
Others.
Wiring is broken,
shorted or makes
poor contact.
Check for continuity. If none, repair.
Noise.
Locate the source of noise and remove.
3-6-54
Check procedures/corrective measures
2AR
3-6-5 Mechanical problems
Problem
(1)
No primary
paper feed.
(2)
No secondary
paper feed.
(3)
Skewed paper
feed.
Causes/check procedures
Corrective measures
Check if the surfaces of the
following rollers or pulleys are
dirty with paper powder: forwarding pulleys, paper feed pulleys,
separation pulleys, left/right feed
rollers, feed rollers 1/2 and feed
pulley.
Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
Check if the paper feed pulleys
or separation pulleys are
deformed.
Replace if necessary (see page
3-3-3).
Check if the forwarding pulleys
are deformed.
Replace if necessary (see page
3-3-3).
Electrical problem with the
following electromagnetic
clutches: upper/lower paper feed
clutches, feed clutches 1/2/3.
See pages 3-6-48 and 49.
Check if the surfaces of the left
or right registration roller is dirty
with paper powder.
Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
Electrical problem with the
registration clutch.
See page 3-6-49.
Width guide in a drawer installed
incorrectly.
Check the width guide visually
and remedy or replace if necessary.
Deformed width guide in a
drawer.
Check the width guide visually
and remedy or replace if it is
deformed.
Check if a pressure spring along
the paper conveying path is
deformed or out of place.
Remedy or replace.
3-6-55
2AR
Problem
Causes/check procedures
Corrective measures
(4)
The scanner
does not
travel.
Check if the scanner wire is
loose.
Reinstall the scanner wire (see
page 3-3-25).
The scanner motor malfunctions.
See page 3-6-46.
(5)
Multiple sheets
of paper are
fed at one
time.
Check if the separation pulleys
are worn.
Replace the separation pulleys
if they are worn (see page 3-3-3).
Check if the paper is curled.
Change the paper.
(6)
Paper jams.
Check if the paper is excessively
curled.
Change the paper.
Deformed guides along the
paper conveying path.
Check visually and remedy or
replace any deformed guides.
Check if the contact between
the left and right registration
rollers is correct.
Remedy if necessary. Replace
the pressure spring if it is
deformed.
Check if the press roller is
extremely dirty or deformed.
Clean or replace the press
roller.
Check if the contact between
the heat roller and its separation claws is correct.
Repair if any springs are off the
separation claws.
(7)
Toner drops
on the paper
conveying
path.
Check if the developing section
of the image formation unit is
extremely dirty.
Clean the developing section of
the image formation unit.
(8)
Abnormal
noise is
heard.
Check if the pulleys, rollers and
gears operate smoothly.
Grease the bearings and gears.
Check if the following electromagnetic clutches are installed
correctly: upper/lower paper
feed clutches and feed clutches
1/2/3.
Remedy.
3-6-56
2AR-1
2AR
CONTENTS
3-7 Appendixes
Timing chart No. 1 ........................................................................................ 3-7-1
Timing chart No. 2 ........................................................................................ 3-7-2
Timing chart No. 3 ........................................................................................ 3-7-3
Timing chart No. 4 ........................................................................................ 3-7-4
Timing chart No. 5 ........................................................................................ 3-7-5
Timing chart No. 6 ........................................................................................ 3-7-6
Timing chart No. 7 ........................................................................................ 3-7-7
Timing chart No. 8 ........................................................................................ 3-7-8
Timing chart No. 9 ........................................................................................ 3-7-9
Timing chart No. 10 ................................................................................... 3-7-9-1
Timing chart No. 11 ................................................................................... 3-7-9-2
Power source PCB ...................................................................................... 3-7-10
Engine PCB 1/2 ........................................................................................... 3-7-11
Engine PCB 2/2 ........................................................................................... 3-7-12
Main PCB 1/20 ............................................................................................ 3-7-13
Main PCB 2/20 ........................................................................................... 3-7-14
Main PCB 3/20 ........................................................................................... 3-7-15
Main PCB 4/20 ........................................................................................... 3-7-16
Main PCB 5/20 ........................................................................................... 3-7-17
Main PCB 6/20 ........................................................................................... 3-7-18
Main PCB 7/20 ........................................................................................... 3-7-19
Main PCB 8/20 ........................................................................................... 3-7-20
Main PCB 9/20 ........................................................................................... 3-7-21
Main PCB 10/20 ......................................................................................... 3-7-22
Main PCB 11/20 ......................................................................................... 3-7-23
Main PCB 12/20 ......................................................................................... 3-7-24
Main PCB 13/20 ......................................................................................... 3-7-25
Main PCB 14/20 ......................................................................................... 3-7-26
Main PCB 15/20 ......................................................................................... 3-7-27
Main PCB 16/20 ......................................................................................... 3-7-28
Main PCB 17/20 ......................................................................................... 3-7-29
Main PCB 18/20 ......................................................................................... 3-7-30
Main PCB 19/20 ......................................................................................... 3-7-31
Main PCB 20/20 ......................................................................................... 3-7-32
Scanner control PCB 1/4 ............................................................................. 3-7-33
Scanner control PCB 2/4 ............................................................................. 3-7-34
Scanner control PCB 3/4 ............................................................................. 3-7-35
Scanner control PCB 4/4 ............................................................................. 3-7-36
Scanner motor PCB ..................................................................................... 3-7-37
CCD PCB .................................................................................................... 3-7-38
Operation unit main PCB 1/3 ....................................................................... 3-7-39
Operation unit main PCB 2/3 ....................................................................... 3-7-40
Operation unit main PCB 3/3 ....................................................................... 3-7-41
Operation unit PCB ...................................................................................... 3-7-42
2AR-1
2AR
General connection diagram ....................................................................... 3-7-43
General wiring diagram ............................................................................... 3-7-44
E
A
A
A
E
E
A
A
E
E
2AR-1
2AR
Timing chart No. 1 From the main switch turned on to machine stabilization
C
D
2
CN8-14
H1
CN1-7
3
H2
CN1-6
DM
CN11-A3
4
G
H
I
J
1
2
500 ms
2s
3
500 ms
10 s*3
100 ms
300 ms
4
500 ms
DB REM
CN9-11
CFM1
CFM2
CN8-2
CN8-4
Half speed
CFM1
5
CFM2
CN8-2
CN8-4
Full speed*2
PM
CN8-1, 2, 3
6
CN9-9
TC REM
F
Secondary
stabilization fixing
temperature
175oC/347oF
MSW: On
1
MSW
E
Copying enabled*1
B
Primary stabilization
fixing temperature
170oC/338oF
A
5
1000 ms
6
500 ms
*1: Copying is enabled as follows:
1. When fixing temperature at the main switch turning on is 100oC/212oF or lower
Absolute humidity is 15 g/m3 or higher:
Copying is enabled 120 s after fixing heater M (H1) turning on.
2. When fixing temperature at the main switch turning on is 100oC/212oF or lower
The fixing temperature at the main switch turning on is 13oC/55.4oF or higher and the ambient temperature is 18oC/64.4oF or higher:
Copying is enabled at the earlier timing of either 41 s after fixing heater M (H1) turning on or when the copier enters secondary stabilization.
Other than the above:
Copying is enabled at the later timing of either 69 s after fixing heater M (H1) turning on or when the copier enters secondary stabilization.
3. Other conditions than 1 and 2
Copying is enabled when the copier enters secondary stabilization.
7
8
o
7
8
o
3
*2: Rotates for 180 s at full speed when the fixing temperature at the main switch turning on is 100 C/212 F or lower, and the absolute humidity is 15 g/m or higher.
A
B
C
*3: 60 s when the fixing temperature at main switch turning on is 100oC/212oF or lower, and the absolute humidity is 15 g/m3 or higher.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-1
E
E
A
A
E
A
A
E
A
E
E
A
E
A
A
E
A
A
E
E
2AR
Timing chart No. 2 Scanner initialization
A
B
C
1
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
1
Scanner initialization (SHPSW: ON, ODSW: ON)
Fwd. rotation
SM
CN2-1, 2,
3, 4, 5, 6
SHPSW
2
Off
Rev. rotation
CN4-2
2
120 P
43 P
Scanner initialization (SHPSW: ON, ODSW: OFF)
Fwd. rotation
3
SM
CN2-1, 2,
3, 4, 5, 6
SHPSW
CN4-2
3
Off
Rev. rotation
4
120 P
43 P
4
94 P
Scanner initialization (SHPSW: OFF, ODSW: ON)
Fwd. rotation
SM
5
CN2-1, 2,
3, 4, 5, 6
SHPSW
Off
5
Rev. rotation
CN4-2
76 P
43 P
120 P
6
6
Scanner initialization (SHPSW: OFF, ODSW: OFF)
Fwd. rotation
CN2-1, 2,
3, 4, 5, 6
SM
7
SHPSW
Off
Rev. rotation
7
CN4-2
76 P
43 P
120 P
94 P
8
8
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-2
E
E
A
A
E
A
E
A
A
E
E
A
A
A
E
E
A
A
E
E
2AR
Timing chart No. 3 Original scanning operation
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
1
1
Scanning an A3/11" x 17" original, magnification ratio 100% (ODSW: ON)
2
2
Fwd. rotation
SM
3
CN2-1, 2,
3, 4, 5, 6
SHPSW
Off
Rev. rotation
3
CN4-2
FVSYNC signal
270 P 414 P
9921 P
120 P
4
4
Scanning an A3/11" x 17" original, magnification ratio 100% (ODSW: OFF)
5
5
Fwd. rotation
SM
6
SHPSW
CN2-1, 2,
3, 4, 5, 6
Off
Rev. rotation
6
CN4-2
FVSYNC signal
214 P
270 P 414 P
9921 P
120 P
94 P
7
7
8
8
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-3
E
E
A
A
E
A
A
E
A
E
E
A
E
A
A
E
A
A
E
E
2AR-1
2AR
Timing chart No. 4 Copying an A3/11"×17" original onto an A5R/51/2"×81/2" copy paper from the bypass table, magnification ratio 25%, manual
copy density control
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
1
Image ready
1
2Start key
2
48 ms
DM
CN11-A3
RCL
CN10-A5
100 ms
300 ms
250 ms
110 ms
450 ms
3
BYPPFCL
CN4-1
BYPFCL
CN4-5
4BYPLCL
CN4-4
MC REM
CN9-14
FSM
CN2-7, 8, 9, 10
3
270 ms
110 ms
30 ms
100 ms
4
500 ms
200 ms
5
5
CL
CN13-4
RSW
CN8-25
518 ms
6ESW
CN2-15
BYPFSW
CN4-16
TC REM
CN9-9
6
419 ms
350 ms
215 ms
7
7
DB REM
500 ms
CN9-11
8
8
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-4
E
E
A
A
E
A
E
A
A
E
E
A
A
A
E
E
A
A
E
E
2AR-1
2AR
Timing chart No. 5 Copying an A4/11"×81/2" original onto an A4/11"×81/2" copy paper from the copier upper drawer, magnification ratio 100%, auto
copy density control
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
1
Image ready
1
2 Start key
2
48 ms
3
DM
CN11-A3
RCL
CN10-A5
100 ms
300 ms
250 ms
110 ms
3
Min 78 ms
FCL1
CN10-A7
PFCL-U
CN10-B1
MC REM
CN9-14
FSM
CN2-7, 8, 9, 10
CL
CN13-4
RSW
CN8-25
30 ms
88 ms
4
4
5
500 ms
200 ms
5
518 ms
6 ESW
7
6
CN2-15
FSW1
CN15-5
TC REM
CN9-9
DB REM
419 ms
215 ms
350 ms
7
500 ms
CN9-11
8
8
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-5
E
E
A
A
E
A
A
E
A
E
E
A
E
A
A
E
A
A
E
E
2AR-1
2AR
Timing chart No. 6 Copying an A4/11"×81/2" original onto an A4/11"×81/2" copy paper from the copier upper drawer, magnification ratio 100%, auto
copy density control, ejection to the job separator
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
1
Image ready
1
2
2
Start key
DM
CN11-A3
3 RCL
CN10-A5
FCL1
CN10-A7
PFCL-U
CN10-B1
4 MC REM
100 ms
250 ms
CN2-7, 8, 9, 10
FSSOL2
CN2-3
FSSOL1
CN2-5
CL
CN13-4
RSW
CN8-25
FSW1
CN15-5
FSSW
CN2-2
JBESW
CN11-B10
110 ms
Min 78 ms
3
30 ms
88 ms
4
200 ms
500 ms
CN9-14
FSM
300 ms
48 ms
296 ms
1260 ms
5
5
6
6
7
7
419 ms
TC REM
CN9-9
DB REM
CN9-11
215 ms
350 ms
500 ms
8
8
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-6
E
E
A
A
E
A
E
A
A
E
E
A
A
A
E
E
A
A
E
E
2AR-1
2AR
Timing chart No. 7 Continuous copying of an A5R/51/2"×81/2" original onto two sheets of A3/11"×17" copy paper from the copier lower drawer,
magnification ratio 400%, manual copy density control
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
1
Image ready
1
2
Start key
2
48 ms
3
DM
CN11-A3
RCL
CN10-A5
100 ms
300 ms
250 ms
Min 78 ms
FCL1
CN10-A7
FCL2
CN10-A9
4 PFCL-L
CN10-B3
250 ms
110 ms
30 ms
CN9-14
FSM
CN2-7, 8, 9, 10
CL
CN13-4
RSW
CN8-25
6 ESW
CN2-15
3
30 ms
88 ms
88 ms
MC REM
110 ms
78 ms
4
1855 ms
500 ms
200 ms
5
5
FSW1
CN15-5
FSW2
CN15-8
TC REM
CN9-9
DB REM
CN9-11
518 ms
6
7
419 ms
419 ms
350 ms
7
215 ms
500 ms
8
8
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-7
E
E
A
A
E
A
A
E
A
E
E
A
E
A
A
E
A
A
E
E
2AR-1
2AR
Timing chart No. 8 Duplex copying of an A3/11"×17" book original onto one duplex A4/11"×81/2" copy from the copier upper drawer, magnification
ratio 100%, auto copy density control
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
1
2
Start key
2
DM
CN11-A3
RCL
CN10-A5
3 FCL1
CN10-A7
PFCL-U
CN10-B1
DUPCL
CN10-B5
4 MC REM
5
Image ready
Image ready
1
100 ms
CN2-7, 8, 9, 10
CL
CN13-4
RSW
CN8-25
ESW
CN2-15
FSW1
CN15-5
FSSW
CN2-2
DUPPCSW
CN10-B7
TC REM
CN9-9
48 ms
250 ms
Min 78 ms
300 ms
250 ms
110 ms
110 ms
Min 78 ms
30 ms
30 ms
3
88 ms
88 ms
4
200 ms
500 ms
CN9-14
FSM
48 ms
Fwd. rotation
at low speed
40 ms
Fwd. rotation
100 ms at low speed
Rev. rotation
at high speed
100 ms
5
518 ms
6
6
7
419 ms
419 ms
350 ms
215 ms
7
500 ms
CN9-11
DB REM
8
8
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-8
E
E
A
A
E
A
E
A
A
E
E
A
A
A
E
E
A
A
E
E
2AR-1
2AR
Timing chart No. 9 Continuous, duplex copying of two single-sided A4/11"×81/2" originals onto two duplex A4/11"×81/2" copies from the copier
upper drawer, magnification ratio 100%, auto copy density control
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
1
2
Image ready
Image ready
1
2
Start key
48 ms
DM
3 RCL
48 ms
100 ms
CN11-A3
300 ms
250 ms
CN10-A5
110 ms
250 ms
Min 2000 ms
110 ms
250 ms
Min 78 ms
FCL1
30 ms
CN10-A7
30 ms
110 ms
Min 78 ms
30 ms
250 ms
110 ms
3
30 ms
88 ms
PFCL-U
CN10-B1
4 DUPCL
CN10-B5
MC REM
915 ms 88 ms
88 ms
200 ms
500 ms
CN9-14
100 ms
FSM
5
Fwd. rotation
at low speed
CN2-7, 8, 9, 10
100 ms
Rev. rotation
at high speed
Fwd. rotation
at low speed
CN13-4
RSW
CN8-25
ESW
CN2-15
FSW1
CN15-5
FSSW
CN2-2
DUPPCSW
CN10-B7
100 ms
100 ms
Rev. rotation
at high speed
Fwd. rotation
at low speed
40 ms
40 ms
CL
4
88 ms
5
518 ms
1400 ms
1400 ms
6
6
7
TC REM
CN9-9
DB REM
CN9-11
7
419 ms
419 ms
419 ms
419 ms
350 ms
215 ms
500 ms
8
8
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-9
E
E
A
A
E
A
A
E
A
E
E
A
E
A
A
E
A
A
E
E
2AR-1
2AR
Timing chart No. 10
A
Continuous copying an A3/11"×17" original onto two sheets of A3/11"×17" copy paper from the paper feed desk upper
drawer,magnification ratio 100%, auto copy density control
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
Image ready
Start key
1
1
300 ms
DM
CN11-A3
DDM
CN4-6
RCL
CN10-A5
100 ms
48 ms
2
250 ms
110 ms
Min 78 ms
3
FCL1
CN10-A7
FCL2
CN10-A9
FCL3
CN10-A11
FSM
78 ms
30 ms
30 ms
3
88 ms
88 ms
1379 ms
4 DPFCL-U CN1-14
MC REM CN9-14
2
250 ms
110 ms
1379 ms
4
1055 ms
200 ms
500 ms
CN2-7, 8, 9, 10
5
5
CL
CN13-4
RSW
CN8-25
ESW
CN2-15
FSW1
CN15-5
FSW2
CN15-8
FSW3
CN15-11
518 ms
6
6
7
7
419 ms
8 TC REM
215 ms
419 ms
CN9-9
8
350 ms
DB REM
500 ms
CN9-11
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-9-1
3-7-10
E
E
A
A
E
A
E
A
A
E
E
A
A
A
E
E
A
A
E
E
2AR-1
2AR
Timing chart No. 11
A
Copying an A4/11"×81/2" original onto an A4/11"×81/2" copy paper from the paper feed desk lower drawer,
magnification ratio 100%, manual copy density control
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
Image ready
1
Start key
DM
CN11-A3
DDM
CN4-6
1
300 ms
48 ms
100 ms
250 ms
2
3
RCL
CN10-A5
FCL1
CN10-A7
FCL2
CN10-A9
FCL3
CN10-A11
DFCL
CN2-1
2
110 ms
Min 78 ms
30 ms
88 ms
3
123 ms
123 ms
344 ms
4 DPFCL-L CN1-13
4
200 ms
MC REM CN9-14
500 ms
518 ms
FSM
CN2-7, 8, 9, 10
5
5
CL
CN13-4
RSW
CN8-25
6 ESW
CN2-15
FSW1
CN15-5
FSW2
CN15-8
FSW3
CN15-11
DFSW
CN2-7
6
7
7
215 ms
419 ms
8 TC REM
8
350 ms
CN9-9
500 ms
DB REM
CN9-11
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-9-2
3-7-11
E
E
A
A
E
A
A
E
A
E
Power source PCB
2AR
A
B
C
R50
1
1 CH
2
TB 3 TB 4
D
E
F
G
L3*2
1
+
C52
CN3
T1
R14
TB 2
C3
L1
F2 24 V F2 24 V 2
ZD61
3
NC
R66
ZD60
5
F3 5.1 V F3 5.1V 6
R68
ZD62
7
24 V
24 V
8
9
NC
G (5 V)
10
11 G (5 V)
G (5 V)
12
13 G (5 V)
G (5 V)
14
15 G (5 V)
G (5 V)
16
17 G (5 V)
G (24 V) 18
2
BJ5*
C4
FS2*2
1
R67
SCR1
C2
BD1
L2
R13
+
C5
2
*2
C7
D30
BJ6
C91*2
D2
R2*2
F1 24 V*1
ZD63
BJ7
2
*2
F2 24 V*1
PC1
D31
R4
R32
+
R7
PC2
+
+
+
4
2
19 G (24 V) G (24 V) 20
+
C34
R15
F2 24V
R33
R3
R12
J
12 V
IC51
+
C53
FS1
C1
I
CN8
1
TB 1
H
21 G (24 V) G (24 V) 22
TAB5
R34
D5 RB4
23 5.1 V
5.1 V
24
25 5.1 V
5.1 V
26
27 3.4 V
5.1 V
28
29 3.4 V
+12 V
30
ZD64
R35
3
G (24 V)
ZD1
L41
3
ZD2
+
8
D4
7
+
C11
6
+
R45
5
2
F3 5.1 V*1
R46
IC1
1
3.4 V
IC21
L40
3
C14 +
4
C13 ZD3
4
BJ40 BJ41
C15 R11 C3
R72
CN4
R10 R9
R43
D40
PC1
+
+
+
C47
G (24 V) 2
C54 +
+
R44
C61*2
R47
VR2
G (5 V)
3
5.1 V
4
G (5 V)
C16
C17
CN5
5
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
IC40
1
6
4
1
24 V
2
3
4
5
C42
6
7
8
1
F1 24 V F1 24 V 2
3
24 V
24 V
4
5
24 V
24 V
6
7
F3 5.1V F3 5.1 V 8
9
24 V
5
G (24 V) 10
11 G (5 V)
G (5 V)
13 G (5 V)
G (24 V) 14
12
6
15 G (24 V) G (24 V) 16
17 5.1 V
C55
R54
G (24 V) 18
CN6
C45 R62
24 V
1
G (24 V) 2
7
CN1
R20
4
TRC20
C20
CN2
24 V
2
G (24 V) 2
PC20
R26
3
R21
R24
1
7
CN7
R22
R25
1
C21
1
G (5 V)
3
G (5 V)
4
5.1 V
5
+12 V
6
TRC21
8
R27
R23
3
A
B
C
8
*1 For 120 V specification only
*2 For 220-240 V specification only
PC21
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-10
Engine PCB 1/2
2AR
2AR-1
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
S
R20
1
SSW2
R70
CN16–1
S
S
R138
L29
Q3
CN3–B48
R14
R13
C9
S G
SSW1 SOURCE
CN16–2
CN16–3
R69
CN16–5
L17
CN3–B47
R16
C10
NC
S
CN14–4
PWSW–L DIG 1
CN14–3
PWSW–L DIG 2
CN14–2
PLSW–L
CN12–13
BYPPWSW DIG 1
CN3–B46
R18
R17
C11
S G
NC
NC
R75
CN3–B12
CN2–2
CN3–B13
BYPPSW
CN4–12
CN3–B14
BYPFSW
CN4–16
CN3–B6
BYP DET
CN4–20
NC
R135
R80
R140
R49
CN3–B1
C24
CN4–9
CN4–8
BYPPLSW
CN4–18
CN12–8
LICSW –L
CN12–2
PSW–U
CN12–11
PSW–L
CN12–5
RSW
CN8–25
ESW
CN2–15
FSW1
CN15–5
R24 V
CN5–4
COPY ENABLE
CN6–A9
CN3–B15
SET SIG
CN7–8
CN3–B16
DEV DET
CN8–19
R22
S
L30
Q4
R83
R29
R52
R30
R84
R25
R50
R46
R6
R76
R8
R77
CN8–30
MC ALM
CN3–B23
DUPPCSW
CN10–B7
CN3–B24
DUP DET
CN10–B11
CN3–B19
DM LOCK
CN11–A2
JOFSW
CN11–B4
JOB DET
CN11–B6
JBESW
CN11–B10
CN3–B9
FSW2
CN15–8
FSW3
CN15–11
CN3–B11
FSW3 SIG
C8
C
CN3–A18
B
R194
R149
R195
R196
KC SET SIG
Q5 E
S G
TC DET
CN3–A16
R184
R134
R186
G(5 V)
CN8–10
G(5 V)
CN8–7
G(5 V)
CN8–15
R183
C48
CN7–3
IC1
6
L66
CN7–5
5
CN3–A28
S G
S G
ETTH
R190
5
6
IC9
+
–
R113
7
L10
CN3–A13
L67
L70
R179
CN15–3
L71
IC9
3
+
R178 2
–
R148
1
CN3–A14
D5
CN3–A32
R180
L26
S G
L59
L13
6
IC7
R2
FTH
3
CN3–A48
5
CN13–2
+
6 –
LOW SPEED
R161
2
R1
CN8–2
CFM2 REM
CN8–4
7
6
CN3–A47
HIGH SPEED
IC5
R150
7
L19
CN3–A46
L53
S G
L51
IC7
PCFM REM
10
10
CN16–9
11
IC6
R31
C32
IC7
CFM1 REM
11
R32
R55
R33
R86
R35
R54
R105
R106
R216
R217
R104
R103
CN3–A11
L63
CN3–B45
CN3–B28
KC COUNT
15
15
CN8–12
IC6
IC4
10
L24
NC
IC7
CN9–8
3
NC
14
14
C6
14
C19
2
IC4
IC2
C7
7
C26
C20
7
R10
C27
7
R64
R102
CN3–B27
P G
S G
L47
L52
L46
3
L45
+
–
L48
4
C18
C17 IC9
+
–
11
8
C36
C37 IC5
4
R63
+
–
C41
8
C29
R156
S G
S
R175
9,16
COM
IC11
C40
1,8
R173
R165
C43
C42
1,8
4,5
12,13
C28
4
R163
S G
S
9,16
COM
IC12
L35
CN1–8
CN2–13
CN2–14
CN2–17
CN2–16
CN2–18
CN4–11
CN2–20
CN4–15
CN2–21
CN4–17
CN2–22
L12
9,16
COM
IC7
4,5
12,13
R174
P G
CN4–7
CN6–A3
CN4–13
CN6–A4
CN4–14
CN6–A5
CN4–19
CN6–A6
CN4–21
CN6–A7
CN11–A5
CN6–A8
CN11–B5
CN8–26
CN11–B7
CN10–B8
L65
C34
C35
4
1,8
R167
P G
CN5–3
CN11–B9
CN5–10
CN11–B3
CN5–12
CN11–B1
CN6–B9
CN12–3
CN7–4
CN12–6
CN7–6
CN12–9
CN7–7
CN12–12
CN8–20
CN13–1
CN8–21
CN15–4
CN8–27
2
NC
11
NC
10
L54
3
CN3–A52
S G
11,13
C31
C30
1,8
R166
P G
C45
C44
1,8
4,5
12,13
R176
5
P G
L41
C23
C22
C2
CN1–1
F2 24 V
CN1–2
G(24 V)
CN1–3
G(24 V)
CN1–5
5.1 V
CN1–4
G(5 V)
+
R97
L6
P G
L40
C13
6
+
C1
C12
R42
L5
S G
CN8–29
7
CN10–B10
CN12–1
CN3–A49
13
4,5
12,13
R177
9,16
COM
IC10
CN10–B9
R130
10,12
NC
9,16
COM
IC6
CN8–28
L58
NC
R151
S
R160
CN11–B8
CN11–A4
L27
S
CN2–23
CN6–A2
CN15–9
CN2–4
CN8–6
14
IC1
CN3–B29
CN15–12
TC
14
CN3–B32
CN15–6
R57
7
FSFM REM
L25
L21
L9
CN3–A12
R172
CN6–A1
S G
9
R23
CN3–A30
C54
CN7–10
R87
L31
S
REM(METER PULSE)
R147
R34
CN3–B56
S G
S G
CN3–A29
EHUMSENS
IC1
8
R188
S
S
S
CN3–B59
S
L11
C53
R118
S G
R112
CN3–A54
L36
CN15–1
S
5
R95
R189
S G
CN3–A27
S G
R72
P G
S
2
R187
4,5
12,13
S
6
R62
CN3–A58
+
CN3–A24
IC13
R185
R73
CN8–16
R191
L56
C50
4
CN3–A57
CN3–A50
S
S
D11
CN3–A31
R133
C49
IC13
S G
R157
CN8–22
C3
S G
CN3–A34
D4
TNS SIG
CN3–A23
S G
8
CN3–A19
1
CN3–A26
D12
R119
L50
R198
CN5–9
R121
IC3
S
S G
R203
R199
L68
CN3–B18
CN8–8
CN3–A17
CN3–A25
L64
R81
R114
L33
CN3–A15
L43
CN5–11
1
CN3–B20
R24
R197
CN3–A51
S
IC13
1
S G
P G
S
CN3–B21
CN8–9
CN3–B44
R193
7
CN3–B35
S G
CN3–A60
R91
2
R82
CN3–B8
FUSW SIG
3
R26
CN3–B34
CN3–B10
CN3–B60
R11
CN9–12
S
R192
R51
S G
CN3–B22
R154
R65
R89
R27
CN3–B7
R45
R9
R155
3
P G
R28
R88
R100
R153
S
C25
R98
4
COIN ENABLE
R71
CN3–B17
R44
R7
CN3–B2
CN2–24
R99
R48
S
R
L1
CN4–10
BYPPWSW DIG 2
LICSW –U
CN2–19
R12
R4
R5
CN3–B3
P G
R24 V
PWSW–L DIG 0
BYPPWSW DIG 0
L28
Q1
R36
CN16–7
R79
CN2–1
FSSW
S
R19
24 V
CN14–8
CN12–15
P G
CN16–6
CN16–8
PWSW–U DIG 2
PLSW–U
R47
R137
R139
S G
SSW3
CN14–9
S
Q2
R15
2
PWSW–U DIG 1
R136
FS DET
S
NC
CN16–4
SSW3 SOURCE
CN14–10
P G
R21
SSW1
PWSW–U DIG 0
R78
5
CN12–4
NC
CN12–7
CN12–10
12
CN12–14
NC
CN12–16
11
S G
CN3–B52
S G
CN14–1
CN14–7
L62
CN15–2
8
8
CN15–7
CN15–10
CN15–13
S G
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-11
Engine PCB 2/2
2AR
2AR-1
A
B
R90
3
IC12
2
R109
6
IC12
7
R144
11
IC12
10
CN3–B37
CN3–A5
1
CN3–A6
R110
CN3–A7
CN3–A8
CN3–A9
R145
6
IC11
7
R111
11
IC11
10
R85
CN3–B26
2
R143
CN3–A4
R146
CN3–A10
R131
CN3–A53
3
14
IC10
15
14
IC11
15
IC6
3
RCL
CN10–A7
CN10–A9
FCL2
CN10–A11
FCL3
CN3–A42
CN10–B1
PFCL–U
CN10–B3
PFCL–L
Q6
4
2E
2C 3
2 1B
1C 6
CN4–5
BYPFCL
CN4–4
BYPLCL
CN3–A38
R212
CN6–B1
Q10
4
2E
2C 3
2 1B
1C 6
S
5 2B
2 1B
1C 6
L82
CN3–A37
R211
CN6–B2
DUPCL
L60
CN14–5
CN10–B4
L61
CN14–11
CN10–B2
CN3–A40
5 2B
2 1B
1C 6
2 1B
1C 6
CN3–A36
R210
CN6–B3
5 2B
2 1B
1C 6
S
Q16
4
2E
2C 3
R116
L79
5 2B
CN3–A21
R206
2 1B
CN6–B7
P G
5 2B
S
R122
L81
5 2B
CN3–A35
S
Q13
4
2E
2C 3
R201
1C 6
S G
S
2
CN5–6
P G
S G
Q9
4
2E
2C 3
R202
1C 6
1E
1
1E
1
S
CN3–A39
2 1B
CN6–B6
1E
1
R126
S
CN3–A20
R207
S
Q12
4
2E
2C 3
R123
CN6–B10
Q17
4
2E
2C 3
5 2B
1E
1
S
L83
L85
S
L75
1
R204
S
R115
S G
5 2B
PFCL–U
24 V
1C 6
S
Q11
4
2E
2C 3
S
Q8
4
2E
2C 3
PFCL–L
24 V
2 1B
1E
1
S
L77
CN6–B5
S
R124
1E
1
MSW OFF REM
CN3–A33
R208
1E
1
R127
CN8–14
Q14
4
2E
2C 3
P G
S G
2
5 2B
R120
L80
1E
1
Q7
4
2E
2C 3
J
S
S G
S
CN10–B5
I
S
5 2B
R125
L76
S
CN3–A41
H
1E
1
R128
BYPPFCL
G
S
S G
S
L84
CN4–1
F
S
5 2B
R129
FCL1
E
S
L78
IC10
7
6
R53
CN3–B25
CN10–A5
IC10
2
3
D
S
IC12
15
14
C
CN5–7
3
S
R117
L73
5 2B
CN3–A22
Q15
4
2E
2C 3
R66
L16
3
CN3–B31
4
6
IC2
IC6
1C 6
2 1B
4
7
CN11–A3
DM REM
CN13–4
CL REM
R209
1C 6
2 1B
CN6–B4
R205
R200
1C 6
2 1B
CN6–B8
1E
1
1E
1
1E
1
S G
S G
P G
CN5–8
4
S
R168
CN3–B41
TNS CONT
C33
S G
S G
3
CN3–B49
2
R58
IC3
+
–
9
CN3–B40
1
R59
S G
CN2–7
FSM B
CN3–A2
CN3–A55
IC3
R93
L32
7
CN9–7
CN3–B53
TC CONT
3
IC4
IC4
CN3–A56
2
IC8
S G
4
CN9–9
CN10–A2
CLM–U
CN10–A4
CLM–L
CN8–17
TFM+
CN8–18
TFM–
P G
TC REM
6
IC3
+
13 –
R43
L20
14
CN9–13
CN3–B5
GRID CONT
R74
CN3–B4
S G
R56
CN3–B33
R68
CN3–B36
D3
CN2–3
1
3
1
IC4
IC1
IC1
IC2
8
2
4
2
CN9–14
MC REM
CN1–7
H1 REM
CN1–6
H2 REM
CN2–11
CN3–A45
CN5–5
L44
CN10–A1
CN4–22
NC
CN9–5
CN4–2
CN10–A3
CN5–5
NC
CN7–2
CN11–A8
CN4–3
CN10–A6
CN10–B12
NC
CN9–3
CN11–A9
CN4–6
CN10–A8
CN11–A10
NC
CN6–A10
CN10–A10
CN3–A1
NC
CN10–A12
CN3–A43
NC
L2
L3
L69
L8
CN11–A6
CN5–1
CN11–A7
CN7–1
P G
L4
CN11–A1
L7
CN2–12
CN9–6
S G
L37
CN9–4
CN7–9
L57
L42
CN8–1
DM CLK
CN8–3
FSSOL2 ON REM
CN8–5
C14
CN10–B6
P G
C51
F G
C52
C39
F G
C5
F G
C21
7
CN13–3
CN14–6
L14
F G
R37
CN3–A44
R38
DB REM
R41
CN9–11
R40
L15
6
R39
12
9
IC4
R3
R96
CN3–B58
5
R170
CN3–B55
DB CONT
R171
CN9–10
R169
R94
L18
8
S G
R61
R132
3
18
D2
13
D3
8
D4
R214
IC3
+
9 –
R60
7
R164
D1
R
10
CN3–B57
R141
R108
C38
CN9–2
S G
CN3–B54
4
I1
R142 17
I2
R158 14
I3
R152 7
I4
R107
5
P G
R213
6
FSM B
CN9–1
CN3–B50
+
6 –
CN2–8
S
1
C4
+
L34
S G
5
IC2
R182
S G
CN3–A3
R92
CN3–B51
IC2
D10
CN8–24
5
D8
L49
1
LED REM
D13
+
2 –
CN11–B2
R215
5
IC5
3
CN3–A59
C47
L72
1C 6
1E
1
D7
FSM A
D9
8
L23
CN2–9
D6
L39
FSM A
L55
CN3–B42
IC2
R181
R159
6
CN2–10
2 1B
13
S
C46
12
L22
5 2B
CN3–B30
5
15
10
20
6
16
L38
INH1
INH2
N.C.
N.C.
Vcc2
Vcc1
10
SEN1
SEN2
GND
GND
SEN3
SEN4
CN3–B43
IC2
Q18
4
2E
2C 3
2
19
1
11
12
9
11
L74
F G
F G
F G
F G
CN14–12
CN16–10
S G
CN8–11
S G
S G
R67
CN3–B38
D2
8
FSSOL1 ON REM
CN2–6
FSSOL OFF REM
CN8–23
C15
S G
8
S G
R101
CN3–B39
C16
D1
S G
A
CN8–13
CN2–5
S G
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-12
Main PCB 1/20
2AR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
1
1
VPL5
5
6
7
8
R22
2
RA1
4
3
2
1
NF3
25
CN4
VPL5
R23
NF4
27
CN4
MAINMRE
(PG:MRE)
R2
B5 CN5
NF1
R1
SOVST
1
R3
2
OVSYNC_
R24
NF5
29
CN4
MAINID_
S001
IC1
(SCAN OVSYNC_)
R25
3
MCLK
(006-11G)
1
19 _OE1
_OE2
SELFAX_
(003-05B)
R17
SCAN I/F
MDATA_
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
(006-11H)
R18
4
MAINPHSCGEN_
SRFAX_
(003-05A)
(002-04G)
3
4
RA2
FAX(PG) I/F
2
1
NF6
R26
CN4
41
MAINLSUOUT
IC3
NF7
R27
CN4
R4
B1 CN5
R5
SID+
R6
MAINPVCLK
NF2
C2
FAXDATA_
(WIRED OR)
SID–
R28
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R9
R8
A12 CN5
SOHSYNC+
(SCAN OHSYNC_)
R10
A11 CN5
R11
MMRE
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
(006-11I)
R29
R30
R20
OHSYNC_
(002-04D)
GPL0
(014-04E)
RESVTC_
SOHSYNC–
6
R21
A9 CN5
5
R13
SMRE+
Q
D
5
(003-02D)
(003-02D)
R32
2
NF8
6
R14
SMRE–
(010-14B)
_Q
FF74VCC
R33
CN4
6
39
FAXID_
3
CLK
R15
A10 CN5
(003-05B)
4
GPL5
PVCLK
(002-11E)
VPL5
IC2
R12
LSUOUT
R19
_PRE
B4 CN5
SCLK–
VCC
IN1–
IN4–
IN1+
OUT1 IN4+
EN
OUT4
OUT2
_EN
IN2+ OUT3
IN3+
IN2–
GND
IN3–
R31
R7
PHSYNC_
_CLR
B3 CN5
SCLK+
1
5
4
43
VCC3
C1
3
VPL5
18
1Y1 16
1Y2 14
1Y3 12
1Y4 9
2Y1 7
2Y2 5
2Y3 3
2Y4
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
GPL0
B2 CN5
2
MAINCLK
(PG:CLK)
IC4
7
7
S001 OVSYNC_
(002-04E) (006-11I) (011-03D)
(014-05D)
8
8
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-13
E
A
E
A
A
E
A
A
E
E
2AR
Main PCB 2/20
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
1
1
VPL5
1
2
3
4
2
(003-05A)
3
(003-05B)
CNTFAX_
1
2
3
4
SELPRT_
RA022
RA4
8
7
6
5
2
NF10
8
7
6
5
CN4 31
MAINOHSC_
NF11
CN4 33
NF12
CN4 35
MAINOVST_
OHSYNC_
MAINPVST_
(001-08G)
(001-07C)
3
(PG:PVSYNC_)
NF13
OVSYNC_
CN4 37
VCC3
MAINPHSC_
R40
(PG:PHSYNC_)
4
1
19
VPL5
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
R35
14 CN3
NF9
R34
PRTID_
5
4
_OE1
_OE2
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
FAXDATA_
(001-15F)
R39
PVDA_
(003-05C)
R36
VPL5
3
4
IC5
RA5
5
2
1
GPL8
NF14
R37
(001-15D)
(003-05B)
(004-02D)
PRTPVST_
PRI I/F (BD_)
MAINPHSCGEN_
6
C025
6
CN3 15
PVSYNC_
R38
PRTBDGEN_
GPL8
PRT I/F
CN3 4
NF15
PRTBD_
7
7
8
8
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-12
3-7-14
E
E
A
A
E
A
E
A
A
E
E
A
A
A
E
E
A
A
E
E
2AR
Main PCB 3/20
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
1
1
CNTFAX_
(002-04D)
(001-09D)
SELPRT_
(002-04D)
(002-14E)
10
C9
NF16
8
IC4
C5
PVCLK
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
LSUOUT
R44
GPL5
R46
VCC3
5
6
7
8
VPL5
R449
(014-11H)
4
3
2
1
ADE(7:0)
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
(014-11F)
AE(23:0)
RA10
RA11
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
VTCPD(7:0)
(014-04D)
(014-08I)
(014-08H)
(014-04F)
(014-04F)
(014-04F)
3
LSU I/F
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
R55
LDOUTA_
8
9
NF23
CN8 12
NF24
CN8 11
(004-02C)
ADJUST_
IC7
4
3
RA8
1
2
4
3
IC7
VTCBD_
NF25
R53
10
11
IC7
CN8 3
MSC_
7
6
5
XVTC
VCC3
GPL5
C7
C10
NF19
C11
4
ENABLE_
(004-02C)
PMCLK
(004-02H)
(004-08I)
5
RA12
VPL5
1
R447
2
6
CN4 30
PGGND1
IC7
VCC3
NF21
13
RA13
R448
12
CN4 32
PGGND2
IC7
GPL5
VTCD(7:0)
IC032
7
IC6
0
1
2
VPL5
VSS10
LDOUTB_
LDOUTA_
VSS9
ADJUST_
FLDEN_
BD_
VDD5
PMCLK
MSYNC
VSS8
CLK
VSS7
NC3
NC2
NC1
LDEN_
LDON_
PPST
VDD4
VSS6
D7
D6
D5
VSS5
PMREM_
C6
0
1
2
3
_OE
T_R
A0 B0
A1 B1
A2 B2
A3 B3
A4 B4
A5 B5
A6 B6
A7 B7
8
7
6
5
19
1
02
13
24
35
46
57
68
79
41
52
63
74
RDE_
8
7
6
5
(014-08I)
RA9
VTC_
01
12
23
34
(014-04D)
CN8 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
5
VSS15
PVCLK
VSS16
LSUOUT
NC4
VDD10
SCDE_
NSCDE_
SCLE_
NSCLE_
VSS17
RESET_
VSS18
P3
P4
P5
P6
VDD11
P7
TEST0
VSS19
TEST1
TEST2
TEST3
VSS20
3
4
RESVTC_
VCC3
6
NF22
R51
6
5
IC7
4
(014-04E)
GPL5
C4
4
5
(001-15G) (006-11I)
(001-15G) (006-11G)
FF74VCC
C8
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
(010-14B)
_Q
13
3
VCC3
CLK
R443
2
VCC3
R442
9
VDD9
VSS14
PVDB0_
PVDA0_
VSS13
PHSYNC_
VDD8
AMC
PVSYNC_
PVSYNC
VSS12
SEL0_
SEL1_
VDD7
SEL2_
SEL3_
SEL4_
SEL5_
SEL6_
VSS11
P2
P1
P0
FLDON
VDD6
11
Q
VPL5
R48
VDD1
A0
A1
A2
A3
VSS1
A4
A5
VTCCS_
IORD_
IOWR_
VDD2
D0
D1
D2
VSS2
SMC
SIN
SOT
VSS3
D3
D4
VSS4
SCK
VDD3
D
CLR _PRE
12
2
1
NF20
RESVTC_
PVDB_
3
4
PHSYNC_
TP1
PVDA_
(WIRED OR) TP2
(001-15G) (006-11H)
(006-11G)
VCC3
RA7
8
7
6
5
PVSYNC_ R032
(002-04H) (006-11H)
(014-04E)
RA6
SELFAX_
(001-09D)
2
1
2
3
4
SRFAX_
VTC_
7
RDE_
WRE_
LDON_
LDEN_
EPVSYNC
PPST
8
8
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-13
3-7-15
E
E
A
A
E
A
A
E
A
E
E
A
E
A
A
E
A
A
E
E
2AR
Main PCB 4/20
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
(019-14H)
R24 V
13
R56
CN8 10
R57
CN8 9
(019-14F)
IC9
LDOUTA_
(003-15D)
VTCBD_
3
(003-15F)
PRTBDGEN_
1
2
RA14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
4
3
(002-04H)
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
DE
VCC
DIN
NC4
NC1 DOUT+
ROUT DOUT–
RIN+
NC2
RIN–
NC3
_RE
GND
3
TR1
NF30
G S1
K 3
C13
12
VIDEO+
CN8 13
R5 V
D1
A 1
1
TYPICAL 1.0A (MAX1.6A)
C14
FCOVERSW
NF26
R62
2
C12
J
D2
R61
VPL5
VTC I/F
I
VPL5
R60
1
H
2
LSU I/F
VIDEO–
GPL5
GPL5
CN8 5
R58
CN8
5V
6
3
BD+
R55
R59
CN8
7
BD–
IC10
GPL5
GPL8
CN8 4
R63
G(5 V)
4
4
GPL5
CN8 8
R64
G(5 V)
GPL5
D2
VPL5
5
5
COM
K
R68
A
MSC_
6
R65
(003-15F)
10
IC9
11
8
9
R66
XEOE_
2
6
C15
R69
1
(015-16G)
2
OE
GND
GPL5
VCC
OUT
VCC3
NF28
7
4
R71
3
C16
X1
8
CN8
LD
IC9
GPL5
7
NF27
R67
XVTC
(003-15G)
C17
8
GPL5
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-14
3-7-16
E
E
A
A
E
A
E
A
A
E
Main PCB 5/20
2AR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
I
J
VCC3
(006-01A)
166
165
164
163
162
161
160
159
158
184
186
188
193
195
197
199
201
204
206
208
214
213
212
211
219
218
217
216
226
224
223
222
221
MCPSIG (304:1)
1
H
1
NF31
2
3
249
255
4
263
264
269
270
272
273
5
276
277
280
281
283
284
287
288
6
290
291
293
294
295
296
297
299
300
301
302
VDD17
VDD16
DRAMD24
DRAMD23
DRAMD25
DRAMD22
GND26
VDD15
DRAMD26
DRAMD21
DRAMD27
DRAMD20
GND25
VDD14
DRAMD28
DRAMD19
DRAMD29
DRAMD18
GND24
GND23
DRAMD30
DRAMD17
DRAMD31
DRAMD16
GND22
DRAS5B
DRAS4B
DRAS3B
DRAS2B
DRAS1B
DRAS0B
GND21
DA4
DA3
DA5
DA2
GND20
GND19
VDD13
VDD12
DA6
DA1
DA7
DA0
DA8
DA9
GND18
DOEB
DWEB
DCASHB
DCASLB
GND17
DRAMD8
DRAMD7
DRAMD9
DRAMD6
GND16
GND15
DRAMD10
DRAMD5
DRAMD11
DRAMD4
GND14
VDD11
DRAMD12
DRAMD3
DRAMD13
DRAMD2
GND13
VDD10
DRAMD14
DRAMD1
DRAMD15
DRAMD0
VDD9
VDD8
IC11
C19
152
151
150
149
148
147
146
145
144
143
142
141
140
139
138
137
136
135
134
133
132
131
130
129
128
127
126
125
124
123
122
121
120
119
118
117
116
115
114
113
112
111
110
109
108
107
106
105
104
103
102
101
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
150
149
148
147
2
C20
144
143
142
141
138
137
136
135
C21
NF32
3
C22
132
131
130
129
127
126
125
124
123
122
C23
4
120
119
118
117
C24
112
111
110
109
108
107
NF33
C25
5
105
104
103
102
C26
100
99
98
97
94
93
92
91
C27
88
87
86
85
C28
NF34
6
C29
82
81
80
79
7
GPL5
74
66
67
64
53
50
51
48
43
41
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
15
16
17
18
13
8
9
6
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
7
VDD26
VDD27
SMLLD
SMLOEB
SMGHOEB
SMGLOEB
SMGDIR
VDD28
SRAS30B
SRAS31B
SRAS32B
SRAS33B
SCAS30B
SCAS31B
GND47
RAMCSHB
RAMCSLB
RAMOEB
GND48
GND49
CLK
GND50
RAMWEB
ROMCSB
ROMOEB
VDD29
IRQALLB
IRQ5B
IRQ4B
IRQ3B
IRQ2B
IRQ1B
CS0B
GND51
CPUD0
CPUD1
VDD30
VDD31
GND52
GND53
CPUD2
CPUD3
GND54
CPUD4
CPUD5
VDD32
GND55
CPUD6
CPUD7
VDD33
GND56
CPUD8
CPUD9
GND57
CPUD10
CPUD11
GND58
GND59
CPUD12
CPUD13
GND60
CPUD14
CPUD15
GND61
A24
A25
A26
A27
A28
A29
A30
A31
A0
DSACKB
VDD34
VDD35
GND1
GND2
RDBWR
SIZE1
SIZE0
ASB
VDD1
A1
A2
SMC
AMC
SIN
A3
SOUT
A4
A5
A6
A7
VDD2
GND3
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
VDD3
VDD4
GND4
GND5
RCK
GND6
VD1
VD2
VDD5
RCKENB
MCPSELB
MREVDIN
MREVDOUT
PHSYNCB
RVSIB
GND7
ID0
ID1
ID2
ID3
VDD6
GND8
ID4
ID5
ID6
ID7
GND9
WCK
GND10
MREID
WVSTB
WREADYB
RREADYB
ACKENG
ACKMCP
SETMCPB
VDD7
RESETB
GND11
GND12
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
GND46
GND45
SWEB
GND44
SRAS21B
SRAS11B
SRAS20B
SRAS10B
VDD25
SCAS21B
SCAS11B
SCAS20B
SCAS10B
GND43
SRAS22B
SRAS12B
SRAS23B
SRAS13B
GND42
VDD24
SA9
GND41
SA8
GND40
SA7
GND39
VDD23
SA10
GND38
SA6
GND37
SA5
GND36
SA4
GND35
SA3
GND34
GND33
VDD22
VDD21
SA2
GND32
SA1
GND31
SA0
GND30
VDD20
Q2CDWRB
Q2CDRDB
Q2CDACKB
Q2CDRO
Q2PDWRB
Q2PDRDB
Q2PDACKB
Q2PDRQ
Q2HINTR
GND29
VDD19
Q2HWRB
Q2HRDB
Q2HCSB
VDD18
Q1CDWRB
Q1CDRDB
Q1CDACKB
Q1CDRQ
Q1PDWRB
Q1PDRDB
Q1PDACKB
Q1PDRQ
Q1HINTR
Q1HWRB
Q1HRDB
Q1HCSB
GND28
GND27
228
227
226
225
224
223
222
221
220
219
218
217
216
215
214
213
212
211
210
209
208
207
206
205
204
203
202
201
200
199
198
197
196
195
194
193
192
191
190
189
188
187
186
185
184
183
182
181
180
179
178
177
176
175
174
173
172
171
170
169
168
167
166
165
164
163
162
161
160
159
158
157
156
155
154
153
C18
8
8
GPL5
GPL0
A
B
GPL0
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-17
Main PCB 6/20
2AR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
MCPSIG(304:1)
(005-11A)
301
RESMCP_
74
(010-09C)
DRAMD(31:0)
8
0
9
1
13
2
15
3
16
4
17
5
18
6
(007-02A)
150
149
148
147
144
143
142
141
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
RA19
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
24
23
25
22
26
21
27
20
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
RA20
2
263
264
269
270
272
273
276
277
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
RA15
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
RA16
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
RA18
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
19 _DE
1 T_R
(011-08J)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A0 B0
A1 B1
A2 B2
A3 B3
A4 B4
A5 B5
A6 B6
A7 B7
IC12
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
204
7
206
8
208
9
201
10
6
138
137
136
135
132
131
130
129
10
11
12
27
13
28
14
29
15
30
16
31
17
32
18
33
19
34
20
35
21
BNKA22
BNKA23
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
RA21
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
28
19
29
18
30
17
31
16
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
RA22
RA35
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A0 B0
A1 B1
A2 B2
A3 B3
A4 B4
A5 B5
A6 B6
A7 B7
IC13
DRAMCS_
MCPEN_
3
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
255
ASB
DSACK_
WRM_
R76
223 SRAS11_
RA36
VPL5
AM(23:0)
(011-11F)
100
99
98
97
94
93
92
91
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
RA23
4 8
3 7
2 9
1 6
4 10
3 5
2 11
1 4
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
RA24
(010-09C)
RA37
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
RA38
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
RA25
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
12
3
13
2
14
1
15
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
RA26
GPL8
RA39
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
RA40
218 SCAS11_
226
SWE_
222 SRAS20_
224 SRAS21_
217 SCAS20_
219 SCAS21_
DA(9:0)
(010-09A)
(010-09B)
(010-09B)
(011-09H)
MCPINT_
(011-05E)
110
109
108
107
120
119
118
117
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
RA27
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
(007-02J)
7
0
8
9
4
3
5
2
112
111
3
4
2
1
125
124
123
122
7
RA30
105
104
103
102
DRAS2_
DRAS1_
DRAS0_
4
3
2
1
5
6
7
8
DRAS3_
RA31
DOE_
DWE_
DCASH_
DCASL_
8
127
126
2
1
3
4
RA32
D
E
DRAS5_
DRAS4_
166
165
164
158
(009-01E)
Q1CDACK
5
6
7
8
RA42
Q1PDWR
4
3
2
1
Q1PDRD
Q1PDACK
Q1PDRQ
(008-02C)
(008-02B)
(008-02B)
(008-02C)
(008-12E)
(008-12E)
3
(008-12E)
(008-12E)
(009-01F)
(009-09F)(009-01F)
(009-09E)
4
(009-09E)
(009-09E)
(009-09E)
(009-09E)
(009-09F)
LSUOUT
50
R80
PHSYNC_
PVSYNC_
R83
Q1CDRD
(009-01E)
R79
66
(008-02A)
(009-01E)
48
R82
Q1CDWR
4
3
2
1
(009-01E)
PVDB_
41
162
161
160
159
(009-01E)
R78
R81
5
6
7
8
RA41
Q1HINTR
43
53
Q1CDRQ
2
MCLK
67
4
3
2
1
5
6
7
8
163
R77
51
6
1
(009-01C) (009-09C)
64
(010-02D)
RA28
C
216 SCAS10_
212 SRAS23_
RA29
B
211 SRAS13_
214 SRAS22_
(010-09C)
ADBUS(15:0)
A
221 SRAS10_
213 SRAS12_
88
87
86
85
82
81
80
79
300
302
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
VPL5
299
6
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
5
9
297
19 _DE
1 T_R
4
23
296
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
195
6
295
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
2
193
199
294
RDM_
188
8
293
MCPEN_
1
7
36
ADM(15:0)
0
186
22
26
(011-11H)
5
RA34
184
21
25
4
(010-09A)
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
197
24
RA17
280
281
283
284
287
288
290
291
RA33
VPL5
3
1
SA(10:0)
VPL5
MDATA_
5
(001-07D)
249
(003-02D)
VCC3
(003-05B)
NF35
(003-05B)
(001-07E)
(012-15H)
XMOE_
R84
1
4
DE
VCC
2
PVCLK
MMRE
OVSYNC_
6
3
GND
X2
(003-02D)
R86
1
OUT
C30
C31
(001-07G)
(001-07C)
GPL5
(007-02H)
7
(007-02H)
(007-02H)
(007-02H)
(007-02I)
(007-02I)
(007-02I)
(007-02I)
8
(007-02G)
(007-02H)
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-18
E
A
A
A
E
E
A
A
E
E
2AR
Main PCB 7/20
A
B
(006-09A) (008-02L)
C
D
E
F
G
NF39
NF40
C38
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
31
30
14
29
13
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
LCAS0
UCAS0
RAS0
OE0
W0
VSS1
VCC1
VSS2
VCC2
VSS3
VCC3
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
NC1
NC2
NC3
NC4
NC5
42
1
37
6
22
21
28
27
26
25
24
23
20
19
18
17
11
12
15
16
32
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
3
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
31
30
14
29
13
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
LCAS0
UCAS0
RAS0
OE0
W0
VSS1
VCC1
VSS2
VCC2
VSS3
VCC3
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
NC1
NC2
NC3
NC4
NC5
5
(006-09J)
(006-09J)
6
(006-09J)
DRAS5_
5
DRAS4_
4
DRAS3_
3
DRAS2_
2
DRAS1_
1
DRAS0_
0
0
(006-09J)
(006-09K)
(006-09K)
7
(006-09G)
DOE_
5
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
LCAS0
UCAS0
RAS0
OE0
W0
42
1
37
6
22
21
28
27
26
25
24
23
20
19
18
17
11
12
15
16
32
42
1
37
6
22
21
28
27
26
25
24
23
20
19
18
17
11
12
15
16
32
VSS1
VCC1
VSS2
VCC2
VSS3
VCC3
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
NC1
NC2
NC3
NC4
NC5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
2
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
31
30
14
29
13
C37
42
1
37
6
22
21
28
27
26
25
24
23
20
19
18
17
11
12
15
16
32
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
4
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
31
30
14
29
13
VSS1
VCC1
VSS2
VCC2
VSS3
VCC3
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
NC1
NC2
NC3
NC4
NC5
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
LCAS0
UCAS0
RAS0
OE0
W0
IC15
IC14
3
C36
VSS1
VCC1
VSS2
VCC2
VSS3
VCC3
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
NC1
NC2
NC3
NC4
NC5
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
LCAS0
UCAS0
RAS0
OE0
W0
2
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
GPL5
NF38
C35
42
1
37
6
22
21
28
27
26
25
24
23
20
19
18
17
11
12
15
16
32
4
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
5
6
IC16
GPL5
GPL5
(006-09K)
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
31
30
14
29
13
C34
VSS1
VCC1
VSS2
VCC2
VSS3
VCC3
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
NC1
NC2
NC3
NC4
NC5
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
LCAS0
UCAS0
RAS0
OE0
W0
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
IC19
C33
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
31
30
14
29
13
42
1
37
6
22
21
28
27
26
25
24
23
20
19
18
17
11
12
15
16
32
GPL5
NF37
C32
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
C43
IC18
GPL5
NF36
4
1
C42
C41
IC17
(006-09I)
J
NF41
C40
C39
(006-09L)
I
DRAMD(31:0)
1
(006-09K)
H
GPL5
DRAS_(5:0)
DWE_
DCASH_
DCASL_
7
DA(9:0)_
VPL5
NF42
C191
C190
C189
C188
C187
C186
C185
C184
C44
+
C45
+
8
8
GPL5
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-19
3-7-15
E
E
A
A
E
A
A
E
A
E
Main PCB 8/20
2AR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
(006-16B)
XMOE_
(006-16C)
(006-16C)
(006-16D)
2
(011-11H)
Q1CDACK_
Q1CDRD_
Q1HINTR
ADM (15:0)
0
1
2
3
4
NF43
2
DE
VCC
GND
OUT
X3
3
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
Q1CDWR_
VPL5
1
4
5
6
7
3
C46
C47
R96
(010-09C)
GPL5
(011-08J)
(011-09H)
(010-09C)
RESMCP_
RDM_
WRM_
Q1HCS_
1
2
3
4
4
IC20
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Q1PDWR_
Q1PDRD_
Q1PDACK_
Q1PDRQ
31
30
29
(006-16D)
(006-16D)
(006-16D)
RA51
5
20
21
22
23
24
15
16
17
18
19
10
11
12
13
14
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
VPL5
RA53
PD (31:0)
7
RA47
RA48
RA49
8
RA50
(007-02A)
A
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
C55
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
NF47
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
RA56
C54
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
C53
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
NF46
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
RA55
C51
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
NF45
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
NF44
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
RA54
C52
RA46
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
C50
RA45
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
C49
6
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
C48
RA44
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
VPL5
5
6
7
RA59
8
5
6
RA60
7
8
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
VPL5
5
6
RA61
7
8
5
RA62
6
7
8
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
1
2
VPL5
5
6
RA63
7
8
5
6
7
8
RA64
3
VPL5
5
6
RA65
7
8
5
RA66
6
7
8
4
RA52
RA43
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
(006-16D)
28
27
26
25
GND1
PD0
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
VDD1
GND2
PD5
PD6
PD7
PD8
PD9
VDD2
GND3
PD10
PD11
PD12
PD13
PD14
VDD3
GND4
PD15
PD16
PD17
PD18
PD19
VDD4
GND5
PD20
PD21
PD22
PD23
PD24
VDD5
GND6
AM (23:0)
VDD11
CD7
CD6
CD5
CD4
GND11
VDD10
CD3
CD2
CD1
CD0
GND10
VDD9
PXCKO
RVID
SVID
PXCK
PTIM
PRDY
GND9
VDD8
PDWR
PDRD
PDAK
PDRQ
GND8
VDD7
PD31
PD30
PD29
GND7
VDD6
PD28
PD27
PD26
PD25
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
(011-11F)
CDAK
CDRD
CDWR
INTR
VDD17
GND18
HD0
HD1
HD2
HD3
HD4
VDD18
GND19
HD5
HD6
HD7
TEST0
TEST1
VDD19
GND20
MCLK
VDD20
GND21
RESET
HRD
HWR
HCS
VDD21
GND22
HA0
HA1
HA2
HA3
TOUT1
TOUT2
VDD22
(009-14G) (009-06G)
12
11
10
9
8
17
16
15
14
13
22
21
20
19
18
(012-15H)
(006-16C)
108
107
106
105
104
103
102
101
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
R93
CD (31:0)
R94
Q1CDRQ
CDRQ
GND17
VDD16
CD31
CD30
CD29
CD28
GND16
VDD15
CD27
CD26
CD25
CD24
CD23
GND15
VDD14
CD22
CD21
CD20
CD19
CD18
GND14
VDD13
CD17
CD16
CD15
CD14
CD13
GND13
VDD12
CD12
CD11
CD10
CD9
CD8
GND12
1
27
26
25
24
23
31
30
29
28
PRESSD (31:0)
RA57
RA58
GPL5
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
5
6
7
8
DRAMD (31:0)
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-20
E
A
A
A
E
E
A
A
E
E
2AR
Main PCB 9/20
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
1
1
SIM2ADR(10:0)
SIM1ADR(10:0)
(006-12B)
0
CN6
1
CN6
2
3
SA(10:0)
CN6
4
CN6
5
CN6
6
7
3
CN6
8
CN6
CN6
CN6
9
CN6
10
CN6
RA75
(006-11D)
(006-11D)
4
(006-11D)
(006-11E)
(006-11E)
(006-11E)
(006-11E)
SRAS11_
6
8
6
8
SRAS10_
SRAS12_
CN6
3
1
3
1
CN6
RA71
SRAS13_
4
4
SCAS10_
SCAS11_
CN6
1
1
CN6
RA76
CN6
SWE_
R101
CN6
CN6
5
CN6
CN6
CN6
CN6
VPL5
6
NF48
CN6
C195
C194
C193
C57
SM1D16
SM1A2
SM1D1
15
SM1A3
SM1D17
SM1A4
SM1D2
SM1A5
SM1D18
SM1A6
SM1D3
SM1A7
SM1D19
SM1A8
SM1D4
SM1A9
SM1D20
SM1A10
SM1D5
16
17
18
28
31
32
19
45
SM1RAS1_
SM1D21
SM1RAS0_
SM1D6
44
34
SM1D22
SM1RAS2_
33
SM1RAS3_
SM1D7
SM1CAS0_
SM1D23
40
0
3 CN6
16
4 CN6
SM1D8
SM1D24
SM1D9
1
5 CN6
17
6 CN6
SM1D25
2
7 CN6
18
8 CN6
SM1D26
3
9 CN6
19
20 CN6
4
21 CN6
20
22 CN6
5
23 CN6
21
24 CN6
6
25 CN6
22
26 CN6
7
27 CN6
23
51 CN6
CN6
25
53
RA74
CN6
10
54
CN6
(006-12B)
9
8
7
10
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
10
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
CN7
1
CN7
2
3
SA(10:0)
CN7
5
CN7
55 CN6
6
CN7
56
CN6
7
CN7
57
CN6
8
CN7
9
CN7
CN6
29
10
CN7
61
SM1D13
CN6
13
62 CN6
63
SM1D14
64
SM1D31
(006-11F)
(006-11E)
30
(006-11F)
14
(006-11F)
CN6
(006-11F)
CN6
31
65
SM1D15
RA75
CN6
15
(006-11F)
(006-11E)
SRAS21_
SRAS20_
SRAS22_
CN7
4
2
4
2
5
7
5
7
CN7
RA71
SRAS23_
3
3
SCAS20_
CN7
2
2
SCAS21_
CN7
RA76
CN7
SWE_
R105
CN7
CN7
SM1CAS1_
42
CN7
SM1CAS1_
47
CN7
SM1WE_
(008-15A)
10
CD(31:0)
CN7
SM1VCC
30
NF49
SM1VCC
R104
CN7
VPL5
SM1VCC
59
CN6
CN7
SM1GND
C58
72
+
C59
SM2A4
SM2D2
SM2A5
SM2D18
SM2A6
SM2D3
SM2A7
SM2D19
SM2A8
SM2D4
SM2A9
SM2D20
SM2A10
SM2D5
31
32
19
45
SM2RAS1_
SM2D21
SM2RAS0_
SM2D6
SM2RAS2_
SM2D22
44
34
33
SM2RAS3_
SM2D7
SM2CAS0_
SM2D23
40
2 CN7
0
3 CN7
16
4 CN7
SM2D8
51
2
7 CN7
18
8 CN7
SM2D26
4
21 CN7
20
22 CN7
5
23 CN7
21
24 CN7
6
25 CN7
22
26 CN7
7
27 CN7
23
CN7
24
SM2D9
SM2D25
9 CN7
19
20 CN7
8
50
SM2D24
1
5 CN7
17
6 CN7
3
49 CN7
CN7
9
52
CN7
25
2
53 CN7
SM2D10
10
54
CN7
26
55
SM2D11
CN7
11
56 CN7
SM2D27
27
57
SM2D12
CN7
12
58
SM2D28
3
CN7
28
60 CN7
SM2D29
29
61
SM2D13
CN7
13
62
SM2D30
CN7
30
63 CN7
SM2D14
4
14
64
SM2D31
CN7
31
65
SM2D15
CN7
15
43
SM2CAS0_
41
SM2CAS1_
5
42
SM2CAS1_
47
SM2WE_
(008-15A)
10
CD(31:0)
SM2VCC
30
SM2VCC
59
SM2VCC
R107
R108
SM1GND
SM2D17
28
SM1GND
+
SM2A3
18
R106
39
SM2D1
17
SIMM SOCKET1
1
SM2A2
16
28
60
SM1D29
SM2D16
15
12
58 CN6
SM2D0
SM2A1
14
27
SM1D12
SM2A0
13
11
41
CN6
CN7
4
SM1CAS0_
CN6
CN7
12
26
SM1D27
SM1D30
RA73
9
SM1D10
SM1D28
RA72
CN6
24
52
SM1D11
CN6
8
50
43
R103
C192
C56
+
SM1A1
14
R102
+
SM1D0
SN1A0
13
C199
RA69
9
8
7
10
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
C198
2
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
C197
RA68
9
8
7
10
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
49
2 CN6
C196
RA67
12
CN7
CN7
CN7
SIMM SOCKET2
6
1
SM2GND
39
SM2GND
72
SM2GND
7
7
GPL5
GPL5
GPL5
GPL5
8
8
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-17
3-7-21
E
E
A
A
E
A
A
E
A
E
Main PCB 10/20
2AR
B
C
D
E
F
1
R120
MCPEN_
R121
DSACK_
R122
ASB
G
H
I
(006-05G)(006-01F)
1
(006-05H)
(006-05H)
VCC3
VPL5
VCC3
R114
SCC1CS_
R115
(012-04B)
20
21
22
(012-07H)
VPL5
GPL5
IC21
BANK_
(011-09H)
NF52
20
0
ADM(15:0)
AM(23:0)
C69
C68
IC5
GPL5
3
VPL5
(011-12E)
(011-11H)
10
(011-11F)
14
VCC
IC8
GPL5
AM(23:0)
7
GND
R117
(011-05E)
VPL5
(011-11F)
5
VPL5
1
23
19
0
IC4
GPL5
NF56
WRM_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
R116
ID15
ID14
ID13
ID12
ID11
GND2
ID10
VDD1
ID9
ID8
ID7
R129
GND
14
VCC
VCC
C75
SCUCS_
IDGTS2
VDD3
IDGTS1
ID23
ID24
ID25
ID26
ID27
ID28
IDGCK1
IDGCK2
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
IC3
GPL5
C73
R109
R110
4
(011-12H)
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
RAMMCS_
10
GND
C72
R113
2
(011-14E)
VPL5
R128
VCC
(011-12E)
C71
BRAMMWR_
(011-12H)
WRMO_
7
GND
C70
R112
WRME_
20
VCC
NF55
R127
IDGSR
ID22
ID21
ID20
ID19
ID18
ID17
VDD2
GND3
TDD
ID16
BRAMMCS_
(011-12B)
14
VCC
NF54
R111
(006-05G)
IDGCK3
ID1
ID2
GND1
ID3
ID4
ID5
ID6
TDI
TMS
TCK
VPL5
ROMMCS_
(008-02E)
10
R126
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
DRAMCS_
3
C61
C60
R125
Q1HCS_
20
(006-03B)(008-02E)
4
C74
R124
(006-05F)
(001-11I)
(003-02D)
C67
2
BNKA23
RESMCP_
(006-05F)
C66
R123
BNKA22
C65
2
1
C64
RA77
NF51
FF74VCC
3
4
J
NF53
A
7
GND
IC7
GPL5
GND
IC5
GPL5
VPL5
5
VPL5
CLK_M
MCPRDY_
R118
C63
(011-05F)
NF57
(011-03F)
NF50
NF58
C62
20
RST2_
20
VCC
VCC
RDM_
GPL5
ALEM
(011-08I)
6
(011-09I)
C78
(011-08J)
C76
(011-05G)
C77
RESET_
C79
(011-02H)
6
BHEM_
10
IC12
GPL5
1
7
10
GND
GND
IC13
GPL5
2
7
IC9
3
4
IC9
5
6
IC9
8
8
GPL0
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-22
Main PCB 11/20
2AR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
VPL5
NF62
VPL5
1
1
VPL5
NF60
C90
(011-08H) VCCCPUM
C84
C85
SCMACK (013-12B)
GPL5
IC24
R169
SCMHEAD (013-12B)
(010-09D) ROMMCS_
R164
(012-02D) RESSCU_
(012-14H) RESSCC1_
(014-05H) RESENG_
(013-11C) RESSCAN_
(013-11H) RESMMI_
TXDMMI (013-12G)
TP3
(018-06D) REQCMD_
(018-06D)
SBSY_
SCURXRDY (012-04B)
SCLKPRT (018-09C)
1
RXPRT (018-09C)
TP4
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TXPRT (018-06D)
(011-11E) AM22
(011-11E) AM21
(011-11E) AM20
R142
(001-07C)
OVSYNC_
(018-09D)
CBSY_
R140
R139
R138
R143
R144
(011-04G) WD
(012-10I) INTSCC1
(013-06D) SCANACK
(013-06G)
MMIACK
(014-06B)FACKMCPU
(006-06H) MCPINT_
(013-05K)
MMIJG_
(010-02G) BANK_
R145
4
GPL5
(012-04E) SCUCLK
(013-12H)
MMIMERR
R146
(013-12G)
MMIMACK
(014-05D) ENGMERR
(014-05D) ENGMHEAD
(014-05E) ENGMACK
(013-06B) SCENABLE
(013-06C)
SCHEAD
(013-06H)
MMIERR
(014-06B)
ENGERR
(014-06B) ENGHEAD
R147
MCPRDY_
(010-02H)
VPL5
(019-03H) TWTHSIG
5
(010-02G) (012-04D) CLK_M
IC22
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
4
3
2
1
4
3 RA79
2
1
4
3 RA80
2
1
4
3 RA81
2
1
4
3 RA82
2
1
R166
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
R149
RA84
RA85
WD (011-04D)
6
VPL5
VPL5
VPL5
R150
RA86
GPL0
RESET_ (010-02H)
R152
(011-06A)
VCCCPUM
R156
R151
(010-02H)
RST2_
R154
C88
GPL5
1
IC23
VPL5
7
8
7
6
5
C80
C81
ADJ2
WD
RST2_
TC
VCC RST1_
ADJ1 GND
7 1
VPL5
IC29
R23
1
2
3
4
R158
2
R161
C83
R162
GPL5
R163
GPL5
C86
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3
AM(23:0) (011-11F)
GPL5
VPL5
R168
(011-08J)
(010-09E) RDM_
RAMMCS_
(010-09D) WRME_
4
(010-09D) WRMO_
VPL5
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
23
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
GPL5
VPL5
NF64
NF63
AM20 (011-02D)
AM21 (011-02D)
AM22 (011-02D)
IC25
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
22
20
27
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
25
24
21
23
2
26
1
DE_
CE_
WE_
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
IC26
VCC
28
C92
VSS
DQ0
DQ1
DQ2
DQ3
DQ4
DQ5
DQ6
DQ7
C93
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
14
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
GPL5
ADM (15:0)
(011-11H)
22
20
27
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
25
24
21
23
2
26
1
DE_
CE_
WE_
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
VCC
28
C94
VSS
DQ0
DQ1
DQ2
DQ3
DQ4
DQ5
DQ6
DQ7
C95
14
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
GPL5
6
VPL5
VPL5
IC27
(011-08J)
RDM_
(010-02E) BRAMMCS_
(010-02E) BRAMMWR_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
BHEM_ (010-02I)
C87
8
VPL5
NF65
R170
ADM (15:0)
$003
22
20
27
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
25
24
21
23
2
26
1
DE_
CE_
WE_
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
VCC
28
C96
VSS
DQ0
DQ1
DQ2
DQ3
DQ4
DQ5
DQ6
DQ7
C97
14
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
GPL5
ADM (15:0) (011-11H)
8
(011-11F) AM (23:0)
GPL5
A
B
C
D
5
ADM (15:0)
(011-11H)
AM (23:0)
(011-11F)
RDM_ $004
X4
GPL5
2
(011-08J) RDM_
ALEM (010-02H)
B
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
GPL5
R159
+
A
GPL5
RA83
GPL5
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
VCC
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
GND2
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
VPP
CE0
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
GND1
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
DE0
(011-11H) ADM(15:0)
WRM_$001
GPL5
IC29
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
C89
R160
R157
R153
NF61
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
AM (23:0)
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
R148
C82
RA78
P00_A0
P01_A1
P02_A2
P03_A3
P04_A4
P05_A5
P06_A6
P07_A7
P10_A8
P11_A9
P12_A10
P13_A11
P14_A12
P15_A13
P16_A14
P17_A15
P20_A16
P21_A17
P22_A18
P23_A19
P27_A23
P100_D0_LA0
P101_D1_LA1
P102_D2_LA2
P103_D3_LA3
P104_D4_LA4
P105_D5_LA5
P106_D6_LA6
P107_D7_LA7
P110_D8
R167
R141
P70_AN0
P95_INT3__KI4_
P94_CS4__RTP13
P93_CS3__A22_RTP12
P92_CS2__A21_RTP11
P91_CS1__A20_RTP10
P90_CS0_
P67_TB2IN
P66_TB1IN
P65_TB0IN
P64_INT2_
P63_INT1_
P62_INT0_
P61_TA4IN
P60_TA4OUT
P57_TA3IN_KI3_
P56_TA3OUT_KI2_
P55_TA2IN_KI1_
P54_TA2OUT_KI0_
P53_TA1IN_W_RTP03
P52_TA1OUT_U__RTP02
P51_TA0IN_V__RTP01
P50_TA0OUT_W__RTP00
P47
P46
P45
P44
P43
P42_CLK
P41_RDY_
20
21
22
(012-04B)SCUTXRDY
(013-12C) SCSTART
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
P40_HOLD_
BYTE
CNVSS
RESET_
XIN
XOUT
E__RD_
VSS1
VCC1
P33_HLDA_
P32_ALE
P31_BHE_
P30_WR_
P117_D15
P116_D14
P115_D13
P114_D12
P113_D11
P112_D10
P111_D9
3
P71_AN1
P72_AN2
P73_AN3
P74_AN4
P75_AN5
P76_AN6
P77_AN7_ADTRIG_
VSS2
AVSS
VREF
AVCC
VCC2
P80_CLKS1_DA0
P81_CLK0
P82_RXD0_CLKS0
P83_TXD0
P84_DA1_INT4_
P85_CLK1
P86_RXD1
P87_TXD1
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
R165
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
RXDMMI (013-06I)
(018-05I) MAIN_STS_
2
C91
GPL5
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-23
Main PCB 12/20
2AR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
1
1
VPL5
15
14
1
(011-11F) AM(23:0)
(010-02E)
SCUCS_
R186
13
R187
12
(011-08J)
RDM_
(011-09B) SCURXRDY
(011-05D) SCUTXRDY
2
R185
R188
11
R189
10
R190
9
R191
R171
TXDENG
8
GPL0
3
RESSCU_
R172
(011-06B)
4
(011-03F)
CLK_M
IC29
VPL5
R173
NC1
NC2
TXD
CLK
RESET
NC3
DSR_
RTS_
DTR_
NC4
NC5
VPL5
NF66
(011-03E)
SCUCLK
R192
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
NC11
NC10
WR_
TXC_
D7
NC
D6
D5
D4
NC9
NC8
WRM_
7
(018-06D)
(018-06E)
(018-09D)
(019-03I)
6
5
4
SETPRT_
P1_
PRINT_
MSWSIG
R196
2
R197
R198
R199
R200
R176
(018-05I)
(019-02I)
RESFAX_
MSWOFF
(018-06D)
(018-09D)
PRTRST_
P2_
R177
R202
4
R201
GPL5
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
GPL5
(011-11F) AM(23:0)
RXDENG
(014-10B)
2 3
VPL5
(011-11H) ADM(15:0)
NF67
5
C100
C101
GPL5
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
VPL5
6
R179
R180
(011-09H)
(011-08J)
(010-02F)
IC30
P00
P01
P02
P03
P04
P05
P06
P07
VSS
XOUT
XIN
P10
INTP11
RESET_
CNVSS
P12
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
(011-11H)
ADM(15:0)
R203
GPL5
R204
GPL5
5
X5
1
3
2
VPL5
GPL0
R205
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
R178
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
VCC
DO7
DO6
DO5
DO4
DO3
DO2
DO1
DO0
W_
R_
S_
BM
INTR
RXD3
TXD3
RXD2
TXD2
RXD1
TXD1
P16CTS3_
P15CTS2_
P14CTS1_
P13CLK
GPL5
PA0
PA1
PA2
PA3
PA4
PA5
PA6
PA7
PB0
PB1
PB2
PB3
PB4
PB5
PB6
PB7
C99
0 1
R195
3
R174
GPL5
R194
(018-10H) PRINTFAX_
(018-10H) SCANFAX_
(018-10H)
SETFAX_
(018-10I)
FAXRDY_
(011-09H)
R175
C98
R193
(011-11H) ADM(15:0)
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
GPL5
4
IC28
NC6
RXC_
VDD
D0
D1
IC
D2
D3
RXD
GND
NC7
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
NC15
NC14
CTS_
SYNC_BRK
TXRDY
NC13
RXRDY
RD_
C-D_
CS_
NC12
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
(014-10B)
VPL5
R206
6
XMOE_
RESSCC1_ (011-06B)
0
GPL5
WRM_
RDM_
SCC1CS_
(006-13H) (008-02B)
R207
R208
GPL5
GPL5
(011-05D)
R183
INTSCC1
TXDSCAN (013-12A)
7
7
R181
RXDSCAN (013-06E)
R184
GPL5
TP5
TXDFAX
(018-05I)
RXDFAX
(018-10H)
VPL5
R182
TP6
8
8
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-24
E
A
A
A
E
E
A
A
E
E
2AR
Main PCB 13/20
A
B
C
NF68
SCN ENABLE
NF69
SCN HEADER
4
4
IC31
R219
9
IC31
R220 13
C104
8
SCHEAD (011-05F)
R223
R222
IC31
GPL5
4
9
IC31
12 11
R224 3
C105
5
(011-04D) SCSTART
7
10
IC31
5
IC1
6
8 11
IC1
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
RXDSCAN (012-13I)
IC1
B12
B10
B8
B6
A3
A1
CN5
CN5
CN5
CN5
CN5
CN5
NF72
R225
ERROR FOR MAIN
NF73
NF74
RXD MAIN
7
NF75
DET SIG
8
R235
6
7
IC32
MMIACK (011-05E)
14 11
IC32
3
(011-05E) MMIMACK
8
MMIERR (011-05F)
5
10 9
IC1
FAX_MMISTS_
10
RXDMMI (011-09B)
IC32
FAX_MMIRXD
FAX_MMITXD
R239
C
11
(011-06C) RESMMI_
IC32
GPL5
VPL5
MMIJG_ (011-05E)
R238
B
CN5 A5
NF79
8
IC33
CN5 A6
NF80
10
IC33
CN5 B7
1
TXD SCN
MAIN SCN ACK
MAIN SCN HEADER
2
SCN START
SCN RESET
3
R242
GPL0
R243
4
2
NF81
TXD MAIN
4
CN9
6
8
D
E
14 CN9
G(5 V)
12 CN9
G(5 V)
4 CN9
G(5 V)
2 CN9
G(5 V)
F
R240
1
NF82
ACK FROM MAIN
IC34
GPL5
A
6
IC33
CN9
5
6
NF83
ERROR FROM MAIN
CN9
8
NF84
RESET MAIN
IC34
R244
GPL5
NF85
R236 13
C108
R237
9 CN9
4
IC32
GPL5
VPL5
GPL5
3
(011-05E) MMIMERR
R232 5
C107
R234
3 CN9
CN5 A4
NF78
IC34
R231
R233
2
IC32
GPL5
VPL5
GPL5
R228 1
C106
R230
7 CN9
4
IC33
IC34
R227
R229
1
(011-09B) TXDMMI
R226
GPL5
6
CN5 B9
NF77
GPL5
MMI I/F
5 CN9
NF76
2
IC33
GPL0
VPL5
5 ACK FOR MAIN
J
R241
GPL5
SCANACK (011-05E)
GPL5
VPL5
3
(011-09B) SCMACK
(011-09B) SCMHEAD
6
I
1
SCENABLE (011-05F)
(011-06B) RESSCAN_
R221
B11 CN5
H
GPL5
R218
NF71
3
IC31
R216 5
C103
VPL5
GPL5
RXD SCN
R215
R217
A2 CN5
2
GPL5
R214
NF70
R212 1
C131
VPL5
GPL5
SCN ACK
R211
R213
A7 CN5
G
SCANNER I/F
R210
A8 CN5
F
(012-13I) TXDSCAN
R209
GPL5
3
E
VPL5
1
2
D
CN9 11
6
NF88
18 CN4
NF86
CN9 10
NF89
14 CN4
NF87
CN9 13
NF90
CN9 15
16 CN4
MMI STS
7
RXD FAX
TXD FAX
GPL0
8
G
H
I
J
3-7-19
3-7-25
E
E
A
A
E
A
A
E
A
E
Main PCB 14/20
2AR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
VPL5
NF94
VPL5
1
C122
C121
NF92
1
(014-08H) VCCCPUE
C113
C114
DACLK (014-12I)
LD (014-12I)
TP7
DI (014-12I)
R284
GPL5
VPL5
DBCNT (019-09H)
R285
16
15
12
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TXDENG (012-03C)
R245
GRCNT (019-09H)
R282
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
R247
(019-07H) TONERSENS
GPL5
C112
(001-07C) OVSYNC_
(003-05I) VTC_
R250
R252
R253
R256
R257
R258
R254
R255
GPL5
4
C111
GPL5
(003-0H)
R251
(014-11E) AE22
(014-11E) AE21
(014-11E) AE20
C110
R259
(011-05F) ENGMERR
(011-05F) ENGMHEAD
R260
(015-11H) TNTSCC2
(011-05F) ENGMACK
(017-15E) RESFINSH
(015-15G) RESSCC2_
$001 RESVIC_
(017-06K) RESMAIL
GPL5
R261
R263
(019-06I) BMOTB_
(019-06J) BMOTA_
(019-06J) BMOTB
(019-06J) BMOTA
(016-10D) (016-01D) RESIO_
(003-05J) EPVSYNC
(003-05J)
LDEN_
(003-05J)
LDON_
R264
R265
R266
R267
R268
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
GPL5
P70_AN0
P95_INT3_ _KI4
P94_CS4_ _RTP13
P93_CS3_ _A22_RTP12
P92_CS2_ _A21_RTP11
P91_CS1_ _A20_RTP10
P90_CS0_
P67_TB2IN
P66_TB1IN
P65_TB0IN
P64_INT2_
P63_INT1_
P62_INT0_
P61_TA4IN
P60_TA4OUT
P57_TA3IN_KI3_
P56_TA3OUT_KI2_
P55_TA2IN_KI1_
P54_TA2OUT_KI0_
P53_TA1IN_W_RTP03
P52_TA1OUT_U_ _RTP02
P51_TA0IN_V_ _RTP01
P50_TA0OUT_W_ _RTP00
P47
P46
P45
P44
P43
P42_CLK
P41_RDY_
VPL5
5
R269
R270
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
RA89
VPL5
RA92
RA93
RA94
4
3
2
1
4
3 RA95
2
1
3
2
1
20
19
4
5
6
7
8
C119
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
IC36
IOQ2
IOQ3
IOQ4
IOQ5
IOQ6
18
17
16
15
14
5
6
7
8
3
4
4 RA87
3
2
1
2
1 RA88
VPL5
RDE_
(014-08I)
(014-04I) RAMECS_
WRE_
(014-08H)
AE20 (014-02D)
AE21 (014-02D)
AE22 (014-02D)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
AE (23:0)
$004
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
GPL5
4
22
20
27
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
25
24
21
23
2
26
1
VCC 28
OE_
CE_
WE_
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
C123
C124
VSS 14
DQ0
DQ1
DQ2
DQ3
DQ4
DQ5
DQ6
DQ7
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
GPL5
5
ADE (7:0)
(014-11H)
AE (23:0)
(014-11F)
6
WRE_$005
NF96
IC39
R278
R274
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
(014-09B)
LD
(014-09B) DACLK
(014-09B)
DI
(019-09H)
TCCNT
(019-09H) TONERCNT
RDE_$003
B
D0
LD
CLK
DI
A01
A02
GND
VCC
VDD
A06
A05
A04
A03
VSS
GPL5
X6
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
C125
SBCNT (019-09I)
7
GPL5
GPL5
C117
$001 RESVTC_ (001-11H) (003-02C) (003-02E)
$002 ADE
(003-01I) (014-12C) (014-14G)
(015-10G) (015-12C) (016-10E)
(016-02E)
$003 RDE_
(003-05I) (003-01H) (014-14B)
(014-12E) (015-08G) (016-02F)
(016-10F)
$004 AE
(003-04H) (014-01J) (014-12D)
(014-12G) (015-14C) (015-10E)
(016-02F) (016-10F)
A
VPL5
NF95
GPL5
AE (23:0)
(014-11F)
8
(014-04I) ROMECS_
VPL5
R279
R273
R276
GPL5
2
R286
C120
VTCRDY_ (014-05G)
22
23
7
R287
10
7
6
5
4
3
GPL5
ROMECS_(014-15D)
RAMECS_ (014-12E)
XIO1_
(016-02G)
XIO2_
(016-10G)
SCC2CS_ (015-08H)
R277
RDE_
VPL5
3
ADE (7:0)
$002
NF93
R272
I2
I1
I-CLK
VCC
IDQ1
17
18
19
20
21
I8
GND
I-OE_
IOQ8
IOQ7
6
(014-06B)
VCCCPUE
(011-06B) RESENG_
GPL5
15
16
18
17
14
13
8
9
11
(014-11F) AE (23:0)
VPL5
(014-04G) CLK_E
GPL5
GPL5
(014-11H) ADE (7:0)
KCDB0 (019-06K)
KCDB1 (019-06K)
KCDB2 (019-06K)
KCDB3 (019-06K)
KCDB4 (019-06K)
KCDB5 (019-06K)
KCDB6 (019-06K)
KCDB7 (019-06L)
C116
C115
R275
RA91
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
VPL0
(014-04J) VTCRDY_
RA90
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
VCC
A18
A17
A14
A13
A8
A9
A11
OE_
A10
CE_
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
IC38
R271
NF91
VPL5
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
VDD
A16
A15
A12
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
D0
D1
D2
GND
R280
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
(014-02H) CLK_E
P00_A0
P01_A1
P02_A2
P03_A3
P04_A4
P05_A5
P06_A6
P07_A7
P10_A8
P11_A9
P12_A10
P13_A11
P14_A12
P15_A13
P16_A14
P17_A15
P20_A16
P21_A17
P22_A18
P23_A19
P27_A23
P100_D0_LA0
P101_D1_LA1
P102_D2_LA2
P103_D3_LA3
P104_D4_LA4
P105_D5_LA5
P106_D6_LA6
P107_D7_LA7
P110_D8
IC35
0
1
2
GPL5
P40_HOLD_
BYTE
CNVSS
RESET_
XIN
XOUT
E_ _RD_
VSS1
VCC1
P33_HLDA_
P32_ALE
P31_BHE_
P30_WR_
P117_D15
P116_D14
P115_D13
P114_D12
P113_D11
P112_D10
P111_D9
C109
P71_AN1
P72_AN2
P73_AN3
P74_AN4
P75_AN5
P76_AN6
P77_AN7_ADTRIG1
VSS2
AVSS
VREF
AVCC
VCC2
P80_CLKS1_DA0
P81_CLK0
P82_RXD0_CLKS0
P83_TXD0
P84_DA1_INT4_
P85_CLK1
P86_RXD1
P87_TXD1
R248
(019-07I) THSIG
(019-06J) MMOTCLK
RXDENG (012-05E)
R249
R246
(019-07H) HUMTH2
3
TP8
R283
R281
(019-07H) HUMRHV
2
(011-05F)
FNGERR
(011-05F) ENGHEAD
(011-05E) EACKMCPU
IC37
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
B
$005 WRE_
C118
(003-05J) (014-12E) (015-08G)
(016-10F) (016-02F)
GPL5
GPL5
8
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-26
E
A
A
A
E
E
A
A
E
E
2AR
Main PCB 15/20
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
VPL5
VPL5
19
1
R292
6
R306
12
R298
0
R305
13
R297
1
R304
14
R296
2
R303
15
R295
3
R302
16
R294
4
R301
17
R293
5
2
R300
18
7
R307
11
R299
R308
10
R309
(014-11H) ADE(7:0)
R320
3
R321
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
R310
1
R311
R312
R313
R314
R315
2
R316
R317
R318
R319
(014-11H) AE(23:0)
3
GPL5
PA0
PA1
PA2
PA3
PA4
PA5
PA6
PA7
PB0
PB1
PB2
PB3
PB4
PB5
PB6
PB7
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
GPL5
VPL5
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
4
VPL5
NF97
6
7
8
5
5
RA96
3
2
1
4
CN4
23
CN4
22
CN4
21
CN4
20
PGDI
PGDO
C128
C129
PGCLK
PGEN
GPL5
VPL5
GPL5
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
R290
R291
6
P00
P01
P02
P03
P04
P05
P06
P07
VSS
XOUT
XIN
P10
INTP11
RESET_
CNVSS
P12
IC41
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
R289
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
VCC
D07
D06
D05
D04
D03
D02
D01
DO0
W_
R_
S_
BM
INTR
RXD3
TXD3
RXD2
TXD2
RXD1
TXD1
P16CTS3_
P15CTS2_
P14CTS1_
P13CLK
(014-11F) AE(23:0)
4
GPL5
R323
GPL5
X8
1
3
5
2
VPL5
GPL0
R325
R324
XEOE_(004-02I)
RESSCC2_(014-04E)
(014-11H)
ADE(7:0)
(014-08H) WRE_
(014-08I)
RDE_
(014-04I) SCC2CS
R322
GPL5
R326
6
R327
GPL5
GPL5
TP11
(014-05E) INTSCC2
TP9
7
R329
TXDLCM(017_07D) (017-06I)
TP12
(017-15B) RXDF INISH
R330
R328
(017-15C) TXDF INISH
7
RXDLCM(017-07E)
TP13
TP10
TXDMMD(017-03B)
TP14
R331
2
IC42
8
1
RXDMMD(017-03B)
8
R332
GPL5
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-21
3-7-27
E
E
A
A
E
A
A
E
A
E
Main PCB 16/20
2AR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
1
1
VPL5
VPL5
NF99
NF98
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
(014-11F) AE(23:0)
VPL0
6
UPSIGLIFTR
(016-05I)
4
3
8
7
6
5
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
R342
3
5
PORTO
KC1COUNTREM
KCDREM
TCOUNTREM
COPYINGSIG
EJECTCOUNT
FEEDCOUNT
MMDREM
SBFEEDCLREM
FEED3CLREM
FEED2CLREM
FEED1CLREM
DUPREM
SBPFCLREM
LOPFCLREM
UPPFCLREM
(019-06B)
UPLIFTREM
RESIO_
(014-04F)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
(019-06D)
(019-06D)
(019-06D)
(019-06D)
(019-06D)
(019-06D)
(019-06D)
(019-06D)
(019-02F)
(019-02F)
(019-02F)
(019-02F)
(019-02F)
(019-02F)
(019-02F)
(019-02E)
(014-11H) ADE(7:0)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
R335
(014-11F) AE(23:0)
R336
(014-08I) RDE_
(014-08H) WRE_
GPL5
1
2
1
2
3
4
IC44
JOBSIG (019-03C)
(014-04I) XIO1_
GPL5
VPL0
PF7
PF6
PF5
PF4
PF3
PF2
PF1
PF0
VDD2
GND3
PD7
PD6
PD5
PD4
PD3
PD2
PF7
PF6
PF5
PF4
PF3
PF2
PF1
PF0
VDD2
GND3
PD7
PD6
PD5
PD4
PD3
PD2
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
MODE
RESET_
SELECT
AD0
AD1
AD2
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD7
GND
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
ALE
RD_
WR_
CS
PD1
PD0
Y3_
PE7
PE6
PE5
PE4
PE3
PE2
PE1
PE0
GND2
PC7
PC6
PC5
PC4
PC3
PC2
PC1
PC0
INITD
PA7
PA6
PA5
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
RA102
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
RA103
1
2
RA104
4
3
R343
(014-04I) XIO2_
(019-03D)
FEED1SW
(019-03D)
FEED2SW
(019-03D)
FEED3SW
(019-03D)
SBSIGFEED
(019-03D)
EJECTSW
(019-03D)
REGSW
(019-03D) BRANCHSWSIG
(019-03D)
DUPSIG
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
R337
LOSIGLIFTR (016-07C)
UPSIGLIFTR (016-07D)
JOBEJECTSW
LOSIGPF
UPSIGPF
SBSIGPF
LOSIGLIFT
UPSIGLIFT
VPL5
(019-03B)
(019-03B)
(019-03B)
(019-03B)
(019-03B)
(019-03B)
RA107
RA105
RA99
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
C136
GPL5
R338
7
C133
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
6
RA98
RA97
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
C132
GPL5
DEVSIG
PORTI2
PORTI1
MCALM
(019-14D)
(019-14D)
(019-14D)
(019-14D)
DUPSET
MMLOCK
(019-14D)
(019-14D)
HEATREMS
HEATREMM
(019-09F)
(019-09F)
COFANREMH
COFANREMF
PCFANREM
JOBREM
MMREM
(019-09F)
(019-09F)
(019-09F)
(019-09F)
(019-09E)
COINEN
KCDCOPYEN
(019-10C)
(019-10C)
SETMAIL
(017-06J)
BRANCHSET
(019-10B)
4
5
C137
8
7
6
5
(014-08I) RDE_
(014-08H) WRE_
GPL5
PD1
PD0
Y3_
PE7
PE6
PE5
PE4
PE3
PE2
PE1
PE0
GND2
PC7
PC6
PC5
PC4
PC3
PC2
PC1
PC0
INITD
PA7
PA6
PA5
3
GPL5
6
1
2
3
4
5
(019-06B)
LOLIFTREM
RA106
(014-11H) ADE(7:0)
7
IC45
4
MODE
RESET_
SELECT
AD0
AD1
AD2
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD7
GND
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
ALE
RD_
WR_
CS
IC43
GPL5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
CS_
PB7
PB6
PB5
PB4
PB3
PB2
PB1
GND1
VDD1
PB0
PA0
PA1
PA2
PA3
PA4
R334
R333
IC44
2
2
GPL5
VPL5
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
VPL5
RESIO_
(014-04F)
1
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
3
(019-06C)
(019-06C)
(019-06B)
(019-06B)
(019-06B)
(019-06B)
LOSIGLIFTR
(016-05H)
CS_
PB7
PB6
PB5
PB4
PB3
PB2
PB1
GND1
VDD1
PB0
PA0
PA1
PA2
PA3
PA4
SBLIFTCLREM
SCREM
ICREM
ICCHANG
DBREM
MCREM
C135
R341
RA100
GPL5
(019-06E)
BRANCH2REM
(019-06F)
REGCLREM
(019-06F)
BRANCH1REM
(019-06F) BRANCHFANREM
(019-06F)
TMOTP
(019-06F)
TMOTP_
C134
(019-14E)
KC1SET
(019-14F) TCOUNTSET
(019-14F)
MMDSET
SETFINISH
(017-15D)
(019-14F) FCOVERSW
(019-14F)
FEEDLSW
(019-14F)
FEEDHSW
(019-14F)
JOBSET
RA101
C131
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
C130
2
(019-10D) LOSIGLEN
(019-10D) LOCSSW0
(019-10D) LOCSSW1
(019-10D) LOCSSW2
(019-10D) UPSIGLEN
(019-10D) UPCSSW0
(019-10D) UPCSSW1
(019-10D) UPCSSW2
R339
(019-10B)
SBSSW2
(019-10B)
SBSSW1
SBSSW0
(019-10B)
(019-10B) SBSIGLEN
R340
7
8
8
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-28
Main PCB 17/20
2AR
2AR-1
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
D7
G(5 V)
MMD TXD
1
G(5 V)
MMD RXD
A30 CN2
A29 CN2
NF100
TXDMMD(015-14I)
A27 CN2
VPL5
R334
A28 CN2
A
MMD I/F
NF101
RXDMMD(015-14I)
R358
A25 CN2
NF102
2
R345
CN10
IC42
F TXD
4
NF104
R362
6
K 3
CN10
R364
12
K 3
13
TXDLCM(015-14H)
6
IC46
NF113 GPL5
CN10
F DET
5
TXDFINISH(015-10I)
IC46
D8
A
R346
D3
NF112
CN10
A
5
2
COM
K
F RESET
LCF I/F
VPL5
A
NF114
CN10
VPL5
R366
2
R367
GPL5
SETFINISH(016-11B)
R365
8
NF105
A
R349
13
12
3
IC42
R348
4
R350
4
RXDLCM(015-14H)
3
9
IC46
D9
R347
R368
C141
K 3
GPL5
2
R363
D4
CN11
6
VPL5
3
3
5
IC42
GPL5
2
CN11
DECK RXD/DESK RXD
10
IC46
G(5 V)
2
11
C140
NF103
3
G(5 V)
R361
GPL5
GPL5
DECK TXD/DESK TXD
R360
RXDFINISH(015-10H)
1
G(5 V)
1 CN11
NF111
R359
A26 CN2
2
CN10
F RXD
GPL5
A24 CN2
1
K
FINISHER I/F
1
A23 CN2
COM
GPL5
2
RESFINISH(014-04E)
R446
GPL5
IC42
C138
GPL5
4
GPL5
4
CN11
G(5 V)
R351
GPL5
GPL5
5
FSW3 SIG
CN11
NF106
FEEDSW(019-14H)
5
5
MAILBOX I/F
7
CN10
M RXD
6
6
8
CN10
G(5 V)
9
M TXD
10
G(5 V)
7
NF107
CN10
NF108
R352
4
CN10
R353
M DET
12
M RESET
CN10
CN10
NF109 GPL5
NF110
TXDLCM(015-14H)
D5
A
11
3
IC46
K 3
7
VPL5
R355
2
R356
GPL5
SETMAIL(016-15F)
C139
R354
K 3
IC46
D6
8
R357
A
GPL5
2
8
RESMAIL(014-04E)
R445
GPL5
GPL5
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-29
E
A
E
A
A
E
A
A
E
E
2AR
Main PCB 18/20
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
VPL5
R369
1
NF115
17
CN3
19
CN3 NF116
PRT_SCLK
1
R370
R377
R378
R376
R375
VPL5
PRT_CMD_
R397
VPL5
R371
C142
C143
R399
R373
2
NF117
9
CN3
7
CN3 NF118
20
CN3
16
CN3 NF120
PRT_CBSY
PRT_PRINT
PRT_SET_
GPL5
2
GPL5
R374
R381
R400
R382
R380
R379
NF119
C144
GPL0
C145
PRT_PORT1
3
GPL5
GPL5
(011-18C)
TXPRT
(011-05C)
SBSY_
(011-05C) REQCMD_
(012-18E) PRTRST_
1
19 _DE1
_DE2
2
4 1A1 1Y1
6 1A2 1Y2
8 1A3 1Y3
11 1A4 1Y4
13 2A1 2Y1
15 2A2 2Y2
17 2A3 2Y3
2A4 2Y4
VPL5
1
CN3
11
CN3
NF122
12
CN3
NF123
PRT_5V
PRT_5V
4
PRT_5V
R385
R387
3
CN3
R388
13
CN3
R389
PRT_GND
PRT_GND
PRT_GND
SCLKPRT (011-09B)
R392
NF129
CN3 18
RXPRT
(011-10C)
R393
NF130
CN3 8
CBSY
PRINT_
(011-03D)
(012-09D)
R394
NF131
CN3 10
R395
NF132
CN3 5
NF133
CN3 6
PRT_STS_
R391
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
PRT_SBSY_
PRT_ENGRDY_
3
PRT_RESET_
R396
PRT_PORT2_
(012-10E) P2_
R386
SETPRT_ (012-09D)
C149
R384
R383
C150
C151
C152
C153
P1_(012-09D)
C146
CN3
R390
IC47
NF121
2
R398
PRINTER I/F
R372
GPL5
C147
GPL5
GPL5
GPL5
GPL5
4
GPL5
GPL5
GPL5
GPL5
GPL5
5
5
VPL5
3
R401
CN4 NF124
FAX_MAINRXD
R403
R404
R402
FAX I/F
VPL5
6
C148
GPL5
8
CN4 NF125
9
CN4 NF126
R416
R405
RXDFAX (012-13J)
R409
FAX_SET_
SETFAX_ (012-09D)
R406
R410
FAX_SCAN_
7
GPL0
10
R407
CN4 NF127
R411
FAX_PRINT_
11
R408
CN4 NF128
TXDFAX (012-13I)
R413
R412
FAX_READY_
MAIN_STS_ (011-06B)
RESFAX_ (012-10D)
1
19 _DE1
_DE2
2
4 1A1 1Y1
6 1A2 1Y2
8 1A3 1Y3
11 1A4 1Y4
13 2A1 2Y1
15 2A2 2Y2
17 2A3 2Y3
2A4 2Y4
SCANFAX_ (012-09D)
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
IC48
R414
R415
PRITFAX_ (012-09C)
FAX_GND
FAX_GND
FAX_GND
FAX_GND
FAX_GND
FAX_GND
FAX_GND
FAX_GND
FAX_GND
FAX_GND
FAX_GND
FAX_GND
FAX_GND
FAX_GND
FAX_GND
FAX_GND
FAX_GND
1
2
4
6
13
15
17
24
26
28
34
36
38
40
42
44
45
CN4
CN4
CN4
CN4
CN4
CN4
CN4
CN4
CN4
CN4
CN4
CN4
CN4
CN4
CN4
CN4
CN4
R420
GPL5
6
R421
7
FAXRDY_ (012-09D)
R417
NF134
R418
NF135
R419
NF136
CN4 5
N.C 19 CN4
FAX_MAINTXD
GPL5
CN4 7
FAX_MAINSTS_
CN4 12
FAX_RESET_
8
8
GPL5
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-22
3-7-30
E
E
A
A
E
A
E
A
A
E
E
A
A
A
E
E
A
A
E
E
2AR
Main PCB 19/20
A
B
C
XIO1 PA
1
LICSW-U
LICSW-L
BYPPSW
PSW-U
PSW-L
JBESW
JOFSW
B9
B11
B21
B8
B10
B27
B29
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
D
E
F
CLM-U
CLM-L
MC REM
DB REM
BYPPWSW(DIG2)
BYPPWSW(DIG1)
BYPPWSW(DIG0)
BYPPLSW
FS DET
G
XIO1 PD
UPSIGLIFT
LOSIGLIFT
SBSIGPE
UPSIGPE
LOSIGPE
JOBEJECTSW
JOBSIG
(016-08D) UPLIFTREM
(016-08C) LOLIFTREM
MCREM
(016-06C)
DBREM
(016-06C)
(016-06C) TCCHANG
TCREM
(016-06C)
SCREM
(016-06C)
(016-06C)SBLIFTCLREM
(016-07H)
(016-07H)
(016-07H)
(016-07H)
(016-07H)
(016-07H)
(016-07F)
H
I
XIO2 PD
XIO2 PA
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
A2
A3
B58
B55
B52
B53
B50
B25
B24
B23
B22
B19
B34
TC REM
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
SBSSW2
SBSSW1
SBSSW0
SBSIGLEN
BRANCHSET
A19 CN2
A34 CN2
BYPLCL
(016-11H)
(016-11I)
(016-11I)
(016-11I)
(016-15G)
1
COINEN
(016-15F)
KCDCOPYEN (016-15F)
2
FSW1
FSW2
FSW3
BYPFSW
ESW
RSW
FSSW
DUPPCSW
A15
A16
A17
B20
B44
A60
B35
A11
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
XIO1 PE
FEED1SW
(016-03H)
FEED2SW
(016-03H)
FEED3SW
(016-03H)
SBSIGFEED
(016-03H)
EJECTSW
(016-03H)
REGSW
(016-03H)
BRANCHSWSIG (016-03H)
DUPSIG
(016-03H)
XIO2 PB
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
(016-07E)
MMDREM
(016-07E)
FEEDCOUNT
(016-07E) EJECTCOUNT
(016-07E)
COPYINGSIG
(016-07D)
TCOUTREM
(016-07D)
KCDREM
(016-07D) KC1COUNTREM
(016-07D)
PORTO
A32
A20
A21
A22
A49
A33
A52
A43
REM(METER PULSE)
TC
KC COUNT
B14
B13
B12
B6
B17
B16
B15
B7
PWSW-U(DIG2)
PWSW-U(DIG1)
PWSW-U(DIG0)
PLSW-U
PWSW-L(DIG2)
PWSW-L(DIG1)
PWSW-L(DIG0)
PLSW-L
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
UPCSSW2
UPCSSW1
UPCSSW0
UPSIGLEN
LOCSSW2
LOCSSW1
LOCSSW0
LOSIGLEN
(016-11H)
(016-11H)
(016-11H)
(016-11H)
(016-11H)
(016-11H)
(016-11H)
(016-11H)
DM LOCK
DUP DET
B32 CN2
A12 CN2
MMLOCK
DUPSET
(016-15E)
(016-15E)
MC ALM
BYP DET
R24 V
DEV DET
B56
B18
B60
A57
MCALM
PORTI1
PORTI2
DEVSIG
(016-15E)
(016-15D)
(016-15D)
(016-15D)
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
R422
R423
XIO1 PC
4
2
XIO2 PE
XIO1 PB
3
J
UPPECLREM
(016-07F)
LOPECLREM
(016-07F)
SBPECLREM
(016-07F)
DUPREM
(016-07E)
(016-07E) FEED1CLREM
(016-07E) FEED2CLREM
(016-07E) FEED3CLREM
(016-07E) SBFEEDCLREM
XIO1 PF
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
A8
A9
B26
A10
A5
A6
A7
A4
PFCL-U REM
PFCL-L REM
BYPPFCL
DUPCL
FCL1
FCL2
FCL3
BYPFCL
BRANCH2REM
(016-03C)
REGCLREM
(016-03C)
BRANCH1REM
(016-03C)
(016-03C) BRANCHFANREM
TMOTP
(016-03C)
TMOTP_
(016-03C)
XIO2 PC
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
B36
B37
B38
B39
A55
A56
FSSOL2 ON REM
RCL
FSSOL1 ON REM
FSSOL OFF REM
TFM+
TFM–
5
(016-15F)
MMREM
(016-15F)
JOBREM
(016-15F) PCFANREM
(016-15E) COFANREMF
(016-15E) COFANREMH
(016-15E) HEATREMM
(016-15E) HEATREMS
3
GPL5
XIO2 PF
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
B31
B30
B45
A47
A48
CN2
CN2
B5
B4
DM REM/CL REM
LED REM
PCFM REM
CFM1 HI/CFM2 HI
CFM1 LOW/CFM2 LOW
KC SET SIG
TC DET
SET SIG
SSW1
SSW3
SSW2
JOB DET
H1
H2
A51 CN2
A50 CN2
A31 CN2
KC1SET
(016-11B)
TCOUNTSET (016-11B)
MMDSET
(016-11B)
B47
B46
B48
B28
ECOVERSW
FEEDLSW
FEEDHSW
JOBSET
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
4
(004-02C) (016-11C)
(016-11C)
(016-11C)
(016-11C)
5
ENGINE CPU
MAIN CPU
EHUMSEN
ETTH
B59
CN2
TWTHSIG(011-03E)
TNS SIG
FTH
6
A14
CN2
A13
CN2
A58
CN2
A46
CN2
HUMRHV(014-02B)
(014-11C) GRCNT
HUMTH2(014-02C)
(014-11B) DBCNT
TONERSENS(014-02C)
FUSW SIG
CN2
A53
A54
CN2
CN2 B54
CN2 B51
CN2 A59
GRID CONT
A18 CN2
FSW3 SIG
DB CONT
FEEDSW (017-03G)
TC CONT
TNS CONT
THSIG(014-02C)
(014-14I) SBCNT
I/F CPU1
(012-10D)MSWOFF
(014-12I) TCCNT
(014-12I) ONERCNT
CN2 B57
CN2 B49
B1
R24 V
CN2
R24 V (004-11A)
6
MSW OFF
MSWSIG(012-09D)
(014-03E)
(014-03F)
(014-03F)
(014-03F)
BMOTB_
BMOTA_
BMOTB
BMOTA
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
B40
B42
B41
B43
CN2
B33
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
CN2
A35
A36
A37
A38
A39
A40
A41
A42
FSM B
FSM A
FSM B
FSM A
A1
B2
B3
N.C
N.C
N.C
7
(014-02E) MMOTCLK
A44 CN2
A45 CN2
N.C
N.C
DM CLK
CN2
CN2
CN2
7
R437
GPL5
(014-09G)
(014-09G)
(014-09G)
(014-09G)
(014-09G)
(014-09G)
(014-09G)
(014-09H)
8
A
B
C
D
KCDB0
KCDB1
KCDB2
KCDB3
KCDB4
KCDB5
KCDB6
KCDB7
8
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-23
3-7-31
E
E
A
A
E
A
A
E
A
E
E
A
E
A
A
E
A
A
E
E
2AR
Main PCB 20/20
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
NF201
VPL5
C171
C170
4
7 GND
IC34
GPL5
10 GND
GPL5
IC44
3
4
7 GND
IC46
IC48
GPL5
GND
2 CN1
11
TP15 VCC3
C177
R438
R426
A
A
TP16 VPL5
LED1
LED2
GPL5
GPL5
+
3 CN1
+
C182
GMI5
R433
GMI5
R434
GMI5
R435
GMI5
R436
GMI5
IC42
12
IC1
6
GPL0
7
R441
8
GMI5
GPL5
GND
A
13
8
C183
TP17
R440
R432
K
K
R427
C181
13
IC34
12
9
R431
R430
R429
C180
R439
12
IC33
VPL5
VCC3
R425
5.1 V
TYPICAL 5.6A
13
C178
C179
4 CN1
5
10
IC34
+
GPL5
8
4 GND
14 VCC
7 GND
GPL5
2
VPL0
1 CN1 NF137
3.4 V
TYPICAL 0.8A C176
7
IC47
GPL5
VPL5
5
6
C166
C165
C164
C161
14 VCC
7 GND
IC33
GPL5
IC42
GPL5
VPL5
14 VCC
C169
C168
14 VCC
IC32
GPL5
8 VCC
C175
VPL5
VPL5
7 GND
C173
3
IC1
GPL5
20 VCC
NF202
IC31
GPL5
14 VCC
7 GND
C172
IC29
7 GND
1
VPL5
C174
7 GND
14 VCC
C160
C159
C158
7 GND
GPL5
14 VCC
C157
14 VCC
C156
C155
2
C154
14 VCC
VPL5
VPL5
C163
VPL5
C162
VPL5
VPL5
C167
1
GPL5
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-24
3-7-32
E
E
A
A
E
A
E
A
A
E
Scanner control PCB 1/4
2AR
2AR-1
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
S
SCANNER START
R1
RA60
CN9_A7
TXD SCANNER
1
R4
CN9_B4
R7
MAIN SCAN HEADER
S
RA61
1
2
3
4
IC1
2
1
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
IC1
4
3
IC1
5
6
FMOT_ENE
1
TR3
4
2E
2C 3
5 2B
R8
CN9_A8
MAIN SCAN ACK
C4 C3 C2 C1
R11
R12
CN9_A9
S G
R15
11
CN7_12
1E
1
10 13
IC1
1C 6
2 1B
IC1
8
9
12
FMOT ENABLE
S G
IC1
S G
CN2_1
CN2_2
CN2_3
CN2_4
8
7
6
5
RA62
2
3
4
1
7
6
5
8
R16
IC2
2
1
3
S G
RA63
IC2
4
8
7
6
5
IC2
6
5
9
SC TIM
HEADER OUT
EJ_JCT
RSV1
IC2
8
TR5
4
2E
2C 3
1
2
3
4
TR6
4
2E
2C 3
2 1B
1C 6
5 2B
C8 C5 C6 C7
11
CMOT M1
12
13
S MOT CWB
IC4
2
4
S MOT M1
IC4
FMOT CLK
IC4
1
3
IC4
6
8
5
X1
9
CN6_2
IC4
10
11
S G
CMOT CLK
R20
13
RSV2
1C 6
EJ_JCT SOL
CN7_7
1E
1
S G
S G
S
S
5 2B
TR9
4
2E
2C 3
2 1B
1C 6
RA65
1E
1
LED(RED)
REV_JCT SOL
CN7_9
S
5 2B
TR10
4
2E
2C 3
2 1B
1C 6
SC TIM
5 2B
TR11
4
2E
2C 3
CN7_2
2 1B
1C 6
LED(RED)
1E
1
S G
S G
S G
C11
C12
R44
MIPCS_
SHDCS_
R23
R24
FD CL
S_MOT ENABLE
CN7_11
5 2B
TR13
4
2E
2C 3
2 1B
1C 6
HEADER OUT
FD CL
CN7_6
CN6_6
R46
CN6_8
S G
CN6_11
8
LA4 7
6
5
5
LA5 8
7
6
8
LA6 7
6
5
1
2
3
4
4
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
CN6–1
CN6–2
CN6–3
CN6–4
CN6–5
CN6–6
CN6–7
CN6–8
CN6–9
CN6–10
CN6–11
OFM RET
OFM CLK
OFM CWB
OFM ENABLE
OCM RET
OCM CLK
OCM CWB
OCM Verf
OCM M3
OCM M2
OCM M1
5
LA7 8
7
6
8
LA8 7
6
5
8
LA9 7
6
5
4
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
CN7–1
CN7–2
CN7–3
CN7–4
CN7–5
CN7–6
CN7–7
CN7–8
CN7–9
CN7–10
CN7–11
CN7–12
N.C
OSLED(RED)
OSLED(GN)
SBPSOL2
SBPSOL1
OFCL
EFSSOL
3
S G
CN7_2
CN7_3
CN7_4
CN7_5
CN7_6
CN7_7
4
SBFSSOL
OFSOL2
OFSOL1
OFM ENABLE
S
TR17
B
E
LAMP ON REM
5
CN2_12
C
S
CH2_1
R26
DF OC SW
D(7:0)
_WR
S
A(8:0)
N.C
OSBSW
OFSW
OSS
RAI0
R51
S
_RD
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
27
26
23
25
4
28
29
3
2
30
31
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
_CE
_OE
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
1
2
3
4
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
5
6
7
8
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
RAI1
22
24
POMCS_
DF_SHORT
OSWSW
DESSW2
DFSSW1
OSLSW
DFTSW
N.C
CN5–1
CN5–2
CN5–3
CN5–4
CN5–5
CN5–6
CN5–7
CN5–8
CN5–9
CN5–10
CN5–11
CN5–12
CN5–13
1
LA10 2
3
4
1
LA11 2
3
4
1
LA12 2
3
4
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
6
S
CN5_2
CN5_3
CN5_4
RA13
1
2
4
3
R166
RSV1
RSV2
1
2
R53
L43
RA17
1
2
3
4
CN8_3
RA18
4
3
8
7
6
5
CN5_7
CN5_8
S G
L44
CN8–3
OSS
CN8–2
5V
CN8–1
G(5 V)
CN5_9
CN5_10
CN5_11
CN5_12
7
S
S G
L41
1
Vpp
32
Vcc
16
GND
S G
R52
S
5 2B
TR14
4
2E
2C 3
2 1B
1C 6
1E
1
1E
1
1E
1
S G
S G
S G
C
CN9_A5
SCANNER ENABLE
R45
R49
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
7
CN6_1
CN6_2
CN6_3
CN6_4
R47
R48
_Y0
_Y1
_Y2
_Y3
_Y4
_Y5
_Y6
_Y7
_RD
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
S
CN7_9
CN7_10
CN7_11
CN7_12
SET SW
DF SHORT
COV SF SW
DF SF SN
SZ SW A
R25
S
S
TR12
4
2E
2C 3
B
RA7
CN7_3
1E
1
1C 6
RA6
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
LED(GN)
1E
1
2 1B
A
1C 6
2 1B
RA5
5 2B
TR8
4
2E
2C 3
RA4
LED(GN)
S
SM_ENB
S
CN6_10
FD CL
CN5_4
CN5_7
CN5_9
CN5_10
CN5_11
S
TR7
4
2E
2C 3
2 1B
8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
S
S
5 2B
G1
_G2A
_G2B
S G
LED (RED)
ROMCS_
CNS_3 SIG
R189
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
A9
A10
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
S G
REV_JCT
R188
R28
5
A18 6
A17 7
A16 8
A15 5
A14 6
A13 7
A12 8
A11 5
A10 6
A9 7
A8 8
A7 5
A6 6
A5 7
A4 8
A3 5
A2 6
A1 7
A0 8
6
7
S G
_WR
C117
12
6
4
5
LED (GN)
R19
C118
R18
IC4
S
S G
R27
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
S G
5 2B
R38
IC6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
S MOT M2
NO MOUNT
TP
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
1
43
2
42RA9 3
41
4
40
1
39
2
38RA8 3
37
4
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
2
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
IC3
VDD
VSS
P14
/CS2
P12
/CS0
P10
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
P07
P06
P05
P04
P03
P02
P01
P00
/WEH
/WEL
ODSW
SM Verf
SM M1
SM M2
SM M3
SM M4
SM M5
SM CLK
SM CWB
SM RET
SM ENABLE
EL ON REM
SHPSW
G(5 V)
C18
RA15
IC3
10
CN2_8
EJ_JCT
R37
S G
CN7_5
1
A
2
B
3
C
L42
S G
CN5_8
A9
A10
1
4
2
3
4
1
2
3
_RESET
S G
+
8
5
LA2 7
6
5
LA3 8
7
6
CN2–1
CN2–2
CN2–3
CN2–4
CN2–5
CN2–6
CN2–7
CN2–8
CN2–9
CN2–10
CN2–11
CN2–12
CN2–13
CN2–14
12
RA14
5
9
CMOT M2
S MOT CLK
CN6_6
13
1
2
IC3
8
1
2
RA3 S G
P53
P60
P61
P62
P63
P64
P65
P66
P67
P70
P71
P72
P73
P74
P75
P76
P77
SYSCLK
VDD
/X1
X0
VDD
/OSC
OSCO
VSS
S G
CN2_11
CN2_12
CN2_13
_RESET
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
IC3
6
FMOT CWB
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
FMOT_ENB
C19
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
3
P52
P51
P50
P43
P42
P41
P40
P37
P36
P35
P34
P33
P32
P31
P30
AVSS
AVDD
P23
P22
P21
P20
/WORD
/BUSGT
/BUSRO
/RST
4
1
IC3
C10
CN2_3
4
C13
_RESET
A23
A22
A21
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A09
A08
A07
A06
A05
A04
A03
A02
A01
A00
/RE
2
FD SOL (ACT)
IC3
C9
CN2_4
2C
1
2
3
4
C14 C15
CN2_9
CN2_8
CN2_9
E
3 2B
SZ DET
R21
IC5
1
4
2
3
FD SOL (RET)
SM_ENB
REV_JCT
5
5
S
FMOT RET
CN6_11
B
E
L40
CN6_1
CN6_3
S G
IC2
S G
R36
TR16
REV PRS SOL(ACT)
S G
TP15 TP14
4
3
CN6_10
2
1C
8
LA1 7
6
5
SCANNER RESET
1E
1
S
CN7_11
R170
REV PRS SOL(RET)
CN7_4
CN9_B6
TP13
S G
4
R35
1 1B
1E
1
RA2
CN7_10
R34
S G
1C 6
2 1B
TP15
10
S
4
3
3
7
8
6
5
5 2B
S
1E
1
RA1
RA64
FD SW 2
REV SW 1
HP SW 3
TMG SW 4
1B 2
11
R43
6 1C
S
CN5_3
CN5_2
CN2_13
CN5_12
S G
CN9_B2
IC2
S G
S G
CN6_4
S
1E
1
S G
RXD SCANNER
CMOT ENABLE
1C 6
2 1B
R41
1
2
3
R39
S
TR2
4
2E
3 2C
2B 5
1B 2
1E
1
Vdd
GND
OUT
R42
6 1C
CN9_A11
TR4
4
2E
2C 3
5 2B
R40
S
C16
R33
2B 5
IC8
RA12
SCANNER ACK
S
1
2
3
4
TR1
4
2E
3 2C
2
S
C119
S
D
R31
R32 S G
8
CN9_A6
SCANNER HEADER
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-33
Scanner control PCB 2/4
2AR
2AR-1
B
C
D
E
F
R172
CN4–1
VO_O
3
R171
S
R57
R58
S G
+
H
R174
IC21
C62
S
CN4–3
5
S G
C132
AIN1
RD
11
2
22
21
20
16
C52
13
4
3
RA34 6
3
7
2
8
1
5
4
RA35 6
3
7
2
8
1
87
1
8
86
RA29 2
7
85
3
6
84
4
5
81
1
8
80
RA30 2
7
79
3
6
78
4
5
C26
83
S
82
4
G
77
C27
76
75
74
73
RA26
3
IC13
70
1
5
10
2
6
9
68
3
7
8
67
4
8
7
1
5
6
RA31
69
66
RA32
65
2
6
5
64
3
7
4
63
4
8
3
20
62
RA30
61
1
4
21
60
2
3
24
59
2
D7
CLK
D6
VRT
D5
VRB
D4
VIN
D3
VRTS
D2
VRBS
D1
AVDD
D0
AVSS
AVDD
AVDD
AVSS
DVDD
DVSS
DVDD
DVSS
_OE
1
L15
C54
RA57
49
48
47
46
TEST6
45
S
RA28
1
5
10
2
6
9
3
7
8
4
8
7
1
5
6
2
6
5
3
7
4
4
8
3
20
RA33
21
4
24
3
2
D7
CLK
D6
VRT
D5
VRB
D4
VIN
D3
VRTS
D2
VRBS
D1
AVDD
D0
AVSS
AVDD
AVDD
AVSS
DVDD
DVSS
DVDD
DVSS
_OE
12
17
23
19
16
S
22
S
14
L16
15
18
11
C60
50
S
C31
13
1
L17
7
A G
C57
A G
S G
C58
L12
C126
C125
6
S G
IC14
R108
C33
13
C55
51
C32
R106
11
S G
S G
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
L14
15
18
52
S G
A2
14
53
L13
A1
22
R108
S G
54
S
A0
S
55
S G
C128
S
A G
3.3D
C129
16
C53
A G
2
S G
19
S G
56
7
S G
5
23
C28
57
1
_RESET
17
58
MREIN
_RESET
12
C136
4
2
C56
1
71
C55
72
44
TEST5
88
C29
91
92
93
94
95
96
5
90
SHPO
SHDE1
CLP1
CLP2
VSS
CLP3
HPX
REFLO0
97
98
REFLO1
100
99
AVSS1
AVDD1
102
103
101
AVSS2
AVDD2
STOP1
105
106
107
108
109
110
104
STOP2
VSS
INCLK
REFLO2
REFLO3
REFLO4
REFLO5
VDD5V
111
113
112
REFLO6
REFLO7
REFLE0
114
116
115
REFLE1
117
REFLE2
VSS
119
118
REFLE4
REFLE5
REFLE3
120
121
VDD3V
REFLE6
122
REFLE7
123
124
REFHO0
REFHO1
SHDE2
43
6
A4
A3
5
4
A2
A0
A1
3
2
L11
L10
125
TEST7
1
MIPIN(7:0)
REFHO2
MRE
3.3D
S
126
127
REFHO3
VSS
128
REFHO4
129
130
131
PVSYNC
TEST4
176
R169
SHDOUT7
TEST3
175
_PHSYNC
42
174
ODDM0
SHDOUT6
41
5
ODDM1
SHDOUT5
TEST2
4
MIPIN7
SHDOUT4
VSS
173
40
172
6
VSS
TEST1
7
3
VDD3V
VSS
TEST0
8
2
MIPIN6
VDD3V
SMCK
171
1
MIPIN5
ODDM2
39
C35
MIPIN4
ODDM3
SHDOUT3
38
170
RA22
SHSYNCIN
ODDM4
SHDOUT2
37
169
SHDOUT1
MMS1
168
36
167
5
ODDM5
35
166
6
4
SHDOUT0
MMS0
7
3
MIPIN3
VDD5V
VDD3V
2
MIPIN2
ODDM6
34
MIPIN1
ODDM7
VDD5V
33
165
SVSYNC
_SHSYNC
MST
8
ADCCLK1
XSH
1
ADCCLK2
XTCK1
SVSYNCIN
6
MIPIN0
PCLK
OVSS
32
164
VSS
31
163
VSS
30
162
R101
RA21
EVEM0
XTCK0
S G
161
R100
EVEN1
_PCLK
29
C36
160
EVEN2
SPHOLD2
VSS
159
SPHOLD1
_RESET
158
EVEN3
28
157
EVEN4
OVDDS
27
3
C37
4
2
R102
L19
1
CLAMP2
XTST
_PCLK
EVEN5
26
156
RA67
CLKIN
EVEN6
D7
155
OVSS
CLAMP1
D6
154
EVEN7
VDD5V
153
RS2
D5
S
17
_CXAWR
25
152
VSS
CXARD
RS1
24
151
13
15
VSS
_BCLAMP
23
150
CXAL0
IC11
2A4
149
CXAL1
CCDCLK2
D4
2Y4
4
CCDCLK1
IPD
3
2A2
2A3
5
148
D3
R104
SOVST
2Y2
2Y3
8
11
146
147
22
5
7
5
1A4
2A1
2
3
21
R95
1Y4
2Y1
1
7
6
20
12
9
8
4
6
CXAL2
D2
4
RA20
2
_CCDCLK2
VSS
5
1A2
1A3
VDD5V
CXADT0
17
4
1A1
1Y2
1Y3
VDD5V
_CCDCLK1
19
5
1Y1
CXADT1
18
16
14
CXADT2
SHIFT
D1
18
2
3
CXADT3
REFHE7
_IORD
1
7
6
REFHE6
_IOWR
8
2
3
CXADT4
D0
S G
RA19
1
7
6
145
REFHE5
16
LA13
8
144
C38
19
2G
CN3–7
CN3–1
CN3–3
CN3–5
1000p
1
_1G
SHIFT
CLK
RS
CLP
143
VSS
VDD3V
14
142
S
VSS
VDD3V
15
141
IC10
CXADT5
VDD3V
140
CXADT6
REFHE4
13
139
L20
CXADT7
REFHE3
12
138
CN3–9
REFHE2
_SHDCS
137
A8
C39
136
11
135
A7
1
SHD0
A6
8
S
REFHE1
9
134
10
133
4
A5
2
5
REFHO5
REFHO7
7
CXAL1
CXAL2
SHPE
8
CXAL2
CXAL0
REFHE0
VSS
CXAL1
3
7
CXAL0
6
REFHO6
132
S G
RA70
S G
5V
C51
14
C139
C122
C120
CN3–2
CN3–4
CN3–6
CN3–8
CN3–10
4
A G
A G
15
S
A G
S G
S G
L60
+
S G
L75
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
+
C50
17
R87
18
C49
19
S G
R76
4
3
23
12
WR
10
D7
9
8
7
6
1
D6
AIN2
D5
L1
1
24
C48
IC12
AIN3
D4
AIN4
L0
C21
R84
25 C99
CLP3
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
27
CLP2
SHDO
SHPO
SHDE2
SHPE
SHDE1
AIN5
DGND
L2
CLPEC2
D3
48
C45
C44
47
CLPEC1
TDA
D2
46
C43
C41
4
3
RA25 2
1
4
1
RA24 2
45
CLPOC1
CLPOC2
5
C42
8
7
6
5
8
7
R94
C22
DA0
R75
6
5
R92
L4
S G
44
A G
VRB
DVCC
43
+
VRT
EVENIN1
42
NC GND
1
7 X2
C23
C123
R197
S
R196
R194
L3
L2
L1
R192
R190
S
DA1
R70
R195
3.3D
R193
R72
R71
3.3D
R191
DA2
AGND
MPXOUT
T3
EVENIN2
41
S G
2
RA66
T2
4
R91
8
3
14
35
36
DA3
R69
R74
L8
C162
DA0
DA1
DA2
DA3
DA4
DA5
DA6
DA7
40
6
3
39
A G
A G
ODDOUT
ODDIN1
38
C124
5
R70
+
–
S G
ODDIN2
37
L5
R67
IC9
S
S G
CLP1
3.3D
AVCC
L65
L77
D1
CN4–6
D0
CN4–4
A.GND
3.3D
3
A.GND
S
+
L39
C47
CN4–2
A.GND
S
7
A G
2
S G
2
CN6_8
R177
A G
C46
L64
R68
7
L38
DA4
R65
R66
6
R178
IC21
–
L6
R64
CN4–5
+12
+
C164
DA5
R63
R175
R62
VO_E
C131
R176
DA6
L9
2
R61
CMOT Vref
1
A G
_RESET
–
C64
C25
IC9
S
C63
C24
1
S G
DA7
R59
C163
CN2_2
3
R60
+
S_MOT Vref
J
C61
R173
1
I
1
–
2
G
R83
A
A(8:0)
8
8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D0
_WR
D1
SHDCS_
_RD
D(7:0)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-34
Scanner control PCB 3/4
2AR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
1
RA48
SD27
1
8
IO27
SD26
SD25
2
3
7
6
IO26
IO25
SD24
4
5
IO24
SD23
1
8
IO23
SD22
SD21
2
3
7
6
IO22
IO21
SD20
4
5
IO20
H
I
J
1
RA49
3.3D
1
4
_OE
20
_CE
SA20
SA21
SA22
27
10
9
8
_WE
A0
A1
A2
SA23
7
A3
SA24
6
A4
SA25
5
A5
SA26
4
A6
SA27
SA28
SA29
3
25
24
A7
A8
A9
SA210
21
A10
SA211
23
A11
SA212
3
A12
SA213
26
A13
1
A14
RAMEN_
2
22
S G
16
I/O4
17
I/O5
18
I/O6
19
I/O7
IO24
IO25
1
2
8
7
IO26
3
IO27
4
2
6
5
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
SA20
SD17
SD16
VDD3V10
VSS15
SD15
SD14
VS13
VS12
VS11
VDD3V9
IO17
7
IO16
6
5
8
IO15
IO14
IO13
SD12
SD11
2
3
7
6
IO12
IO11
SD10
4
5
IO10
2
3
7
6
4
5
8
2
3
7
6
4
5
27
_WE
SA110
10
9
A0
A1
SA19
SA12
8
A2
SA18
SA17
SA13
7
A3
SA14
6
A4
SA16
SA15
5
A5
SA16
SA17
4
A6
3
A7
SA18
SA19
SA110
25
24
SA14
MIPOUT6
SA11 60
4
5
142
143
MIPOUT7
FVSYNC
SA10 59
VDD3V7 58
144
FHTHIN_
VSS10 57
145
146
FHSYNC
VSS23
INCLK 56
VSS9 55
147
148
VDD3V15
TESTD0
MIPIN7 54
MIPIN6 53
MIPIN7
MIPIN6
149
TESTD1
MIPIN5 52
MIPIN5
150
151
TESTD2
TESTD3
MIPIN4 51
MIPIN3 50
MIPIN4
MIPIN3
152
VSS24
153
154
VDD3V16
TESTD4
VDD3V6 48
MIPIN2 47
MIPIN2
155
156
TESTD5
TESTD6
MIPIN1 46
MIPIN0 45
MIPIN1
MIPIN0
157
158
TESTD7
MRED
MREIN 44
SHSYNC_ 43
_OE
_CE
SA10
SA11
SA15
8
RAMEN_
22
20
SA13
SA12
SA11
SA10
Vcc 28
IC19
GND 14
S G
I/O0 11
I/O1 12
IO10
RA46 1
8
IO11
2
7
I/O2 13
I/O3 15
IO12
3
6
IO13
4
5
IO14
RA47 1
8
A8
A9
I/O4 16
I/O5 17
I/O6 18
IO15
IO16
2
3
7
6
21
A10
I/O7 19
IO17
4
5
SA111
23
A11
SA112
2
A12
SA113
26
1
A13
A14
C80
CLKIN
VSS8 49
6
MIPIN(7:0)
VSS7 42
VSS6 41
40 VDD3V5
39 SVSYNC
38 TEST2
36 TEST0
37 TEST1
35 D7
34 D6
32 VDD3V4
33 VSS5
31 D5
30 D4
29 D3
28 VSS4
27 VDD3V3
24 D0
25 D1
26 D2
22 TFSEL1
23 TFSEL2
20 VDD3V2
21 VSS0
19 TFSEL0
16 VSS2
17 RESET
18 SCN
MREIN
SHSYNCIN
C143
SVSYNCIN
S G
C73
C74
C75
C76
C77
C78
R123
A7
A8
A6
A5
A4
A3
S G
L24
S
A1
A2
A0
S G
7
3.3D
S G
L49
L76
5
S G
SOVST
7
4
L31
C93
SA111
RA43
8
2
SD15
3
SD14
4
SD13 RA45 1
C92
SD10
SA20
5
4
SD11
SA21
6
3
92
SA21
SD13
SD12
SA22
7
2
93
SA22
C141
SA112
8
RA42
1
SD16
3.3D
3
RA41
SD17
4
SA113
1
C81
RA40
141
S G
5
3
7
6
15 IOWR_
CN9_B6
L29
RA69
2
3
159 VSS25
160 VSS26
S
4
RA44
SA13 62
SA12 61
L28
IO23
C79
CN9_A9
CN9_A11
CN9_B2
CN9_B4
6
15
RA51
VSS22
VDD3V14
139
140
7
3
I/O3
1
MIPOUT5
2
IO22
I/O2
SA14 63
138
14 IORD_
8
7
6
5
L22
IC17
C66
C68
LA17
1
2
3
4
3.3D
C71
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
CN9–B1
CN9–B2
CN9–B3
CN9–B4
CN9–B5
CN9–B6
CN9–B7
CN9–B8
CN9_A5
CN9_A6
CN9_A7
CN9_A8
C84
SA24
SA23
8
RA39
1
VDD3V8 66
VSS11 65
SA15 64
R121
8
7
6
5
SD14
SA25
5
4
VDD3V13
MIPOUT3
MIPOUT4
NO MOUNT
1
2
3
4
SD15
SA26
6
3
135
136
137
L23
G(5 V)
RXD SCN
G(5 V)
TXD SCN
G(5 V)
SCN RESET
G(5 V)
SOVST
CN9–A5
CN9–A6
CN9–A7
CN9–A8
CN9–A9
CN9–A10
CN9–A11
CN9–A12
97
96
95
94
SA17 68
SA16 67
C144
6
9
11
12
15
17
19
21
23
99
98
MIPOUT1
MIPOUT2
LA16
SCN ENABLE
SCN HEADER
SCN START
MAIN SCN HEADER
MAIN SCN ACK
G(5 V)
SCN ACK
G(5 V)
SA25
SA24
SA23
VSS16
133
134
_PCLK
R183
R184
R185
R186
CN9–B10
CN9–B9
CN9–B11
CN9–B12
SA27
SA26
SA18 69
C69
20
18
22
24
SA28 102
VSS17 101
VDD5V2 100
MIPOUT0
S G
SCLK+
SCLK–
SID+
SID–
SA210 104
SA29 103
132
11 VSS1
12 VDD3V1
13 MIPCS_
5
GND
8
1
IO21
4
1
SA110 71
SA19 70
9 A7
10 A8
8
SA211 105
VSS12 73
SA111 72
8 A6
A2
SA212 106
2
SA112 74
MREMIP
VDD3V12
MIPCLK
VSS21
7 A5
Z2
Y2
OE2_ 109
SA213 108
VDD3V11 107
SA113 75
MREOUT
128
129
130
131
6 A4
5
6
7
WR2_ 110
MRETHIN
127
5 A3
G
SD21 112
SD20 111
126
3 A1
4 A2
Z1
4
SD22 114
VSS18 113
1
2 A0
CN9–A1
CN9–A2
CN9–A3
CN9–A4
SD23 115
SD10 78
MR1_ 77
OE1_ 76
R120
RA50
IO20
13
I/O1
2
PORT1
PORT2
1 VDD5V1
1
3
5
7
16
VCC
15
A4
14
Y4
13
Z4
12
_G
11
Z3
10
Y3
9
A3
1
PORT0
C72
SOHSYNC+
SOHSYNC–
SMRE–
SMRE+
A1
Y1
2
3
VSS14 80
VSS13 79
124
125
C67
1
R179
R180
R181
R182
S G
12
S G
123
IC16
14
11
I/O0
3.3D
R119
C89
GND
L25
R79 RAMEN_
L27
C88
L83
121 VSS19
122 VSS20
3.3D
4
SD25 117
SD24 116
VDD5V3 120
C140
S G
SD27 119
SD26 118
L21
C87
IC18
3
SD17
SD16
SA27
7
2
1
RA37
RA38
8
SA28
S G
C85
5
4
SA210
SA29
7
6
2
3
SA211
8
SA212
3
C86 1
SA213
4
2
C160
RA36
1
3
3.3D
L30
28
S G
SD20
SD22
SD21
SD23
SD25
SD24
SD27
SD26
L26
S
Vcc
C91
3
C90
RA68
2
A(8:0)
S G
MIPCS_
_RD
_WP
_RESET
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
8
D0
D1
D2
8
D(7:0)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-35
Scanner control PCB 4/4
2AR
2AR-1
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
1
1
L66
AG
R151
C145
C112
C111
C110
S
S
S
R152
4
C116
C148
C115
CN1–4
C146
C113
C100
C98
C96
S G
C170
+
L33
G(5 V)
S G
R153
S
L32
C95
C94
CN1–6
L52
3
S G
S
5.1 V
C107
+
IC21
A G
4
2
S
R154
L63
C106
SG
L36
C114
CN1–3
S
S
C147
L67
G(5 V)
G O
B
L50
C165
C166
+
C97
I
3
D1
IC20
C169
CN1–2
L62
C168
5.1 V
L34
C167
CN1–1
R187
+12 V
C103
2
SG
L68
C69
5
3.4 V
CN1–5
3.3D
C151
5
S G
C152
L35
AG
S G
S G
SG
C105
C104
C102
C101
+
S G
SG
SG
L72
R162
L73
R164
L74
R166
L71
R160
NO MOUNT
L70
6
R158
6
SG
7
AG
F G
F G
F G
F G
7
F G
8
8
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-36
Scanner motor PCB
2AR
2AR-1
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
1
1
2
SM
SM
SM
SM
SM
SM
SM
SM
3
Vref
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
CLK
CWB
CN1–13
CN1–12
CN1–11
CN1–10
CN1–9
CN1–8
CN1–7
CN1–6
SM RET
C6
SGSG
CN1–5
R3 JP100
R2
D1
JP7
C13
C12
R16
R15 + C22
7
Vref VDD
6
5
2
1
A
_A
B
_B
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
MOI
CLK
MO1
CWB
MO2
_RES
17 RET
PG
18
EN SG PG
22
CN2–4
CN2–6
CN2–3
CN2–1
DT1
C
B
4
SM A
SM A
SM B
SM B
L3
SHPSW
CN4–2
CN1–2
SHPSW
CN1–14
ODSW
C1
S G
SG
19
20
21
3
L4
ODSW
CN5–2
C21
3
4
CN2–5
CN2–2
+
C3
24 V
24 V
S G
PG
R12
CN1–4
SG
SG
R1 S G
S
SM ENABLE
C9
C8
C7
JP8
JP101
S
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
2
TP1
NO MOUNT
SG
IC1
R9
R8
R7
R6
C20
C19
S
C100
SG
4
E
SG
EL ON REM
B
CN1–3
DT2
C
L5
CN3–1
CN3–2
EL
EL
E
P G
S
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
P G
C110
6
JP5
CN3–3
CN3–4
JP9
+
C102
C18
JP15
C16
CN6–2
C17
24 V
24 V
24 V
C23
F G
C119
C120
F G
F G
C121
C117
C118
S G
C116
S G
JP 102
C115
SG
C114
CN6–3
CN4–3
CN5–3
CN1–1
5
C113
L2
G(5 V)
5V
5V
C112
+
CN4–1
CN5–1
C101
C5
C11
CN6–4
C10
L1
5.1 V
C111
5
S
6
F G
JP6
G(24 V)
CN6–1
PG
JP16
7
JP11
CN3–5
CN3–6
G(24 V)
G(24 V)
7
8
8
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-37
CCD PCB
2AR
2AR-1
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
6P–SAN
F2
11
17
23
25
CN2–5
C17
C20
C22
C14 C13
F8
2
A.GND
C5
6
C6
C7
CN2–6
A G
A G
F7
24
5
C11 C10
3
C8
C9
4
16
19
F1
CP1_EVEN
CP1_ODD
CP2_EVEN
CP2_ODD
CP_LH_EVEN
CP_LH_ODD
VGG CP_RS_EVEN
CP_RS_ODD
CP_CLP_EVEN
CP_CLP_ODD
CP_ROG
VOUT_EVEN
NC
NC
VOUT_ODD
NC
NC
GND
NC
GND
NC
GND
NC
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
18
10
20
9
26
3
27
2
28
1
12
F3
F6
F4
F5
R9
R11
14
13
11
12
16
1
9
15
10
CK_out
_CK_out
CK_out
_CK_out
2B_out
_2B_out
RS_out
CP_out
SH_out
CK_in
GND
GND
R12
7
8
13
14
15
21
22
R19
F14
2B_in
2
RS_in
CP_in
SH_in
8
3
7
Vcc
Vcc
4
5
1
10P–SAN
F12
6
R20
F15
R21
F16
R10
R22
CN1–1
CN1–2
CLK
G(5 V)
CN1–3
CN1–4
RS
G(5 V)
CN1–5
CN1–6
CLP
G(5 V)
CN1–7
CN1–8
SHIFT
G(5 V)
CN1–9
5V
CN1–10
G(5 V)
2
F13
C31
C30
C29
F17
3
S G
A G
A G
J
IC3
IC1
1
I
F18
8
F11
IC2
C24
C25
C4
C3
4
4
4
A G
A G
R8
TR2
R16
F10
R17
CN2–3
CN2–4
VO_E
A.GND
R18
3
1
IC2
R6
2
A G
5
5
C18
R14
R13
RA1
C19
C27
C1
C20
C21
A G
A G
C23
R1
6
6
A G
R7
TR1
R5
F9
VO_O
A.GND
R15
CN2–1
CN2–2
7
IC2
C15
R3
5
R4
A G
6
S G
A G
C2
R2
7
7
A G
C16
A G
S G
C12
F G
A G
C32
S G
C28
8
8
A G
A
B
C
F G
A G
D
S G
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-38
Operation unit main PCB 1/3
A
2AR
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
1
1
LCDCON
TxD-Main
VCC
A22
A21
A20
R131
R132
R133
int_CFLREM
int_SCAN7
int_SCAN6
int_SCAN5
int_SCAN4
int_SCAN3
int_SCAN2
int_SCAN1
int_SCAN0
Key-sense7
Key-sense6
Key-sense5
Key-sense4
Key-sense3
Key-sense2
Key-sense1
Key-sense0
Key-sense10
Key-sense9
Key-sense8
int_LDONX9
int_LDONX8
MPUCLK
_Wait
S G
4
5
R136
S
_Reset
AN1
P72
P73
P74
P75
P76
P77
Vss
AVss
Vref
AVcc
Vcc
PB0/CTS0
P81
P82/RxD0
P83/TxD0
P84/_INT4
P85
RxD1
TxD1
R128
R129
R130
AN0
P95/_INT3
P94
A22
A21
A20
P90
P67/TB2in
P66/TB1in
P65/TB0in
P64/_INT2
P63/_INT1
P62/_INT0
P61/TA4in
P60/TA4out
P57/TA3in
P56/TA3out
P55/TA2in
P54/TA2out
P53/TA1in
P52/TA1out
P51/TA0in
P50/TA0out
P47
P46
P45
P44
P43
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A23
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
P110
IC5
VCC
C28
R106
C29
R139
R108
6
X1
L4
_Reset
S
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
R46
R48
R50
R52
R54
R56
R58
R60
R62
R64
R66
R68
R70
R32
R33
R34
R35
R36
R37
R38
R39
R110
R111
R112
R113
R114
R115
R116
R117
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
S
R47
R49
R51
R53
R55
R57
R59
R61
R63
R65
R67
R69
R71
R72
R74
R76
R78
R80
R82
R84
R86
R73
R75
R77
R79
R81
R83
R85
R87
L14
S
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
D0
D1
D2
D3
Vcc
NC
_RES _CE
A12
A11
A13
A10
A14
A9
A15
A8
A16
A7
A17
A6
A18
A5
A19
A4
NC
NC
NC IC2 NC
NC
A3
NC
A2
_WE
A1
_OE
A0
DQ0RY/_BY
DQ1 DQ7
DQ2 DQ6
DQ3 DQ5
DQ4
Vss
Vcc
Vss
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
Vcc-ROM
_CE-ROM-Main
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
_RD
_CE-RAM
_WR
S
_FWR
_RD
C12
S G
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
22
20
27
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
25
24
21
23
2
26
1
_OE
_CE
_WE
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
Vcc 29
GND 14
S G
I/O0
I/O1
I/O2
I/O3
I/O4
I/O5
I/O6
I/O7
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
4
IC4
5
Vcc-ROM
A_BUS
D_BUS
S
int_LDONX0
int_LDONX1
int_LDONX2
int_LDONX3
int_LDONX4
int_LDONX5
int_LDONX6
int_LDONX7
6
L7
C17
R45
C16
S
C30
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
_RD
_RD
_WR
_WR
S G
RY/_BY
3
R22 C13
10
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
I0
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
I9
S G
7
R23
D7
D6
D5
D4
S G
C37
2
S
_HOLD
BYTE
CNVss
_RESET
Xin
Xout
_RD
Vss
Vcc
_HLDA
ALE
_BHE
_WR
P117
P116
P115
P114
P113
P112
P111
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
R137
_DET_Fax_Option
_FWR
S G
31
R138 32
33
34
35
36
R135
37
37
39
40
41
42
R107
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
ACK_from_Main
2
FLASH
3
IC6
TxD-Fax
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
_CSSEL
RxD-Fax
R141
1
R140
Error-for-Main
R105
C27
R134
R104
FLASH
C26
_END
S
S
Error-from-Main
C24
R101 C25
_MMI-STS
RY/_BY
2
_WR
RxD-Main
R103
VEE-cntr1
ACK-for-Main
S
R102
L15
THX
A23
A20
A21
A22
_CSSEL
IC3
Vcc
20
O1
O0
O2
O3
13
12
14
15
R31
R30
R24
R25
O5
O6
17
18
R26
R27
O4
I/07
16
19
R28
R29
_CE-ROM-Main
_CE-RAM
_CE-LCD
_CE-ROM-OPT
7
_CE-VRAM
_CE-jigROM-4M
S G
8
8
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-39
Operation unit main PCB 2/3
2AR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
B13B-PH-K-S
1
G(24 V)
CN6-13
G(5 V)
CN6-12
Vo
CN6-11
LP
CN6-10
C61
P G
L25
SG
L26
1
VO
L27
S
R150 18
L28
S
IC9
2
LP
C38
R149
SG
R151
DISP OFF
CN6-9
3
L29
2
IC9
17
6 –
5 IC8
+
LCDCON
LCDENB
R142
7
2
–
3 IC8
+
1
VO
C60
SG
FLM
R152 16
CN6-8
C62
L30
IC9
4
2
C59
SG
SG
LCDVEE
FLM
SG
R153
CN6-7
C63
5
L31
IC9
S
15
CP
R127
CN6-5
UD2
CN6-4
UD3
CN6-3
VEE
7
L33
R156 12
L34
L35
CN6-2
IC9
IC9
13
9
IC9
8
11
UD3
S
S
L36
+
LCDVdd1
C21
SG
P G
R18
F G
R17
SG
P G
R8
F G
R9
SG
P G
R1
F G
R2
SG
3
SG
SG
4
C3
9 Vin+
8 _Control
+
DC1
C33
R124
Filter 1
Vout 2
7 Vin–
Vset 3
GND 4
L19
C1
R122
LCDVEE
5
SG
UD3
UD2
UD1
UD0
FLM
LP
CP
5
L12
L6
L5
L1
L2
L3
L13
LCDVdd1
LCDVdd2
LCDVdd3
LCDVdd4
LCDVdd5
LCDVdd6
LCDVdd7
L37
C2
R3
SG
C34
LCDVEE
CN6-1
F G
UD2
S
5V
R4
UD1
VEE-cntrl
R157
4
UD0
SG
R155
UD1
IC9
R125
L32
P G
C36
R123
CN6-6
6
THX
C35
L21
UD0
R154 14
D1
R126
TH1
SG
3
+
CP
R97 C20
S
MPUCLK
LCDVdd7
R99
_WR
_RD
_CE-VRAM
LCDVdd2
C23
C22
_Reset
S
R98
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
SG
7
LCDVdd3
C10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Vss
_IOCS
_HWR
_LWR
_RD
_MCS
_WAIT
VDD
MPUCLK
Vss
_RESET
MPUSEL
Vss
_BHE
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
VDD
Vss
IC1
Vss
VDD
M
LCDENB
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
VDD
Vss
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
VDD
Vss
C11
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
SG
C19
C8
C9
L22
C39 C40
C41 C42
L24
C45 C46
L23
C43 C44
6
20
LCDENB
IC6
IC10
IC9
D_BUS
IC12
IC11
1,10,19
S
R109
R143
R146
R148
R147
LCDVdd6
C14
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
C15
SG
R44
S
SG
LCDVdd5
1,8, 9,16
C7
IC7
C58
4,5,12,13, 17,18
7
1,8, 9,16
IC13
R19
A_BUS
8
L20
L16
C31 C32
SG
C6
A8 25
A9 26
A10 27
A11 28
A12 29
A13 30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
R21
C18
R96
S
Vss
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
NC
NC
VDD
Vss
NC
NC
NC
NC
Vss
R100
_CE-LCD
Vss
OSC2
OSC1
VDD
NC
NC
NC
NC
UD3
UD2
UD1
UD0
FLM
LP
CP
Vss
SG
_Wait
6
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
S
C51
4,5,12,13, 17,18
SG
SG
8
R20
SG
LCDVdd4
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-40
Operation unit main PCB 3/3
2AR
A
B
D
E
_SCAN0
SCAN0
CN3-1
_SCAN0
SCAN0
CN5-1
_SCAN0
SCAN1
CN1-2
_SCAN1
SCAN1
CN3-2
_SCAN1
SCAN1
CN5-2
_SCAN1
SCAN2
CN1-3
_SCAN2
SCAN2
CN3-3
_SCAN2
SCAN2
CN5-3
_SCAN2
SCAN3
CN1-4
_SCAN3
SCAN3
CN3-4
_SCAN3
SCAN3
CN5-4
_SCAN3
SCAN4
CN1-5
_SCAN4
SCAN4
CN3-5
_SCAN4
SCAN4
CN5-5
_SCAN4
SCAN5
CN1-6
_SCAN5
SCAN5
CN3-6
_SCAN5
SCAN5
CN5-6
_SCAN5
SCAN6
CN1-7
_SCAN6
SCAN6
CN3-7
_SCAN6
SCAN6
CN5-7
_SCAN6
SCAN7
CN1-8
_SCAN7
SCAN7
CN3-8
_SCAN7
SCAN7
CN5-8
_SCAN7
KEY SENSE3
S
KEY SENSE0 CN4-1
KEY SENSE6
CN2-1
CN2-2
KEY SENSE7
CN2-3
KEY SENSE8
CN2-4
L17
R121
L18
R120
R95
L11
KEY SENSE9
L10
R93
L9
R94
CN2-5
Key-sense5
R119
Key-sense6
R118
R89
Key-sense8
Key-sense9
R88
LDONX7
CN2-7
LDONX7
LDONX8
CN2-8
LDONX8
LDONX9
CN2-9
LDONX9
R92
R183
L60
R181
Key-sense10
Key-sense0
R182
Key-sense1
R180
LDONX1
E
C
LDONX2
C
Key-sense3
Key-sense4
CN5-11
LDONX3
CN5-12
LDONX3
L63
LDONX3
LDONX0
LDONX4
CN5-13
LDONX4
LDONX1
LDONX5
CN5-14
LDONX5
LDONX2 CN4-6
LDONX2
E
R16
CNS-Key-sense5
C
C
LDONX6
CN7-b2
LDONX5
CFL REM CN4-9
C
S
S G
C
int_CFLREM
B
LDONX6
C
LDONX7
4
5
CN7-b3
CN7-b4
CN7-b5
CN7-b6
CN7-b7
CN7-b8
CN7-b9
CN7-b10
CN7-b11
CN7-b12
CN7-b13
CN7-b14
CN7-b15
CN7-b16
CN7-b17
CN7-b18
CN7-b19
CN7-b20
CN7-b21
_RD
CN7-b22
N/C
N/C
CN7-b23
CN7-b24
5V
CN7-b25
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
CN7-b26
CN7-a1
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
S
R158
RXD MAIN
R145
R159
IC10
1
LDONX9
7
CN7-a11
CN7-a12
CN7-a13
CN7-a14
CN7-a15
CN7-a16
CN7-a17
CN7-a18
L39
_CSSEL
CN7-a19
CN8-13
CN7-a21
_CE1
CN7-a22
CN8-6
CN8-12
N/C
CN7-a23
_CE3
CN7-a24
int_LDONX7
7
_SCAN5
8
int_SCAN5
C52
S G
IC7
TR3
int_LDONX8
2
_SCAN6
3
4
int_SCAN6
C50
S G
IC7
TR4
int_LDONX9
B
15
_SCAN7
10
14
int_SCAN7
_MMI-STS
11
24 V
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
CN8-11
1
CN8-5
3
CN8-10
G(5 V)
IC10
R160 5
6 9
5.1 V
ACK-from-Main
S G
R171
RXD FAX
6
R164
R168
S G
L54
R174 3
R165 11
+
C47
IC12
4 5
C4
6
G(5 V)
RxD-Fax
CN9-3
L53
C68
TP5
S G
IC10
R166
7
S G
IC10
10
13
12
G(5 V)
CN8-2
Error-from-Main
L52
S G
C66
TP4
S G
IC11
IC11
_DET-Fax-Option
DET SIG
R172
R173
S G
S
CN8-7
_CSSEL
L46
_CE-ROM-OPT
IC12
5
R41
CN8-8
CN9-2
TP3
CN8-3
Error-for Main
R40
6
S
CN8-9
L45
P G
S G
C65
R163
S G
L44
ERROR FROM MAIN
L56
S
L49
_END
CN9-4
CN8-4
L50
8
IC11
B
G(24 V)
_Reset
R167
C67
S G
IC10
R161
_CSSEL
2
C5
TP6
R162
ERROR FOR MAIN
+
C48
ACK-for-Main
S
L43
R169
L48
4
L42
ACK FROM MAIN
L55
IC12
S G
RESET MAIN
ACK FOR MAIN
CN9-1
R170
S
R43
8
int_SCAN4
IC7
TR2
S
S
11
C53
S G
IC11
TxD-Main
1
MMI STS
L41
C
10
_SCAN4
5
2
L47
E
TR1
S G
_DET
int_LDONX6
TP2
G(5 V)
CN7-a20
3
IC7
TR11
IC11
R42
_END
int_SCAN3
S G
L40
S
14
C54
S G
CN8-14
_RD
S G
int_SCAN2
C49
S G
IC11
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
C
15
_SCAN3
S G
D_BUS
6
int_LDONX5
B
E
R7
RxD-Main
11
IC13
TR10
S
4
CN7-a2
CN7-a3
CN7-a4
CN7-a5
CN7-a6
CN7-a7
CN7-a8
CN7-a9
CN7-a10
C
IC10
2 3
C64
S G
G(5 V)
R144
CN8-15
L38
LDONX8
TP1
2
int_SCAN1
C55
S G
B
E
10
_SCAN2
S
S
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
C
R6
TXD MAIN
5V
int_LDONX4
B
E
R5
8
IC13
TR13
S
P G
7
_SCAN1
C56
S G
B
E
R13
A_BUS
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
int_LDONX3
S
TR6
R176
R177
S
IC13
TR12
B
E
R14
L58
int_SCAN0
C57
S G
S
24 V CN4-8
3
2
_SCAN0
S
TR5
5V
int_LDONX2
B
E
R15
LDONX4
CN5-15
IC13
TR7
B
S
R184
L62
LDONX1 CN4-5
L57
CN7-b1
int_LDONX1
R187
LDONX0 CN4-4
3
G(5 V)
1
TR8
S
LDONX3 CN4-7
R90
int_LDONX0
B
E
R10
CN5-10
LDONX6
J
S
KEY SENSE5
R178
I
TR9
B
C
R11
R185
L64
E
R12
LDONX0
KEY SENSE4
Key-sense2
R179
L59
R91
CN2-6
L61
KEY SENSE2 CN4-3
Key-sense7
KEY SENSE10
L8
KEY SENSE1 CN4-2
CN5-9
H
S
LED1
KEY SENSE5
G
S R186
S
CN5-Key-sense5
2
F
CN1-1
R175
1
C
SCAN0
8
TXD FAX
CN8-1
9
L51
12
TxD-Fax
13
8
_CE-Jig-ROM4M
S
A
5V
CN7-a25
G(5 V)
CN7-a26
S G
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-41
Operation unit PCB
2AR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
1
1
24 V
1
CN2–2
3
CN1–1
4
CFL REM
2
CN2–1
5
CN1–5
2
LCD inverter PCB
3
key1
KEY SENS0
CN4–1
CN4(PCB)–9
KEY SENS1
CN4–2
CN4(PCB)–8
KEY SENS2
CN4–3
CN4(PCB)–7
key2
key3
2
CN1–2
NC
CN1–3
NC
CN1–4
NC
key4
key5
key6
key7
key8
key9
key12
key13
key14
key10
key11
key21
key15
key16
key20
key17
key18
key19
key22
KEY SENS3
CN5–9
CN5(PCB)–7
KEY SENS4
CN5–10
CN5(PCB)–6
KEY SENS5
CN5–11
CN5(PCB)–5
key23
key24
key29
key33 key37
key40
key26
key32
key25
key30
key34 key38
key41
key27
key36
key0
key31
key35 key39
key42
key28
key43
3
4
4
D1
5
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D9
D8
SCAN7
CN3–8
CN3(PCB)–1
SCAN7
CN5–8
SCAN6
CN3–7
CN3(PCB)–2
SCAN6
CN5–7
CN5(PCB)–9
SCAN5
CN3–6
CN3(PCB)–3
SCAN5
CN5–6
CN5(PCB)–10
SCAN4
CN3–5
CN3(PCB)–4
SCAN4
CN5–5
CN5(PCB)–11
SCAN3
CN3–4
CN3(PCB)–5
SCAN3
CN5–4
CN5(PCB)–12
SCAN2
CN3–3
CN3(PCB)–6
SCAN2
CN5–3
CN5(PCB)–13
SCAN1
CN3–2
CN3(PCB)–7
SCAN1
CN5–2
CN5(PCB)–14
SCAN0
CN3–1
CN3(PCB)–8
SCAN0
CN5–1
CN5(PCB)–15
LDONX0
CN4–4
LDONX1
LDONX2
L1
L8
L10
L15
L22
L26
L3
L2
L9
L11
L16
L23
L27
L4
CN4(PCB)–6
LDONX3
6
7
D2
CN4–5
CN4–6
LDONX4
L6
L13
L12
L17
L24
L28
L7
L14
L18
L19
L25
L29
L5
LDONX5
LDONX3
CN4–7
CN4(PCB)–3
24 V
CN4–8
CN4(PCB)–2
CN6(PCB)–1
CN6–2
CFL REM
CN4–9
CN4(PCB)–1
CN6(PCB)–2
CN6–1
LDONX6
D12
D13
D14
D15
CN5–12
5
L30
L34
CN5(PCB)–4
CN5–13
L43
L46
L38
L41
L50
L51
L31
L35
L44
L47
L39
L42
L52
L53
L32
L36
L45
L48
L40
L49
L77
L78
L33
L37
6
CN5(PCB)–3
L21
CN4(PCB)–4
D11
CN5(PCB)–8
L20
CN4(PCB)–5
D10
CN5–14
CN5(PCB)–2
CN5–15
CN5(PCB)–1
7
Operation unit right PCB
Operation unit left PCB
8
8
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
3-7-42
CLM–L
A
RCL
FCL1
FCL2
FCL3
B
PFCL–U
1
3
PFCL–L
CFM1
C
CFM2
4
1
3
2
2
3
PCFM
8
D
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
HUMPCB
1
4
DB
E
TC
DM
TFM
DB
CL
TNS
3
2
1–8
1–9
Image formation unit
F
CFL REM
OLPCB
HVTPCB
d
LCDIN
24 V PCB 1–1
2–2
2–1
1–2
1–3
1–4
1–5
ORPCB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213
13121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
LCD
G
H
OMPCB
I
CN1
(Option)
PM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LSU
BDPCB
LDPCB
OSS
5V
G(5 V)
7–12
7–11
7–10
7–9
7–8
7–7
7–6
7–5
7–4
7–3
7–2
7–1
EFSSOL
OFCL
SBPSOL1
SBPSOL2
OSLED(GN)
OSLED(RED)
N.C
OFM ENABLE
OFSOL1
OFSOL2
SBFSSOL
OCM M1
OCM M2
OCM M3
OCM Vref
OCM CWB
OCM CLK
OCM RET
OCM ENABLE
OFM CWB
OFM CLK
OFM RET
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
B
B
B
B
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1
2
3
A.GND
2 2
5–2
SPEAKER
1 1
5–1
NCUPCB
NWPCB
1 2 3 4 5
5 4 3 2 1
6–11
6–10
6–9
6–8
6–7
6–6
6–5
6–4
6–3
6–2
6–1
OSS
OFSW
OSBSW
N.C
N.C
DFTSW
OSLSW
DFSSW1
DFSSW2
OSWSW
DF SHORT
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A
A
HDD
1
60
1
MCPCB1
60
CN3
1
1
2
3
4
5
44
44
60
1
MCPCB2
60
CN4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5–13
5–12
5–11
5–10
5–9
5–8
5–7
5–6
5–5
5–4
5–3
5–2
5–1
1–10
1–9
1–8
1–7
1–6
1–5
1–4
1–3
1–2
1–1
2–6
2–5
2–4
2–3
2–2
2–1
1–1
1–2
1–3
1–4
1–5
1–6
1–7
1–8
1–9
1–10
1–11
1–12
1–13
1–14
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
or
6–2
6–1
60
60
1–4
CN4
1–3
5.1 V
1
1
1
CN7
1
MPCB
1–1
1–2
1–3
1–4
1–5
1–6
1–7
1–8
1–9
1–10
60
60
(Option)
CN3
SIMM
R5 V
ADJUST
ENABLE
VIDEO+
VIDEO–
G(5 V)
BD –
BD +
5V
G(5 V)
1
1
SIMM
G(5 V)
2 1
BATT
1 2
SIMM
12–15
1 2 3 4 5
5 4 3 2 1
G(5 V)
CLK
LD
S/S
G(24 V)
24 V
CN6
CN2
11–1
8–3
8–2
8–1
SIMM
11–2
8–13
8–12
8–11
8–10
8–9
8–8
8–7
8–6
8–5
8–4
FCPCB
11–3
G(5 V)
5V
G(5 V)
SHIFT
G(5 V)
CLP
G(5 V)
RS
G(5 V)
CLK
A.GND
+12 V
A.GND
VO_E
A.GND
VO_O
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CCDPCB
CN5
G(5 V)
DECK TXD/DESK TXD
CN1
11–4
6–1
6–2
6–3
6–4
11–5
G(5 V)
5.1 V
G(5 V)
+12 V
G(5 V)
FSW3 SIG
DECK RXD/DESK RXD
CN2
10–1
45
F RXD
1
i
FG
20
BUBAT
F3
5–3
5–2
5–1
4–3
4–2
4–1
3–1
3–2
3–3
3–4
3–5
3–6
G(5 V)
ODSW
5V
G(5 V)
SHPSW
5V
EL
EL
24 V
24 V
G(24 V)
G(24 V)
f
5
6
1–6
1–5
1–4
1–3
1–2
1–1
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
A
A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
F3 5.1 V
F3 5.1 V
G(24 V)
G(24 V)
F2 24 V
F2 24 V
1
1–2
G(5 V)
ODSW
SP
10–2
45
10–3
G(5 V)
3–10
3–9
3–8
3–7
3–6
3–5
3–4
3–3
3–2
3–1
4–6
4–5
4–4
4–3
4–2
4–1
G(5 V)
SHPSW
EL ON REM
SM ENABLE
SM RET
SM CWB
SM CLK
SM M5
SM M4
SM M3
SM M2
SM M1
SM Vref
ODSW
SM A
3
2–1
2–4
Fixing unit
20
10–4
F TXD
CN4
9–B1
9–B2
9–B3
9–B4
9–B5
9–B6
9–B7
9–B8
9–B9
9–B10
9–B11
9–B12
9–A1
9–A2
9–A3
9–A4
9–A5
9–A6
9–A7
9–A8
9–A9
9–A10
9–A11
9–A12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1
2–6
24 V
2
4
4
1
1
1
G(5 V)
CN3
10–7
EL
H
NWPCB
9–1
9–2
9–3
9–4
9–5
9–6
9–7
9–8
9–9
9–10
9–11
9–12
9–13
9–14
9–15
G(5 V)
RXD SCN
G(5 V)
TXD SCN
G(5 V)
SCN RESET
G(5 V)
SOVST
SCLK–
SCLK+
SID+
SID–
SOHSYNC+
SOHSYNC–
SMRE–
SMRE+
SCN ENABLE
SCN HEADER
SCN START
MAIN SCN HEADER
MAIN SCN ACK
G(5 V)
SCN ACK
G(5 V)
2–14
2–13
2–12
2–11
2–10
2–9
2–8
2–7
2–6
2–5
2–4
2–3
2–2
2–1
2
2–5
1
3
3
G
PCPCB
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
10–8
M RXD
TXD MAIN
G(5 V)
RXD MAIN
G( 5 V)
ACK FOR MAIN
ACK FROM MAIN
ERROR FOR MAIN
ERROR FROM MAIN
DET SIG
MMI STS
RESET MAIN
G(5 V)
RXD FAX
G(5 V)
TXD FAX
5
G(5 V)
5–B12
5–B11
5–B10
5–B9
5–B8
5–B7
5–B6
5–B5
5–B4
5–B3
5–B2
5–B1
5–A12
5–A11
5–A10
5–A9
5–A8
5–A7
5–A6
5–A5
5–A4
5–A3
5–A2
5–A1
1
2
3
4
10–9
6
A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
M TXD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
6
10–10
8–15
8–14
8–13
8–12
8–11
8–10
8–9
8–8
8–7
8–6
8–5
8–4
8–3
8–2
8–1
5
FSSOL2 ON
2–1
2–2
2–3
2–4
2–5
2–6
2–7
2–8
2–9
4
10–11
G(5 V)
3
KEY SENSE5
KEY SENSE6
KEY SENSE7
KEY SENSE8
KEY SENSE9
KEY SENSE10
LDONX7
LDONX8
LDONX9
3
10–12
M DET
5–1
5–2
5–3
5–4
5–5
5–6
5–7
5–8
5–9
5–10
5–11
5–12
5–13
5–14
5–15
2
Feedshift unit
(Option)
1–1
1–2
1–3
1–4
1–5
1–6
1–7
1–8
LDONX6
LDONX5
LDONX4
LDONX3
KEY SENSE5
KEY SENSE4
KEY SENSE3
SCAN7
SCAN6
SCAN5
SCAN4
SCAN3
SCAN2
SCAN1
SCAN0
5–15
5–14
5–13
5–12
5–11
5–10
5–9
5–8
5–7
5–6
5–5
5–4
5–3
5–2
5–1
1
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6
M RESET
2
4–1
4–2
4–3
4–4
4–5
4–6
4–7
4–8
4–9
CN2
120
1–1
G(5 V)
1
6–13
6–12
6–11
6–10
6–9
6–8
6–7
6–6
6–5
6–4
6–3
6–2
6–1
CFL REM
24 V
LDONX3
LDONX2
LDONX1
LDONX0
KEY SENSE2
KEY SENSE1
KEY SENSE0
4–9
4–8
4–7
4–6
4–5
4–4
4–3
4–2
4–1
1
1
8
2
7
10–5
3
6
10–6
F RESET
4
5
F DET
5
6
7
4
3
2–4
SM A
1
9–1
3–1
3–2
3–3
3–4
3–5
3–6
3–7
3–8
3.4 V
9–2
7
SCAN7
SCAN6
SCAN5
SCAN4
SCAN3
SCAN2
SCAN1
SCAN0
8
3
G(24 V)
2
1–6
1–5
1–4
1–3
1–2
1–1
3–8
3–7
3–6
3–5
3–4
3–3
3–2
3–1
120
1
LED
2
SCAN0
SCAN1
SCAN2
SCAN3
SCAN4
SCAN5
SCAN6
SCAN7
9–4
4
CN3
a
4
2–3
SM B
24 V
SM B
3
9–3
1
3
14 9–1
2
NC
1
13 9–2
5
1
1
1
12 9–3
6
2–1
2–2
1
1
2
NC
Job separator
(Option)
1
9 10
2 1
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
NC
Mail box
(Option)
2
8
3
JOFSW
3
7
4
2
1
1
1
4
11 9–4
Finisher
(Option)
1
6
5
A–1
A–4
5
NC
Paper feed
desk (Option)
1 2 3 4 5 6
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6
B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
6 5 4 3 2 1
5.1 V
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
3.4 V
5.1 V
G(5 V)
Large paper
deck (Option)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2
5
6
4
7
3
8
JBESW
3
1 2
10 9
+12 V
8–10
Key counter
(Option)
Key card
(Optional for
120 V specs
only.)
KC SET SIG
B
8–9
G(24 V)
2 1
24 V
KC COUNT
G(5 V)
3
G(24 V)
G(24 V)
F1 24 V
F1 24 V
F1 24 V
F1 24 V
8–12
5.1 V
4
C
24 V
A
12 6
F1 24 V
F1 24 V
F3 5.1 V
G(5 V)
G(24 V)
G(24 V)
10 9–5
9–6
9
8–11
4
b
R24 V
9–7
8
3
1
1
1
6–1
2
2
FSSW
3
15
15
6–2
G(24 V)
1
2
2
2
6–3
24 V
G(24 V)
9–8
7
g
3
FSSOL2
1
3
3
1
2
6–4
G(5 V)
TC CONT
9–9
6
e
2
4
4
A–2
A–3
5.1 V
1–10 1
4
1–7
9–10
5
h
3
FSSOL1
1
13
13
1 1
NC
REM (METER PULSE)
MMD
(Optional for 120 V specs only.)
1
1
5
5
MSW
TC REM
24 V (METER PULSE)
7–10
DB CONT
SET SIG
7–9
5
7–8
9–11
G(5 V)
9–12
7–7
4
G(5 V)
9–13
7–6
3
2
FSM
2
12
12
24 V
DB REM
3
7–4
G(5 V)
4
R24 V
MC ALM
TXD
5
ESW
3
4
5
24 V
GRID CONT
7–5
6
7–3
RXD
7
24 V
G(24 V)
8
24 V
10 9
FSFM
1
FSM B
2
9–14
1
7–1
7–2
MC REM
8–24
24 V
TNS CONT
ESW
8–23
2
G(5 V)
24 V
5V
3
FSM A
8–22
2
FSM A
TNS SIG
FSFM REM
1
FSM B
8–21
7
7
24 V
6
8–19
14
FSSOL1 ON
1
2
24 V
2
1
1
FSSW
3
2
8–20
NC
FSSOL OFF
G(5 V)
NC
1–25
G(5 V)
1–27
5V
4
2
2
14
1–8
8
1–28
DEV DET
1–26
8
1–6
10
1–19
1
1–22
10
1–4
9
G(5 V)
2
1–24
9
1–21
16 17 18
16 17 18
JBESW
20 11
1–23
20 11
5V
11–B10
6
1–9
6
11–B9
19
G(5 V)
11–B8
5
1–10
19
11–B7
6
1
1
Duplex unit (Option)
FSPCB
JOB DET
7
1
G(5 V)
11–B6
8
2
DUPPCSW
3
11–B5
9
1
1
1 –5
Bypass table (Standard for
220-240 V specs and optional
for 120 V specs.)
2
2
DUPCL
3
3
JOFSW
Bypass unit (Standard for 220-240 V specs and optional for 120 V specs.)
3
1
BYPPLSW
2
2
1
7
2
6
3
5
5V
11–B4
10
10 11 12 13
BYPPSW
3
1
3
4
4
5
3
6
2
11–B3
11
BYPPWSW
3
7
1
TB 4
6
G(24 V)
G(5 V)
Vo
LP
DISP OFF
FLM
CP
UD0
UD1
UD2
UD3
VEE
5V
3
3
12
12–1
BYPFCL
BYPPWSW DIG 1
BYPPFCL
4–9
13–4
4–10
BYPPWSW DIG 0
BYPFSW
5V
CL REM
BYPPFCL
BYPLCL
3
2
1
BYPPSW
4–11
2
4–12
12–11
1
12–12
5
G(5 V)
4
G(5 V)
4–13
13–3
24 V
2
4–14
24 V
24 V
3 2 1
3 2 1
1
1
1–3
8–18
BYPLCL
1
3
BYPFCL
1
24 V
1
2
2
2
FTH 5 V
FTH
NC
SHPSW
24 V
2
2
3
3
13–2
13–1
NC
NC
1 2 3
1 2 3
TFM–
2
2
4–1
G(5 V)
2
1
5V
8–17
12–2
3
1
12–3
BYPPWSW DIG 2
15–1
4–2
1–7
1–1
1–2
1–12
1–16
1–14
1–20
1–18
1–13
1–11
1–17
1–15
TFM+
4–3
R24 V
24 V
G(5 V)
5V
ESW
5V
G(5 V)
24 V
G(24 V)
FSM A
FSM A
FSM B
FSM B
FSSOL OFF REM
FSSOL1 ON REM
FSFM REM
FSSOL2 ON REM
FSSW
FS DET
ETTH
12–6
BYP DET
15–2
4–6
G(5 V)
15–3
4–7
G(5 V)
4
4
16–7
16–8
Noise filter
INPCB
5.1 V
1
1
DUP DET
15–4
4–8
BYPPLSW
5
5
24 V
NC
10–B11
G(5 V)
12–7
5 V(200Ω)
6
6
DUPPCSW
10–B6
10–B12
EHUMSENS
12–16
4–17
5V
1
1
4–18
4
4
4–15
2
2
12–8
4–16 BYPFSW
3
3
12–13
5
5
12–14
6
6
14–1
7
7
4–19
8
8
14–2
NC
9
9
4–20
DUPCL
11 10
11 10
4–21
13 12
13 12
PWSW–L DIG 0 14–4
PWSW–L DIG 1 14–3
14
14
4–22
16 15
16 15
14–5
8–6
10–B5
8–5
10–B7
14–8
TC
PWSW–U DIG 1
14–9
8–7
8–8
5V
14–12
24 V
4
2–17
2–16
2–15
2–14
2–13
2–12
2–11
2–10
2–9
2–8
2–7
2–6
2–5
2–4
2–3
2–2
2–1
G(5 V)
NC 8–28
TC DET
2–24
2–19
LED REM
SM
G(5 V)
3 1 2 4
3 1 2 4
TH
G(24 V)
3 1 2 4
3 1 2 4
SSW3
5 V(200Ω)
1–6
1
11–B1
1–5
2
16–5
16–6
NC
SSW2
11–B2
7
3
16–2
16–3
16–4
FUSW SIG
MSW OFF REM
24 V
G(5 V)
2–3
2–2
2–1
3–4
3–20
3–21
3–12
3–23
6
1–4
4
1–16
1–14
1–13
H2 REM
H1 REM
5V
F2 24 V
G(24 V)
G(24 V)
G(5 V)
5.1 V
DC supply
circuit
8
5
4
c
9
6
2
1–3
7
FUSW
(Option)
550W
1–2
8
1–15
1–6
1–7
1–8
1 –1
1–2
1–3
1–4
1–5
6–2
6–1
5–14
5–15
5–13
5–7
5–9
5–16
5–11
5–17
5–1
5–2
3B
1–1 10
9
3A
400W
F
2–9
2–8
2–7
2–6
2–5
2–4
2–3
2–2
2–1
2
2
1–4
E
1–8
1–7
1–6
1–5
1–4
1–3
1–2
1–1
3
1
2B
MC
1
3
2A
1
2
2
G(24 V)
24 V
24 V
G(24 V)
G(5 V)
5.1 V
F1 24 V
F1 24 V
G(24 V)
G(24 V)
G(5 V)
F3 5.1 V
H2
1–3
1
3
1
EPCB
16–9
G(5 V)
PCFM REM
LICSW–L
12–4
16–10
5V
12–5
24 V
G(5 V)
12–9
8–4
G(5 V)
12–10
CFM2 REM
PLSW–L
8–3
PLSW–U
16–1
8–25
24 V
1
3
SSW1
1B
GRID
1
3
2 1
2 1
8–2
2
2
3
1
3
5
CFM1 REM
1
5
2
3
8–1
G(5 V)
11–A10
PWSW–L DIG 2
1
24 V
14–6
11–A9
14–7
24 V
NC
G(5 V)
3–8
R24 V
10–B8
PWSW–U DIG 2
11–A8
1 15–13
R24 V
10–B9
PWSW–U DIG 0 14–10
24 V
i
11–A7
2 15–12
11–A6
2
4
1
TB 3
G(24 V)
5V
G(5 V)
11–A5
3 15–11
11–A4
4 15–10
G(24 V)
6 15–8
G(5 V)
FSW2
5V
7 15–7
11–A3
3
3
4
2
5
1
3
G(5 V)
DM REM
1
4
2
8 15–6
11–A1
2
3
1
9 15–5
5V
11–A2
3
2
4
1
2
1
3
2
3
2
2
1
3
FSW3
5 15–9
3
1
1
FSW1
DM LOCK
3
5
14–11
G(5 V)
4
6
5
10–B10
G(5 V)
5
3
4
8–27
DM CLK
3
DF11(8P)
8 7
6
2 1
4
2
G(5 V)
10–B4
3
5
1
8–26
24 V
4
6
5
5V
LSU
1A
2
2
2
Large paper
deck / Paper
feed desk
10–B3
5
3
4
h
PFCL–L
3
DF11(8P)
8 7
6
2 1
4
2
5V
G(5 V)
10–B2
6
1
RSW
24 V
3
4
5
5
1
G(5 V)
2
Mail box
10–B1
1
2
4
3
2
1
G(5 V)
2
SRDF
PFCL–U
10–A12
6
1
8
2
1–1
2
3
1
24 V
10–A11
1
6
2
5
3
4
7
PSPCB
B
3
1
3
PSW–L
4
3
5
1
3
2
6
4
5
5V
LICSW–U
4
6
G(5 V)
3
5V
PSW–U
8
A
3
2
2
5V
5
2
4–4
6
1
1
7
5
FCL3
10–A10
8
COM
4
3
1
24 V
2
7
g
1–2
D
4
1
3
4–5
1
TB 1
2
FG
5
2
2
f
2
CH
6
3
1
6
4
7–6
7–5
7–4
7–3
5
3–5
3–6
3–10
3–11
3–18
3–19
3–1
3–2
TB 2
Heater control
circuit
1
7
1
3
F3 5.1 V
F3 5.1 V
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
G(24 V)
G(24 V)
F2 24 V
F2 24 V
8–2
8
2
2
3
RSW
+12 V
5.1 V
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
4
FSW1
CN7
6
FSW2
TB5
3
FSW3
G(24 V)
5
1
5–12
5–8
2
2
G(5 V)
F3 5.1 V
3
5–3
5–4
5–5
5–6
5–10
5–18
1
2
F1 24 V
F1 24 V
F1 24 V
F1 24 V
G(24 V)
G(24 V)
8
3
4–4
4–3
4–2
4–1
1
1
5.1 V
G(5 V)
G(24 V)
24 V
7
2
PWSW–U
3–30
3–25
3–26
3–27
3–14
3–15
3–13
3–22
3–7
3–24
10–A9
3
PWSW–L
120 V
FCL2
1
PLSW–L PLSW–U
a
MPCB
+12 V
5.1 V
5.1 V
3.4 V
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
10–A8
2
PSW–U
G(5 V)
G(24 V)
24 V
5.1 V
3–29
3–28
3–17
3–16
24 V
3
LICSW–U
b
H1
3.4 V
5.1 V
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
10–A7
PSW–L
c
SCPCB
COM
FCL1
LICSW–L
d
SMPCB
8–1
9
3
1
10–A6
10–A5
e
OMPCB
LIVE
10
1
2
24 V
RCL
j
Finisher
220-240 V
Transfer
roller
CLM–U
2
1
10–A4
k
Finisher
LIVE
C
11
1
2
10–A3
C
B
12
2
1
24 V
FCPCB
3
CLM–L
6
Upper primary
Paper feed unit
2
10–A2
Lower primary
Paper feed unit
1
CLM–U
10–A1
A
5.1 V
24 V
A
A
General connection diagram
2AR-1
I
J
FG
FG
1
ILSW
SRDF
(Option)
FTH
SMPCB
2
SCPCB
G(5 V)
3
OSS
(8W)
4
j
(Option)
5
CN6
5–4
5–3
HAND SET
TEL MOD
LINE MOD
k
6
CFL
7
CN7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213
FDPCB
CN1
(Option)
8
J
3-7-43
8
A
5V
SHPSW
G(5 V)
1
2
3
GY
1
GY
2
GY
3
5V
ODSW
G(5 V)
CN5
SMPCB
INPCB
B
C
A
A
B
B
D
B
B
CCDPCB
EL
E
B
B
CFL
CFL
CFL REM
24 V
5
4
3
2
1
2
1
1
2
F
LCD
SRDF(Option)
2
1
C53–1
C53–2
C53–3
C53–4
C53–5
C53–6
C53–7
C53–8
C53–9
C53–10
C53–11
C53–12
C53–13
C53–14
C53–15
CN1
CN4
OLPCB
G
CN7
CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
C76
CH
(Service part)
CN8
CN5
CN9
H
CN7
CN9
CN6
1
40
1
40
1
40
1
40
C43–7
C43–8
C43–9
C43–10
C43–11
C51 CN5
NWPCB
(Option)
FAPCB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
BE
LB
BK
BK
SIG
SOURCE
C64–15
C64–16
P11
P12
RD C64–13
GN C64–14
I
C50 CN8
MPCB
PCPCB
(Option)
C86
HVTPCB
RD
Option
F RXD
S.G
F TXD
S.G
F RESET
F DET
M RXD
S.G
M TXD
S.G
M DET
M RESET
C48 CN11
CN3
P15
3
RD
2
RD
1
3
2
1
TC
BK
TC
BK
R24 V
BK
TC DET
S.G
P16
P17
P18
P19
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
GY
RD
BN
BE
S.G
FUSW SIG
LIVE
LIVE
1 24 V
2 MSW OFF REM
MSW
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
45
1
45
C89
+12 V
5.1 V
G(5 V)
C90
24 V
G(5 V)
G(24 V)
C64–6
C64–5
C64–8
C64–7
3
4
1
2
1
2
RD
WE
RD
WE
LB
LB
RD
WE
RD
WE
LB
LB
SIMM
CN4
C39–5
1
C39–3
2
C39–6
3
C39–4
4
BK
RD
WE
RD
WE
YW
WE
W1
C48–1
C48–2
C48–3
C48–4
C48–5
W2
LSU
BDPCB
LD
PCB
RD
WE
RD
WE
LB
LB
C49–7
C49–8
C49–9
C49–10
C49–11
C49–12
RD
RD
OE
BE
BE
BE
C36–1
C36–2
C36–7
C36–13
C36–14
C36–15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
HEATER LIVE
DESK TXD/DECK TXD
S.G
DESK RXD/DECK RXD
S.G
FSW3 SIG
HEATER COM
OE
BE
RD
WE
RD
WE
LB
LB
C36–8
C36–12
C49–1
C49–2
C49–3
C49–4
C49–5
C49–6
BE
BE
RD
RD
RD
RD
C36–18
C36–10
C36–6
C36–5
C36–4
C36–3
GN P13
C41
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
E 5.1 V
G(5 V)
TXD
G(5 V)
RXD
G(5 V)
F RESET
F DET
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
–
G(24 V)
G(24 V)
G(24 V)
24 V
24 V
24 V
24 V
C86
LCDINPCB
Paper feed desk
Large paper deck
(Option)
GY
1 G(24 V)
MMD
(Optional for 120 V
specs only.)
C42
24 V
G(24 V)
RXD
G(5 V)
TXD
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
SET SIG
24 V
REM
6
5
4
3
2
1
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
5
4
3
2
1
TXD
G(5 V)
RXD
G(5 V)
M RESET
M DET
6
5
4
3
2
1
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
5
4
3
2
1
24 V
24 V
5.1 V
S.G
P.G
P.G
Wire color
Mail box
(Option)
C40
C36–9
C36–16
C36–11
C36–17
C44
24 V
G(24 V)
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
5.1 V
+12 V
24 V
G(24 V)
C39 CN7
RD
BE
BE
OE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Finisher
(Option)
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
24 V
24 V
24 V
24 V
24 V
24 V
5.1 V
5.1 V
24 V
G(24 V)
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
G(24 V)
G(24 V)
G(24 V)
5.1 V
G(24 V)
24 V
G(24 V)
G(5 V)
5.1 V
5.1 V
H1 REM
H2 REM
TB4
TB3
TB2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
L
N
C77–1
C77–4
C77–3
C77–2
C47–6
C47–5
C45–2
C45–3
C45–4
C45–5
C47–4
C44–7
C43–1
C45–6
C43–3
C44–8
C47–3
C47–2
C47–1
C43–2
C43–4
C45–7
RD
BE
BE
OE
RD
RD
RD
RD
RD
RD
OE
OE
RD
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
OE
BE
OE C54–8
GY C54–7
GN C54–6
WE P3
WE P4
BK P19
(P21)
BK P2
BK P18
(P20)
BYPFSW
5V
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
BYPPSW
5V
BYPPWSW DIG 0
BYPPWSW DIG 1
BYPPWSW DIG 2
G(5 V)
24 V
BYPFCL
BYPLCL
24 V
24 V
BYPPFCL
G(5 V)
BYP DET
G(5 V)
BYPPLSW
5 V(200Ω)
TB1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
LIVE
N.C.
H2 COM
H1 COM
LIVE
P12
LIVE
P11
COM
P10
LIVE
P9
C68–16
C68–15
C68–14
C68–13
C68–12
C68–11
C68–10
C68–9
C68–8
C68–7
C68–6
C68–5
C68–4
C68–3
C68–2
C68–1
C68–21
C68–20
C68–19
C68–18
C68–17
I
C45
C89–1
C89–2
C90–2
C90–4
C90–1
C90–3
RD C40–1
BE C40–3
PSPCB
C65–1
C65–2
C65–3
C65–4
C65–5
C65–6
C65–7
C65–8
C65–9
C65–10
C46
PM
BK
1
BK
2
BK
3
24 V
24 V
N.C.
24 V
5.1 V
5.1 V
24 V
24 V
N.C.
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
G(24 V)
G(24 V)
G(24 V)
G(24 V)
G(24 V)
5.1 V
5.1 V
5.1 V
5.1 V
3.4 V
5.1 V
3.4 V
+12 V
TB5
PK
OE
BE
BE
BN
OE
BN
GN
PE
BE
RD
LB
GN
RD
RD
GN
BE
GY
BE
GY
OE
1
2
RD
3 R24 V
BK
4 CFM2 REM
C21
1
2
3
4
C36 CN5
RD
BE
RD
WE
RD
WE
BE
GN
RD
YW
C47
5V 1
BD 2
GND 3
P13
G(24 V)
CN6
C38
RD
WE
RD
WE
YW
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
BK
24 V
BK
P.G
BK
BK
BK
C80–16
C80–17
C54–4
C80–18
C80–1
C80–4
C52–2
C52–3
C80–14
C80–15
C54–2
C54–3
C80–10
C54–5
C80–3
C80–7
C80–6
C80–9
C52–4
C52–1
C80–8
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
OE
OE
OE
OE
YW
OE
YW
PE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
1
CN3
1
2
3
4
5
5
4
3
2
1
WE C32–2
WE C86–2
WE C87–2
DESK TXD/DECK TXD
S.G
DESK RXD/DECK RXD
S.G
FSW3 SIG
1
2
3
4
5
W2
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
W1
1 10
2 9
3 8
4 7
5 6
6 5
7 4
8 3
9 2
10 1
5
4
3
2
1
BK C32–1
BK C86–1
BK C87–1
GY
GY
GY
BE
OE
GY
GY
BE
GY
GY
GY
GY
OE
1
2
3
4
5
Key counter
(option)
Key card
(Optional for
120 V specs
only.)
RD C38–1
BE C38–2
C54–1
C80–2
C80–5
C80–11
C82–1
RD
OE
OE
RD
RD
RD C80–12
RD C80–13
GN P20
5V
LED REM
5V
JOFSW
G(5 V)
JOB DET
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
5V
JBESW
10 1
9 2
8 3
7 4
6 5
5 6
4 7
3 8
2 9
1 10
C37
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
C71–A12
C71–A11
C71–A10
C71–A9
C71–A8
C71–A7
C71–A6
C71–A5
C71–A4
C71–A3
C71–A2
C71–A1
C71–B12
C71–B11
C71–B10
C71–B 9
C71–B8
C71–B7
C71–B6
C71–B5
C71–B4
C71–B3
C71–B2
C71–B1
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
C61–1
C61–2
C61–3
C61–4
C61–5
C61–6
C61–7
C61–8
C61–9
C61–10
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
DUPCL
24 V
DUPPCSW
24 V
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
DUP DET
C27
C26–5
C55–2
C26–23
C26–21
C26–19
C55–4
C26–28
C26–26
C26–24
C26–22
C55–19
C26–6
C26–4
C26–8
C26–9
C55–15
C55–16
C55–17
C26–10
C55–24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
BE
PK
YW
BN
PK
GN
LB
PE
GY
YW
RD
RD
RD
RD
OE
GN
OE
BE
RD
RD
2 HEATER COM
C37–14
C37–5
C37–24
C37–15
C37–6
C37–26
C37–25
C37–30
C37–27
C37–22
C37–7
C37–1
C37–2
C37–18
C37–19
C37–10
C37–11
C37–13
C53
C34
C35
CN2
CN4
BE
OE
OE
BE
OE
OE
OE
PE
YW
BE
RD
RD
RD
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
C52
CN1
C33
CN1
S/S
LD
CLK
G(5 V)
5V
BD+
BD–
G(5 V)
VIDEO–
VIDEO+
ENABLE
ADJUST
R5 V
C37–29
C37–16
C37–17
C37–28
YW
BE
BE
OE
C64–11
C64–12
C64–9
C64–10
C62–B5
C62–B6
C62–B7
C62–B8
C62–B9
C62–B10
C62–B11
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
RD
3 R24 V
BK
4 CFM1 REM
C20
1
2
3
4
CN8
C49 CN10
BK
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
1
2
3
4
C37–4
C37–20
C37–21
C37–12
C37–23
C34–3
C34–2
C34–1
RD
PK
GY
BE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
RD C64–3
PE C64–4
RD C64–1
GY C64–2
WE W2
G(5 V)
SCN ACK
G(5 V)
M.SCN ACK
M.SCN HEADER
SCN START
SCN HEADER
SCN ENABLE
SMRE+
SMRE–
SOHSYNC–
SOHSYNC+
SID–
SID+
SCLK+
SCLK–
SOVST
G(5 V)
SCN RESET
G(5 V)
TXD SCN
G(5 V)
RXD SCN
G(5 V)
3.4 V
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
5.1 V
C54
CN1
1 HEATER LIVE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
CN2
RD
BE
BE
BE
OE
GN
GY
OE
GY
1
2
3
4
G(5 V)
FSSW
FSSOL2 ON
FSSOL OFF
FSSOL1 ON
FSFM REM
FSM B
FSM B
FSM A
FSM A
24 V
24 V
24 V
24 V
5V
ESW
5V
G(5 V)
24 V
R24 V
C22
GY C56–9
3 3
2 2
RD C56–10
1 1
WE
G(5 V)
5.1 V
5.1 V
G( 5 V)
5.1 V
5.1 V
5.1 V
+12 V
3.4 V
G(24 V)
24 V
24 V
24 V
G(24 V)
G(24 V)
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
C68 CN4
TXD MAIN
S.G
RXD MAIN
S.G
ACK FOR MAIN
ACK FROM MAIN
ERROR FOR MAIN
ERROR FROM MAIN
DET SIG
MMI STS
RESET MAIN
S.G
RXD FAX
S.G
TXD FAX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RD C25–20
24 V
KC COUNT
KC SET SIG
S.G
FSM B
FSM B
FSM B
FSSOL1 ON
FSM B
FSSOL OFF
FSM A
FSSOL2 ON
FSM A
G(5 V)
24 V
FS DET
24 V
G(5 V)
24 V
5V
24 V
5V
24 V
FSSOL1 ON REM
G(24 V)
FSSOL OFF REM
FSM A
FSSOL2 ON REM
FSM A
R24 V
PCFM REM
H
C72–4
C73–5
C88–4
C72–3
C73–6
C72–1
C72–5
C72–6
C72–2
C88–1
C88–2
C73–1
C73–2
C73–3
C73–4
C73–7
C73–8
C88–3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
24 V
G(24 V)
G(24 V)
G(5 V)
5.1 V
H2 REM
H1 REM
5.1 V
R24 V
24 V
LB C25–7
PE C25–8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
GY C60–13
BE C60–14
G
BE
OE
OE
BE
OE
OE
OE
PE
YW
BE
RD
RD
RD
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
C76–15
C76–14
C76–13
C76–12
C76–11
C76–10
C76–9
C76–8
C76–7
C76–6
C76–5
C76–4
C76–3
C76–2
C76–1
C65 CN7
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
EPCB
CN3
C55 CN2
C32
24 V
5.1 V
G(5 V)
G(24 V)
CN3
RD C25–11
C26–3
C25–2
C26–15
C25–6
C26–11
C26–13
C26–18
C26–20
C26–14
C26–16
C26–12
C26–2
C26–1
C26–7
C25–16
C25–17
C25–18
C55–7
C25–5
C55–8
C25–4
C25–10
C25–3
C25–9
LB
PK
PE
BN
YW
YW
GY
C30
BK W1
1
2
3
4
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
BYPPFCL
24 V
24 V
BYPLCL
BYPFCL
24 V
G(5 V)
BYPPWSW DIG 0
BYPPWSW DIG 1
BYPPWSW DIG 2
5V
BYPPSW
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
5V
BYPFSW
5 V(200Ω)
BYPPLSW
G(5 V)
BYP DET
G(5 V)
YW
PK
YW
GN
PK
BN
LB
PE
GY
YW
BE
RD
BE
OE
GN
OE
BE
GY C22–3
RD C22–1
RD P1–1
RD C78–3
RD P1–2
C55–13
C55–12
C55–1
C25–13
C25–1
C25–12
C55–14
C25–14
C25–15
C25–19
C55–5
C55–11
C55–6
C55–9
C55–3
C55–10
BE
RD
YW
RD
BE
RD
OE
RD
OE
RD
PK
BE
BN
GY
YW
YW
PE C60–15
BE C60–16
C26
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
C2–3
C2–2
C2–1
C3–4
C3–3
C3–2
C4–5
C4–4
C4–3
C10–4
C10–3
C10–2
C10–1
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
RD C83–1
RD C78–1
C15–2
C15–1
C15–4
C15–3
C15–6
C15–5
C17–2
C17–1
C17–4
C17–3
C17–6
C17–5
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
C19
PLSW–U 2
1
G(5 V)
C18
PLSW–L 2
1
G(5 V)
Job separator
(Option)
C35–1
C35–4
C35–3
C35–2
CN6
GN
TXD MAIN
S.G
RXD MAIN
S.G
ACK FOR MAIN
ACK FROM MAIN
ERROR FOR MAIN
ERROR FROM MAIN
DET SIG
MMI STS
RESET MAIN
S.G
RXD FAX
S.G
TXD FAX
FDPCB
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
C24–16
C24–15
C24–14
C24–13
C24–12
C24–11
C24–10
C24–9
C24–8
C24–7
C24–6
C24–5
C24–4
C24–3
C24–2
C24–1
C23–6
C23–5
C23–4
C23–3
C23–2
GN
RD
RD
GN
LB
RD
BE
PE
GN
BN
OE
BN
BE
BE
OE
PK
OE
GY
BE
GY
BE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
PWSW–U
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
FS DET
FSSW
FSSOL2 ON REM
FSFM REM
FSSOL1 ON REM
FSSOL OFF REM
FSM B
FSM B
FSM A
FSM A
G(24 V)
24 V
G(5 V)
5V
ESW
5V
G(5 V)
PCFM REM
24 V
SSW3
SSW1
SSW3
SSW2
SSW1
G(5 V)
5V
FSW3
G(5 V)
5V
FSW2
G(5 V)
5V
FSW1
5V
HUMSENS
G(5 V)
ETTH
G(5 V)
PWSW–L DIG 2
PWSW–L DIG 1
PWSW–L DIG 0
24 V
24 V
G(5 V)
PWSW–U DIG 2
PWSW–U DIG 1
PWSW–U DIG 0
24 V
24 V
C69–A2
C69–A1
C74–2
C74–1
GY
GY
GY
GY
–
KEY SENSE5
KEY SENSE6
KEY SENSE7
KEY SENSE8
KEY SENSE9
KEY SENSE10
LDONX7
LDONX8
LDONX9
52
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
52
C28
BK
C77
C73
OMPCB
SCAN0
SCAN1
SCAN2
SCAN3
SCAN4
SCAN5
SCAN6
SCAN7
1
120 V
SCAN0
SCAN1
SCAN2
SCAN3
SCAN4
SCAN5
SCAN6
SCAN7
KEY SENSE3
KEY SENSE4
KEY SENSE5
LDONX3
LDONX4
LDONX5
LDONX6
C72
1
INLET
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
CN1
C24
WE
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
FG
C56 CN16
KEY SENSE0
KEY SENSE1
KEY SENSE2
LDONX0
LDONX1
LDONX2
LDONX3
24 V
CFL REM
C71
FUSW
P12
Transfer roller
Duplex unit
(Option)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CN7
Bypass unit
(Standard for 220–240 V specs and optional for 120 V specs.)
WE
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
CN9
P21
C64 CN8
C57 CN15
SCAN0
SCAN1
SCAN2
SCAN3
SCAN4
SCAN5
SCAN6
SCAN7
CN8
C58 CN14
Feedshift unit
(Option)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CN6
C59
CN13
P20
C63 CN9
1
2
3
4
PLSW–U
P11
C60 CN12
24 V
G(24 V)
RXD
G(5 V)
TXD
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
SET SIG
24 V
REM(METER PULSE
GN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
C61 CN11
FTH 5 V
FTH
24 V
CL REM
C12–6
C12–5
C12–4
C12–3
C12–2
C12–1
C13–6
C13–5
C13–4
C13–3
C13–2
C13–1
C18–2
C18–1
C19–2
C19–1
BE
BN
OE
BE
YW
OE
BE
GN
OE
BE
LB
OE
GY
BE
PE
BE
RD
BK
1 TFM+
BK
2 TFM–
C42–1
C42–2
C42–3
C42–4
C42–5
C42–6
C42–7
C42–8
C42–9
C42–10
Fixing unit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
C69
G(5 V)
LICSW–L
5V
G(5 V)
PSW–L
5V
G(5 V)
LICSW–U
5V
G(5 V)
PSW–U
5V
PLSW–L
G(5 V)
PLSW–U
G(5 V)
C17
G(24 V)
G(5 V)
VO
LP
DISP OFF
FLM
CP
UD0
UD1
UD2
UD3
VEE
5V
CN5
PLSW–L
C25
WE
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
CN4
CN3
CLM–U
GY
1
GY
2
GY
3
GY
4
GY
5
GY
6
GY
7
GY
8
GY
9
GY
10
GY
11
GY
12
GY
13
CN4
C16
PCFM
GY C64–17
GY C64–18
CN2
24 V
CFM1 REM
24 V
CFM2 REM
24 V
TC
G(5 V)
TC DET
KC SET SIG
G(5 V)
24 V
KC COUNT
24 V
MSW OFF REM
S.G
FUSW SIG
TFM+
TFM–
DEV DET
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
TNS SIG
24 V
TNS CONT
RSW
5V
S.G
MC
C60–1
C60–2
C60–3
C60–4
C60–5
C60–6
C23
RD
OE
BE
BE
OE
1
PK
2
BE
3
CN3
SCPCB
PWSW–U DIG 0
PWSW–U DIG 1
PWSW–U DIG 2
G(5 V)
PWSW–L
F
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
CN2
OSS
CLM–L
CFM2
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
G(24 V)
G(24 V)
24 V
24 V
EL
EL
CN6
C14
C75
CN1
–
CL
C88
5
4
3
2
1
E
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
WE
RD
TFM
SM A
24 V
SM A
SM B
24 V
SM B
WE
1
2
2 1 R24 V
1 2 CLM–U
C60–7
C60–8
C60–9
C60–10
C60–11
C60–12
1
2
TC
C15
C74
G(24 V)
24 V
G(5 V)
5.1 V
BK W1
WE W2
YW
LB
PK
BE
PWSW–L DIG 0
PWSW–L DIG 1
PWSW–L DIG 2
G(5 V)
CFM1
GY C59–4
GY C59–3
DB
RD
BE
RD
WE
RD
WE
BE
GN
RD
YW
GRID
C27–10
C27–9
C27–8
C27–7
C27–6
C27–5
C27–4
C27–3
C27–2
C27–1
C12
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
C13
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
5.1 V
5.1 V
G(24 V)
G(24 V)
24 V
24 V
Image formation unit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5
4
3
2
1
C81–17
C81–16
C81–5
C81–2
C81–15
C81–14
C81–13
C81–12
DB
2 1 R24 V
1 2 CLM–L
BE
BE
OE
OE
BE
BE
RD
RD
WE
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
YW
LB
PK
BE
6
5
4
3
2
1
F.GND
F.GND
MC
GY C62–A3
GY C62–A4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
5.1 V
3.4 V
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
5.1 V
+12 V
GRID
GY C58–6
GY C58–5
GY C58–4
GY C58–3
GY C58–2
GY C58–1
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BE
GN
OE
BE
LB
OE
1
2
3
4
5
6
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
1
2
3
4
Upper primary
Paper feed unit
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
6
5
4
3
2
1
C81–6
C81–9
C81–4
C81–1
C81–7
C81–8
BE C81–10
BE C81–11
BE C81–18
BE C81–3
TNS
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
ODSW
1
2
3
4
GY C62–A1
GY C62–A2
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
C70
PSW–U
G(5 V)
PSW–U
5V
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
1
2
3
4
5
6
11 11
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
SHPSW
6
5
4
3
2
1
FTH
LICSW–U
3
G(5 V)
LICSW–U 2
1
5V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BE
BN
OE
BE
YW
OE
1 11
2 10
3 9
4 8
5 7
6 6
7 5
8 4
9 3
10 2
11 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
BK
C20–3
C20–4
C21–3
C21–4
C79–2
C79–1
C79–4
C79–3
C30–3
C30–4
C30–1
C30–2
C86–1
C86–2
P16
P17
C75–1
C75–2
C70–6
C70–5
C70–4
C70–3
C70–2
C70–1
C84–1
C84–2
C84–3
H1
Lower primary
Paper feed unit
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
OE
YW
BE
BE
OE
PK
SM
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
C
SBFSSOL
OFSOL2
OFSOL1
OFM ENABLE
R24 V
G(24 V)
TC CONT
NC
TC REM
DB CONT
DB REM
MC ALM
GRID CONT
MC REM
BK
BK
24 V
CLM–U
24 V
CLM–L
RCL
24 V
FCL1
24 V
FCL2
24 V
FCL3
24 V
PFCL–U
24 V
PFCL–L
24 V
DUPCL
24 V
DUPPCSW
24 V
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
DUP DET
RD
GY
RD
PE
RD
GY
BE
BN
GY
BE
RD
PK
RD
GN
BE
LB
GY
GY
GN
GN
BE
LB
RD
YW
PK
OE
BE
DB
2 1
1 1
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
C4
3
2
1
OSLED(RED)
OSLED(GN)
SBPSOL2
SBPSOL1
OFCL
EFSSOL
TNS CONT
24 V
TNS SIG
G(24 V)
G(5 V)
DEV DET
1 2
BK
C16–2
C16–1
C14–2
C14–1
C9–3
C9–1
C8–3
C8–1
C6–3
C6–1
C1–3
C1–1
C7–3
C7–1
C5–3
C5–1
C27–7
C27–6
C27–5
C27–4
C27–3
C27–2
C27–1
1
GY
2
GY
3
GY
4
GY
5
GY
6
GY
7
GY
8
GY
9
GY
10
GY
11
GY
12
H2
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
23 12
22 11
21 10
20 9
19 8
18 7
17 6
16 5
15 4
14 3
13 2
12 1
WE
550W
BK
G(5 V)
PSW–L
5V
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
TH
3
G(5 V)
LICSW–L 2
1
5V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
WE
BK
1 1
PSW–L
C51–A12
C51–A11
C51–A10
C51–A9
C51–A8
C51–A7
C51–A6
C51–A5
C51–A4
C51–A3
C51–A2
C51–A1
C51–B12
C51–B11
C51–B10
C51–B9
C51–B8
C51–B7
C51–B6
C51–B5
C51–B4
C51–B3
C51–B2
C51–B1
A2 A3 5 V
C2
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
A1 A4 FTH
1 1
LICSW–L
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
C84
SOHSYNC+
SOHSYNC–
SMRE–
SMRE+
SCN ENABLE
SCN HEADER
SCN START
M.SCN HEADER
M.SCN ACK
G(5 V)
SCN ACK
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
RXD SCN
G(5 V)
TXD SCN
G(5 V)
SCN RESET
G(5 V)
SOVST
SCLK–
SCLK+
SID+
SID–
WE
400W
WE
1
2
3
H1
1 1
WE
GY
GY
GY
BK
1
2
3
WE
OE C64–26
2 2
PK C64–25
3 1
BE C64–27
1 3
G(5 V)
5V
OSS
4
GY C58–12
GY C58–11
GY C58–10
GY C58–9
GY C58–8
GY C58–7
OFM RET
OFM CLK
OFM CWB
OCM ENABLE
OCM RET
OCM CLK
OCM CWB
OCM Vref
OCM M3
OCM M2
OCM M1
H2
OE
3
PK
2
BE
1
C11
GY
1
GY
2
GY
3
GY
4
GY
5
GY
6
GY
7
GY
8
GY
9
GY
10
GY
11
LIVE
RCL
GY C62–A6
3 1
2 2
GY C62–A5
1 3
C11–9
C11–8
C11–7
C11–6
C11–5
C11–4
C11–3
C11–2
C11–1
C9
HUMPCB
11 11
10 10
9
9
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
5V
RSW
G(5 V)
GY C62–A8
3 1
2 2
GY C62–A7
1 3
RD C56–1
RD C37–8
C6
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
BK
R24 V
1
2
GY C57–9
3
GY C57–8
4
GY C57–7
5
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
RCL
FCL1
DM
DM CLK
DM LOCK
DM REM
5V
G(5 V)
G(24 V)
G(24 V)
R24 V
R24 V
NC
5V
LED REM
5V
JOFSW
G(5 V)
JOB DET
G(5 V)
G(5 V)
5V
JBESW
BK
R24 V
R24 V
R24 V
G(24 V)
G(24 V)
G(5 V)
5V
DM REM
DM LOCK
DM CLK
C62 CN10
C8
C83
C10
1 11
2 10
3 9
4 8
5 7
6 6
7 5
8 4
9 3
10 2
11 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
BK
MC REM
GRID CONT
MC ALM
DB REM
DB CONT
TC REM
NC
TC CONT
G(24 V)
R24 V
BK
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
FCL1
GY C62–A12
3 1
2 2
GY C62–A11
1 3
C85–10
C85–9
C85–8
C85–7
C85–6
C85–5
C85–4
C85–3
C85–2
C85–1
3
PFCL–U
1
GY C57–6
2
GY C57–5
3
GY C57–4
4
C82
C7
2 2
1 1
C1
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
B
DF SHORT
OSWSW
DFSSW2
DFSSW1
OSLSW
DFTSW
1
BK
GY C62–B2
3 1
2 2
GY C62–B1
1 3
SSW2
PFCL–U
R24 V
1 1
BK
FCL2
ETTH
G(5 V)
HUMSENS
5V
OSBSW
OFSW
OSS
C63–10
C63–9
C63–8
C63–7
C63–6
C63–5
C63–4
C63–3
C63–2
C63–1
1
BK
GY C62–A10
3 1
2 2
GY C62–A9
1 3
RD
RD
FCL2
R24 V
3
RD C56–7
2
RD C56–5
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
P1
C61–A9
C61–A8
C61–A7
C61–A6
C61–A5
C61–A4
C61–A3
C61–A2
C61–A1
P8
–
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
1
2
3
4
SIG
SIG
SSW3
SIG
SOURCE
BK C33–1
AC(L) 1A
WE C33–3
AC(C) 2A
WE C33–4
AC(C) 3A
C5
P2
P3
P4
BK
PFCL–L
GY C62–B4
3 1
2 2
GY C62–B3
1 3
C57–13
C57–12
C57–11
C57–10
1
GY
2
GY
3
GY
4
GY
5
GY
6
GY
7
GY
8
GY
9
GY
10
GY
11
GY
12
13
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
2
BK
R24 V
ILSW
PFCL–L
BN
OE
BE
AC(L) P5
AC(C) P6
AC(C) P7
C116
5
4
3
2
1
1B
2B
3B
BK
4
3
2
1
BK C69–3
WE C69–2
WE C69–1
2
LB
OE
BE
GY
GY
GY
GY
23 12
22 11
21 10
20
9
19
8
18
7
17
6
16
5
15
4
14
3
13
2
12
1
C64–24
C64–23
C64–22
C64–21
C64–20
C64–19
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
GY C59–1
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
GY C59–2
2
FG
3
2
1
GY C57–3
3 1
GY C57–2
2 2
GY C57–1
1 3
CLK
G(5 V)
RS
G(5 V)
CLP
G(5 V)
SHIFT
G(5 V)
5V
G(5 V)
WE P7
3
FSW1
5V
G(5 V)
C3
GN
OE
BE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
RSW
3
2
1
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
FSW1
3
2
1
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
C116
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
YW
RD
LB
BE
GN
GN
FSW2
FSW2
5V
G(5 V)
FCL3
ODSW
SMVref
SM M1
SM M2
SM M3
SM M4
SM M5
SM CLK
SM CWB
SM RET
SM ENABLE
EL ON REM
SHPSW
G(5 V)
WE P6
4
BK
VO_O
A.GND
VO_E
A.GND
+12 V
A.GND
6
FCL3
R24 V
1
2
3
4
5
6
5
BK
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
C116
FSW3
FSW3
5V
G(5 V)
C85
BK P5
1
2
3
4
4
WE
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
WE
G(24 V)
G(24 V)
24 V
24 V
EL
EL
General wiring diagram
2AR-1
J
220–240 V
GN/YW
WE
1
BK
C43
24 V
P.G
S.G
5.1 V
F.G. 1
BLACK
BK
BROWN
BN
YELLOW
YW
GREEN
BLUE
GN
BE
WHITE
PINK
WE
PK
RED
RD
LIGHT BLUE
ORANGE
OE
LB
PURPLE
PE
2
3
–
P20
GN
4
C44–6
C44–5
C44–4
C44–3
C44–2
C44–1
C46–6
C46–5
C46–4
C46–3
C46–2
C46–1
SIMM
(Option)
5
C80
C81
C39–1
1
2
C39–2
3
6
C78
RD C56–4
SSW1
RD C56–2
C79
Mark
7
GRAY
GY
GREEN/YELLOW
GN/YW
RED/WHITE
RD/WE
CFL
ORPCB
8
J
3-7-44
MITA COPYSTAR AMERICA, INC.
Headquarters:
225 Sand Road, P.O. Box 40008
Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008
TEL : (973) 808-8444
FAX : (973) 882-6000
New York Show Room:
149 West 51st street,
New York, NY 10019
TEL : (212) 554-2679
FAX : (212) 554-2625
Northeastern Region:
225 Sand Road, P.O. Box 40008
Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008
TEL : (973) 808-8444
FAX : (973) 882-4401
Midwestern Region:
225 Spring Lake Drive,
Itasca, Illinois 60143
TEL : (630) 250-7447
FAX : (630) 250-8787
Western Region:
14101 Alton Parkway,
P.O.Box 57006, Irvine,
California 92618-7006
TEL : (949) 457-9000
FAX : (949) 457-9119
Southeastern Region:
1500 Oakbrook Drive,
Norcross, Georgia 30093
TEL : (770) 729-9786
FAX : (770) 729-9873
Southwestern Region:
2825 West Story Road,
Irving, Texas 75038-5299
TEL : (972) 550-8987
FAX : (972) 570-4704
Dallas Parts Distribution Center
& National Training Center:
2825 West Story Road,
Irving, Texas 75038-5299
TEL : (972) 659-0055
FAX : (972) 570-5816
MITA COPYSTAR CANADA, LTD.
6120 Kestrel Road,
Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1S8
TEL : (905) 670-4425
FAX : (905) 670-8116
MITA COPYSTAR MEXICO, S.A. DE C.V.
Av. 16 de Septiembre #407
Col. Santa Inés,
Delegación Azcapotzalco
México, D.F. C.P. 02130
TEL : 3-83-27-41
FAX : 3-83-78-04
MITA COPYSTAR SOUTH AMERICA S.A.
Av. Mitre 1345 Florida (1602)
Pcia, Buenos Aires, Argentina.
TEL : (54) 11-4730-1070
FAX : (54) 11-4760-2071
©1999 MITA INDUSTRIAL CO., LTD.
MITA and
are registered trademarks of MITA INDUSTRIAL CO., LTD.
Printed in U.S.A.